Proposal for a EUROPEAN PARLIAMENT AND COUNCIL DIRECTIVE ON CERTAIN COMPONENTS OR CHARACTERISTICS OF TWO OR THREE-WHEEL MOTOR VEHICLES
Date: 1993-11-30
Institutions: European Commission
Subjects: anti-pollution device, approval, safety device, signalling device, technical standard, two-wheeled vehicle

COMMISSION OF THE EUROPEAN  COMMUNITIES 

C0M(93) 449 final - COD 470 

Brussels, 30 November  1993 

i*1 

•*•»»  t 

L.:L-  I.  MA. 

3&m 

ift^E^'tt^afflt 

Proposal  for a 

EUROPEAN PARLIAMENT AND COUNCIL DIRECTIVE ON 

CERTAIN COMPONENTS OR CHARACTERISTICS OF 

TWO OR THREE-WHEEL MOTOR VEHICLES 

(presented by the Commission) 

-  2 -

EXPLANATORY  MEMORANDUM 

This proposal  forms part  of  the  type  approval  procedure  for  two or  three-wheel 

motor  vehicles  covered  by  Directive  92/61/EEC of  30 June  1992  (framework 

directive). 

It deals with  the  following  devices  and  characteristics: 

tyres 

lighting  and  light-signalling  devices 

external  projections 

rear-view  mirrors 

measures  to counter  atmospheric  pollution 

fuel  tanks 

measures  to counter  tampering 

electromagnetic  compatibility 

permissible  sound  level  and exhaust  system 

trailer  couplings  and  side-car  attachments 

safety  belts  and  safety  belt  anchorages 

glazing, windscreen  wipers  and washers  and  de-icing  and  de-misting 

devices. 

At  issue  in this  instance  are  the  requirements  applying  to  the above-mentioned 

components  and  characteristics.  Together  with  those  already  proposed  for  the 

other  components  and  characteristics provided  for  in Annex  1 to the  framework 

directive,  these  are  requirements which must  be met  if said  vehicles  are  to be 

approved  and  placed  on  the Community  market  without  encountering  technical 

barr iers. 

In drawing  up  this proposal  the Commission  has  taken extensive  account  -

wherever  possible - of  the  requirements  adopted  by  the United  Nations' 

Economic  Commission  for  Europe  (UNO/ECE).  This  applies  to the  requirements 

for  tyres  (UNO/ECE  Regulation  No 7 5 ), for  lighting  and  light-signalling 

devices  (UNO/ECE  Regulations  No  37, 50, 56, 57, 72 and  82) and  for  safety 

belts  (UNO/ECE  Regulation  No. 16). 

-  3 -

For  the  remainder  the Commission  has  taken  account  of  the regulations  in force 

in the various Member  States by basing  its proposals on  the  highest  level  of 

those national  requirements. 

The present  requirements  are needed  (a)  in order  to harmonize  the differing 

legal  provisions  in force  in the Member  States and  (b)  in order  to ensure 

greater  road  safety. 

The  requirements  set  out  in three of  the  twelve  chapters  in the annex  to  this 

proposal  warrant  particular  stress  in view of  their  impact  on  protection  of 

the environment  or  on  safety.  These are  requirements  put  forward  in order  to 

restrict  pollutant  emissions  and  sound  level, and  also  requirements  intended 

to reduce  to a minimum  the scope  for users  to  increase  the performance of  such 

vehicles (tampering). 

The proposed  action  to reduce  pollutant  emissions  by  the vehicles  concerned 

(Chapter  5)  is  intended  to  lay down  limit  values  for  carbon monoxide (CO), 

unburnt  hydrocarbons  (HC) and nitrogen  oxides  (N0X).  In  line with  the 

approach  to environmental  protection adopted  by  the Commission  it  is proposed 

that  the procedure  should  take place  in stages: an  initial  stage  laying  down 

limit  values  for  pollutant  emission  which  would  enter  into force  as soon  as 

possible, and  a second  stage -  roughly  four  years after  the entry  into  force 

of  the  first  - within  which, on  the basis of a proposal  passed  on  in good  time 

by  the Commission,  the European  Parliament  and  the Council  will  reach a 

decision  on making  those values more stringent  for motorcycles  and  tricycles. 

The  four-year  period  is to enable  the  industries  involved  to take any  steps 

required  in order  to ensure  that  their  products are able  to meet  the new 

requirements  by  the due date. 

The  future  strategy  shall,  inter  alia, be based on  the  following: 

-  4 -

(a) Air  quaiity 

Need  to meet  the Community  criteria applying  to air quality and  the 

implementation of  harmonized Community measures concerning  the monitoring 

and measurement  of air  quality; 

(b) Subsequent  reduction of  limit values 

These shall  be based on an assessment  of  the potential  offered  by 

traditional  engine  technology  and by after-burning, possible  improvements 

to the test  method, for example, test  cycles, cold starting, durability, 

evaporation and  the potential  offered  by new motive-power  technologies 

such as electric  traction; 

(c) Additional  technical  measures deriving  from specific  directives 

Improvements  to fuel  quality  and  requirements concerning  alternative 

fuels  in connection with  vehicle emissions, and  tightening of  the 

requirements as part of  Inspection and maintenance  programmes; 

(d) Coherent  strategy  for other  additional measures concerning  air-quality 

targets 

Use of  tax  incentives, traffic management  and  improvements  to urban public 

transport. 

The Commission  proposal  will  also take account of  the technological  potential 

that  is either  available or  conceivable  in order  to achieve  the target  set, 

and of  the analyses of  the cost/benefit  ratio of  those  technologies. 

On  the other  hand,  the Commission  has already been able to propose 

second-stage  limit  values for mopeds with  the full  agreement  of  experts 

representing  both governments and  the  industries  affected. 

-  5 -

The measures  put  forward  in order  to reduce  noise emission  by  the  vehicles 

concerned  (Chapter  9) are  intended  to  lay down  limit  values  in A-weighted 

decibels  [dB(A)j according  to the categories of  those vehicles. 

Also  in  line with  the approach  adopted  by  the Commission  on protection of  the 

environment,  it  is proposed  that  one  proceed  in stages, following  the  example 

of  the procedure  adopted  for  pollutant  emissions  and  described  above.  It 
should  be pointed  out  that  a directive on motorcycles adopted  in 1978,1  as 
last  amended  in 1989,2  is currently  in force but  that  the sound-level  limits 

to be met,  together  with  the optional  nature of  that  directive,  have  led 

almost  all  of  the Member  States  to keep  their  less-stringent  national  laws  in 

force.  More  particularly  the  limit  values  that  this directive  had  laid  down 

with  effect  from October  1993  for motorcycles  having  a cylinder  capacity  of 
less than 80 cm3,  and more  than  175 cm3  (75 and  80 dB(A) respectively) and 

those with  effect  from  January  1995  for motorcycles  having  a cylinder  capacity 
of  between  80 and  175 cm3  (77 dB(A)) prove  to be so difficult  to meet  that 

70% of motorcycles would  not  be able  to meet  those  limit  values without  the 

development  of  new  technologies. 

Since  it  is aware  that  most  of  the 50, or  so, Community  companies  are  small 

and medium-sized  and  that  mandatory  compliance  with  the  limit  values set  out 

in the current  directive, on  the dates  stated, would  have an outcome  that  was 

incompatible  with  their  survival, the Commission,  by means of  this new 

directive on mandatory  harmonization  and  as a  first  stage, has proposed  that 

the date of  entry  into force of  those  limit  values be set  at  1 January  1997. 

The  future  strategy  will  be based,  inter  alia, on  the  following: 

(a) Permissible  sound  level 

Need  to meet  Community  criteria  applying  to noise  nuisances  and 

implementation of  harmonized  Community  measures concerning  the monitoring 

and measurement  of  sound  emissions; 

1 

Directive  78/1015/EEC; OJ  L 349, 13.12.1978, p. 21. 

2 

Directive 89/235/EEC; OJ  L 98, 11.4.1989, p. 1. 

(b) Subsequent  reduction of  limit  values 

- 6 -

These  shall  be based on an assessment  of  the potential  offered  by  the 

traditional  technology  applying  to the engine and other  mechanical  parts 

of  the vehicle, the potential  offered  by new sound-emission  reduction 

technologies, of  the possible  improvements  to the test method  - especially 

as regards certain  categories of  the vehicles concerned  - and on an 

assessment  of  the taking  into account of  the noise generated  by contact 

between  tyres and  road surfaces without, however, neglecting  safety 

requirements; 

(c) Coherent  strategy  for other  supplementary measures  relating  to the  targets 

for  protection of  the environment  against  noise nuisances.  Use of  tax 

incentives, traffic management  and  improvements  to urban public  transport. 

The measures put  forward  in order  to restrict  to a minimum  the scope for 

tampering  with mopeds and motorcycles by  their users  in order  to boost  their 

performance  (Chapter  7) meets  requirements  that  are becoming more and more 

widespread  throughout  the Member  States as a result  of  the  increasing  spread 

of  this phenomenon, which  impairs road safety.  It  Is necessary, with  regard 

to mopeds, to put  a stop  to altering  the engine character 1stics of  such 

vehicles by young users  in order  to  increase  their  performance  to such a  level 

that  -  in certain cases - this outstrips  the performance of,  in particular, 

the vehicle's braking  system,  tyres and  lighting and  light-signalling devices. 

When  adopting  Directive 92/61/EEC  the Council  had agreed, with  regard  to 

motorcycles, that  adequate steps  to counter  tampering were essential  and could 

be considered  as a supplement  to those  restricting motorcycle  power  to 74 kW. 

In preparing  the measures proposed  the Commission  listened  to the views of  the 

Working  Party on  "Motor  vehicles" which, as a matter  of  course, assists the 

Commission  in all of  its technical  harmonization activities and which 

comprises both government  experts and experts  from  the  interested  circles 

within  the Member  States. 

- 7 -

However,  it had  to go beyond  certain opinions delivered,  in particular, on  the 

action  to be  taken on  permissible  sound  level  put  forward  by  representatives 

of  industry  and  users and by certain government  experts, since protection of 

the environment  against  this type of nuisance  is not  only  necessary  but  could 

also be achieved  via  the work being, and  to be, done by  the  industry on 

developing  technologies enabling  the requirements put  forward  to be met  by  the 

due date. 

- 8 -

PROPOSAL  FOR A 

EUROPEAN  PARLIAMENT  AND COUNCIL  DIRECTIVE ON 

CERTAIN COMPONENTS AND CHARACTERISTICS OF 

TWO OF THREE-WHEEL  MOTOR  VEHICLES 

THE EUROPEAN  PARLIAMENT  AND THE COUNCIL OF THE EUROPEAN  COMMUNITIES, 

Having  regard  to the Treaty  establishing  the European Community,  and  in 

particular  Article  100a  thereof, 

Having  regard  to the proposal  from  the Commission, 

Having  regard  to the opinion of  the Economic  and  Social  Committee,1 

Whereas  it  is necessary  to adopt measures  that  are  intended  to establish an 

internal  market  consisting  of  an area without  internal  frontiers within which 

goods, persons, services and  capital  are able  to move  freely; 

Whereas  in each Member  State  two or  three-wheel  motor  vehicles shall,  in 

respect  of  the components  and characteristies covered  by  this directive, 

display  certain mandatory  technical  characteristics which  differ  from one 

Member  State  to another; whereas owing  to those differences  they  constitute 

barriers  to trade within  the Community;  whereas  those barriers  to the 

establishment  and operation  of  the  internal  market  may  be removed  if the same 

requirements  are adopted  by all of  the Member  States  in place of  their 

national  regulations; 

Whereas  the drawlng-up of  harmonized  requirements  concerning  those  components 

and  characteristics of  two and  three-wheel  motor  vehicles  is necessary  in 

order  to enable  the type approval  and component  type approval  procedures 
covered  by Directive 92/61/EEC2  to be  implemented  in respect  of each  type of 

said  vehicle; 

1 
2 

OJ C  ..: . 
OJ  L 225, 10.8.1992, p. 72. 

9  -

In order  to ease  access  to  the markets  in the non-Member  States of  the 

Community  it  is necessary  to establish  equivalence  between  the  requirements of 

Chapters  1  (tyres),  2  (lighting  devices) and  11  (safety  belts) of  the Annex  to 

this Directive and  those  to equivalent  ECE/UNO  regulations Nos 75, 37, 50, 56, 

57, 72, 82 and  16 respectively; 

Whereas, with  regard  to  the aspects  concerning  the protection  of  the 

environment  i.e. atmospheric  and  noise pollution,  it  is neccessary  to pursue 

the aim of  constantly  improving  the environment; whereas  for  this  purpose 

limit  values  for  pollutants and  sound  level,  laid  down  for  the  fastest 

possible  application, must  be  reduced  yet  further; whereas  that  subsequent 

reduction  may  only  be opted  for on  the basis of  studies  and  reseach  to be 

undertaken  or  pursued  into the available  or  conceivable  technological 

potential  and  into an analysis of  their  cost/benefit  ratios  in order  to permit 

production, on  an  industrial  scale, of  vehicles which  are  able  to meet  these 

more  stringent  limits; whereas  the decision  on  that  subsequent  reduction  must 

be  taken  by  the  European  Parliament  and  the Council  at  least  three  years 

before  their  entry  into force  in order  to enable  the  industry  to make  the 

necessary  arrangements whereby  their  products may,  by  the  intended  date, 

comply  with  the new Community  measures, whereas  the European  Parliament  and 

Council  Decision  will  be based  on proposals which  the Commission  will  have  to 

send  them  in good  time; 

Whereas, by granting  tax  incentives,  the Member  States  should  be enabled  to 

promote  the marketing  of  vehicles which,  in advance, meet  the  requirements 

adopted  at  Community  level  concerning  measures  to counter  pollutant  and  noise 

emissions. 

Whereas  the methods of measuring  the  immunity  of  vehicles  and  separate 

technical  units  to electromagnetic  radiation  in order  to check  compI lance with 

the provisions  concerning  electromagnetic  compatibility  (Chapter  8)  require 

complex  and  costly  installations;  whereas  in order  to enable  the  Member 

States  to provide  such  installations provision  should  be made  for  deferring 

application  of  these methods  by  three  years, dating  from  the entry  into  force 

of  this  Directive; 

-  10 -

Whereas, given  the  scale  and  impact  of  the action  proposed  in the sector  in 

question,  the Community  measures which  are  the subject  of  this Directive  are 

necessary, or  even  indispensable,  to attain  the objective  set,  namely 

Community  vehicle  type  approval; whereas  this objective cannot  be  adequately 

achieved  by  the Member  States  individually; 

Whereas  technical  progress  required  rapid  adaptation of  the  technical 

requirements  set  out  in the Annex  to this Directive-,  whereas, with  the 

exception of  the  limit  values  for  pollutants and  sound  level, this  task  should 

be assigned  to  the Commission  in order  to simplify  and  speed  up  the  procedure; 

whereas,  in all  cases where  the European  Parliament  and  the Council  confer 

upon  the Commission  authority  to  implement  rules  laid  down  in the  two- or 

three-wheel  motor  vehicle  sector,  it  is appropriate  to provide  for  a  procedure 

for  prior  consultation  between  the Commission  and Member  States within  an 

advisory  committee; 

HAVE  ADOPTED  THIS  DIRECTIVE: 

-  11  -

Article 1 

This  Directive  and  its Annex  shall  apply  to: 

tyres 

lighting  and  light-signalling  devices 

external  projections 

rear-view  mirrors 

measures  to counter  atmospheric  pollution 

fuel  tanks 

measures  to counter  tampering 

electromagnetic  compatibility 

permissible  sound  level  and  exhaust  system 

trailer  coupling  devices  and  sidecar  attachments 

safety  belt  anchorages  and  safety  belts 

glazing, windscreen  wipers  and washers  and  de-icing  and  demisting  devices 

for  all  types of  vehicle  as defined  in Article  1 of  Council 

Directive  92/61/EEC. 

Article  2 

1.  The  procedures  governing  the granting of  component  type  approval  in 

respect  of  tyres,  lighting  and  light-signalling  devices,  rear-view 

mirrors,  fuel  tanks, exhaust  systems, safety  belts and  glazing  for  a  type 

of  two- or  three-wheel  motor  vehicle  and  the component  type approval  of  a 

type of  tyre,  lighting  and  light-signalling  device,  rear-view mirror,  fuel 

tank, exhaust  system,  safety  belt  and  glazing  in the  form of  components, 

and  the conditions  applying  to the  free movement  of  said  vehicles and  for 

the  free  placing  on  the market  of  said  components  shall  be  those set  out 

in Chapters  II and  III  respectively  of  Directive  92/61/EEC. 

-  12 -

2.  The  procedure  governing  the granting of  component  type  approval  in respect 

of  external  projections, measures  to counter  atmospheric  pollution, 

measures  to counter  tampering, electromagnetic compatibility,  permissible 

sound  level, coupling  devices  for  trailers  and  sidecar  attachments, 

safety-belt  anchorages, windscreen  wipers  and washers  and  de-icing  and 

demisting devices  for  a type of  two- or  three-wheel  motor  vehicle, and  the 

conditions  applying  to the  free movement  of  said  vehicles  shall  be  those 

set  out  in Chapters  II and  III  respectively of  Directive  92/61/EEC. 

Article  3 

1.  In pursuance of  the provisions of Article  11 of  Directive  92/61/EEC,  the 

equivalence  shall  be  recognized  of  the  requirements of Chapters  1  (tyres), 

2  (lighting  and  light-signalling  devices) and  11  (safety  belts)  of  this 

Directive and  those of  ECE/UNO  Regulations Nos. 

75  (document  E/ECE/TRANS/505/Rev.  1/Add. 74)  in respect  of  tyres, 

37  (document  E/ECE/TRANS/505/Rev.  1/Add. 36/Rev.  2/Suppl. 9 ), 

50  (document  E/ECE/TRANS/505/Rev.  1/Add. 49/Amend.  1/Corr. 2 ), 

56  (document  E/ECE/TRANS/505/Rev.  1/Add. 55/Rev. 1/Corr. 2 ), 

57  (document  E/ECE/TRANS/505/Rev.  1/Add. 56/Amend.  2/Suppl. 1 ), 

72  (document  E/ECE/TRANS/505/Rev.  1/Add. 71/Amend.  1/Suppl. 1 ), 

82  (document  E/ECE/TRANS/505/Rev.  1/Add. 81)  in respect  of  lighting  and 

light-signalling  devices, and 

16  (document  E/ECE/TRANS/505/Rev.  1/Add. 15/Rev. 3/Amend.  1/Suppl.  4) in 

respect  of  safety  belts. 

13 -

2.  The Member-State  authorities granting  component  type  approval  shall  accept 

component  type approvals  issued  in accordance  with  the  requirements of  the 

above-mentioned  regulations,  and  component  type  approval  marks,  instead of 

the corresponding  component  type  approvals  and  component  type  approval 

marks  issued  in accordance  with  the  requirements  of  this  Directive. 

Article  4 

1.  The  European  Parliament  and  the Council, acting  in accordance  with  the 

conditions  set  out  in the Treaty,  shall, before  1 January  1997, state 

their  opinion  on  a Commission  proposal  laying  down  a subsequent  stage 

providing  for  measures  that  are  aimed  to make  the  limit  values  for 

pollutants  and  the sound  level  of  the vehicles  concerned,  as  laid  down 

respectively  in Chapter  5, Annex  II, Tables  I and  II and  Chapter  9,  Annex 

I, more  str ingent. 

2.  The  European  Parliament  and  Council  decision  referred  to  in paragraph  1, 

which  shall  apply  from  2001, shall  take  account  of  the need  to  incorporate 

factors other  than  simple  more-stringent  limit  values.  The  costs  and 

benefits  deriving  from  the  implementation of  such  measures  shall  be 

assessed,  and  these  shall  be proportional  and  reasonable  in the  light of 

the  intended  aims. 

Article  5 

1.  Member  States may  only make  provision  for  tax  incentives  for  motor 

vehicles meeting  the atmospheric-pollution  and  noise-pollution 

requirements  laid down  in Chapter  5, Annex  I,  item  2.2.1.1.3  and  Annex  II, 

Tables  I and  II and Chapter  9, Annex  I respectively  of  this  Directive. 

2.  These  incentives  shall  be  in  line with  the provisions  of  the Treaty  and 

also meet  the  following  conditions: 

they  must  be  valid  for  all  new  vehicles  placed  on  the market  of a 

Member  State  and,  in advance, comply  with  paragraph  1 of  this 

Direct ive; 

-  14 -

they  shall  come  to an end  upon  the mandatory  implementation  of 

paragraph  1 ; 

they  must  also,  for  each  type of motor  vehicle,  cover  substantially 

lower  amounts  than  the extra  cost  of  the  technical  solutions  applied 

and  of  their  incorporation  into  the motor  vehicle  in order  that  the 

values  laid  down  are  met. 

3.  The Commission  shall  be  informed  in good  time of  any  intentions  to 

introduce  or  alter  any of  the  tax  incentives  referred  to  in paragraph  1. 

The  Commission  shall  give  its prior  agreement  to  the  implementation  of 

those  incentives  and  shall,  in particular,  take  account  of  the  impact  of 

those  incentives on  the  internal  market. 

Article  6 

The  changes  needed  in order  to adapt  the Annex  to  technical  progress  -  apart 

from  the  limit  values  for  atmospheric  and  sound  pollution  set  out, 

respectively,  in Chapter  5, Annex  I,  item  2.2.1.1.3  and  Annex  II, Tables  I and 

II, and  in Chapter  9,  Annex  I - shall  be  adopted  in accordance  with  the 

following  procedure. 

Where  reference  is made  to  the  procedure  defined  in this Article  the 

Commission's  representative  shall  lay a draft  of  the measures  to be  taken 
before  the committee  set  up under  Article  13 of  Directive  70/156/EEC1,  as 
last  amended  by  Directive 92/53/EEC2.  The Committee  shall  deliver  its 

opinion  on  this draft  within  a deadline  which  the Chairman  may  lay  down  in the 

light  of  the urgency  of  the matter  at  issue, and  where  appropriate  by  taking  a 

vote. 

That  opinion  shall  be entered  in the  record;  moreover  each  Member  State  has 

the  right  to  request  that  its views  be entered  in that  record. 

The  Commission  shall  take  the utmost  account  of  the opinion  delivered  by  the 

Committee.  It shall  inform  the Committee  of  the manner  in which  its opinion 

has been  taken  into  account. 

1 
2 

OJ  No  L 42, 23.02.1970, p.  1. 
OJ  No  L  225,  10.08.1992, p.  1. 

-  15 -

Articled 

1.  Member  States  shall  bring  into force  the  laws, regulations and 

administrative  provisions  necessary  in order  to comply  with  this  Directive 

by, at  the  latest,  1 June  1996.  They  shall  forthwith  inform  the 

Commission  thereof. 

From  the above-mentioned  date Member  States may  no  longer  prohibit  the 

first  placing  in service of  vehicles  complying  with  this Directive or  with 

certain  of  its chapters. 

They  shall  apply  these provisions  from  1 January  1997. 

However,  the  implementation of  certain  provisions  in Chapters  5, 8 and  9 

shall  be deferred  as specified  in said  chapters. 

2.  When  the Member  States adopt  these  provisions  these  shall  contain  a 

reference  to  this Directive or  shall  be  accompanied  by  such  a  reference  on 

their  official  publication.  The  details of  that  reference  shall  be  laid 

down  by  the Member  States. 

Article  8 

Directives 78/1015/EEC on  the permissible  sound  level  and  exhaust  system  of 
motor  cycles1, as  last  amended  by  Directive 89/235/EEC2,  and  80/780/EEC  on 

rear-view mirrors  for  two- or  three-wheel  motor  vehicles with  or  without 
sidecar  and on  their  fitting  to said  vehicles3,  as  last  amended  by 
Directive  80/1272/EEC4 shall  be  repealed  on entry  into force of  this 

Directive. 

1 
2 
3 
4 

OJ  No L 349,  13.12.1978, p. 21. 
OJ  No L 98, 11.4.1989, p. 1. 
OJ  No L 229, 30.8.1980, p. 49. 
OJ  No L  375, 31.12.1980, p. 73. 

-  16 -

Article  9 

This  Directive  is addressed  to the Member  States 

Done  at  Brussels, 

For  the  European  Parliament, 

For  the  Council, 

The  President 

The  President 

-  17 -

A N N EX 

Contents of  Annex 

Chapter  1:  Tyres  for  two- or  three-wheel  motor  vehicles 

Chapter  2:  Lighting  and  light-signalling  devices  for  two- or  three-wheel 

motor  vehicles 

Chapter  3:  External  projections  from  two- or  three-wheel  motor  vehicles 

Chapter  4:  Rear-view mirrors  for  two- or  three-wheel  motor  vehicles 

Chapter  5:  Measures  to counter  atmospheric  pollution caused  by  two- or  three-

wheel  motor  vehicles 

Chapter  6:  Fuel  tanks  for  two- or  three-wheel  motor  vehicles 

Chapter  7:  Measures  to counter  tampering  with mopeds  and  motorcycles 

Chapter  8:  Electromagnetic  compatibility  of  two- or  three-wheel  motor 

vehicles 

Chapter  9:  Permissible  sound  level  and exhaust  system  of  two- or  three-wheel 

motor  vehicles 

Chapter  10: Trailer  coupling  devices  for  two- or  three-wheel  motor  vehicles 

and motorcycle  sidecar  attachments 

Chapter  11: Safety-belt  anchorages  and  safety  belts  for  bodied  three-wheel 

mopeds,  tricycles and  quadr(cycles 

Chapter  12: Glazing, windscreen  wipers, washers, de-icers  and  demisters  for 

bodied  three-wheel  mopeds, tricycles and  quadricycles 

«-  ; / 

CHAPTER 1 

TYRES FOR TWO- OR  THREE-WHEEL 
MOTOR  VEHICLES AND ON THEIR  FITTING 

- /cl-

LIST OF  ANNEXES 

ANNEX  I 

-  Conditions  attached  to  the component  type  approval  and  marking 

of  tyres 

ANNEX  II 

-  Definitions, markings  and  requirements 

ANNEX  III  -  Diagram  of  tyre  markings 

ANNEX  IV 

-  List  of  load  capacity  indices  (CI) and  corresponding 

permissible  maximum  mass  (kg) 

ANNEX  V 

-  Size of  certain  types of  tyre 

ANNEX  VI 

-  Method  of measuring  tyre  dimensions 

ANNEX  VII 

-  Modus operandi  for  the  load/speed  performance  tests 

ANNEX  VIII  -  Variation  in  load  capacity  as a  function  of  speed 

ANNEX  IX 

-  Test  method  intended  to determine  the dynamic  expansion  of 

tyres 

ANNEX  X 

A -  Information  document  in respect  of  a  type of  tyre  intended 

for  two- or  three-wheel  motor  vehicles 

B  -  Certificate  of  component  type  approval  for  a  type of  tyre 

intended  for  two- or  three-wheel  motor  vehicles 

ANNEX  XI 

-  Requirements  governing  the  fitting of  tyres  to  vehicles 

ANNEX  XII 

A -  Information  document  in respect  of  the  fitting  of  tyres  to a 

type of  two- or  three-wheel  motor  vehicle 

B -  Certificate of  component  type  approval  in respect  of  the 

fitting of  tyres  to a  type of  two- or  three-wheel  motor 
vehicle 

- 2 ^-

ANNEX I 

CONDITIONS GOVERNING THE COMPONENT TYPE APPROVAL  AND MARKING OF TYRES  . 

1. 

1.1 

1.2 

APPLICATION FOR COMPONENT TYPE  APPROVAL 

The  application  for  the component  type  approval  of  a  type of  tyre 
must  give  precise  details of  the  type of  tyre  to which  the  component 
type  approval  mark  is to be affixed. 

For  each  type of  tyre  that  application must  also give  precise 
detaiIs on: 

1.2.1 

the description of  the  tyre dimension  as defined  in Annex  II,  item 
1.16, 

1.2.2 

the make or  trade name, 

1.2.3 

category  of  use: normal, special  or  snow, 

1.2.4 

configuration, 

1.2.5 

speed  rating, 

1.2.6 

tyre  load capacity  index, 

1.2.7 

whether  the  tyre  is  intended  for  use with  or  without  an  inner  tube, 

1.2.8 

whether  the  tyre  is "normal" or  "reinforced", 

1.2.9 

the ply-rating number  for motor  cycle  derivatives, 

1.2.10 

the  size outer  dimensions:  the overall  tyre  size  and  overall 
diameter, 

1.2.11 

the  rims  to which  the  type may  be  fitted, 

1.2.12 

the measuring  and  test  rims, 

1.2.13 

the  test  and measurement  pressures 

1.2.14 

the  x-coefficient  referred  to  in Annex  II,  item  1.19 

1.3 

The  application  for  component  type approval  shall  also be 
accompanied  by drawings or  photographs  in triplicate of  the  tyre 
sidewalls and  tread,  together  with  a dimensional  drawing with a  tyre 
cross-section  and/or  two  tyre samples  for  each  type of  tyre  to be 
component  type approved.  The photos or  drawings  shall  show  the 
position  provided  for  the component  type  approval  mark. 

2. 

MARKS 

-Il 

-

The examples of  a type of  tyre submitted  for component  type approval 
shall  bear,  in a clearly  legible and  indelible manner, the 
applicant's make or  trade name and shall  include sufficient  space 
for  the component  type approval  mark. 

3. 

COMPONENT TYPE APPROVAL  MARK 

All  tyres conforming  to a type that has been component  type-approved 
in compliance with  this directive shall  bear  the component 
type-approval  mark described  in Annex  5 to Directive 92/61/EEC of 
30 June  1992 on  the type approval  of  two or  three-wheel  motor 
vehicles. 

The  "a" value defining the dimensions of  the rectangle and  the 
digits and  letters making up the mark  shall  not exceed  2 mm. 

-  22.-

ANNEX  I I 

DEFINITIONS, MARKS, AND REQUIREMENTS 

1. 

DEFINITIONS 

For the purposes of this chapter: 

1.1 

"type of tyre" means 
tyres which basically do not differ from each other, more 
particularly as regards the following aspects: 

1.1.1 

the make or trade name, 

1.1.2 

the dimensional description of the tyre, 

1.1.3 

the category of use (normal: for tyres intended for normal road use; 
special: for special-purpose tyres such as those used for on-road 
and off-road purposes or for use  in snow and on mopeds), 

1.1.4 

configuration (cross-ply, bias-belted, radial), 

1.1.5 

speed rat ing, 

1.1.6 

load capacity index, 

1.1.7 

cross section of tyres; 

1.2 

1.2.1 

1.2.2 

1.2.3 

"tyre configuration" means 
the technical characteristics of a tyre carcass. 
A distinction  is drawn, in particular, between the following tyre 
configurations: 

"cross-ply" means 
a tyre structure the ply cords for which extend out as far as the 
beads and are aligned  in such a way as to form alternating angles 
that are perceptibly  less than 90' to the tread centre  line, 

"bIas-beI ted" means 
a tyre structure of the "cross-ply" type in which the carcass is 
restrained by a belt consisting of two or more basically inelastic 
cords forming alternating angles close to those of the carcase; 

"radial" means 
a tyre structure the ply cords of which extend down to the beads and 
are aligned  in such a way as to form a perceptible angle of 90' to 
the tread centre  line, while the carcass  is stabilized by a 
basically  ine lastic circumferential belt; 

1.2.4 

"reinforced" means 
a tyre structure whereby the carcass  is more durable than that of a 
corresponding conventionaI tyre; 

1.3 

1.4 

1.5 

1.6 

1.7 

1.8 

1.9 

1.10 

1.11 

1.12 

1.13 

1.14 

- ^5  -

"bead" means 
the part of the tyre the shape and structure of which enables  it to 
fit the rim and hold the tyre on that  rim;1 

"cords" means 
the wires constituting the tyre ply webbing;1 

"ply" means 
the sheet consisting of  layers of rubber-encapsulated  cords running 
parallel  to each other;1 

"carcass" means 
the part of the tyre other  than the tread and the sidewalls which, 
when  inflated, bears the  load;1 

"tread" means 
that part of the tyre which comes  into contact, with the ground;  it 
protects the carcass against mechanical  damage and helps to provide 
grip;1 

"sidewall" means 
that part of a tyre  lying between the tread and the part  intended to 
be covered by the wheel  rim;1 

"tread grooves" means 
the space between two adjacent  tread ribs or blocks;1 

"main grooves" means the wide grooves  located  in the centre of the 
tread; 

"tyre size (S)" means 
the  linear distance  (expressed  in mm) between the outer edges of the 
sidewalls of an  inflated  tyre, excluding  the protrusions due to 
markings, embellishments, or protective strips or  ribs;1 

"overall size" means 
the  linear distance  (expressed  in mm) between the outer edges of the 
sidewalls of an  inflated tyre,  including markings, embellishments 
and protective strips or ribs;1  the overall  size of  tyres the 
tread width of which  is greater  than the overall  carcass size  is the 
width of the tread; 

"tyre height  (H)" means 
the distance  (expressed  in mm) equalling half  the difference between 
the outer diameter of the tyre and the nominal  diameter of the 
wheeI ;1 

"nominal  aspect  ratio (Ra)" means 
one hundred times the number obtained by the dividing  tyre height 
(H) by the nominal  tyre size (S-|) both being expressed  in the same 
unit; 

1 

See diagram  in appendix. 

- -24-

1.15 

1.16 

"outer diameter (D)"  means 
the overall diameter (expressed In mm) of a new inflated tyre;1 

"dimensional description of tyre" means 
the description containing the following: 

1.16.1 

the nominal tyre size (S-j) (expressed in mm, except for certain 
types of tyre for which the dimensional description is set out in 
Column 1 of the tables in Annex V), 

1.16.2 

the nominal aspect ratio (Ra), except for certain types of tyre for 
which the dimensional description is given in the first column of 
the tables in Annex V; 

1.16.3 

a conventional number (d) characterizing the nominal rim diameter 
and corresponding to that diameter expressed either in the form of a 
code (a figure of less than 100) or in millimetres (a figure of more 
than 100). 

1.16.3.1  the values in millimeters of symbol (d) expressed in code form and 

in millimetres are as follows: 

"d" code expressed by one or  "d"-code values expressed 
two figures symbolizing the 
nominal diameter of the wheel 
r im 

in mm 

4 
5 
6 
7 
8 
9 
10 
11 
12 
13 
14 
15 
16 
17 
18 
19 
20 
21 
22 
23 

102 
127 
152 
178 
203 
229 
254 
279 
305 
330 
356 
381 
406 
432 
457 
483 
508 
533 
559 
584 

1.17 

1.18 

"nominal diameter of wheel rim (d)" means 
the diameter of the wheel rim to which a tyre is intended to be 
fitted;1 

"wheel rim" means 
the support for either a tyre and inner tube or a tube less tyre 
against which the beads of the tyre are pressed;1 

1  See diagram in the appendix. 

1.19 

1.20 

1.21 

1.22 

1.23 

1.24 

1.25 

1.26 

1.27 

-2* -

"theoretical wheel rim" means 
an  imaginary wheel rim the width of which would be X times the 
nominal size of a tyre.  The X value must be Justified by the tyre 
manufacturer; 

"measuring rim" means 
the wheel rim to which a tyre must be fitted for dimensional 
measurement purposes; 

"test rim" means 
the rim to which a tyre must be fitted prior to testing; 

"stripping" means the separation of pieces of rubber from the tyre 
tread; 

"detachment of webbing" means separation of the webbing from the 
coating surrounding them; 

"ply detachment" means 
separation of adjacent plies; 

"tread detachment" means 
separation of tread and carcass; 

"load-capacity  index" means 
a figure  linked with the maximum  toad which a tyre is able to 
withstand at the speed  indicated by its speed symbol  in accordance 
with  its use specifications laid down by their manufacturer. 
Annex VI contains a list of those  indices and the corresponding 
loads; 

"table of load variations as a function of speed" means 
the table we have set out in Annex VIM  stating, as a function of 
the load capacity  indices and nominal speed capacity symbols, the 
variations  In the loading of a tyre when this is used at speeds 
different from those corresponding to its nominal speed rating 
symboI ; 

1.28 

"speed ratings" means 

1.28.1 

the speeds, depicted by a symbol, at which a tyre may withstand the 
load corresponding to its load capacity index; 

1.28.2 

the speed ratings are those set out in the following table: 

- z& -

Speed rating symbol 

Relevant speed (km/h) 

B 
F 
G 
J 
K 
L 
M 
N 
P 
Q 
R 
S 
T 
U 
V 

50 
80 
90 
100 
110 
120 
130 
140 
150 
160 
170 
180 
190 
200 
240 

1.28.3 

Tyres designed for maximum speeds  in excess of 240 km/h are 
identified by means of the letters "V" or "Z" incorporated  into the 
description of the tyre dimensions; 

1.29 

"snow tyre" means 
a tyre the tread pattern and structure of which have above all been 
designed primarily  in order to guarantee better behaviour  than that 
of conventional  tyres in mud and fresh snow or slush.  The tread 
pattern of snow tyres is generally typified by extra  large grooves 
and/or blocks which are more widely spaced than those on 
conventional  road-going tyres; 

1.30 

"MST" (multiservice tyre) means 
a multi-use tyre, or  in other words a tyre suitable for both on-road 
and off-road use. 

1.31 

"maximum  load" means 
the maximum mass which a tyre is able to bear 

1.31.1. 

in the case of speeds of  less than 130 km/h the maximum  load shall 
not exceed the percentage of the value  linked with the corresponding 
load capacity  inde of the tyre set out  in the table  in Annex VI11 as 
function of the tyre speed-category symbol  and of the speed of which 
the vehicle to which the tyre is fitted  is capable, 

1.31.2 

in the case of tyres designed for a speed not exceeding 210 km/h the 
maximum  load shall not exceed the value  linked with the load 
capacity  index for the tyre; 

1.31.3 

in the case of tyres designed for a speed exceding 210 km/h, but not 
exceeding 240 km/h (tyres with the speed-category symbol  "V" or 
tyres marked with the letter "V"  in the dimensional  description) 

-•21-

the maximum  load  shall  not  exceed  the  percentage  of  the  value  linked 
with  the  load  capacity  index  for  the  tyre  set  out  in the  table  below 
as  a  function  of  the  speed  of  which  the  vehicle  to which  the  tyre  is 
f it ted  is capable. 

Max imum  speed 

km/h 

210 
215 
220 
225 
230 
235 
240 

Load 
(X) 

100.0 
97.5 
95.0 
92.5 
90.0 
87.5 
85.0 

Linear  interpolations of  the maxium  load  are  permitted  for 
intermediate  maximum  speeds, 

1.31.3.1  in the  case of  tyres marked  with  the  letter  "Z"  in the  dimensional 
description,  the maximum  load shall  apply  up  to  240  km/h, 

1.31.4 

In the  case of  tyres designed  for  a speed  exceeding  240 km/h  (tyres 
marked  with  the  letter  "V"  in the dimensional  description)  and  tyres 
marked  with  the  letter  "Z"  in the dimensional  description,  the 
maximum  load  shall  not  exceed  the  values  specified  by  the  tyre 
manufacturer  as a  function of  the maximum  speed  of  which  the 
vehicle  to which  the  tyre  is fitted  is capable; 

1.32 

1.33 

1.34 

"moped  tyre"  means 
a  tyre  intended  to be  fitted  to mopeds 

"motor  cycle  tyre" means 
a  tyre  designed  mainly  to be  fitted  to motor  cycles 

"rolling  circumference  (Cr)" means 
the  theoretical  distance  covered  by  the  centre  (axis) of  the wheel 
of  a vehicle  in motion  during  one  complete  revolution  of  the  tyre, 
and  obtained  from  the  following  formula: 

Cr  -  f x D, where 

D  is the outer  diameter  of  the  tyre  in accordance  with  the  tyre 
description  set  out  in  item  3.1.2  in Annex  II 

f -  3.02  for  tyres  the  rim  diameter  code  for  which  is at  least  13 

3.03  for  radial-ply  tyres  the  rim  diameter  code  for  which  is 

not  more  than  12 

2.99  for  cross-ply  tyres or  bias-belted  tyres  the  rim  diameter 

code  for  which  is not  more  than  12. 

2. 

2.1 

MARKINGS 

- zz -

On at  least one of their sidewalls tyres shall bear the following 
markings: 

2.1.1 

the make or trade name; 

2.1.2 

the conventional  description of the tyre as defined  in item 1.16; 

2.1.3 

the description of the tyre configuration 

2.1.3.1 

in the case of cross-ply tyres no description or else the letter 
"D"; 

2.1.3.2  in the case of bias-belted tyres the letter "B" preceding the 

rim-diameter code and, possibly, the words "bias-belted"; 

2.1.3.3  in the case of radial-ply tyres, the letter "R" preceding the 
rim-diameter code and, possibly, the word "radial"; 

2.1.4 

the speed rating of the tyre, expressed via the symbol  referred to 
in item 1.28.2.  Where tyres are designed for speeds higher than 
240 km/h, the tyre speed rating  is expressed by the letter "V" or 
the letter "Z" ahead of the description of the tyre configuration 
(see item 2.1.3); 

2.1.5 

the load capacity as defined  in 1.26; 

2.1.5.1  however, where tyres are designed for speeds of more than 240 km/h 

the  load capacity  index may be omitted; 

2.1.6 

the word "tubeless" where the tyre is intended for use without an 
inner tube; 

2.1.7 

the symbol  "REINFORCED" or "REINF" in the case of a reinforced tyre; 

2.1.8 

the date of manufacture comprising three digits, the first two 
giving the week and the third the year.  This  information only 
appears on one sidewall; 

2.1.9 

the symbol  *'M + S" or "M.S" or "M & S" in the case of a snow tyre; 

2.1.10 

the symbol  "MST" in the case of multiservice tyres. 

2.1.11 

the term "MOPED" where a tyre is intended for mopeds. 

2.2 

Annex  III provides a model  layout for the tyre markings. 

- z <\  -

the markings  referred  to  in 2.1  and  the  component  type  approval  mark 
must  either  stand  proud  of  or  be  recessed  into  the  tyre.  They  shall 
be  clear I y  legible. 

REQUIREMENTS  RELATING TO  TYRES 

Tyre  dimensions 

2.3. 

3. 

3.1 

3.1.1 

OveralI  tyre  width 

3.1.1.1 

the overall  tyre width  is calculated  via  the  following  formula: 

S  - S-i + K  (A-A^ 

where: 

S  -  size of  tyre measured  at  measuring  rim; 
S-| - nominal  size of  tyre  as  set  out  on  the  tyre  sidewall  in the 

specified  description  of  said  tyre; 

A  - width, expressed  in millimeters, of  measuring  rim  stated  by 

manufacturer  in the  technical  description; 

A-| -  theoretical  rim  width. 

The  value  S«j multiplied  by  the  X  factor  quoted  by  the  tyre 
manufacturer  is used  for  A-| and  the  value  0.4  is used  for  K. 

3.1.1.2 

However, where  the  dimensional  description  of  tyre  types  appears  in 
the  first  column  of  the  tables  in Annex  V,  the  tyre  size  shall  be 
that  entered  opposite  the  tyre  description  in those  tables. 

3.1.2 

Tyre  outer  diameter; 

3.1.2.1 

The  outer  diameter  of  a  tyre  is that  obtained  from  the  following 
formula: 

D -  d + 2H 

where: 

D  -  the outer  diameter, 
d  -  the  nominal  rim  diameter,  expressed  millimetres 
H  - the  nominal  tyre  height 

H  - S-j X 0.01  Ra,  where 

S-| -  the  nominal  tyre  size, 
Ra - 

the  nominal  aspect  ratio 

as  set  out  in the description on  the  tyre  sidewall  as  required  by 
Item  2.3. 

-  •&  -

3.1.2.2 

However,  the outer  diameter  of  types of  tyres  for  which  the 
dimensional  description  is entered  in the  first  column  of  the  tables 
in Annex  V,  shall  be  that  set  out  in said  tables opposite  the  tyre 
description. 

3.1.3 

Tyre measuring  method 

The  tyre  dimensions  shall  be measured  as specified  in Annex  VI. 

3.1.4 

Specifications concerning  tyre  size 

3.1.4.1 

The overall  tyre size  shall  be  less  than  tyre  size  S as  determined 
in accordance  with  Item  3.1.1 

3.1.4.2 

It may  exceed  that  value up  to the  value  set  out  in Annex  V or,  in 
the  case of  descriptions  not  set  out  in Annex  V,  the  the  following 
percentages: 

3.1.4.2.1  for  a moped  tyre  and  a norma I-purpose on-road  and  snow  tyre  for  a 

motor  cycle: 

+  10%  in the case of  a rim  diameter  of  at  least  13 
+  8%  for  a rim  diameter  of  not  more  than  12 

3.1.4.2.2  a special-purpose  tyre suitable  for  restricted  on-road  use  and 

marked  with  MST:  25%. 

3.1.5 

Specifications concerning  the  tyre outer  diameter 

3.1.5.1 

The  tyre outer  diameter  must  not  exceed  the minimum  and  maximum 
diameter  values  specified  in V. 

3.1.5.2 

The outer  tyre diameter  in the descriptions  not  set  out  in Annex  V 
shall  not  exceed  the minimum  and  maximum  diameter  values obtained  by 
applying  the  following  formulas: 

Dmin - d +  (2H  x a) 
Dmax  - d +  (2H  x b) 

where: 

H  and  d are  as defined  in  Item  3.1.2.1  and  a and  b are  as defined  in 
Items  3.1.5.2.1  and  3.1.5.2.2  respectively. 

3.1.5.2.1  for  a conventional  on-road  tyre  and  for  snow  tyres 

rim  diameter  at  least  13 
rim  diameter  not  more  than  12 

For  a special-purpose  tyre 

0.97 
0.93 

1.00 

- z\ -
3.1.5.2.2  For  a moped  tyre and  a norma«-purpose on-road  tyre  for  a motorcycle 

rim  diameter  of  at  least  13 

rim  diameter  of  not  more  than  12 

for  snow  and  special-purpose  tyres 

b 

1.07 

1.10 

1.12 

3.2 
3.2.1 

3.2.2 

3.2.3 

Load/speed  performance  test 
The  load/speed  performance  test  shall  be carried  out  on  a tyre  in 
accordance  with  the practical  method  set  out  in Annex  VII. 

After  successfully  undergoing  the  load/speed  test  a  tyre  shall  not 
display  any  tread, ply, or webbing  separation,  or  any  tread 
detachment  or  cord  breakage. 

The outer  diameter  of  the  tyre, measured  at  least  six  hours  after 
the  load/speed  performance  test, shall  not  differ  from  the outer 
diameter  measured  before  the  test  by more  than ±  3.5%. 

3.2.4 

The overall  tyre  size measured  after  the  load/speed  performance  test 
shall  not  exceed  the value  set  out  in  Item  3.1.4.2. 

3.3 

Dynamic  expansion  of  tyres 

The  tyres  referred  to  in  Item  1.1  in Annex  IX, which  have passed  the 
load/speed  performance  test  required  in  Item  3.2  shall  undergo a 
dynamic  expansion  test  to be carried out  in accordance  with  the 
practical  method  set  out  in said  annex. 

3.4 

Where  a  tyre manufacturer  produces  a range of  tyres  it  is not 
necessary  to carry  out  load/speed  performance  tests  and  dynamic 
expansion  tests on each  type of  tyre on  the  range.  The option of 
choosing  the  least  favourable  case  is  left  to  the  discretion  of  the 
authorities  responsible  for  component  type  approval. 

-  3"£-

ANNEX  11  -  Append i x 

EXPLANATORY DIAGRAM 
(see  item  1  in this annex) 

(2) 

-33-

ANNEX  III 

DIAGRAM OF TYRE  MARKINGS 

Example of  the markings which must  appear  on  types of  tyres 

b > 4 mm 

i 

b 

100/80 B  18 

S3 S 

TUBELES M+S 

013 

These markings define a tyre: 

having  a nominal  size of  100 
having  a nominal  aspect  ratio of  80 
being of  bias-belted  configuration  (B) 
having  a wheel-rim  diameter  of  457 mm,  the code  for which  is 18 
having  a  load capacity of  206 kg, corresponding  to  load  index 53  (see  list 
in Annex  IV) 
falling within  speed  rating  S  (maximum  speed  180 km/h) 
which  can be  fitted without  an  inner  tube  (tubeIess) 
being of  the snow  type  (M + S) 
made during week  1 (01) of  the year  1993 (3). 

The position  and order  of  the markings making up  the tyre description  shall  be 
as follows: 

(a) the dimensional  description  including  the nominal  tyre size, the nominal 

aspect  ratio, the configuration symbol, where appropriate, and  the nominal 
wheel  rim diameter  shall  be combined  as shown  in the above example  i.e. 
100/80 B 18; 

(b) the  load  index and  the symbol  for  the speed  category  shall  be next  to each 
other  close  to the dimensional  description.  They may either  precede or 
follow  this or  be  located  above  it or  below  it; 

(c) the descriptions  "TUBELESS" and  "REINFORCED" or  "REINF" and  "M + S" and 

"MST" and/or  "MOPED" may  be  further  away  from  the dimensional  description. 

-  J<*  -

ANNEX 

IV 

LIST  OF  LOAD-CAPACITY  INDICES  ( C I)  AND 
CORRESPONDING  PERMISSIBLE  MAXIMUM  MASS  ( k g) 

A  - 

load  c a p a c i ty 

index 

B  -  c o r r e s p o n d i ng  maximum  mass  ( k g) 

A 

0 
1 
2 
3 
4 
5 
6 
7 
8 
9 
10 
11 
12 
13 
14 
15 
16 
17 
18 
19 
20 
21 
22 
23 
24 
25 
26 
27 
28 
29 

B 

45 
46.2 
47.5 
48.7 
50 
51.5 
53 
54.5 
56 
58 
60 
61.5 
63 
65 
67 
69 
71 
73 
75 
77.5 
80 
82.5 
85 
87.5 
90 
92.5 
95 
97.5 
100 
103 

A 

30 
31 
32 
33 
34 
35 
36 
37 
38 
39 
40 
41 
42 
43 
44 
45 
46 
47 
48 
49 
50 
51 
52 
53 
54 
55 
56 
57 
58 
59 
60 
61 

B 

106 
109 
112 
115 
118 
121 
125 
128 
132 
136 
140 
145 
150 
155 
160 
165 
170 
175 
180 
185 
190 
195 
200 
206 
212 
218 
224 
230 
236 
243 
250 
257 

A 

62 
63 
64 
65 
66 
67 
68 
69 
70 
71 
72 
73 
74 
75 
76 
77 
78 
79 
80 
81 
82 
83 
84 
85 
86 
87 
88 
89 
90 

B 

265 
272 
280 
290 
300 
307 
315 
325 
335 
345 
355 
365 
375 
387 
400 
412 
425 
437 
450 
462 
475 
487 
500 
515 
530 
545 
560 
580 
600 

A 

91 
92 
93 
94 
95 
96 
97 
98 
99 
100 
101 
102 
103 
104 
105 
106 
107 
108 
109 
110 
111 
112 
113 
114 
115 
116 
117 
118 
119 
120 

B 

615 
630 
650 
670 
690 
710 
730 
750 
775 
800 
825 
850 
875 
900 
925 
950 
975 
1000 
1030 
1060 
1090 
1120 
1150 
1180 
1215 
1250 
1285 
1320 
1360 
1400 

- 3£ -

ANNEX V 
SIZE OF CERTAIN TYPES OF TYRE 
(See Annex  II. Items 3.1.1.2, 3.1.2.2, 3.1.4.2 and 3.1.5.1) 

TABLE 1 A 
Mopod  tyres 
Descriptions and rim diameter up to code 12 

DESCRIPTION 

WIDTH OF 
MEASURING 
RIM  (code) 

2 
- 12 
2 1/4- 12 
2 1/2-  8 
2 1/2-  9 
2 3/4-  9 
- 10 
3 
- 12 
3 

1.35 
1.50 
1.75 
1.75 
1.75 
2.10 
2.10 

OVERALL DIAMETER  (mm) 

D.min 

413 
425 
339 
365 
375 
412 
463 

D 

417 
431 
345 
371 
381 
418 
469 

D.max 

426 
441 
356 
382 
393 
431 
482 

TYRE 
SIZE 
(mm) 

55 
62 
70 
70 
73 
84 
84 

OVERALL 
WIDTH 
(mm) 

59 
67 
76 
76 
79 
91 
91 

-  3c  -

TABLE 1 B 
Motor cycle tyres 
Descriptions and rim diameter up to code 12 

DESCRIPTION 

WIDTH OF 
MEASURING 
RIM  (code) 

OVERALt 

. DIAMETER 

(mm) 

D.min 

D 

D.max 

2.50 -  8 
2.50 -  9 
2.50 - 10 
2.50 - 12 

2.75 -  8 
2.75 -  9 
2.75 - 10 
2.75 - 12 

3.00 -  4 
3.00 -  5 
3.00 -  6 
3.00 -  7 
3.00 -  8 
3.00 -  9 
3.00 - 10 
3.00 - 12 

3.25 -  8 
3.25 -  9 
3.25 - 10 
3.25 - 12 

3.50 -  4 
3.50 -  5 
3.50 -  6 
3.50 -  7 
3.50 -  8 
3.50 -  9 
3.50 - 10 
3.50 - 12 

4.00 -  5 
4.00 -  6 
4.00 -  7 
4.00 -  8 
4.00 - 10 
4.00 - 12 

4.50 -  6 
4.50 -  7 
4.50 -  8 
4.50 -  9 
4.50 - 10 
4.50 - 12 

5.00 -  8 
5.00 - 10 
5.00 - 12 

6.00 -  6 
6.00 -  7 
6.00 -  8 
6.00 -  9 

1.50 

1.75 

2.10 

2.50 

2.50 

2.50 

3.00 

3.50 

4.00 

328 
354 
379 
430 

338 
364 
389 
440 

241 
266 
291 
317 
352 
378 
403 
454 

362 
388 
414 
465 

264 
289 
314 
340 
376 
402 
427 
478 

314 
339 
365 
401 
452 
505 

364 
390 
430 
456 
481 
532 

453 
504 
555 

424 
450 
494 
520 

338 
364 
389 
440 

348 
374 
399 
450 

251 
276 
301 
327 
362 
388 
413 
464 

372 
398 
424 
475 

274 
299 
324 
350 
386 
412 
437 
488 

326 
351 
377 
415 
466 
517 

376 
402 
442 
468 
493 
544 

465 
516 
567 

436 
462 
506 
532 

352 
378 
403 
451 

363 
383 
408 
462 

264 
291 
314 
342 
378 
401 
422 
473 

386 
412 
441 
492 

291 
316 
341 
367 
397 
430 
448 
506 

346 
368 
394 
427 
478 
538 

398 
424 
464 
490 
515 
568 

481 
532 
583 

464 
490 
534 
562 

TYRE 
SIZE 
(mm) 

OVERALL 
WIDTH 
(mm) 

65 

70 

71 

77 

80 

86 

88 

95 

92 

99 

105 

113 

120 

130 

134 

145 

154 

166 

- C I 

TABLE  2 
Motor  cycle  and  moped  tyres 
Normal  p r o f i le 

DESCRIPTION 

WIDTH OF 
MEASURING 
RIM(code) 

OVERALL DIAMETER  (mm) 

D.min 

D 

D.max1 

D.max^ 

TYRE 
SIZE 
(mm) 
(mm) 

OVERALL 
WIDTH (mm) 

1 

2 

1 3/4 - 19 

1.20 

582 

589 

597 

605 

50 

54 

58 

2 
2 
2 
2 
2 
2 
2 
2 
2 

- 14 
- 15 
- 16 
- 17 
- 18 
- 19 
- 20 
- 21 
- 22 

2 1/4 - 14 
2 1/4 - 15 
2 1/4 - 16 
2 1/4 - 17 
2 1/4 - 18 
2 1/4 - 19 
2 1/4 - 20 
2 1/4 - 21 
2 1/4 - 22 

2 1/2 - 14 
2 1/2 - 15 
2 1/2 - 16 
2 1/2 - 17 
2 1/2 - 18 
2 1/2 - 19 
2 1/2 - 20 
2 1/2 - 21 
2 1/2 - 22 

2 3/4 - 14 
2 3/4 - 15 
2 3/4 - 16 
2 3/4 - 17 
2 3/4 - 18 
2 3/4 - 19 
2 3/4 - 20 
2 3/4 - 21 
2 3/4 - 22 

3 
3 
3 
3 

- 16 
- 17 
- 18 
- 19 

3 1/4 - 16 
3 1/4 - 17 
3 1/4 - 18 
3 1/4 - 19 

461 
486 
511 
537 
562 
588 
613 
638 
663 

474 
499 
524 
550 
575 
601 
626 
651 
677 

489 
514 
539 
565 
590 
616 
641 
666 
692 

499 
524 
549 
575 
600 
626 
651 
676 
702 

560 
586 
611 
637 

575 
601 
626 
652 

468 
493 
518 
544 
569 
595 
620 
645 
670 

482 
507 
532 
558 
583 
609 
634 
659 
685 

498 
523 
548 
574 
599 
625 
650 
675 
701 

508 
533 
558 
584 
609 
635 
660 
685 
711 

570 
596 
621 
647 

586 
612 
637 
663 

477 
501 
526 
552 
577 
603 
628 
653 
680 

492 
517 
540 
566 
591 
617 
642 
667 
695 

508 
533 
558 
584 
609 
635 
660 
685 
711 

518 
545 
568 
594 
621 
645 
670 
695 
721 

582 
608 
633 
659 

598 
624 
651 
675 

484 
509 
534 
560 
585 
611 
636 
661 
686 

500 
525 
550 
576 
601 
627 
652 
677 
703 

520 
545 
570 
596 
621 
647 
672 
697 
723 

530 
555 
580 
606 
631 
657 
682 
707 
733 

594 
620 
645 
671 

614 
640 
665 
691 

1.35 

1.50 

1.60 

1.85 

1.85 

2.15 

55 

58 

63 

62 

66 

71 

68 

72 

78 

75 

80 

86 

81 

86 

93 

89 

94 

102 

1  Tyres  for  normal  use 
2  Special-purpose  and  snow  tyres 

- A S 

TABLE  3 
Motor  cycle  tyres 
Normal  profile 

DESCRIPTION 

WIDTH OF 
MEASURING 
RIM (code) 

OVERALL DIAMETER  (mm) 

D.min 

D 

D.max1 

J.max^ 

TYRE 
SIZE 
(mm) 

OVERALL 
WIDTH (mm) 

3 

4 

5 

2.00 - 14 
2.00 - 15 
2.00 - 16 
2.00 - 17 
2.00 - 18 
2.00 - 19 

2.25 - 14 
2.25 - 15 
2.25 - 16 
2.25 - 17 
2.25 - 18 
2.25 - 19 

2.50 - 14 
2.50 - 15 
2.50 - 16 
2.50 - 17 
2.50 - 18 
2.50 - 19 
2.50 - 21 

2.75 - 14 
2.75 - 15 
2.75 - 16 
2.75 - 17 
2.75 - 18 
2.75 - 19 
2.75 - 21 

3.00 - 14 
3.00 - 15 
3.00 - 16 
3.00 - 17 
3.00 - 18 
3.00 - 19 
3.00 - 21 
3.00 - 23 

3.25 - 14 
3.25 - 15 
3.25 - 16 
3.25 - 17 
3.25 - 18 
3.25 - 19 
3.25 - 21 

1.20 

1.60 

1.60 

1.85 

1.85 

2.15 

460 
485 
510 
536 
561 
587 

474 
499 
524 
550 
575 
601 

486 
511 
536 
562 
587 
613 
663 

505 
530 
555 
581 
606 
632 
682 

519 
546 
569 
595 
618 
644 
694 
747 

531 
556 
581 
607 
630 
656 
708 

466 
491 
516 
542 
567 
593 

480 
505 
530 
556 
581 
607 

492 
517 
542 
568 
593 
619 
669 

512 
537 
562 
588 
613 
639 
689 

526 
551 
576 
602 
627 
653 
703 
754 

538 
563 
588 
614 
639 
665 
715 

478 
503 
528 
554 
579 
605 

492 
517 
542 
568 
593 
619 

506 
531 
556 
582 
607 
633 
683 

524 
549 
574 
600 
625 
651 
701 

540 
565 
590 
616 
641 
667 
717 
768 

552 
577 
602 
628 
653 
679 
729 

496 
521 
546 
572 
597 
623 

508 
533 
558 
584 
609 
635 
685 

530 
555 
580 
606 
631 
657 
707 

546 
571 
596 
622 
647 
673 
723 
774 

560 
585 
610 
636 
661 
687 
737 

52 

57 

60 

65 

61 

67 

70 

75 

65 

72 

75 

79 

75 

83 

86 

91 

80 

88 

92 

97 

89 

98 

102 

108 

1  Tyres  for  normal  on-road  use 
2  Special-purpose  and  snow  tyres 
3  Tyres  for  normal  on-road  use  up  to  and  including  speed  rating  P 
4  Tyres  for  normal  on-road  use  beyond  speed  rating  P  and  snow  tyres 
5  Special-purpose  tyres 

-  %c,  -

TABLE 3 (continued) 
Motor cycle tyres 
Normal profile 

DESCRIPTION 

WIDTH OF 
MEASURING 
RIM (code) 

OVERALL DIAMETER  (mm) 

D.min 

D 

D.max1 

D.max2 

TYRE 
SIZE 
(mm) 

OVERALL 
WIDTH (mm) 

3 

4 

5 

3.50 - 14 
3.50 - 15 
3,50 - 16 
3.50 - 17 
3.50 - 18 
3.50 - 19 
3.50 - 21 

3,75 - 16 
3,75 - 17 
3.75 - 18 
3,75 - 19 

4,00 - 16 
4,00 - 17 
4,00 - 18 
4,00 - 19 

4.25 - 16 
4.25 - 17 
4.25 - 18 
4.25 - 19 

4,50 - 16 
4.50 - 17 
4.50 - 18 
4.50 - 19 

4,75 - 16 
4,75 - 17 
4,75 - 18 
4.75 - 19 

2.15 

2.15 

2,50 

2.50 

2.75 

3.00 

539 
564 
591 
617 
640 
666 
716 

601 
627 
652 
678 

611 
637 
662 
688 

623 
649 
674 
700 

631 
657 
684 
707 

657 
683 
708 
734 

548 
573 
598 
624 
649 
675 
725 

610 
636 
661 
687 

620 
646 
671 
697 

632 
628 
683 
709 

640 
666 
691 
717 

666 
692 
717 
743 

564 
589 
614 
640 
665 
691 
741 

626 
652 
677 
703 

638 
664 
689 
715 

650 
676 
701 
727 

658 
684 
709 
734 

686 
710 
735 
761 

572 
597 
622 
648 
673 
699 
749 

634 
660 
685 
711 

646 
672 
697 
723 

660 
686 
711 
737 

665 
694 
719 
745 

698 
724 
749 
775 

93 

102 

107 

113 

99 

109 

114 

121 

108 

119 

124 

130 

112 

123 

129 

137 

123 

135 

141 

142 

129 

142 

148 

157 

1  Tyres  for  normal  on-road  use 
2  Special-purpose  and  snow  tyres 
3  Tyres  for  normal  on-road  use  up  to  and  including  speed  rating  P 
4  Tyres  for  normol  on-road  use  beyond  speed  rating  P  and  snow  tyres 
5  Special-purpose  tyres 

- A C 

TABLE 4 
Motor cycle tyres 
Low profile 

DESCRIPTION 

WIDTH OF 
MEASURING 
RIM (code) 

OVERALL DIAMETER  (mm) 

D.min 

D 

D.max1 

D.max2 

3.60 - 18 

3.60 - 19 

4,10 - 18 

4,10 - 19 

5.10 - 16 
5.10 - 17 
5.10 - 18 

2.15 

2.50 

3,00 

605 

615 

628 

633 

631 

641 

653 

658 

629 

641 

654 

663 

655 

667 

679 

688 

615 
641 
666 

625 
651 
676 

643 
670 
694 

651 
677 
702 

TYRE 
SIZE 
(mm) 

MAXIMUM 
OVERALL 
WIDTH (mm) 

3 

4 

5 

93 

102 

108 

113 

108 

119 

124 

130 

129 

142 

150 

157 

4.25/85 - 18 

2,50 

649 

659 

673 

683 

112 

123 

129 

137 

4,60 - 16 
4,60 - 17 
4.60 - 18 

2.75 

594 
619 
644 

604 
630 
654 

619 
642 
670 

628 
654 
678 

117 

129 

136 

142 

1 Tyres for normal  on-road use 
2 Special-purpose and snow tyres 
3 Tyres for normal  on-road use  up to and including speed  rating P 
4 Tyres for normal  on-road use beyond speed  rating P ond snow tyres 
5  Special-purpose  tyres 

- C I 

TABLE  5 

Tricycle  tyres 

DESCRIPTION 

WIDTH OF 
MEASURING 
RIM  (code) 

OVERALL DIAMETER  (mm) 

D.min 

D 

D.max 

3.00 -  8C 
3.00 - IOC 
3.00 - 12C 

3.50 -  8C 
3.50 - IOC 
3.50 - 12C 

4.00 -  8C 
4.00 - IOC 
4.00 - 12C 

4.50 -  8C 
4.50 - IOC 
4.50 - 12C 

5.00 -  8C 
5.00 - IOC 
5.00 - 12C 

2.10 

2.50 

3.00 

3.50 

3.50 

359 
410 
459 

376 
427 
478 

405 
456 
507 

429 
480 
531 

455 
506 
555 

369 
420 
471 

386 
437 
488 

415 
466 
517 

439 
490 
541 

465 
516 
567 

379 
430 
479 

401 
452 
513 

427 
478 
529 

453 
504 
555 

481 
532 
581 

TYRE 
SIZE 
(mm) 

OVERALL 
WIDTH 
(mm) 

80 

86 

92 

99 

108 

117 

125 

135 

134 

145 

TABLE  6 

Low-pressure  motor  cycle  tyres 

DESCRIPTION 

WIDTH OF 
MEASURING 
RIM  (code) 

5.4 -  6 
5.4 - 10 
5.4 - 12 
5.4 - 14 
5.4 - 16 

6.7 - 10 
6.7 - 12 
6.7 - 14 

4.00 

5.00 

OVERALL DIAMETER  (mm) 

D.min 

373 
474 
525 
576 
626 

532 
583 
633 

D 

379 
481 
532 
582 
633 

541 
592 
642 

D.max 

395 
497 
547 
598 
649 

561 
612 
662 

TYRE 
SIZE 
(mm) 

OVERALL 
WIDTH 
(mm) 

135 

146 

170 

184 

- 6 2-

TABLE 7 

Motor cycle  tyres 

Descriptions and dimensions of American  tyres 

DESCRIPTION 

WIDTH OF 
MEASURING 
RIM  (code) 

OVERALL DIAMETER  (mm) 

D.min 

D 

D.max 

TYRE 
SIZE 
(inn) 

MAXIMUM 
OVERALL 
WIDTH 
(mm) 

MH90 - 21 

MJ90 - 18 
MJ90 - 19 

It.90 - 18 
ML90 - 19 

MM90 - 19 

MN90 - 18 

MP90 - 18 

MR90 - 18 

MS90 - 17 

MT90 - 16 
MT90 - 17 

MU90 - 15M/C 
MU90 - 16 

1.85 

2.15 
2.15 

2.15 
2.15 

2.15 

2.15 

2.15 

2.15 

2.50 

3.00 
3.00 

3.50 
3.50 

MV90 - 15M/C 

3.50 

MP85 - 18 

MR85 - 16 

MS85 - 18 

MT85 - 18 

MV85 - 15M/C 

2.15 

2.15 

2.50 

3.00 

3.50 

682 

620 
645 

629 
654 

663 

656 

667 

680 

660 

642 
668 

634 
659 

643 

654 

617 

675 

681 

627 

686 

625 
650 

634 
659 

669 

662 

673 

687 

667 

650 
675 

642 
667 

651 

660 

623 

682 

688 

635 

700 

640 
665 

650 
675 

685 

681 

692 

708 

688 

672 
697 

665 
690 

675 

679 

643 

702 

709 

658 

80 

89 

93 

95 

104 

108 

114 

121 

89 

99 

103 

106 

116 

120 

127 

134 

130 

144 

142 

150 

108 

114 

121 

130 

150 

158 

172 

120 

127 

134 

144 

m 

-  m-

ANNEX VI 

METHOD OF MEASURING  TYRE  DIMENSIONS 

1.  The tyre  is fitted  to the measuring  rim and Inflated  to the pressure* 

specified  by its manufacturer. 

2.  The tyre mounted  on its rim is left at ambient  laboratory  temperature for 

at  least  24 hours. 

3.  The pressure  is reset  at the value  specified  in  Item 1. 

4.  The overall  size  is measured  by means of a calliper  gauge at six equally 

spaced  points, account  being  taken of the thickness of the ribs or bands. 
The  highest  measurement  thus obtained  shall  be retained  as the overall 
s I ze. 

5.  The outer  diameter  is determined  as follows:  the maximum  circumference is 

measured  and the figure  thus obtained  is divided  by p  (3.1416). 

The  inflation  pressures may also be specified  as follows: 

lyre version 

Speed  rating 

Pressure 

bar 

kPa 

MOPEDS 

STANDARD 

REINFORCED 

MOTORCYCLES 

SIANUAKU 

REINFORCED 

MOTORCYCLE DERIVATIVES 

B 

B 

2.25 

2.80 

225 

280 

F, G,  J, K, L, M, 
N,  P, Q, R, S 

2.25 

225 

T, U, H, V 

F to P 

2.80 

280 

Q, R, S, T, U, H 

3.30 

4PR 

6PR 

8PR 

F  to M 

3.50 

4.00 

4.50 

330 

350 

400 

450 

Other  tyre  versions  must  be  inflated  to the pressure  specified  by  their 
manufacturer 

- 

< *-

ANNEX VII 

PRACTICAL METHOD FOR TESTING LOAD/SPEED  PERFORMANCE1 

1. 

1.1 

1.2 

TYRE PREPARATION 

A new tyre shall be fitted  to the test rim identified by the 
manufacturer. 

It shall  be  inflated to the appropriate  pressure as set out in the 
fol lowing  table: 

TEST  INFLATION PRESSURE (kPa) 

lyre version 

Speed  rating 

MOPEDS 

STANDARD 

REINFORCED 

MOTORCYCLES 

STANDARD 

REINFORCED 

B 

B 

F, G,  J, K 

L, M, N, P 

Q, R, S 

T, U, H, V 

F,G,J,K,L,M,N,P 

Pressure 

bar 

kPa 

2.25 

225 

3.00 

2.50 

2.50 

3.00 

3.50 

3.30 

300 

250 

250 

300 

350 

330 

390 

370 

450 

520 

Q, R, S, T, U, H 

3.90 

4PR 

MOTORCYCLE  DERIVATIVES 

6PR 

F, G,  J, K, L, M 

8PR 

3.70 

4.50 

5.20 

Other  types of tyre shall  be inflated to the pressure  quoted by their 
manufacturer. 

1.3 

If supported by evidence the manufacturer  may request  that a test 
inflation  pressure different  from  that  laid down  in Item 1.2 is to 
be used.  In this case the tyre may be inflated  to that  pressure. 

In the case of tyres  intended for vehicles designed for a maximum speed in 
excess of 240 km/h shall, while owaiting an agreement on uniform test 
procedures provide the testing body with a guarantee that  its own test 
procedures and results are acceptable. 

-  <f5 -

1.4 

1.5 

2. 

2.1 

2.2. 

2.2.1 

2.2.2 

2.2.3 

2.3. 

2.4. 

2.5. 

2.5.1 

2.5.2 

The wheel/tyre  combination  shall  be  stored  at  the  temperature  of  the 
test  chamber  for  at  least  three  hours. 

The  tyre pressure  shall  be brought  to  that  specified  in  Items  1.2 or 
1.3. 

TEST  SEQUENCE 

The  tyre/wheel  combination  shall  be  fitted  to a  test  spindle  and 
pressed  against  the outer  surface of  a smooth  flywheel  having  a 
diameter  of  1.7 m ±  1% or  2.0 m ±  1%. 

A  load  that  is equal  to 65% of  the  following  shall  be  applied  to  the 
test  spindle: 

a maximum  load corresponding  to  the  load capacity  index  for  tyres 
bearing  speed  symbols  up  to and  including  "H", 

the maximum  load  associated  with  a maximum  speed  of  240 km/h 
applying  to  tyres bearing  speed  symbol  "V"  (see paragraph  1.31.3 in 
Annex  II). 

In the case of moped  tyres  (speed  category  symbol  B ), the  test  load 
shall  be 65% on  a test  drum  that  is 1.7 m  in diameter,  and  67% on a 
test  drum  that  is 2.0 m  in diameter. 

Throughout  the  test  the  tyre pressure  shall  not  be  reset  and  the 
test  load shall  be  held  constant. 

During  the  test  the  temperature  in the  test  chamber  shall  be kept  at 
between  20 and  30'C or  at  a higher  temperature  if so accepted  by  the 
manufacturer. 

The  test  shall  proceed  uninterrupted,  in accordance  with  the 
fol lowing  cr iter ia: 

time  for  transition  from  speed  0  to  test  starting  speed: 
20 minutes, 

test  starting  speed:  equal  to the maximum  speed  intended  for  the 
type of  tyre, reduced  by  30 km/h  if the  test  is carried  out  on a 
2 m-diameter  drum, or  by 40 km/h  if the  test  is carried  out  on a 
1.7 m-diameter  drum, 

2.5.3 

speed-range  intervals:  10 km/h, 

2.5.4 

duration  of  test  within  each  speed-range  interval:  10 minutes, 

2.5.5 

total  duration  of  test:  one  hour, 

2.5.6 

maximum  test  speed:  maximum  speed  intended  for  the  type of  tyre  if 
the  test  is carried  out  on  a 2 m-diameter  drum  and maximum  speed 
intended  for  the  type of  tyre  reduced  by  10 km/h  if the  test  is 
carried  out  on  a  1.7 m-diameter  drum. 

-  <4  -

2.5.7 

In the case of moped  tyres  (speed-category  symbol  B) the  test  speed 
shall  be 50 km/h, the time  taken  to accelerate  from 0 to 50 km/h 
being  10 minutes, a steady  state speed  then being  held  for 
30 minutes, the total  duration of  the  test  being 40 minutes. 

3. 

EQUIVALENT TEST METHODS 

If a test method other  than  that  described  in  Item  2  is used  its 
equivalence  shall  be  demonstrated. 

-  kl  -

ANNEX  V IM 

VARIATION OF LOAD CAPACITY AS A FUNCTION OF SPEED 

Load var iat ion 

(%) 

Maximum 

Rim diameter < 13 

Rim diameter >. 13 

speed 

Speed code 

(km/h) 

J 

K 

L 

J 

K 

L 

M et N 

at least 
P 

50 

60 

70 

80 

90 

100 

110 

120 

130 

+ 30 

+ 30 

+ 30 

+ 30 

+ 30 

+ 30 

+ 30 

+ 30 

+ 23 

+ 23 

+ 23 

+ 23 

+ 23 

+ 23 

+ 23 

+ 23 

+ 16" 

+ 16 

+ 16 

+ 16 

+ 16 

+ 16 

+ 16 

+ 16 

+ 10 

+ 10 

+ 10 

+ 10 

+ 10 

+ 10 

+ 10 

+ 14 

+  5 

+  5 

+ 7.5 

+  5 

+  5 

+ 7.5 

+ 7.5 

+ 12 

0 

-  7 

0 

0 

+  5 

+ 2.5 

- 15 

-  6 

0 

- 25 

- 12 

-  5 

0 

/ 

/ 

/ 

0 

+  5 

+  5 

+ 10 

0 

+ 2.5 

+ 2.5 

+  8 

/ 

/ 

0 

0 

+  6 

' 

0 

+  4 

-  kS  -

ANNEX  IX 

TEST METHODS  FOR  DETERMINING  THE DYNAMIC  EXPANSION OF  TYRES 

1. 

SCOPE AND  EXTENT 

1.1. 

1.2 

This  test  method  shall  apply  to new motorcycle  tyres of  the  types 
referred  to  in  Item  3.4.1. 

It  is  intended  to determine  the maximum  expansion  of  the  tyre  that 
is due  to  the effect  of  the centrifugal  force on  the maximum 
permissible  speed. 

2. 

DESCRIPTION OF TEST METHOD 

2.1 

The  test  spindle  and  the  rim shall  be checked  in order  to ensure 
that  any  radial  eccentricities  less  than ±0.5 mm  and  any  lateral 
displacement  is  less than ±0.5 mm when measures  at  the outer 
periphery  of  the  tyre well. 

2.2 

Contour-plotting  device 

Any  device  (squared  frame, camera, spot  and other  lamps) enabling 
the outer  contour  of  the cross section of  the  tyre  to be  determined 
clearly  at  right  angles  to the equator  of  the  tyre  at  the point  of 
maximum  tread  deformation. 
This device  shall  reduce  any  deformation  to a minimum  and  ensure a 
constant  (known) ratio  (K) between  the contour  plotted  and  the 
actual  dimensions of  the  tyre. 
This  device will  enable  the  tyre contour  to be  determined  in 
relation  to the wheel  spindle. 

2.3. 

The  peripheral  speed of  the  tyre  tread, measured  with  a stroboscope, 
shall  not  diverge  from  the maximum  speed  applying  to  the  tyre by 
more  than  2%  In either  direction. 

2.4. 

If any other  test  method  is used  its equivalence must  be 
demonstrated. 

3. 

TEST  SEQUENCE 

3.1. 

3.2. 

3.3. 

3.4. 

During  the  test  the  temperature  in the  test  chamber  shall  be  held 
between  20'C and  30*C or  at  a higher  temperature  if so accepted  by 
the  tyre manufacture. 

The  tyres  to be  tested must  have undergone  the  load/speed 
performance  test  in accordance with  Annex  VII  without  any  fault 
emerging. 

The  tyre  to be  tested  shall  be  fitted  to a wheel,  the  rim of  which 
displays  the standardized  characteristics  applying. 

The  tyre  inflation  pressure  (test  inflation  pressure) shall  coincide 
with  the  values  required  by  Item  3.4.1. 

(3) 

3.4.1 

Cross-ply  and bias-belted  on-road  tyres 

- 

^ 

Speed  rat ing 

Tyre  version 

P/Q/R/S 

T/U/H/V 

norma I 

norma I 

Test  inflation 

pressure 

bar 

2.50 

2.90 

kPa 

250 

290 

3.5. 

3.6. 

3.7. 

3.8. 

3.9. 

3.10. 

The wheel/tyre  combination  shall  be stored  at the temperature  of the 
test  chamber  for at  least  three  hours. 

Following  that  period of storage  the inflation  pressure  shall be 
corrected  to the value  laid  down  in Item 3.4. 

The wheel/tyre  combination  shall  be mounted on the test  spindle and 
checked  that  It turns  freely.  The tyre may be rotated  by a motor 
acting on the tyre  spindle or else via pressure  against  a test  drum. 

The entire  assembly  shall  be accelerated  without  interruption in 
order  to achieve, within  five minutes, the maximum  speed  that  can be 
achieved  by the tyre. 

The contour-plotting  device  shall  be  installed, care  being  taken 
that  it is at right  angles to the (direction of) rotation of the 
tread of the tyre  being  tsted. 

It shall  be checked  that  the peripheral  speed of the tread  surface 
is equal  to the maximum  speed of the tyre ±2%.  The combination 
shall  be kept  at a constant  speed  for five minutes at  least and then 
the  cross  section of the tyre  shall  be traced  in the area of maximum 
deformation. 

4. 

4.1 

-  Sit -

ASSESSMENT OF  RESULTS 

The  limit outline  (envelope outline) required  for  the wheel/tyre 
combination  fitted  is projected  onto  the chequered  screen  (see 
example  below). 

^n  &<U 

/»**y. ^ U hf  u  •^eujvo^  (Smax) 

"a 

In view of  items 3.1.4. and  3.1.5.  in Annex  II the  limit  values for 
the envelope outline are  laid down  as follows: 

Tyre speed 
rating 

P/Q/R/S 

T/U/H 

V 

Maximum width  in operation 

H x 1.16(mm) 

S x 1.15 

S x 1.15 

S x 1.15 

H x  1.10 

H x  1.13 

H x 1.15 

-  £J  -

4.1.1. 

The  main  dimensions  of  the envelope  outline  shall  be  set  in such  a 
way  as  to  take  account  of  any  deformation of  the  tyre  silhouette 
projected  onto  the chequered  screen  that  has  been  caused  by  the 
lighting  device  adopted. 

4.2. 

The  tyre  contour  deforming  at maximum  speed  shall  not  go beyond  the 
envelope  outline when  related  to  the  tyre  axes. 

4.3. 

No other  test  is carried  out  on  the  tyre. 

5. 

EQUIVALENT TEST  METHODS 

If a method  other  than  that  described  in  item  2  is used  its 
equivalence  shall  be  demonstrated. 

- ^z. -

ANNEX  X A 

INFORMATION  DOCUMENT  IN RESPECT OF  A TYPE OF  TYRE  INTENDED 
FOR  TWO OR  THREE-WHEEL  MOTOR  VEHICLES 

(to be  attached  to the application  for  component  type  approval  If  this 

s  submitted  separately  from  the application  for  vehicle  type  approval) 

Order  No  (assigned  by  the  applicant): 

The  application  for  the component  type  approval  of  a  type of  tyre  intended  for 
two or  three-wheel  motor  vehicles  shall  contain  the  information  set  out  in 
Annex  I,  items  1.1  to 1.3.1.  to this Chapter. 

- S3 -

ANNEX X B 

CERTIFICATE OF COMPONENT TYPE APPROVAL  IN RESPECT OF 
A TYPE OF TYRE  INTENDED FOR TWO OR THREE-WHEEL  MOTOR  VEHICLES 

MODEL 

Name of administration 

Report  No 

by technical  body 

date 

Component  type approval  No 

Extension  No 

1.  Mark or trade name of tyre 

2.  Type of tyre 

3.  Manufacturer's  name and address 

4.  If applicable, name and address of manufacturer's  representative 

5.  Tyres submitted  for test on 

6.  Component  type approval  granted/refused* 

7.  Place 

8.  Date 

9.  Signature 

*  Delete  as  appropriate. 

- S Q -

ANNEX  XI 

REQUIREMENTS  REGARDING  THE  FITTING OF  TYRES  TO  VEHICLES 

The  tyres  fitted  to a vehicle  shall  meet  the  following  requirements: 

1.  All  tyres  fitted  to a vehicle  shall  be  identical  as  regards  the  aspects 

covered  by  Annex  II,  Item  1.1.5. 

1.1  All  tyres  fitted  to a given  axle  shall  be of  the  same  type  (see Annex  II, 

item 1.1). 

2.  The  maximum  load, as defined  in  item  1.31  in Annex  II shall  be  at  least 

equal  to  the  following: 

the maximum  permissible  mass where  there  is only  one  tyre  per  axle, 
0.5  times  the maximum  permissible  mass where  two  single  tyres  are 
fitted, 
0.54  times  the maximum  permissible  mass where  two  twin  tyres  are 
fitted, 
0.7  times  the maximum  permissible  mass  declared  by  the  vehicle 
manufacturer,  for  the  axle  for  which  the  tyre  is  intended,  account 
being  taken  of  the  requirement  set  out  in Annex  V I M,  where  four 
twin  tyres  are  fitted. 

3.  The maximum  speed,  as set  out  in Annex  II,  item  1.28, of  norma I-purpose 

and  moped  tyres  shall  be  at  least  equal  to  the maximum  design  speed  of  the 
vehicle,  including  the  tolerance  permitted  for  series-production 
conformity  checks, account  being  taken  of  the  requirements  set  out  in 
Annex  VIII. 

4.  Tyres  which  have  been  component  type  approved  for  category  M-| and N-j 

motor  vehicles  may  also  be  fitted  to  tricycles.  Motorcycle  tyres may  also 
be  fitted  to mopeds. 

5.  The manufacturer  of  the vehicle  shall  define  the  type of  tyre(s)  in 

accordance  with  the  requirements  of  this Chapter.  This  type  or  these 
types of  tyre made  by  the  tyre manufacturer  to  the  tolerances  laid  down  in 
Annex  II,  items 3.1.4,  3.1.5  and  3.3  shall  move  freely  in their  intended 
posit ion. 

6.  Tyres  fitted  to  reduced-performance  mopeds  as defined  in the  note  set  out 

in Annex  1 to Directive 92/61/EEC  on  the  type  approval  of  two or 
three-wheel  motor  vehicles  may  be of  a different  type  from  those  covered 
by  the  requirements  of  this Chapter  owing  to special  conditions  of  use, 
provided  that  the  authority  responsible  for  component  type  approval 
receives  an  assurance  that  the  tyres  fitted  are  appropriate  to  the 
conditions of  use of  the  vehicle. 

-  & 

-

ANNEX  XII A 

INFORMATION  DOCUMENT  IN RESPECT OF THE FITTING OF TYRES TO 
A TYPE OF TWO OR THREE-WHEEL MOTOR  VEHICLE 

(to be attached  to the application  for  component  type  approval  if this 
is submitted  separately  from  the application  for  vehicle  approval) 

Order  No  (assigned  by  the applicant): 

The application  for  component  type approval  in respect  of  the  fitting of  tyres 
to a type of  two or  three-wheel  motor  vehicle  shall  contain  the  information 
set out  in Annex  II to Council  Directive  No. 92/61/EEC of  30 June  1992, under 
A,  in  items: 

0.1 

0.2 

0.4  to  0.6 

2.3  to  2.3.2 

4.6 

5.2  to  5.2.3 

In addition,  the  following  information  is required: 

minimum-speed  category  symbol  compatible with  the  theoretical  maximum 
design  speed of  the vehicle: 

-  ' minimum  load-capacity  index compatible  with  the maximum  axle  load: 

- ^  -

ANNEX  XII B 

CERTIFICATE OF COMPONENT TYPE APPROVAL  IN RESPECT OF THE FITTING 
OF TYRES TO A TYPE OF TWO OR THREE-WHEEL  MOTOR  VEHICLE 

MODEL 

Name of administration 

Report  No 

by technical  body 

date 

Component  type  approval  No 

Extension  No 

1.  Mark or trade  name of vehicle . 

2.  Type of vehicle 

3.  Manufacturer's  name and address 

4.  If applicable, name and address of manufacturer's  representative 

5.  Vehicle  submitted  for test on 

6.  Component  type  approval  granted/refused* 

7.  Place 

. .. 

8.  Date 

. . .. 

9.  Signature 

•  Delete  as  appropriate. 

O -

CHAPTER  2 

LIGHTING AND LIGHT-SIGNALLING DEVICES FOR 

TWO OR THREE-WHEEL MOTOR  VEHICLES 

-ïç 

ANNEX I 

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS APPLYING TO THE COMPONENT TYPE APPROVAL 
OF A TYPE OF LIGHTING AND LIGHT-SIGNALLING DEVICE 
FOR TWO OR THREE-WHEEL MOTOR VEHICLES 

1. 

1.1 

1.2 

1.3 

1.4 

2. 

2.1 

2.1.1 

2.1.2 

For the purposes of this chapter: 
"type of device" 
means devices which do not differ among themselves in respect of 
the fol lowing essential characteristics: 

trade name or mark; 

the characteristics of the optical system-, 

the addition or deletion of components likely to alter the 
optical  results as a result of reflection, refraction or 
absorption and/or deformation during their operation; 

their  intended use  in either right-hand or  left-hand driving or 
both. 

Application for the component type approval of a type of device 

The application for the component type approval of a type of 
device submitted  in compliance with Article 3 of Council 
Directive 92/61/EEC of 30 June 1992 on the type approval of two 
or three-wheel motor vehicles shall, moreover, provide the 
foMowing detai Is: 

the  intended function(s) of the device; 

in the case of a headlamp  if designed for running on either side 
of the road or for  left-hand or right-hand running only; 

2.1.3 

in the case of a direction  indicator: its category. 

2.2 

2.2.1 

For each type of device for which component type approval  is 
requested the application shall be accompanied by: 

drawings, in triplicate, in sufficient detail  to permit 
identification of the type and setting out the geometrical 
conditions under which  it is fitted to the vehicle, together 
with the direction of observation which must be taken into 
account as the reference axis during the tests (horizontal 
angle H - 0, vertical angle V - 0) and the point which must be 
taken as the centre of reference during these tests; in the case 
of a headlamp the drawings must show a vertical (axial) section 
and a head-on view with, where appropriate, 

-  £<i  -

details of  the  lens fluting;  the drawings  shall  also  illustrate 
the position  intended  for  the mandatory  component  type  approval 
mark  and, where appropriate, additional  symbols  in relation  to 
the rectangle  for said mark; 

2.2.2 

a brief  technical  description  giving  details,  in particular, of 
the  intended  category(s) of  lamp. 

2.3 

3. 

3.1 

3.1.1 

3.1.2 

3.1.3 

4. 

4.1 

5. 

5.1 

Applicants shall  also submit  two samples of  the device  for  which 
component  type approval  is requested. 

Additional  requirements concerning  the marking  of and marks on 
dev i ces 

Devices shall  bear  the following  in a clearly  visible  and 
indelible manner: 

make or  trade name; 

a statement  of  the  intended  category(s) of  lamp(s); 

the component  type approval  mark  in accordance  with  the 
provisions of Article 8 of Council  Directive  92/61/EEC of 
30 June  1992 on  the type approval  of  two or  three-wheel  motor 
vehicles.  In the case of  headlamps  the marks shall  be placed  on 
the  lens or main body of  the  lamp  (the mirror  being  considered 
to be a main  body).  If the  lens cannot  be separated  from  the 
main body  a position on  the  lens will  suffice. 
That  position  shall  be shown on  the designs  referred  to  in 
Item 2.2.1  above. 

Component  type approval  of  a device 

When  at  least  two  lamps form part of  the same device  component 
type approval  can only  be granted  if each of  those  lamps meets 
the requirements of  this chapter. 

Minimum  requirements with  regard  to quality  checking  by  the 
manufacturers 

From both mechanical  and geometrical  standpoints  the  conformity 
of  production requirements  are considered  to be satisfactory  if 
the differences  do not exceed  the  inevitable manufacturing 
tolerances. 

- éc 

5.2 

5.3 

The  conformity  of  series-production devices  is not  challenged  in 
respect  of  photometric  performance  if, during  the  photometric 
tests on any given  device  selected  at  random  and  provided  with a 
standard  incandescent  lamp, none of  the values measured  differs, 
in an adverse  direction, by more  than  20%  in relation  to the 
value  laid down  in this regulation, with  the exception of 
specific  requirements  provided  for  in the annex  that  is 
appropriate  to the device  at  issue. 

If the  results of  the tests described above  do not meet  those 
requirements  the  tests on  the device  that  has been  challenged 
shall  be  repeated  using  another  reference  incandescent  lamp. 

The holder of  the component  type approval  shall  carry out at 
least  the  following  tests, at an appropriate  frequency, on each 
type of  device.  Those  tests shall  be carried out  in compliance 
with  this chapter. 

All  sampling  identifying  non conformity  for  the  type of  test 
under  consideration shall  give  rise  to further  sampling  and 
testing.  The manufacturer  shall  take every  step  to ensure  the 
corresponding conformity  of  production. 

5.4 

Nature of  the  tests 

5.5 

5.5.1 

5.5.2 

5.5.3 

5.5.4 

The conformity  tests shall  concentrate  on  the  photometric 
character ist ics. 

Conditions attached  to test 

The  tests are generally  carried  out  in  line with  the  methods 
defined  in this chapter. 

Certain  conformity  tests carried  out  by  the manufacturer  may, 
however, use equivalent  methods  following  approval  by  the 
competent  authority  that  is responsible  for  the component  type 
approval  test.  Manufacturers  shall  be  required  to furnish  proof 
that  the methods used  are equivalent  to those described  in this 
chapter. 

Implementation of  Items 5.5.1  and  5.5.2  shall  involve  regular 
calibration of  the  testing  equipment  and  correlation  with  the 
measurements  taken by a competent  authority. 

In all  of  these  instances  the reference methods  shall  be  those 
contained  in this chapter,  in particular  as  regards 
administrative checking  and  sampling. 

-  61  -

5.6 

Form of  sampling 

The examples of devices shall  be selected  at  random  from a 
homogeneous  batch.  "Homogeneous batch" means a group of  devices 
of  the same  type, defined  in accordance with  the  manufacturer's 
methods of production. 

5.7 

Photometric characteristics both measured  and  recorded 

The devices selected  shall  be subjected  to  photometric 
measurements  at  the points provided  for  in this chapter. 

5.8 

AcceptabiIity criteria 

Manufacturers  are required  statistically  to plot  the results of 
the  tests and,  in agreement  with  the competent  authority, to 
define  the acceptability criteria  for  their  products  in order  to 
meet  the specifications  laid down  for  checking  conformity  of 
production. 

The acceptability criteria must  be such  that, with  a  confidence 
level of 95%, the minimum  probability of  passing  the  tests 
provided  for  in  Item 6 below  (first  sampling)  is 0.95. 

Minimum  requirements  for checks which may  be carried out  by  the 
competent  authorities when checking  conformity 

The  requirements set out  in  Items 5.1  and  5.2  above  shall  apply. 

The conformity  of series-production devices shall  not  be 
challenged  if, based on  the sampling  procedure  set out  in 
diagrammatic  form  in Figure  1  in the appendix  to  this Annex, the 
values measured  on a device  from sample A  taken  first  from  the 
devices selected  at  random  diverge  from  the values  laid down by 
more  than 20% or  a maximum of  30% in an adverse  direction and 
the other  device  from sample A and  the  two sample  devices  from 
sample B meet  the requirements  set out  in  Item 5.2  above. 

Conformity  shall  be challenged  and  the manufacturer  shall  be 
requested  to bring  his production  into  line with  the 
requirements set out  in this chapter  if the  tests conducted  in 
accordance with  Item 6.2  above have  identified  unacceptable 
divergences. 

6. 

6.1 

6.2 

6.3 

6.3.1 

in the case of one sample A and one sample B device. 

-  C-7 

6.3.2 

6.3.3 

6.3.4 

6.4 

6.5 

or  in the  case  of  the  two sample  A or  sample  B  devices 

or  if the  values measured  on  either  one or  both  of  the  sample  A 
or  sample  B devices  diverge  in the  adverse  direction  by  at  the 
most  40% from  the  required  value. 

or  if the  values measured  on  a sample  A or  sample  B device  do 
not  diverge  by more  than  20%  in the adverse  direction,  but  those 
of  the second  device  in the  sample  diverge  in the  adverse 
direction  by more  than  40% of  the  required  value. 

Where  item 6.3  above  is applied  further  sampling  of  two  devices 
from  recent  production,  selected  at  random,  shall  take  place 
within  two months.  If the  results obtained  from  those  two 
devices  do not  meet  the  requirements  set  out  in  item  5.2  above. 
Article  10 of  Council  Directive 92/61/EEC  on  the  type  approval 
of  two or  three-wheel  motor  vehicles  shall  then  apply. 

Conformity  shall  be challenged  and  Article  10 of  the  Directive 
referred  to above  implemented  if, when  the  sampling  described  in 
figure  1  in the appendix  to  this Annex  takes  place,  the  results 
do not  meet  the  requirements  set  out  in  item 6.2  and  6.3  above. 

Random 
of two 

sample A 
devices 

A 
—>  [Ôj  \Ô\ 

•* 

j 

i 

3 E^H 
lo 

10. 

<0 

110 

-M 

TJD 

to 

| 
|~01 }>2q -> 

a 
E 
«a 
«0 

3 
0) 
O 

CO 
CO 
o 

CL 

\-ï 

h» 

-ùl 

APPENDIX 

First random sample 
of four devices 
separated  into two 
samples A and B 

Random sample B 
of two devices 

—

*> 

> 
Cont inue with 

END 

[  END 

<-

Manufacturer is 
called upon to 
correct production 

Further samp Iing 
within two months 

8 

sample  B 

3  (j[ 
<-§[o]< 

Toj  [To]  <-| 

<-

o 

-10.. 
•<Z£> 

Ho 

JZ£> 

20 

fe-

Hj@ 

~0 
O 
CO 
CO 

CO 
c 

10 
o 
-*. 
CO 
D> 
3 

Ô 

CD 

Second random sampling 
of two devices 

(XKJITÔI  ou  ol  lo 

End 

(Withdrawal of component 
type approval 

j*-IMS 

i«-  @ 

m Means that the device 

Achieves at  least (80 -  x)% of the minimum values 

Does not exceed  (120 -  x)% of the maximum values 

Fig. 1 

- 6i>  -

ANNEX  I I 

REQUIREMENTS  CONCERNING  THE  COMPONENT  TYPE  APPROVAL  OF 

FRONT  POSITION  (SIDE) LIGHTS. REAR  LIGHTS, STOP  LIGHTS, 

DIRECTION  INDICATOR  LIGHTS, REAR  NUMBER  PLATE  ILLUMINATING 

LIGHTS,  FRONT FOG  LIGHTS, REAR  FOG LIGHTS,  REVERSING 

LIGHTS AND  REFLEX  REFLECTORS  FITTED TO TWO OR 

THREE-WHEEL  MOTOR  VEHICLES 

1. 

Definitions 

2. 

2.1 

2.2 

The  relevant  definitions  set  out  in Annex  I to Council 
Directive  93/.../EEC  of 
on  the  fitting  of  lighting  and 
light  signalling  devices  to  two or  three-wheel  motor  vehicles 
shalI  apply. 

Information  that  is additional  to  the  component  type  approval 
mark  for  direction  indicators  shall: 

In the general  case of  a direction  indicator  a number  stating 
that  It  is a  front  direction  indicator  (category  11) or  a rear 
direction  indicator  (category  12) be  affixed  close  to  the 
rectangle  for  the  component  type  approval  mark  and opposite  the 
component  type  approval  number. 

In the  case of  a direction  indicator  which  does  not,  in 
accordance  with  item  4.7.1  on  one  side  achieve  the minimum  light 
intensity  required  up  to an  angle  of  H - 80' of  a  horizontal 
arrow,  the  tip  if which  is pointing  in the  direction  where  the 
minimum  light  intensity  in accordance  with  item  4.7.1  is 
achieved  up  to an angle of  at  least  H - 80', be  affixed  below 
the  rectangle  for  the component  type  approval  mark. 

General  requirements 

Devices  shall  be  designed  and  constructed  in such  a way  that, 
under  their  normal  conditions of  use  and  despite  any  vibrations 
to which  they may  be  submitted,  their  proper  functioning  remains 
unimpaired  and  they  retain  the  characteristics  required  by  this 
Annex. 

Intensity of  the  light  emitted 

Within  the  reference  axis  the  intensity  of  the  light  emitted  by 
each  of  the  two devices  shall  be  at  least  equal  to  the  two 
minimum  values  and  at most  equal  to  the maximum  values  set  out 
in the  table  below.  In no  direction  must  the maximum  values 
stated  be  exceeded. 

M-

-es-

4.1 

4.2 

4.3 

4.4 

4.4.1 

4.4.2 

Rear  position  (side)  lights 

Front  position  (side) lights 

Stop  Iights 

Direction  indicator  lights 

Front  (category  11) 
(see Appendix  1) 

Rear  (category  12) 
(see Appendix  1) 

min  (cd) 

max  (cd) 

4 

4 

40 

90 

50 

12 

60 

100 

700* 

200 

a 

4.9 

4.10 

5. 

5.1 

5.2 

The Appendix  2 referred  to  in  item 4.5  above provides details on 
the methods of measurement  to be used. 

The rear  registration-plate  illuminating device shall  meet  the 
conditions set out  in Appendix  3. 

Conditions attached  to the tests 

All of  the measurements shall  be carried out with a standard 
colourless  lamp falling within the category  intended  for  the 
device and adjusted  in order  to emit  the reference  light  flux 
required  for  the  lamp at  issue. 

The vertical  and horizontal  edges of  the  light emitting surface 
of  the device shall  be determined  and dimensioned  in relation to 
its reference centre. 

Front  and rear  fog  lights 

The requirements of Directive 76/762/EEC on  front  fog  lights and 
of Directive 77/538/EEC on rear  fog  lights shall  apply. 

7. 

Reversing  lights 

The requirements of Directive 77/539/EEC on  reversing  lights 
shalI  apply. 

8. 

8.1 

8.1.1 

8.1.2 

Reflectors 

Pedal  reflectors 

The shape of  the reflex  reflectors shall  be such  that  these are 
able to fit  into a rectangle  the side dimensions of which are  in 
a  ratio of not more  than 8. 

The functioning  reflecting surface of each of  the four pedal 
reflex  reflectors shall  not be  less than 8  cm2. 

8.2 

Other  reflex  reflectors 

The requirements set out  In Directive 76/757/EEC on reflex 
reflectors apply. 

-6? -

APPENDIX 1 

MINIMUM HORIZONTAL (H) AND VERTICAL (V) 
ANGLES OF SPATIAL LIGHT DISTRIBUTION 

1.  Front position light 

reference axis 

V - + 15V-10* 

H = 80 

2.  Rear position lights 

V - + 15V-10' 

vehicle 

H = 80° 

reference axis 

3.  Front and rear direction  indicator  lights 

V - ±15* 

For two-wheel vehicles 

H = 80° 

1  L-» 

\,£&&K£$%1 

H = 8o' 

vehicle 

H « 80v 

".v.v.v.'.v.v 

reference 
axes 

H = 80° 

H= 20° 

For three-wheel  vehicles 

reference 
axes 

4.  Stop  Iights 

V  -  +  15V-10* 

pwyv&WFZS-- 

v e h , c ,e 

-68-

APPENDIX  2 

PHOTOMETRIC  MEASUREMENTS 

1. 

1.1 

1.2 

1.2.1 

1.2.2 

1.2.3 

Methods of  measurement 

Interference  reflections  during  the  photometric  measurements 
shall  be  avoided  by  means  of  appropriate  masking. 

If  the  results  of  the measurements  are  challenged  these  shall  be 
carried  out  in such  a way  that: 

the measuring  distance  is such  that  the  inverse  square  law of 
the  distance  applies; 

the measuring  apparatus  is such  that  the  angular  aperture  of  the 
receiver  viewed  from  the  centre  of  reference  of  the  lamp  lies 
between  ten minutes  of  an  angle  and  one  degree.; 

the  intensity  requirement  for  a given  direction of  observation 
is satisfactory  provided  that  requirement  is met  in a  direction 
not  diverging  by more  than  a quarter  of  a degree  from  the 
direction  of  observation. 

2. 

Standardized  table  showing  spatial  distribution of  light 

10 

-20-

-20 

10 

20 

•70 

-20 

00  * 

35 — 90 - 1 00 —  90 

35 

10-

20 

20-

20-

10  * 

10 

20 

-20 

20° 

10° 

5« 

10' 

20* 

H 

2.1 

Direction  H - 0*  and  V  - 0*  corresponds  to  the  axis of  reference 
(on  the  vehicle  it  is horizontal  and  parallel  to  the  median 
longitudinal  plane  of  the  vehicle  and  pointing  towards  the 
required  field  of  view).  It passes  through  the  centre  of 
reference.  The  values  set  out  in the  table  give  the  minimum 
intensities  for  the  various  directions of  measurement  as a 
percentage  of  the minimum  required  for  each  lamp within  the  axis 
(in  direction  H - 0*  and  V -  0 ' ). 

-ù<k 

-

2.2 

Within  the  field  of  light  distribution  represented  in 
diagrammatic  form  in  Item  2 by  a  grid  the  distribution  of  the. 
light  must  essentially  be  uniform  in  such  a way  that  the  light 
intensity  in each  direction  of  a  part  of  the  field  formed  by  the 
lines of  the  grid  reaches  at  least  the  lowest  minimum  value 
specified  as  a  percentage  (or  the  lowest  available  value) on  the 
lines of  the  grid  which  surround  the  direction  at  issue. 

- le 

APPENDIX  3 

PHOTOMETRIC MEASUREMENTS OF  THE REAR  REGISTRATION-PLATE 
ILLUMINATING  DEVICE 

Position  to be  illuminated 

Devices may  fall  within  category  1 or  2.  The  category-1  devices 
shall  be designed  in such way  as  to  illuminate  a  position 
measuring  at  least  130 x 140 mm  and  the category-2  devices  in 
such  a way  as  to  illuminate a position measuring  at  least 
200 x 200  mm. 

Light  incidence 

The manufacturer  of  the  illuminating  device  shall  lay down  the 
conditions  for  the  fitting of  said  device  in relation  to the 
position  intended  for  the  registration  plate.  That  device  shall 
occupy  a position  such  that  at  none of  the points on  the  surface 
to be  illuminated  will  the angle of  incidence of  the  light  on 
the  surface of  the plate  exceed  82', that  angle  being  measured 
in relation  to  the extremity  of  the  light  emitting  surface of 
the device  that  is furthest  from  the  surface of  the plate. 
Where  there  is more  than one optical  component  this  requirement 
shall  only  apply  to  the part  of  the plate  intended  to be 
illuminated  by  the  relevant  component. 

The  device  shall  be designed  in such  a manner  that  no  ray of 
light  shines  directly  towards  the  rear  with  the exception of 
rays of  red  light  where  the device  is combined  or  grouped with  a 
rear  Iight. 

Method of  measurement 

The  levels of  luminance  shall  be measured  on  a sheet  of  clean 
white  blotting  paper  having  a minimum  factor  of  diffuse 
reflection of  70% and  the  same  dimensions  as  the  registration 
plate  and  placed  at  the position  it would  normally  occupy  but 
2 mm  in front  of  its support. 

The  level  of  luminance  shall  be measured  at  right  angles  to  the 
surface of  the paper  at  the points shown  in the diagram  in 
Item 4 below, each  point  representing  a circular  area  25 mm  in 
diameter. 

- 7 Î-

4. 

Photometric  characteristics 

Luminance  B must  be at  least  2 cd/m2  at  each of  the measuring 
points defined  below. 

240 

130 

i 

25*  65  !  6o  *  65  '25 

25 

40 

40 

25 

25 

75 

75 

25 

280 

1200 

1 

251  80 

i 
1 
1  70  I  80 

i 
I 25 

Fig. 1 

Measuring  point 
for  category 1 

Fig. 2 

Measuring  points 
for  category  2 

The  luminance gradient  between  values B1  and B2, measured  at  any 
two points  1 and  2 selected  from  among  the points referred  to 
above  shall  not  exceed  2 x B0/cm, B0  being  the minimum 
luminance  recorded  at  the  various measuring  points, or  in other 
words 

B2 - B1 

distance  1  -  2  in cm 

<  2 x Bft/cm 

-72-

APPENDIX  4 

INFORMATION  DOCUMENT  IN RESPECT OF  A TYPE OF 

-  FRONT POSITION  (SIDE) LIGHT 

-  REAR  POSITION  (SIDE) LIGHT 

-STOP  LIGHT 

-  DIRECTION  INDICATOR  LIGHT 

- REAR  REGISTRATION PLATE  ILLUMINATING  DEVICE 

- FRONT FOG LIGHT 

-  REAR  FOG LIGHT 

- REVERSING LIGHT 
-  REFLEX  REFLECTOR1 

INTENDED FOR  TWO OR THREE-WHEEL  MOTOR  VEHICLES 

(to be attached  to the application  for  component  type  approval 
where  this  is submitted  separately  from  the  application 
for  vehicle  type  approval) 

Order  No  (assigned  by  the  applicant) 

The  application  for  component  type approval  in respect  of  a  type of  front 
position  (side)  light, a rear  position  (side)  light, a stop  light, a  direction 
indicator  light, a  rear  registration  plate  illuminating  device, a  front  fog 
light, a rear  fog  light, a reversing  light, a  reflex  reflector1  intended  for 
two or  three-wheel  motor  vehicles  shall  contain  the  following  information: 

1. Mark or  trade name 

2. Manufacturer's name and  address 

3.  If applicable, name  and  address of manufacturer's  representative 

4. Type  and  characteristics of  the  device 

5. Number  and  category  of  the  lights fitted  to the  device 

submitted  for  component  type  approval 

6.  Drawing  No... enclosed  illustrating  the geometrical  conditions  applying  to 

the  fitting on  the vehicle of  the device  submitted  for  component  type 

approval.  Moreover,  the axis of  reference  and  the  location of  the  contours 

of  the  light-emitting  surface of  the device  submitted  for  component  type 

approval  must  be  identified. 

1  Delete  as  appropriate. 

~n-

APPENDIX  5 

Name of  the Administration 

CERTIFICATE OF COMPONENT APPROVAL  IN RESPECT OF 

-  FRONT POSITION  (SIDE) LIGHT 
- REAR POSITION  (SIDE) LIGHT 
-STOP LIGHT 
- DIRECTION  INDICATOR  LIGHT 
-  REAR  REGISTRATION PLATE  ILLUMINATING DEVICE 
-  FRONT FOG LIGHT 
-  REAR  FOG LIGHT 
- REVERSING LIGHT 
- REFLEX  REFLECTOR1 

INTENDED FOR TWO OR THREE-WHEEL MOTOR  VEHICLES 

MODEL 

Report  No 

by  testing body 

date 

Component  type approvaI  No 

Ex tens ion No 

1. Make of  dev i ce : 

2. Type of  dev i ce : 

3. Manufacturer's name and address : 

4.  If applicable, name and address of manufacturers' representative 

5. Vehicle submitted  for  testing on 
6. Component  type approval  granted/refused1 

7. Place:  .... 

8. Date: 

9. Signature: 

1  Delete  as appropriate. 

-le 

APPENDIX  3 

PHOTOMETRIC MEASUREMENTS  OF  THE REAR  REGISTRATION-PLATE 
ILLUMINATING  DEVICE 

Position  to be  illuminated 

Devices may  fall  within  category  1 or  2.  The  category-1  devices 
shall  be designed  in such  way  as  to  illuminate  a  position 
measuring  at  least  130 x 140 mm  and  the category-2  devices  in 
such  a way  as  to  illuminate a position measuring  at  least 
200  x 200  mm. 

Light  incidence 

The manufacturer  of  the  illuminating  device  shall  lay down  the 
conditions  for  the  fitting  of  said  device  in relation  to  the 
position  intended  for  the  registration  plate.  That  device  shall 
occupy  a position such  that  at  none of  the points on  the  surface 
to be  illuminated will  the angle of  incidence of  the  light  on 
the surface of  the plate  exceed  82', that  angle  being  measured 
in relation  to the extremity  of  the  light  emitting  surface of 
the device  that  is furthest  from  the surface of  the  plate. 
Where  there  is more  than one optical  component  this  requirement 
shall  only  apply  to  the  part  of  the  plate  intended  to be 
illuminated  by  the  relevant  component. 

The  device  shall  be designed  in such  a manner  that  no  ray of 
light  shines  directly  towards  the  rear  with  the exception  of 
rays of  red  light  where  the device  is combined  or  grouped  with  a 
rear  light. 

Method  of  measurement 

The  levels of  luminance  shall  be measured  on  a sheet  of  clean 
white  blotting  paper  having  a minimum  factor  of  diffuse 
reflection of  70% and  the same  dimensions  as  the  registration 
plate  and  placed  at  the position  it would  normally  occupy  but 
2 mm  in front  of  its  support. 

The  level  of  luminance  shall  be measured  at  right  angles  to  the 
surface of  the paper  at  the points  shown  in the diagram  in 
Item 4 below,  each  point  representing  a circular  area  25 mm  in 
diameter. 

- rC-

ANNEX  I M -A 

HEADLIGHTS FOR  MOPEDS 

1. 

1-1 

1.2 

2. 

2.1 

2.2 

2.3 

2.4 

2.5 

General  requirements 

Headlights shall  be designed  and manufactured  in such  a way 
that, under  normal  conditions of use and  despite  any  vibrations 
to which  they may  be exposed,  they continue  to function 
correctly  and  retain  the characteristics  laid down  in this 
annex. 

The parts  intended  to attach  the  lamp shall  be designed  in such 
a way  that, even  in the dark, the  lamp may  be correctly  fitted 
in  its appropriate position. 

Specific  requirements 

The correct  position of  the  lens  in relation  to the optical 
system  shall  be clearly marked  and be  locked  in position  in 
order  to prevent  rotation during use. 

A measuring screen as described  in appendix  2 or  3 and a 
standard  lamp using  a smooth  colourless  bulb  falling within one 
of  the categories provided  for  in  Item 2.1  and  in Annex  III 
shall  be used  in order  to check  the  illumination provided  by  the 
head Iight. 

The standard  lamps shall  be adjusted  to the  relevant  reference 
light  flux  in accordance with  the values  laid down  for  those 
lamps  in the relevant  technical  document  (see Annex IV). 

The dipped  beam shall  produce  a cut-off  of  such  sharpness  that 
correct  adjustment  by means  thereof  is a practical  possibility. 
The cut-off  shall  be perceptibly  horizontal  and  as straight  as 
possible over  a horizontal  length of  at  least ±  100 mm, measured 
at a distance of  10 m  (in the case of  a halogen  lamp):  length of 
at  least ± 2250 mm measured  at  a distance of  25 m; see 
Appendix  3 ).  When adjusted  in accordance with Appendix 1 
headlights shall meet  the conditions  set out  therein. 

The  light distribution  shall  not  vary  in  lateral  terms  in a way 
that  impairs good  visibility. 

The  illumination on  the screen  referred  to  in  Item 2.2 shall  be 
measured  by means of  a photo  receiver  for  a usable  area  lying 
within  a 65 mm square. 

- 96 

3. 

Additional requirements attached to any  inspections which may be 
carried out by the competent  authorities when checking 
conformity of production 

Any records of the photometric characteristics of headlights 
taken in accordance with the general  requirements concerning 
conformity testing shall be restricted to points LH - RH-L - V 
300 - R 300 - R 600 - L 600 (see figure in Appendix 2). 

-Il-

APPENDIX 1 

PHOTOMETRIC TESTS ON CATEGORY  S3 AND S4 LIGHTS 

For  the measurements  the measuring  screen  shall  be placed  at a 
distance of  10 m  in front of  the headlight  and  at  right  angles 
to the  line  joining  the main  beam  filament of  the  lamp and  point 
HV  (see figure  below);  line H-H  shall  be  horizontal. 

Requirements attached  to dipped  beam 

In  lateral  terms  the headlight  shall  be aligned  in such  a way 
that  its beam  is as symmetrical  as possible  in relation  to 
Iine V-V. 

In vertical  terms  the headlight  shall  be adjusted  in such a 
manner  that  its cut-off  shall  be  100 mm  below  line H-H. 

When  the headlight  has been adjusted  in accordance  with 
Items 2.1  and  2.2  above  the  illumination values  shall  be as 
fol lows: 

On  line H-H  and above:  2  lux at  the most; 

On  a  line situated  300 mm  below  line H-H  and over  a width of 
900 mm either  side of  vertical  line V-V:  8  lux at  least; 

On a  line 600 mm  below  line H-H  and over  a width  900 mm  either 
side of  the vertical  line V-V:  at  least  4  lux. 

Requirements  concerning  the main beam  (if  any) 

When  it has been adjusted  in accordance with  Items 2.1  and  2.2 
above  the headlights  shall  meet  the  following  requirements  in 
respect  of  the main  beam: 

The point of  intersection  (HV) of  lines H-H  and V-V  shall  lie 
within  the  isolux  denoting  80% of maximum  illumination. 

Maximum  illumination  ( Em a x) of  the main  beam  shall  not  be  less 
than 50  lux. 

Starting  from point  HV  the  illumination by  the main  beam  to the 
right  and  left  shall  be at  least Em a x/4 up  to a distance of 
0.90  m. 

1. 

2. 

2.1 

2.2 

2.3 

2.3.1 

2.3.2 

2.3.3 

3. 

3.1 

3.1.1 

3.1.2 

3.1.3 

- T O-

MEASURING SCREEN 

Figure 

v 

KV 

5. 

Cut-off  line 

W 

[ L* 

RH  J_H 

L.  300 

8 

L  6O0 

V  3O0 

ft  300 

5oo 

5 00 

ft  600 

>/ 

(dimensions  in  mm over  a  distance  of  10  m) 

-  1A _ 

APPENDIX  2 

1. 

2. 

3. 

4. 

PHOTOMETRIC TESTS ON CATEGORY  H S2  HALOGEN  LAMPS 

For  the measurements  the measuring  screen  shall  be  placed  25 m 
In front  of  the headlight  in such  a way  that  this  is at  right 
angles  to  the  line  joining  the  filament  of  the  lamp  and  point  HV 
(see  figure  below);  line H-H  shall  be  horizontal. 

In  lateral  terms  the  headlight  shall  be  aligned  in such  a way 
that  the distribution  of  the  beam  shall  be  symmetrical  in 
re I at ion to  M ne  V-V. 

In vertical  terms  the headlight  shall  be  adjusted  in such  a way 
that  its cut  off  shall  be  250 mm  below  line H-H.  It shall  also 
be as  horizontal  as possible. 

When  the- headlight  has been  adjusted  in accordance  with  Items 2 
and  3 above  the  following  conditions shall  be  met: 

Measuring  point 

Illumination E/lux 

Each  point on  and  above 
Ii ne  H-H 

Each  point  on  M ne  35L-35R 
with  the exception  of  35V 

Point  35V 

Each  point  on  line 25L-25R 

<. 0.7 

>. 1 

>  2 

>. 2 

Each  point on  line 15L-15R 

>. 0.5 

MEASURING  SCREEN 

Figure 

5. Measuring  screen 

(dimensions  in mm over  a distance of  25 m) 

(5) 

- B J-

APPENDIX  3 

INFORMATION  DOCUMENT  IN RESPECT OF A 

TYPE OF HEADLIGHT  INTENDED FOR  MOPEDS 

(to be attached  to the application  for  component  type approval 

where  this  is submitted  separately  from  the  application 

for vehicle  type approval) 

Order  No assigned  by  the applicant 

The application  for  component  type approval  in respect of  a type of  headlight 

for mopeds shall  contain  the following  information: 

1. 

Make or  trade name: 

2. 

Manufacturer's  name and address: 

3. 

Name and address of manufacturer's  representative  (if any): .. 

4. 

Type and characteristics of  headlight  submitted  for  component  type 

approval : 

-Sz. -

APPENDIX 4 

Name of the Administration 

CERTIFICATE OF COMPONENT TYPE APPROVAL  IN RESPECT OF 

A TYPE OF HEADLIGHT INTENDED FOR MOPEDS 

MODEL 

Report No 

by testing body 

Date 

Component type approval No 

Extension No 

1. 

2. 

3. 

4. 

5. 

6. 

7. 

8. 

9. 

Make of head Iight: 

Type of headlight: 

Manufacturer's name and address:  .... 

Name and address of manufacturer's representative (if any) 

Headlight submitted for testing on: .. 
Component  type approval granted/refused:1  .... 

PI ace : 

Date: 

Signature: 

1  Delete as appropriate. 

1. 

1.1 

1.2 

2. 

2.1 

2.2 

2.2.1 

-3z 

ANNEX  Ml-B 

HEADLIGHTS FOR MOTORCYCLES AND TRICYCLES 
EMITTING A SYMMETRICAL  DIPPED BEAM AND A MAIN  BEAM 
BY MEANS OF  INCANDESCENT  LAMPS 

Additional  requirements concerning marks and  the marking of 
specific devices 

Headlights shall  bear  in a clearly  legible and  indelible manner 
the  letters  "MB" (symbol  for main beam  headlamp) opposite  the 
component  type approval  number. 

All  headlights designed  in such a way  as to preclude any 
simultaneous  lighting-up of  the dipped  beam  filament  and  that of 
any other  light source with which  they may  be  integrated may  be 
marked with  an oblique  (/)  following the symbol  (DB) for  the 
dipped  beam*  in the component  type approval  mark. 

General  requirements 

Each of  the samples shall  meet  the specifications set out  in 
Item 3 below. 

Headlights shall  be designed  and manufactured  in such a way 
that, under  normal  conditions of use and despite any  vibrations 
to which  they may  be exposed, they continue  to function properly 
and  retain  the required  characteristics. 

Headlights shall  be fitted with a device enabling  them  to be 
adjusted on  the vehicle  in accordance with  the rules applying  to 
them.  A device of  this type may be dispensed with  where 
headlight  units consist of a reflector  and  lens which  cannot  be 
separated where  the use of units of  this type  is restricted  to 
vehicles on which  the headlights are adjusted  by other means. 

If headlights specifically designed  for main beam operation and 
headlights specifically designed  for dipped  beam operation, each 
of which  has an  individual  lamp and are grouped  together  or 
reciprocally  incorporated  in a single device, the setting  device 
shall  enable each of  the optical  systems  to be adjusted 
individually  in order  to achieve  the official  settings. 

2.2.2 

2.3 

2.4 

3. 

3.1 

3.2 

3.3 

3.4 

3.5 

- 

^ 

However, these  requirements shall  not  apply  to headlights with 
non-separable  reflectors.  The  requirements  set out  in  Item  3.3 
below shall  apply  to this type of  headlight.  Where  the main 
beam arises  from more  than one  light source  the maximum 
illumination value  (Em a x) shall  be determined  by using  all of 
the functions producing  the main  beam. 

The parts  intended  to attach  the  incandescent  lamp shall  be 
designed  in such a way  that, even  in the dark, the  lamp may  be 
correctly  fitted  in  its appropriate position. 

Additional  tests meeting  the requirements of Appendix  2 must  be 
carried out  in order  to ensure  that  there are no excessive 
variations  in photometric during use. 

Specific  requirements 

The correct  position  for  the  lens  in relation  to the optical 
system  shall  be clearly marked  and  be  locked  in position  in 
order  to prevent  rotation during use. 

In order  to check  the  illumination produced  by  the headlight  a 
measuring screen as described  in Appendix  1 shall  be used, 
together  with  a standard  lamp  (S1 and/or  S2, see Annex  IV) 
having  a smooth colourless bulb. 

Standard  lamps shall  be adjusted  to the  relevant  reference  light 
flux  applying  in accordance with  the values  required  for  such 
lamps. 

The dipped  beam shall  produce a cut-off of such  sharpness  that 
correct  adjustment  by means  thereof  is a practical  possibility. 
The cut-off  shall  be as straight  and as horizontal  as possible 
over  a horizontal  length of at  least ±5'.  When adjusted  in 
accordance with Appendix  1 headlights shall  meet  the  conditions 
set out  therein. 

The  light distribution  shall  not  vary  in  lateral  terms  in a way 
that  impairs good visibility. 

The  illumination on  the screen  referred  to  in  Item 3.2 shall  be 
measured  by means of a functionning-surface photocell  lying 
within a 65 mm square. 

-  '6-Ç -

4. 

4.1 

4.2 

4.2.1 

Additional  requirements  applying  to any  inspections carried  out 
by  the competent  authorities when  checking  conformity of 
production 

The  conformity  of  series-production  headlights  in respect  of 
photometric  performance  shall  not  be  challenged: 

if none of  the values measured  differs  in the adverse  direction 
by more  than  20% from  the  value  required  (for  zone  III  the 
maximum  divergence  in the  adverse  direction may  be  0.3  lux), 

or  If, 

for  the dipped  beam  the  values  required  are met  with  a  tolerance 
of  0.2  lux on  line hh and  with  a tolerance of  0.1  lux  at at 
least one  point  within  the  area  bounded  on  the measuring  screen 
(at  25 m) by  a  15 cm-diameter  circle  around  points  50L,  50V, 
50R,  25L, 25V,  25R  and  through  zone  IV restricted  to 37.5 cm 
above  line 25R  and  20L,<1> 

4.2.2 

and,  for  the main  beam,  HV  lying within  iso lux 9.75  Em a x,  a 
tolerance of  20%  is not  exceeded  for  the  photometric  values. 

(1) 

The  sole  aim of  checking  the  M luminat ion  rat ios £P_L and £P_R 
50V 

50V 

provided  for  in  Item  5  in Appendix  1  is to  Judge  the  characteristics 
sought  for  the  type of  headlight  and  are not  to be checked  during  the 
conformity  of  production  check. 

-86-

APPENDIX  1 

PHOTOMETRIC  TESTS 

1. 

2. 

3. 

4. 

4.1 

4.2 

4.3 

4.4 

4.4.1 

4.4.2 

For  adjustment  purposes  the  relevant  screen  must  be  placed  at 
least  10 m  before  the  headlight,  line  h-h  being  horizontal.  For 
the measurements  the  photocell  shall  be  25 m  in  front  of  the 
headlight  and  at  right  angles  to  the  line  joining  the 
incadescent  lamp  filament  and  point  HV. 

In  lateral  terms  the  headlight  shall  be  aligned  in such  a  way 
that  the  distribution  of  the main  beam  is symmetrical  in 
re I at ion  to  M ne  v-v. 

In vertical  terms  the  headlamp  shall  be  adjusted  in such  way 
that  the  dipped  beam  cut  off  is 250 mm  below  line  h-h. 

When  the  headlight  has  been  adjusted  in accordance  with  Items  2 
and  3 above,  conditions  for  which  are  similar  to  those  relating 
to main  beams,  the  following  conditions  shall  be  met: 

the  lighting  centre  of  the main  beam  shall  not  be  more  than  0.6' 
above  or  below  line  h-h; 

the  illumination  provided  by  the main  beam  shall  reach  its 
maximum  value  ( Em a x)  at  the  centre  of  the  entire  light 
distribution  and  shall  diminish  laterally; 

the  maximum  illumination  ( Em a x) of  the  main  beam  shall  be  at 
least  32  lux; 

the  illumination  produced  by  the main  beam  shall  correspond  to 
the  following  values: 

the  point  of  intersection  between  lines  h-h  and  v-v  HV  shall  lie 
within  the  isolux  for  90% of  maximum  illumination; 

starting  from  HV  horizontally  to  the  right  and  left  the 
M I urnination provided  by  the main  beam  shall  be  at  least  12  lux 
up  to  a distance  of  1.25  m  and  not  less  than  3  lux  up  to a 
distance  of  2.25  m. 

- 8 * r-

4.5 

The  illumination provided by the dipped  beam  shall  correspond to 
the following values: 

Each point on and above  line 
hh 

<. 0,7 lux 

Each point on the line 

50L-50R with the excep. of 50V* 

> 1,5 lux 

Point 50V 

>. 3,0 lux 

Each point on the line 

25L-25R 
All  points within  zone  IV 

> 3,0 lux 
>. 1,5 lux 

5. MEASURING AND ADJUSTING  SCREEN 
(dimensions  in mm for a distance of 25 m) 

Zone  HI 

2250 

2750 

* 

Intensity SUE. - 0,25 min. 

50V 

-  fcfc  -

APPENDIX  2 

STABILITY TEST ON THE PHOTOMETRIC BEHAVIOUR  OF 
HEADLIGHTS  IN OPERATION 

Compliance with  the requirements of  this appendix  is not  an 
adequate criterion  for  the component-type approval  of  headlights 
incorporâting plastic  lenses. 

Tests on complete  headlights 

Once  the photometric measurements  have been carried out  as 
required  by  this annex  at points  Em ax  for  the main beam and 
HV, 50R, 50L, B 50 for  the dipped  beam  an example of  the 
complete headlight  shall  be subjected  to a test on  the  stability 
of  its photometric  behaviour  during operation.  "Complete 
headlight" means all of  the headlight  itself  including  the parts 
of  the bodywork  and surrounding  areas which may  affect  its heat 
dissipât ion. 

1. 

1.1 

Test on  the stability of photometric  behaviour 

The headlight  itself 

The headlight  shall  remain  lit for  twelve hours as stated  in 
Item  1.1.1  and be  inspected  as required  by  Item  1.1.2 

1.1,1 

Tests 

The headlamp  shall  remain  lit for as  long as  required. 

1.1.1.1 

a) where a single  light  source  (main or  dipped  beam)  is to be 
component-type  approved  the corresponding  filament  shall  be 
lit for  as  long as  required;* 

b) where a dipped  and a main beam are reciprocally  incorporated 

(double  lamp and  filament or  two-filament  lamp) 

if the requester  states  that  the headlight  is  intended 
to be used with  just one  filament  lit** the test 
shall  be carried out  accordingly  and each of  the 
specified  light sources shall  be  lit* during half 
the time referred  to  in 1.1; 

*  When  the headlight  submitted  for  testing  is grouped  together  or 

reciprocally  incorporated with position  lights the  latter  shall  be  lit 
throughout  the tests. 

**  If at  least  two filaments  light up simultaneously when  the headlamp  is used 

as a visible warning  device  that use shall  not be considered  to be a 
simultaneous  normal  use of  the two  filaments. 

- *1 

-  in all other  cases the headlight  shall  be submitted  to the 
following  cycle  for a period equal  to the  length of  time 
required: 

15 minutes, dipped-beam  filament lit; 
5 minutes, all  filaments lit. 

(c) 

All  individual  sources  that are grouped  together  shall 
be  lit simultaneously  for the time required for 
individual  light sources  (a) account  also being  taken 
of  the use of the reciprocally  incorporated  light 
sources and (b) in accordance with  the manufacturer's 
instructions. 

1.1.1.2 

Test  voltage 

The voltage shall  be regulated  such as to provide 90% of the 
maximum power  specified  in this annex  for  incandescent  lamps 
falling with category S, Annex  IV.  The power  applied  shall  in 
all  cases correspond  to the relevant  value  for an  incandescent 
lamp under  a nominal  12 V except where  the applicant for 
component  type-approval  specifies that  the headlamp may be used 
at a different  voltage. 

1.1.2 

Test  results 

1.1.2.1 

Visual  inspection 

Once  the headlamp  temperature has stabilized at the ambient 
temperature  the headlamp shall  be cleaned  and the outer  lens, if 
any, shall  be cleaned with a clean, damp, cotton rag.  These 
shall  then be examined  visually  and there shall  be no 
identifiable  distortion, deformation, cracking or change of 
colour  in the headlamp  lens nor any outer  lens. 

1.1.2.2 

Photometric  test 

As required  by this annex  the photometric values shall be 
checked at the following points: 

D i pped-beam head Ii ght: 

50 R, 50 L, B 50 HV 

Main beam headlamp:; 

Po»nt  Em ax 

There may be a resetting  in order  to take account of any 
deformation of the headlight  support  caused by heat  (for the 
adjustment of the cut-off  line see  Item 2 ). 

A  tolerance of 10% is permissible,  including  the tolerances due 
to the photometric measurement  procedure, between the 
photometric  characteristics and the values measured  before the 
test. 

-  Ci ÎC  -

1.2 

Dirty headlights 

Once  it has been tested as required  in  Item 1.1 above the 
headlight  shall  be prepared as described  in  Item 1.2.1  and then 
lit for an hour as provided  for  in Item 1.1.2  and then checked 
as required by  item 1.1.2. 

1.2.1 

Preparation of the headlight 

1.2.1.1 

Test mixture 

The mixture of water and pollutant  to apply  to the headlight 
shall  consists of nine parts (by weight) of silica sand having a 
grain size of between 0 and  100 fzm, one part  (by weight) of 
vegetable carbon dust having a grain size of between 0 and 
100 Aim, 0.2 parts (by weight) of NaCMC and an appropriate amount 
of distilled water  having a conductivity of  less than 1 mS/m. 

The mixture shall  not be more than 14 days old. 

1.2.1.2 

Application of  the test mixture to the headlight 

The test mixture shall  be applied uniformly  to the entire 
light-emitting surface of  the headlight and then allowed  to dry. 
This operation should be repeated until  the  illumination has 
fallen to a value of between 50 and 20% of  the values measured 
at each of  the following points under  the conditions described 
in this annex. 

M a in for a dipped/main beam  light 
Emax 
Em ax 
Main  for  just a main beam headlight 
B 50 and 50 V for  just a dipped-beam headlight. 
Measuring apparatus 

1.2.1.3 

The measuring apparatus shall  be equivalent  to that used  to test 
headlights for component-type approval.  A standard  (reference) 
incandescent  lamp shall  be used  for  the photometric  inspection. 

2. 

Checking of  the vertical  displacement of  the cut-off  line under 
the effect of heat 

It shall  be checked whether  the vertical  displacement of  the 
cut-off  line of a  lit dipped-beam headlight caused by heat  does 
not exceed a prescribed value. 

- < ? /. 

After  undergoing  the tests described  in  Item  1.1  the headlight 
shall  be submitted  to the test  described  in  Item 2.1  without 
being  removed  from  its support  or  reset  in relation  to. this. 

2.1 

Test 

2.2 

2.2.1 

2.2.2 

The  test  shall  be conducted  in a dry  calm  atmosphere  at an 
ambient  temperature of  23*C + 5*C. 

A series-production  incandescent  lamp that  has been aged  for at 
least one hour  shall  be  lit  in the dipped  position without  being 
removed  from  its support  nor  readjusted  in relation  to this. 
(For  the purposes of  this test  the voltage  shall  be set as 
required  by  Item  1.1.2).  The position of  the cut-off  line in 
its horizontal  position  (between  the vertical  lines passing 
through  50 L and 50 R) shall  be checked  three minutes  (r3) and 
60 minutes  (r60) respectively  after  light-up. 

Measurement  of  the displacement  of  the cut-off  line described 
above shall  be via any method  giving  sufficient  accuracy  and 
reproducible  results. 

Result  of  test 

The  result  expressed  in mi I M radians  (mrad) shall  only be 
considered  acceptable  for  a dipped-beam  headlight  when  the 
absolute  value  [\  rl - r3 » r60 recorded  on  the headlamp  does 
not exceed  1.0 mrad  ( A  r I <. 1.0 mrad). 

However,  if this value exceeds  1.0 mrad  but  does not  exceed 
1.5 mrad  (1.0 mrad  <  L\  r\  < 1.5 mrad) a second  headlight shalI 
be tested  as provided  for  in  Item 2.1  below  after  being 
submitted  three  times  in a row to the cycle described below  in 
order  to stabilize the position of  the mechanical  parts of  the 
headlight on a support  that  is représentâtive of  its proper 
fitting  to the vehicle. 

Dipped-beam  headlight  lit  for an hour  (at  the supply  voltage set 
as provided  for  in  Item  1.1.1.2). 

Dipped-beam  headlight  switched  off  for  an hour. 

The type of  headlight  shall  be considered  acceptable  if the 
average of  the absolute value  A.  rl measured  on  the first 
sample and  A  rll measured  on  the second  sample  does not  exceed 
1.0 mrad. 

(  Û  rl - A r il  < i.o mrad) 

2 

-  0\  \ 77 

APPENDIX  3 

INFORMATION  DOCUMENT 

IN RESPECT OF A TYPE OF  HEADLIGHT 

FITTED WITH  INCANDESCENT LAMPS AND  EMITTING 

AN ASYMMETRICAL  DIPPED-BEAM  AND 

A MAIN BEAM AND  INTENDED TO BE FITTED TO 

MOTORCYCLES AND TRICYCLES 

(To be attached  to the application  for  component  type approval  if this  is 

submitted  separately  from  the application  for  vehicle  type  approval). 

Order  No  (signed  by  the applicant) 

The application  for  component  type approval  in respect  of  a type of  headlight 

for motorcycles and  tricycles shall  contain  the  following  information: 

1. Make or  trade name: 

2. Manufacturer's name and address: 

3. Name and address of manufacturer's  representative  (if any): 

4. Type and  characteristics of  the headlight  submitted  for  component  type 

approval: 

- 5 - 5-

APPENDIX 4 

Name of the Administration 

CERTIFICATE OF COMPONENT TYPE APPROVAL 

IN RESPECT OF A TYPE OF HEADLIGHT 

FITTED WITH  INCANDESCENT LAMPS, EMITTING AN ASYMMETRICAL DIPPED BEAM 

AND A MAIN BEAM AND  INTENDED FOR MOTORCYCLES AND TRICYCLES 

MODEL 

Report No 

by test i ng body 

date 

Component type approval No 

Extension No 

1. Make or trade name of vehicle: .. 

2. Type of headlight: 

3. Manufacturer's name and address: 

4. Name and address of manufacturer's representative (if any) 

5. Headlight submitted for testing on:  .... 

6. Component type approval granted/refused* 

7. Place: 

8. Date: 

9. Signature: .... 

*  Delete as appropriate. 

-  Q m 

ANNEX  M l -C 

HEADLIGHTS  FOR MOTORCYCLES  AND  TRICYCLES 
EMITTING  AN ASYMMETRICAL  DIPPED BEAM,  A MAIN  BEAM 
AND  FITTED WITH  HALOGEN  LAMPS  (HS1  LAMPS) 

ADDITIONAL  REQUIREMENTS  CONCERNING  MARKS  AND  THE MARKING  OF 
DEVICES 

Headlights  designed  in such  a way  as  to meet  the  requirement  of 
a  single  rule of  the  road  (driving  on  either  the  right  or  the 
left) shall, on  the  lens, bear  the  limits of  the  area  which  may 
possibly  be masked  in order  to avoid  distracting  road  users  in a 
country  where  the  rule of  the  road  is not  that  for  which  the 
headlight  has been  designed.  However,  when  that  area  is 
directly  identifiable  by  design  any  such  delimitation  is not 
necessary. 

Headlights designed  in such  a way  as  to meet  the  requirements  of 
driving  on  the  right  and  those  for  driving  on  the  left  shall 
bear  markings  in order  to  locate  the  two positions  for  the 
fixing  in position of  the  light  unit  on  the  vehicle  or  the  lamp 
on  the  reflector;  these markings  shall  consist  of  the  letters 
"R/D"  the position  corresponding  to driving  on  the  right  and  the 
letters  "L/G"  for  the position  corresponding  to driving  on  the 
left. 

All  head Iights designed  in such  a way  as  to preclude  any 
simultaneous  lighting-up of  the  dipped-beam  filament  and  that  of 
any  other  light  source  with  which  they  may  be  associated  shall 
be marked  with  an oblique  (/)  within  the  component  type  approval 
mark,  after  the dipped-headlight  symbol. 

Where  headlights only  meet  the  requirements  of  driving  on  the 
left  a horizontal  arrow  pointing  to  the  right  of  an  observer 
looking  at  the  headlight  head  on,  i.e.  towards  the  side of  the 
road  driven  upon,  shall  be entered  below  the  component  type 
approval  mark. 

Where  by means  of  a deliberate  alteration  in the  adjustment  of 
the  light  unit  or  lamp  headlights  meet  the  requirements  of  both 
rules of  the  road  a horizontal  arrow  having  two  tips  pointing 
one  to  the  left  and  the other  to  the  right  shall  be  entered 
below  the  component  type  approval  mark. 

The  letters  "MBH" shall  be  placed  opposite  the  component  type 
approval  mark. 

The marks  and  symbols  referred  to above  shall  be  clearly  visible 
and  indelible. 

1. 

1.1 

1.2 

1.3 

1.4 

1.5 

1.6 

1.7 

2. 

2.1 

2.2 

2.2.1 

2.2.2 

2.3 

2.4 

2.5 

-  C\ 15 

GENERAL  REQUIREMENTS 

Each  of  the  samples  must  meet  the  specifications  set  out  in 
Items  3  to 5 below. 

Headlights  shall  be  designed  and  manufactured  in such  a way  that 
under  the  normal  conditions of  use  and  despite  any  vibrations  to 
which  they  may  be exposed  they  continue  to  function  properly  and 
retain  the  characteristics  required  by  this  annex. 

Headlights  shall  be  fitted  with  a device  enabling  them  to  be 
adjusted  on  the  vehicle  in such  a way  as  to meet  the  rules 
applying  to  them.  Said  device  does  not  need  to  be  attached  to 
the  parts within  which  the  reflector  and  diffuser  lens  cannot  be 
separated,  provided  that  the use of  said  parts  is restricted  to 
vehicles  on which  the  headlights  may  be  adjusted  by  other  means. 

Where  a headlight  emitting  a main  beam  and  a headlight  emitting 
a  dipped  beam,  each  being  equipped  with  its own  lamp,  are 
grouped  together  to  form  a composite  unit,  the  setting  device 
shall  enable  each  individual  optical  system  to be  set  in an 
appropriate  manner. 

However,  these  provisions  shall  not  apply  to  headlight 
assemblies  the  reflectors  for  which  are  indivisible.  In  this 
instance  the  requirements  of  paragraph  2 of  this  Annex  shall 
apply.  When  more  than  one  light  source  provides  the main  beam 
those  sources must  be  combined  in order  to  determine  the maximum 
illumination  value (Em). 

The  parts  intended  to attach  the  filament  lamp  to  the  reflector 
shall  be made  in such  a way  that,  even  in the  dark,  the  filament 
lamp  can  be  attached  without  uncertainty  in  its  appropriate 
posItIon. 

The  correct  position  of  the  lens  in relation  to  the  optical 
system  must  be marked  clearly  and  be  locked  in position  in order 
to avoid  any  rotation. 

Where  headlights  have  been  designed  in such  a way  as  to meet  the 
requirements  of  driving  on  both  the  right  and  the  left 
adaptation  to a given  rule of  the  road  may  be  obtained  by  a 
suitable  initial  setting  when  the  vehicle  is equipped  or  via a 
deliberate  action  on  the  part  of  the user.  That  initial  setting 
or  that  deliberate  action  shall,  for  example,  consist  of  a 
specific  angular  setting  either  of  the  sealed-beam  assembly  on 
the  vehicle  or  of  the  lamp  in relation  to  that  assembly.  In all 
cases  only  two different  setting  positions  that  have  been 
clearly  specified  and  correspond  in each  case  to  a  rule of  the 
road  (driving on  the  right  or  left), must  be  possible  and  any 

2.6 

3. 

3.1 

3.1.1 

3.1.2 

3.1.3 

- < \ ù-

shift  into an  intermediate position must  be made  impossible. 
When  the  lamp  is able  to occupy  two different  positions the 
parts  intended  to attach  the  lamp to the reflector  shall  be 
designed  and manufactured  in such a way  that,  in each of  those 
two positions, the  lamp  is attached with  the same precision as 
required  for  headlights designed  for  Just one  rule of  the road. 
Conformity  will  be checked  visually and, where  appropriate, by 
means of a test  assembly. 

In order  to ensure  that operation does not  involve any excessive 
changes  to photometric performance additional  tests must  be 
carried out  as required by Appendix  3. 

ILLUMINATION  REQUIREMENTS 

GENERAL  REQUIREMENTS 

Headlights shall  be designed  in such a way  that, with  adequate 
HS1  lamps, they emit  a  light  that  is not  dazzling but  is 
nevertheless adequate on dipped  beam and provides good 
illumination on main beam. 

A screen placed vertically at a distance of  25 m  in front of  the 
headlight, as shown  in Appendix  1, must  be used  to check  the 
illumination produced  by  the headlight. 

A colourless reference  lamp designed  for  a nominal  voltage of 
12 V must  be used  in examining  headlights.  The current  at  the 
terminals of  the  lamp during examination of  the headlight shall 
be set  to the following characteristics: 

Consumption 

Light  flux 

in Watts 

in  lumens 

Dipped-beam  filament 

££•  35 

Main-beam  filament 

—  35 

450 

700 

The headlight  shall  be considered  acceptable  if  it meets the 
requirements set out  in  Item 3 with at  least one  reference  lamp 
which may be presented  together  with  the headlight. 

(6) 

_ <3 ï? 

3-1.4 

3.1.5 

3.2 

3.2.1 

The  dimensions  determining  the position of  the  filaments  within 
the HS1-filament  reference  lamp are set out  in Annex  4, 
Appendix  19. 

The bulb  for  the filament  reference  lamp shall  be of  such  a 
shape and optical  quality  that  it causes a minimum  of  reflection 
or  refraction which may  have an adverse effect  on  the  light 
distr ibut ion. 

Requirements  relating  to the dipped  beam 

The dipped  beam shall  produce  a cut-off  of  such  distinctness 
that  it  is possible  to carry out  adjustments  correctly  using 
said  cut-off.  The cut-off shall  be a straight  horizontal  line 
on  the side opposite  to the rule of  the road  for which  the 
headlight  is  intended.  On  the other  side  the cut-off  shall  not 
go beyond  either  broken  line HV H1  and H4 formed  by a  straight 
line formed  by HV H1  lying at an angle of  45' with  the 
horizontal  and a straight  line H1  H4 offset  by  1%  in relation  to 
straight  line hh, or  straight  line HV H3  inclined  by  15*  to the 
horizontal  (see Appendix  1 ).  In no case  is a cut-off  going 
beyond  both  line HV H2 and  line H2 H4 and  resulting  from  the 
combination of  the two preceding  possibilities acceptable. 

3.2.2 

The headlight  shall  be aligned  in such  a way  that: 

3.2.2.1 

3.2.2.2 

3.2.2.3 

3.2.3 

3.2.4 

where  headlights are designed  to meet  the  requirements of 
driving on  the right  the cut-off  on  the  lefthand half of  the 
screen shall  be horizontal  and  for  headlights designed  to meet 
the requirements of  driving on  the  left  the cut-off  in the 
righthand  half of  the screen  shall  be horizontal.  The  setting 
screen shall  be sufficiently  wide  to permit  examination of  the 
cut-off  over  at  least 5* on each  side of  line vv, 

on  the screen  this horizontal  part of  the cut-off  shall  be 25 cm 
below  the horizontal  plane passing  through  the  focal  centre of 
the headlight  (see Appendix 1 ); 

the tip of  the cut-off shall  be on straight  line vv.  If the 
beam does not  have a cut-off  presenting  a clear  "elbow"  lateral 
setting  shall  be conducted  in such  a way  as best  to meet  the 
illumination requirements applying  to points 75R  and 50R  for 
driving on  the right and points 75L and  50L  for  driving on  the 
left. 

When  aligned  in this manner  the headlight  shall  meet  the 
requirements  referred  to  in  items 3.2.5  to 3.2.7  and  3.3. 

Where  a headlight  aligned as referred  to above does not meet  the 
requirements of paragraphs  3.2.5  to 3.2.7  and  3.3  it  is 
permissible  to alter  the setting  provided  that  the axis of  the 
beam  is not moved  sideways by more  than  1'  (-44  cm) to the 
right or  left.  The  incorrect  setting  limit of  1*  to the  right 
or  left  is not  compatible with  a vertical  incorrect  setting 
upwards or  downwards which  is only  restricted  by  the 

- 4 < è-

requirements  laid down  in paragraph  3.3.  However, the 
horizontal  part of  the cut-off  must  not go beyond  line hh.  In 
order  to make settings easier  by means of  the cut-off  it is 
permissible partly  to mask  the headlight  in order  to make  the 
cut-off more distinct. 

3.2.5 

The  illumination produced on  the screen by  the dipped beam shall 
meet  the requirements set out  in the  following table: 

Point on measuring screen 

Headlight  for 
on-road  use 

Dr iving on 
the right 

Head Iight for 
on-road  use 

Dr iving on 
the  left 

Point 
Point 
Point 
Point 
Point 

50 L 
75 R 
50 R 
25 L 
25 R 

Point 
Point 
Point 
Point 
Point 

50 R 
75 L 
50 L 
25 R 
25 L 

All  points within  zone  III 
All  points within  zone  IV 
All  points within  zone I 

11lumination 
required, 
in lux 

<  0.3 
> 6 
> 6 
> 1.5 
>  1.5 

<  0.7 
>  2 
< 20 

3.2.6 

3.2.7 

3.3 

3.3.1 

3.3.2 

In none of  the zones  I,  II,  III and  IV must  there be  lateral 
variations  that  impair good  visibility. 

Headlights designed  to meet  the requirements of  driving on the 
right and  those for driving on  the  left shall, for each of  the 
two  locations of  the sealed  beam unit or  lamp meet  the 
requirements set out  above  for  the rule of  the road 
corresponding  to the  location under  consideration. 

Requirements concerning  the main beam 

The  illumination produced on  the screen  by  the main beam shall 
be measured using  the same headlight setting as for  the 
measurements defined  in  items 3.2.5  to 3.2.7  above. 

The  illumination produced on  the screen by  the main beam shall 
meet  the following  requirements: 

3.3.2.1 

Point of  intersection HV of  lines hh and  vv shall  be at  the 
isolux  representing 90% of maximum  illumination.  Maximum  value 
Em shall  be at  least 32  lux.  Its value shall  not  exceed 
240  lux. 

3.3.2.2 

Starting  from  the HV point  horizontally  to the right  and  to the 
left, the  illumination shall  be at  least  16  lux at a 

- f\ H  -

distance  of  1.125  m  and  at  least  equal  to 4  lux  up  to a  distance 
of  2.25  m. 

3.4 

The  illumination on  the screen  referred  to  in  items  3.2.5  to 
3.2.7  and  3.3  shall  be measured  by means of  a useable-area  photo 
receiver  acting  within  a 65 mm  square. 

4. 

REFERENCE  HEADLIGHT 

A  headlight  which: 

4.1 

4.2 

4.3 

4.3.1 

4.3.2 

5. 

5.1 

meets  the component  type  approval  requirements  set  out  below, 

has an effective  diameter  of  at  least  160 mm 

provides  illumination, with  a reference  lamp, at  various  points 
within  the  various  areas  provided  for  in  item  3.2.5, 

which  is at  least  90% of  the maximum  values  and 

at  least  120% of  the minimum  limits as  required  by  the  table  in 
item  3.2.5 

shall  be  considered  to be a reference  headlight. 

SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS RELATING TO THE CHECKING  OF  CONFORMITY  OF 
PRODUCTION 

The  conformity  of  series-production  headlights  in respect  of 
photometric  performance  is guaranteed  if, during  photometric 
tests on  any  given  headlight  selected  at  random  and  fitted  with 
a  reference  lamp: 

-  none  of  the  values measured  differs,  in the  adverse 

direction, by more  than  20% from  the  required  value.  (The 
maximum  divergence  in the adverse  direction  of  the B50R  or  L 
values  and  those  for  zone  III may  be 0.2  lux  (B50R  or  L) are 
respectively  0.3  lux  for  zone  III); 

-  or,  in the case of  the dipped  beam,  the  required  values  are 
met  within  HV  (with  a tolerance of  0.2  lux) and  within  at 
least  one  point  in the area  bounded  on  the measuring  screen 
(at  25 m) by  a circle  having  a diameter  of  15 cm  about 
points  B50R  or  L  (with  a tolerance  of  0.1  lux), 75R  or  L, 50R 
or  L,  25R  or  L and  throughout  zone  IV restricted  to 22.5 cm 
above  line 25R  and  25L;  if,  in the case of  the main  beam,  a 
tolerance  of  20%  is not  exceeded  on  the  photometric  values 
where  HV  lies within  an  isolux of  0.75  E max. 

5.2 

If the  results of  the  tests described  in  item  3 above  do not 
meet  the  requirements  the  tests on  the  headlamp  being  challenged 
shall  be  repeated  using  another  reference  lamp. 

-  too -

APPENDIX 1 

MEASURING  SCREEN 

Uniform  European  beam 

Headlight  for driving on the right 

(dimensions  in mm) 

3960 

3960 

22S& 

2250 

< 15QQ M**H 
500 >*  W 

h-h:  trace of horizontal  plane 

passing  through  the focal  centre 

v-v:  trace of vertical  plane 

of headlight 

The measuring  screen for driving on the left  shall  be symmetrical to 

line V-V shown  in the diagram  In this Annex. 

- 

toi-

APPENDIX  2 

TESTS ON THE STABILITY OF THE PHOTOMETRIC 
PERFORMANCE OF HEADLAMPS  IN OPERATION 

Compliance with  the requirements of  these amendments  is not  a  sufficient 
criterion  for  the component  type approval  of  headlights fitted with  plastic 
lenses. 

TESTS ON COMPLETE HEADLIGHTS 

Once  the photometric measurements  have been carried out  as required  by  this 
Annex  at points E max  in the case of main beams and HV, 50 R, B 50 L  in the 
case of dipped beams  (or HV, 50 L B 50 R for  headlights designed  for driving 
on  the  left) a sample of  a complete  headlight shall  be subjected  to a test  on 
the stability of  photometric  performance  during operation.  "Complete 
headlight" means  the entire  headlight  itself  including  the parts of  the 
bodywork  and any  nearby  lights which may  affect  its heat  dissipation. 

1. 

STABILITY TEST ON PHOTOMETRIC PERFORMANCE 

The  test shall  be conducted  in a dry, calm  atmosphere  at an 
ambient  temperature of  23' ± 5'C,  the complete  headlight  being 
attached  to a support  representing  its proper  fitting  to the 
vehicle. 

1.1 

The  headlight  itself 

The headlight  itself  shall  remain  lit for  12 hours as stated  in 
item  1.1.1  and checked  as required  in  item  1.1.2. 

1.1.1 

Test 

1.1.1.1 

The headlight  shall  remain  lit for  the  length of  time  required: 

a)  i) - 

where a single  light source  (main beam or  d-b)  is to 
be component  type approved, the corresponding  filament 
shall  be  lit for  the required  period of  time; 
ii) -  When  the headlight  subjected  to the tests  is grouped 
together  or  reciprocally  incorporated  with  the 
sidelights  the  latter  shall  be  lit throughout  the 
test.  If this  is a direction  indicator  light  it must 
be  lit  in flashing mode with  the  lit and extinguished 
times being approximately equal. 

- 102 -

b)  in the case of  reciprocally  incorporated  dipped  and main beam 
headlights  (two-filament  lamp or  two  lamps with  filaments): 

i) - 

if the requester  states  that  the headlight  is  intended 
to be used with only one  filament  lit a test shall  be 
carried out  as appropriate  and each of  the  light 
sources specified  shall  remain  lit  for  half of  the 
period stated  in  item 1.1; 

ii) - 

if two filaments  light simultaneously when  the 
headlight  is used as a warning  light-that shall  not be 
considered  to be a normal  simultaneous use of  two 
filaments; 

in all other  cases  the headlight must  be subjected  to 
the following cycle for  the time equal  to the  required 
duration: 

15 minutes, filament of dipped  beam  lit 

5 minutes, all  filaments  lit. 

c) 

Where  light sources are grouped  together  all of  the 
individual  sources must  be  lit at  the same  time for 
the required duration  for  individual  light sources a ), 
account  also being  taken of  the use of  the 
reciprocally  incorporated  light sources and b)  in 
accordance with  the manufacturer's  instructions. 

1.1.1.2 

Test  voltage 

The voltage shall  be set  in such a way as to supply 90% of  the 
maximum  power  specified  for  category  HS filament  lamps  in 
annex  4, Appendices 19 and 20. 

1.1.2 

Test  results 

1.1.2.1 

Visual  inspection 

Once  the temperature of  the headlight  has been stabilized at 
ambient  temperature  the headlight  glasses shall  be cleaned  and 
the exterior  glasses, if any, shall  be cleaned with  a clean damp 
cotton rag. 

They will  then be examined  visually and no distortion, 
deformation, cracking or changing colour of  the  headlight 
glasses or outside glasses,  if any, must  be detected. 

-  10 

1.1.2.2 

Photometric  test 

As required by this annex  the photometric  values shall be 
checked  at the following points: 

dipped  beam: 

5 R - B 50 L - HV  in the case of headlights designed  for driving 
on the r ight, 
50 L - B 50 R - HV for headlights designed  for driving on the 

left. 

Main beam: 

point  Emax. 
The beam may be reset  in order  to take account of any 
deformation of the headlight support  caused by heat  (as regards 
a  shift  in the cut-off, see  item 2 ). 

A  tolerance of 10% is permissible  including  the tolerance due to 
the photometric measurement  procedure, between  the photometric 
characteristics and the values measured  before the test. 

1.2 

Dirty  headlight 

Once  it has been tested as required  in item 1.1  above the 
headlight  shall be prepared  in the manner  described in 
item 1.2.1  and then  lit for an hour as provided  for in 
item 1.1.1  and then checked as required by  item  1.1.2. 

1.2.1 

Preparation of headlight 

1.2.1.1 

Test  mixture 

A mixture of water  and pollutant  to be applied  to the headlight 
shall  consist  (by weight) of nine parts of silica sand having a 
grain  size  lying between 0 and 100 urn, one part  (by weight) of 
vegetable carbon dust  having a grain size  lying between 0 and 
100 urn and 0.2 parts (by weight) of NaCMC and an appropriate 
quantity of distilled water  having a conductivity of  less than 
1 mS/m. 

The mixture  shall  not be more  than 15 days old. 

1.2.1.2 

Application of the test mixture to the headlight 

The test mixture shall  be applied uniformly over  the entire 
light-emitting surface of the headlight  and then be allowed to 
dry.  This operation shall be repeated until  the  illumination is 
less than  15-20% of the values measured  for each of the 
following points under  the conditions described  in this 
Append i x: 

\o^  -

Emax Main  for a dipped/main beam  light 
Emax Main  for  just a main beam  light 
50 R and 50 V  for  just a dipped-beam  light designed  for  driving 
on  the right 
50 L and  50 V for  just a dipped  beam  light  that  has been 
designed  for driving on  the  left. 

1.2.1.3 

Measuring  apparatus 

The measuring apparatus shall  be  that equivalent  to that used 
for  the headlight  component  type approval  tests. 

A  reference  filament  lamp shall  be used  for  the photometric 
inspect ion. 

2. 

CHECKING OF THE VERTICAL DISPLACEMENT OF THE CUT-OFF LINE UNDER 
THE EFFECT OF HEAT 

It  is a matter  in this case of checking  that  the vertical 
displacement of  the cut-off  line of  a  lit dipped-beam  headlight 
due  to heat  does not exceed  a prescribed value. 

After undergoing  the tests described  in  item  1 the headlight 
shall  be subjected  to the test  described  in  item 2.1  without 
being  removed  from  its support or  readjusted  in relation to it. 

2.1 

Test 

The  test  shall  be carried out  in a dry calm  atmosphere at a 
temperature of  23*  ±5*C. 

A  headlight  fitted with a series-production  filament  lamp  that 
has been aged  for at  least an hour  shall  be  lit  in the dipped 
beam position without being  removed  from  its support or 
readjusted  in relation  to this.  (For  the purposes of  this test, 
the voltage shall  be regulated  as required  in  item 1.1.1.2.) 
The position of  the horizontal  part of  the cut-off  line  (between 
vv and  the vertical  line passing  through point B 50 L  in the 
case of  headlights designed  for driving on  the right or 
point B 50 R designed  for driving on  the  left) shall  be checked 
three minutes  (r3) and 60 minutes  (r60) after  light-up. 

The displacement of  the cut-off  line described  above shall  be 
measured using any method giving sufficient  accuracy and 
reproducible results. 

2.2 

2.2.1 

Test  results 

The  result expressed  in milliradians  (mrad) shall  be considered 
for a dipped beam headlight only  if the absolute  value of 
^ Rl  -  I R3 - R60  I recorded on  the headlight  does not exceed 
1.0 mrad (/^ <. r I <. 1.0  mrad). 

2.2.2 

-  \0Ç  -

However,  if that  value  is greater  than  1.0 mrad  but  does not 
exceed  1.5 mrad  (1.0 mrad  < A  r I .< 1.5 mrad) a second  headl ight 
shall  be put  to the  test  as provided  for  in  item  2.1  after  being 
subjected  three  times  in succession  to  the cycle  described  below 
In order  to stabilize  the position of  the mechanical  parts of 
the  headlight  on  a support  that  is representative of  its  fitting 
to the vehicle: 

dipped-beam  headlight  lit  for  an  hour  (the supply  voltage  shall 
be set  as  In  item  1.1.2) 

dipped-beam  headlight  switched  off  for  an  hour. 

A given  type of  headlight  shall  be considered  acceptable  if the 
average of  the absolute  values of ^ rl  are measured  on  the  first 
sample  and &  rll measured  on  the second  sample  does  not  exceed 
1.0 mrad. 

( û-rl  +  à  rll 
2 

<  LO  mrad) 

"" 

-IOC 

APPENDIX 3 

INFORMATION DOCUMENT 

IN RESPECT OF A TYPE OF HEADLIGHT EQUIPPED WITH HALOGEN LAMPS 

AND EMITTING AN ASYMMETRICAL DIPPED BEAM AND A MAIN BEAM 

INTENDED FOR TWO OR THREE WHEEL MOTOR VEHICLES 

(To be attached to the application for component type approval 

where this is submitted separately from the application for vehicle 

type approvaI) 

Order number  (assigned by the applicant): .. 

The application for component type approval  in respect of a type of headlight 

intended for two or three wheel motor vehicles shall contain the following 

informat ion: 

-under  letter A  in items:  8.1  to 8.4 

1.  Make or trade name: 

2.  Manufacturer's name and address: 

3.  Name and address of manufacturer's representative (if any) 

4.  Type and characteristics of headlights submitted for component type 

approval: (MBH; MBH/; MBH; MBH; MBH/; MBH/ 

5.  The dipped-beam filament may/may not* be lit at the same time as the 

main beam filaments and/or those of another reciprocally  incorporated 

headlight. 

6.  Maximum  illumination (in lux) of the mainbeam at 25 m from the 

headlight (average of two headlights): . 

* Delete as appropriate. 

-  / o7  -

APPENDIX  4 

Name of the Administration 

CERTIFICATE OF COMPONENT TYPE APPROVAL 

IN RESPECT OF A TYPE OF HEADLIGHT EQUIPPED WITH HALOGEN LAMPS 

AND EMITTING AN ASYMMETRICAL DIPPED BEAM AND A MAIN BEAM 

INTENDED FOR TWO OR THREE WHEEL MOTOR VEHICLES 

MODEL 

Report No 

By test ing body 

Date 

Component  type approvaI number 

Extens ion No 

1.  Make or trade name of headlight: 

2.  Type of headlight: 

3.  Manufacturer's name and address: 

4.  Name and address of manufacturer's representative (if any) 

5.  Headlight submitted for test on: 

6.  Component  type approval  granted/refused*: 

7.  Place: 

8.  Date : 

9.  Si gnature: 

* Delete as appropriate. 

-  ice 

ANNEX  IV 

INCANDESCENT LAMPS  INTENDED FOR USE  IN 
COMPONENT TYPE APPROVED LIGHTS 
FOR MOPEDS, MOTORCYCLES AND TRICYCLES 

-  J0<\  -

APPENDIX  1 

CATEGORY R2 LAMPS 

50  D 5Ï 

f>ipp*à  team 

u*P  c*f>  ?^t-4i 

y 

«?«|7» 

Reference plane 2 
Reference plane 1 

1.  Only  the outer  dimensions and those affecting  interchangabiMty are 

given  in the diagram and they are mandatory. 

2.  The reference  axis shall be the line perpendicular  to reference 

plane 1 and passing  through the intersection of that  plane with the 
corresponding  centering cylinder. 

3.  The internal  structure and the corresponding  dimensions are given on 

sheets R2/2 and R2/3. 

4.  No part of the cap may, as a result of the reflection of the  light 

emitted by the dipped-beam  filament, send out an ascending  interference 
beam when  the light  is in its normal  operating position on the vehicle. 

5.  The bulb  shall be colourless. 

-  MO  -

Internal  components 

R2/2 

KEY. 

I 

M 
Ml 

IV 
V 
VI 
VII 

V IM 

Lamp  ax is 
Dipped-filament  axis 
Plane passing  through  the  reference axis of  the 
angles  to the median  plane of  the alignment  tab 
plane 1 
Main beam  filament  axis 
Outermost  spiral  of  the main beam  filamant 
First  glowing  spiral  of dipped  beam  filament 
The plane passing  through  the axis of  the main beam  filament  may 
not  be parallel  to plane  h-h nor  to plane  z-z 
Distance e from  the reference  plane 

lamp at right 
for  reference 

NB: The drawing  is only mandatory  as regards deta 
fI laments. 

s of  the cap and 

/ 1/ 

-

Internal  components 

R2/3 

Dimensions 
(mm or degrees) 

Tolerances  in mi 11imetres 
or degrees 

Lamp of 
existing 
manufacture 

Reference 
incandescent 

lamp 

± 0.35 

±  0.15 

±  0.35 

±  0.15 

± 0.30 

±  0.15 

± 0.5 

±  0.3 

± 0.35 

±  0.15 

±  0.4 

±  0.2 

±  0.5 

±  0.3 

±  1.5 

±  0.5 

±  1» 30* 

±  0' 30* 

±  1* 30* 

±  0' 30* 

a 

b 

c 

d 

e 

f 

g 

le 

fi 

If 

0.6 

0.2 

0,5 

0 

(2) 

28.5 

(3) 

1.8 

0 

5.5 

0* 

15* 

M.( 4) 

3/4(1c+f) 

(1)  For the measuring methods See ICI publication No ... [in preparation]. 
(2)  28,8 for 24 V  lamps. 
(3) 
2,2 for 24 V  lamps. 
(4)  The value  laid down for dimension Q-Q' shall  apply  exclusively  to the 

reference  incandescent  lamp used  for the component  type approval  test on 
a headlight;  the dimensions of the segment  shall  be such  that  points Q' 
Me  within the edge of the segment. 

- ci -

APPENDIX 2 

CATEGORY H3 LAMPS 

H3/2 

Dimensions  in mi I Iimetres 

Definition  : centre of collar 

Reference axis(*) 

Dimensions of filament and 
tolerances  for reference  lamps -
see  sheet H3/3 

View from above  x 

Reference 
notch 

View B 

Centre of filament 

A 

c 

Centre of 
collar 

/ 

Reference  View from above 
axis 

J: 

10,0 of 
plane 

referenc 

Reference axis 

I 
B 

Définition of ligne Z - Z 

View from above 

View A  : measure  h2 
View B : measure k, h-j, h3, f 
View C : measure  h4 

(*)  The cap must  be pressed  in these  directions 

17) 

- 

/ I3 

-

H3/3 

Dimensions i n mm 

Lamp of existing 
manufacture 

Reference inc 
andescent lamp 

e (7) 

f (7) 

k 

h1 

h3 

h2 

h4 

6 V  12 V  24 V 

18.0 (5) 

18.0 

3,0min 

4,0 min 

5.0 ±0.5 

0 ± 0.20 

0  ± 0.15 (6) 

0 ± 0.25 («) 

(5) 

PK 22s cap in accordance with ICI publication 61 (sheet 7004-47-2) 

ELECTRICAL AND PHOTOMETRIC CHARACTERISTICS 

Nominal 
values 

Volts 

Watts 

6 

12 

24 

55 

70 

12 

55 

Test voltage 

Volts 

6.3 

13.2 

28.0 

Normal 

values 

Watts 

Light 
flux Im 

± X 

max. 
63 

max. 
68 

max. 
84 

max. 
68 a 13.2 V 

1 050 

1 450 

1 750 

15 

Reference  light flux for headlamp tests - 1 100 1m at 12V approximately 

-nu 

-

(1) 

Lamp  deformation on  the cap  side  shall  not  be  visible  in any  direction 
outside  the masking  angle of  80' max.  The  screens  shall  not  reflect 
any  interference  images.  The  angle  between  the axis of  reference  and 
the plane of  each  screen, measured  on  the  lamp  side, shall  not  exceed 
90*. 

H3/4 

(2) 

The  permissible  deviation  from  the  centre  of  the collar  in relation  to 
the  reference  axis  shall  be 0.5  mm  in the direction  at  right  angles  to 
line  1-1  and  0,05  mm  in the direction  parallel  to  line  1-1. 

(3) 

Minimum  length  above  the  height  of  the  light  centre  ("e")  along  which 
the bulb  shall  be  cylindrical. 

(4) 

All  parts of  the spring or  any  component  of  the socket  shall  be 
supported  solely  by  the prefocus  collar  outside  the broken  lines. 

(5) 

These  dimensions  for  lamps of  existing  manufacture  shall  be checked  by 
means of  a box  system  , as shown  in sheet  H3/5  below. 

(6) 

(7) 

The  points  to be measured  in the case  of  reference  lamps  are  those  where 
the projection  of  the outer  part  of  the  terminal  spirals  bisects  the 
ax is of  the  f ilament. 

The  position  of  the  first  and  last  spirals of  the  filament  shall  be 
defined  by  the  intersection  of  the outer  face of  the  first  and  last 
illuminating  spirals with  the plane  parallel  to  the  reference  plane 
located  at  a distance of  18.0 mm.  (Further  instructions  are  being 
studied  for  bispiral  filaments.) 

-  M S ~-

Requirements  regarding  the checking  screen 

H3/5 

This  test  enables  it to be determined  whether  a  lamp meets  the requirements by 
checking  that  the  filament  is correctly  positioned  in relation  to the 
reference  axis and  plane. 

Views A and C 

dimensions  in mil Iimetres 

View B 

from the reference plane 

a 

c 

k 

6  V 

12  V 

1,8d 

1,6d 

1.0 

24  V 

g 

2 ,0 

2 ,8 

2 ,9 

d - diamètre of  filament 

The  filament  shall  be  located entirely within  the 
Iimits shown. 

The centre of  the  filament  shall  Me  within 
dimension  k. 

6  " 

APPENDIX 3 

CATEGORY H4  LAMPS 

Bulb  a x is 

H4/1 

)1.0  rr^X. 

\ 

Cap  pQtt-lî 

(Dimensions in mm) 

ivUefive-yellcw 

bvLK 

•/•#/>e£  ox/s 

The drawings are not mandatory;  their  sole aim is to state the dimensions 
which must be checked. 

Reference 

Dimension 

Tolerance 

12 V 

24  V 

12 V 

24  V 

28,5 

29.0 

+  0.45 
-  0.25 

±  0,35 

28.95 

29.25 

-

— 

max.  60.0 

max.  34,5 

45.0 

max.  40* 

-

-

-

-

e 

P 

m 

n 

• 

(D 

(D 

(2) 

Oc 

(3) 

-  "9  -

Character ist ics 

H4/2 

Lamp of existing manufacture 

Reference Inca 
ndescent lamp 

Nominal 
values 

Volts 

, 2W 

2«< 4) 

, 2< 4) 

Watts 

60 

55 

75 

70 

60 

55 

Test voltage 

Volts 

13.2 

28 

Normal 
values 

Watts 

max. 
75 

max. 
68 

max. 
85 

max. 
80 

max.  75 
à 13.2V 

max.  68 
à 13.2V 

Light 
flux 
Im 

±  X 

1 650 

1 000 

1 900 

1 200 

15 

Measuring  light flux for 
the measurements to be 
carried out  in accordance 
with paragraph 3.8 of this 
regulation 

Im 

-

750 

-

800 

Reference  light flux at approximately 12 volts  Im 

1 250 

750 

P43t-38 In accordance with ICI publication 61 (sheet 7004-39-2) 

(1) 

(2) 

When a yellow outside  lamp  is used  "m" and "n" shall  give  the maximum 
dimensions of that  bulb;  where  there  is no outside  bulb  "m" shall  give 
the maximum  length of the lamp. 
It must  be possible  to introduce  the lamp  into a cylinder  having a 
diameter  "s"  which  is concentric to the reference  axis and limited at 
one of  its ends by a plane  that  is parallel  to the reference  plane at a 
distance of 20 mm from  this and at the other  end by a hemisphere  having 
a  radius of s_. 

2 

(3) 

There must  be blackening at  least up to the cylindrical  part of the 
bulb.  It must, moreover, overlap  the internal  segment  where  this is 
viewed  in a direction at right  angles  to the reference  axis.  The effect 
sought  from  the blackening  must  also be possible by other  means. 

(4)  The values  quoted  in the left  hand  column  relate  to the main  beam,  while 

those  in the right  hand  column  referred  to the dipped  beam. 

- M 8-

Position of curved screen (*) 

H4/3 

OH 

(*)  The drawing  is not mandatory as regards the shape of the curved screen. 
(**)  30,0 for the 24-volt type. 

-  M4 

Position  of  filaments  ( *) 

H4/4 

Y 

iU-ïjfêr 

G > * H^ 

\r 

'Reference axis  2/ 

Main beam  filament  axis 

Dipped beam  filament  axis 

Dimensions in mm 

(*) The drawing  is not mandatory as regards the shape of the curved  screen. 
(**) 30,0 for the 24-volt  type. 

- / Z d 

-

H4/5 

Further  explanations  concerning  sheets  H4/3 and  H4/4. preceding  pages 

The  following  dimensions  are measured  in three  directions: 

1. 

for  dimensions  a,  b-j, c,  d, e,  f,  lp and  lc. 

2. 

for  dimensions g,  h, p and q 

3. 

for  dimensions  b2 

Dimensions  p and  q are measured  in a plane  parallel  to  the  reference 
plane  and  at  distances of  33 mm  from  this. 

Dimensions  b-j, b2,  c and  h are measured  in the planes  parallel  to 
the  reference  plane  and  at  distances of  29.5 mm  (30.0 mm  for  the 24-volt 
type) and  33 mm  from  this. 

Dimensions  a and g are measured  in planes parallel  to  the  reference 
plane  and  at  distances of  26.0 and  23.5  mm. 

NB: 

For  the measuring method  see  ICI  Publication  No 809. 

- ( Z / -

H4/6 

Table of dimensions  referred  to in the figures 
on  sheets H4/3 and H4/4 (in  mm) 

Tolerance 

Series 
production 
lamp 

Reference 
incandescent 
lamp 

Volts 12 

24 

12 

24 

12 

24 

12 

a/26 • 

a/23.5 • 

0.8 

0.8 

bi/29.5*  30.0* 

bi/33 

0 
•• 
bi/29,5mv 

•* 

30.0mv 

± 0.35 

± 0,2 

± 0.60 

± 0.35 

±  0.2 

± 0.2 

±  0.35 

±  0.15 

D2/29.5 

30.0 

0 

± 0.35 

±  0.2 

b2/33 

b2/29.5mv 

30.0mv 

±  0.35 

± 0.15 

c29,5 

30.0 

0.6 

** 
c/29.5mv 

0,75 
•• 

30,0mv 

± 0.35 

± 0.2 

± 0.35 

± 0.15 

c/33 

d 

(7) 

e 

min. 0.1 

-

-

28.5 

29.0 

+ 0.45 
-  0.25 

± 0.35 

+ 0.2 
-  0.0 

f  (5) (6) (8) 

1.7 

2.0 

+ 0,50 
-  0.30 

± 0.40 

+ 0.3 
- 0,1 

9/26 * 

g/23.5 * 

h/29.5 

30.0 

0 

0 

0 

± 0.5 

±  0.7 

± 0.5 

h/33 

h/29.5mv 

30.0mv 

±  0.35 

,  (5) (8) 
|R 
,  (5) (6) 
•c 
P/33* 

0733 

4.5 

5.25 

± 0.8 

5.5 

5.25 

± 0.8 

± 0.35 

depends upon the 
shape of the 

dome 

P  + S 
2 

-

-

± 0.6 

±  0.3 

± 0.3 

± 0.3 

± 0.3 

± 0.2 

±  0.4 

Dimension  to be measured at the reference  plane  distance  stated,  in mm, 
after  the dash. 

"./29.5mvM  or "30.0mv" means the value measured  at a distance of 29.5 mm 
or 30.0 mm from  the reference  plane. 

-  I 2 Z -

H4/7 

(5)  The outermost  filament spirals are defined as having the first and last 

glowing spirals which are regularly spiralled, or  in other words which 
forms the correct winding angle.  Where a filament has two spirals those 
spirals are defined by the envelope of the primary spirals. 

(6)  For the dipped beam filament the points to be measured are the 

intersections viewed  in direct ion Qfrom  the  lateral edge of the segment 
with the outer part of the outermost spirals defined  in Note 5. 

(7)  "e" means the distance from the reference plane at the beginning of the 

dipped-beam  filament as defined above. 

(8)  For the main beam filament the points which are to be measured are the 
intersections, viewed  in direct ion 0  from a plane parallel  to plane HH 
located at a distance of 0.8 mm below this, with the outer part of the 
outermost spirals defined  in Note 5. 

(9)  The reference axis  is the line perpendicular  to the reference plane and 
passing through the centre of the circle having a diameter  "H" (see 
H4/1). 

(10)  Plane VV  is the plane perpendicular to the reference plane and passing 
through the reference axis and through the point of  intersection of the 
circle having a diameter  "M" and the median  line of the reference tab. 

(11)  Plane HH is the plane perpendicular  to the reference plane and to the 

plane W  passing through the reference axis. 

APPENDIX  4 

CATEGORY P21W LAMPS 

P21W/1 

J^ 

h 

4. J— i 
- 1— 

W 

Reference plane 

Reference 
ax is 

Dimensi 

on s 

i. 

_ 

Lamp  from  existing 
production 

Reference 
incandescent lamp 

e 

f 

0 

min. 

nom. 

max. 

3,i3) 

31.8 ± 0.3 

7.0 

7.0 - 0 
- 2 

75' 

90* 

105' 

90* ± 5» 

Lateral deviation 

(1) 

(3) 

0.3 max. 

Cap BA 15s in accordance Publ. ICI 61 (sheet 7004 - 11A - 6) 

(2) 

ELECTRICAL AND PHOTOMETRIC CHARACTERISTICS 

Nominal 

va 1ues 

Volts 

6 

Watts 

12 

21 

24 

12 

21 

Test voltage 

Volts 

6,75 

13.5 

28.0 

Watts 

26 

Normal 

values 

± X 

Light  flux 
Im 

± X 

25 

6 

460 

15 

28 

25 à 13.5 V 

6 

Reference  light  flux:  roughly 460 Im at 13.5 V 

- 

\  ZU 

-

(1) 

Maximum  lateral  deviation  from  the centre of  the  filament  in relation  to 
two  reciprocally  perpendicular  planes  containing  the  axis of  reference 
of  the cap where one of  these  planes  includes  the axis of  the pins. 

(2) 

The  lamps with BA  15d  caps may  be used  for  special  purposes;  they  have 
the  same  dimensions. 

(3) 

Are  checked  by  a box  system,  sheet  P 25-1/2. 

-  iz*r~ 

P21W/2 

Requirements  applying  to the checking  screen 

This  test enables  it to be determined  whether  a  lamp meets the requirements by 
checking  that  the filament  is correctly  positioned  in relation  to the 
reference  axis and to the reference  plane and an axis perpendicular, to ± 15', 
to the plane passing  through the centre of the pins and the reference  axis. 

Reference 
axis 

Dimensions  in millimetres 

Head on view 

Reference  axis 

V A 

reference 

a 

b 

h 

k 

dimension 

3 ,5 

5 ,0 

9 ,0 

1.0 

Measuring  methods and requirements 

1. 

2. 

The lamps shall  be placed  in a socket  which may turn about  its own axis 
and has either a graduated  dial or fixed  stops  corresponding  to the 
tolerated  limits for angular  displacement  i.e. ± 15*.  The socket  is 
then  turned  in such a way that a view of the end of the filament  is 
obtained on the end of the screen on to which  the image of the filament 
is projected. 

The end of filament  view must  be obtained  within  the tolerated  limits of 
angular  displacement  (±  15*). 

Side  view. 
With  the lamp placed cap downwards with  the reference  axis vertical and 
the  filament  viewed end on: the projection of the filament  must be 
located  entirely  within a rectangular  height  "a" and width  "b" the 
centre of which  is in the theoretical  position of the centre of the 
filament. 

- 1 2 6-

3. 

Head on view. 
With the lamp placed cap downwards with the reference axis vertical and 
viewed in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the filament: 

3.1  The projection of the filament shall  lie entirely within a rectangle of 

height "a" and width "h" centered on the theoretical position of the 
centre of the filament. 

3.2  The centre of the filament shall not diverge from the reference axis by 

a distance of more than "k". 

~>27  -

CATEGORY  P21/5W  LAMPS 

a) Main  filament 

*-7.5mn?s,  b) Secondary  filament 

P21/5W/1 

Reference pin 

Reference  axis 

Dimensions 
in mm 

Lamp of existing manufacture 

min. 

nom. 

max. 

Reference 
incandescent 
lamp 

e 

f 

Lateral deviation 

x. y 

fi 

31.8(1) 

31.8 ± 0.3 

7.0 

7.0 I ° 

(D 

(D 

(2) 

0,3 max 

2.8 ± 0.3 

7S.( ,) 

90* 

105* 

90  ± 5* 

BAY 15d cap In accordance with ICI Publ. 61 (sheet 7004 - 11B - 5) 

ELECTRICAL AND PHOTOMETRIC CHARACTERISTICS 

Normal 

Volts 

6 

12 

(3) 

24 

12 

values 

Test 
voltage 

Normal 

values 

Watts 

21 

5 

21 

5 

21 

5 

21/5 

Volts 

6,75 

13.5 

28.0 

Watts 

26 

6 

25 

6 

28 

10 

25 et 6 à 13.5 V 

± X 

6 

10 

6 

10 

6 

10 

6 et 10 

Light 
flux Im 

440 

35 

440 

35 

440 

40 

± X 

15 

20 

15 

20 

15 

20 

Reference light flux: 440 Im and 35 Im at roughly 13.5 V 

- i is  -

(1) 

These  dimensions  must  be checked  by means of  a box  system  (sheets 
P  25-2/2, P  25-2/3) based  on  the dimensions  and  tolerances  referred  to 
above,  x and  y  refer  to the axis of  the main  filament  and  not  to  the 
axis of  the  lamp  (P  25-2/2).  An  increase  in the  accuracy  of  the 
positioning  of  the  filaments and  cap/socket  assembly  is under 
examinât ion. 

(2) 

Maximum  lateral  deviation  of  the centre of  the main  filament  in  relation 
to two  reciprocally  perpendicular  planes  containing  the  reference  axis, 
one of which  includes  the pin  axis. 

(3) 

The  24 V  lamps  is not  recommended  for  any  future  assemblies. 

(81 

-  /1  0\ 

-

P21/5W/2 

Requirements  concerning  the  inspection  screen 

This  test  enables  it  to be determiend  whether  a  lamp meets  requirements  by 
checking  that: 

(a) 

the main  filament  is correctly  located  in relation  to  the 
reference  axis, the  reference  plane  and  an  axis  that  is 
perpendicular,  to ±  15',  to  the  plane  pasing  through  the centre of 
the pins  and  the  reference  axis; 

(b) 

the  secondary  filament  is correctly  located  in relation  to  the 
main  fI lament. 

Test  method  and  requirements 

1. 

2. 

2.1 

The  lamp  Is placed  in a socket  which  can  turn  about  its own  axis and  has 
either  a graduated  dial  or  fixed  stop, corresponding  to  the  tolerated 
limits  to angular  displacement  i.e. ±  15*.  The  pin  is then  turned  in 
such  a way  that  an end-on  view of  the main  filament  is obtained  on  the 
screen  on which  the  image of  the  filament  is projected.  The  end-on  view 
of  the main  filament  must  be obtained  within  the  tolerated  angular 
displacement  limits  (±15*). 

Side  view 
With  the  lamp  placed  cap downwards  with  the  reference  axis  vertical  the 
reference  pin  to  the  right  and  the main  filament  viewed  end  on: 

The  projection  of  the main  filament  shall  be entirely  located  within  a 
rectangular  height  "a" and width  "b" the  centre  of  which  is placed  in 
the  theoretical  centre of  the  filament; 

2.2 

The  projection of  the auxiliary  filament  shall  be  located  entirely: 

2.2.1  within  a  rectangular  width  "c" and  height  Md"  the centre  of  which  is 
located  at  distances  "v" to  the  right  and  "u" above  the  theoretical 
centre of  the main  filament; 

2.2.2  above  a straight  line  tangent  to  the upper  edge of  the  projection  of  the 

main  filament  and  ascending  from  the  left  to  the  right  at  an  angle  of 
25*; 

2.2.3  to  the  right  of  the projection  of  the main  filament. 

3. 

3.1 

3.2 

3.3 

Frontal  view 
The  lamp  being  located  cap downwards  with  the  reference  axis  vertical 
and  viewed  in a direction  perpendicular  to the  axis of  the  main 
filament: 

the  projection  of  the main  filament  shall  be  located  entirely  within  a 
rectangular  height  "a" and  width  "h" centered  on  the  theoretical  centre 
of  the  filament; 

the cetre of  the main  filament  shall  not  diverge  from  the  reference  axis 
by  a distance  of  more  than  "k"; 

the  centre of  the secondary  filament  shall  not  diverge  from  the 
reference  axis  by more  than ±  2 mm  (± 0.4  mm  for  the  reference  lamps). 

Side view 

- 

izo 

Dimensions in millimetres 

c 

P21/5W/3 

Auxiliary 
filament 

OJ c 
OJ  (0 

E  OJ 
O  O 
U  C 
m  OJ 

U 
00 0) 
« «u 
r-i  Q) 

Main filament 

Reference 

a 

b 

c 

d 

u 

V 

Dimension 

3.5 

3.0 

4.8 

2.8 

Front  view 

Reference  axis 

k 

k 

t 

JL. 

C 
0)  «0 
_±?  8? 
E  0 
O  O 
l<  C 
«M  Q) 

00  0J 

i-4  0J 

Reference 

Dimension 

0 

3.5 

h 

9.0 

k 

1.0 

-  f Si -

APPENDIX 5 

CATEGORY R5W LAMPS 

R5W/1 

Reference axis 

Reference plane 

Dimensions 

Lamp from existing 
production 

Reference incandes 
cent lamp 

min. 

nom. 

max. 

e 

17.5 

19.0 

20.5 

19.0 ± 0.3 

Lateral deviation 

(2) 

1.5 

0.3 max. 

fi 

60' 

90* 

120» 

90* ± 5* 

BA15s cop in accordance with ICI publication 61 (sheet 7440 - 11A - 6) 

ELECTRICAL AND PHOTOMETRIC CHARACTERISTICS 

Nominal 
va 1ues 

Volts 

Watts 

6 

12 

24 

5 

12 

5 

Test voltage 

Volts 

6,75  13.5 

28.0 

Watts 

5 

7 

5 to 13.5 V 

Normal 

values 

± X 

Light 
flux  Im 

± X 

10 

50 

20 

Reference light flux:  50 Im at roughly 13.5 V 

10 

-'3? -

(1)  The  lamps with a 8A I5d cap may be used for special purposes;  they have 

the same dimensions. 

(2)  Maximum  lateral deviation from the centre of the filament  in relation to 

two reciprocally perpendicular planes containing the reference axis and 
of which one  includes the pin axis. 

(3)  See item 3.3. 

-<Z2 

-

APPENDIX 6 

CATEGORY R10W LAMPS 

R10W/1 

Reference plane 

Dimensions 

Lamp of existing 
manufacture 

Reference incandes 

cent lamp 

min. 

nom. 

max. 

e 

17.5 

19.0 

20.5 

19.0 ± 0.3 

Lateral  deviation 

(2) 

1.5 

0,5 max. 

* 

60* 

90* 

120* 

90* ± 5* 

BA15s cap in accordance with ICI publication 61 (sheet  7004 - 11A - 6) 

ELECTRICAL AND PHOTOMETRIC  CHARACTERISTICS 

Nominal 

values 

Volts 

Watts 

6 

12 

10 

24 

12 

10 

Test  voltage 

Volts 

6.75  13.5 

28.0 

Normal 

values 

Watts 

Light 
flux 

± X 

Im 

± X 

10 

10 

125 

20 

12,5 

10 a 13.5 V 

10 

Reference  light  flux:  125 Im at roughly 13.5 V 

3  <• -

(1) 

The  lamps with  BA  15d caps may  be used  for  special  purposes:  they  have 
the  same  dimensions. 

(2)  Maximum  lateral  deviation  of  the centre of  the  filament  in relation  to 

two  reciprocally  perpendicular  planes  containing  the  reference  axis, one 
of  which  includes  the pin  axis. 

(3) 

See  Item  3.5.3. 

-n<r-

APPENDIX 7 

CATEGORY C5W LAMPS 

C5W/ 

Reference axis 

Dimensions 

in  mm 

b0) 
f(2) (3) 

Lamp of existing 
manufacture 

Reference incandes 
cent lamp 

min. 

nom. 

max. 

34.0 

35.0 

36.0 

35 ± 0.5 

»S> 

(5) 

15 

9 ± 1.5 

SV 8.5 cap In accordance with ICI publication No 61 (sheet 7004-81-3) 

ELECTRICAL AND PHOTOMETRIC CHARACTERISTICS 

Nominal 

values 

Volts 

6 

12 

24 

Watts 

5 

12 

5 

Test voltage 

Volts 

6.75  13.5 

28.0 

Watts 

5 

7 

5 a 13.5 V 

Normal 

values 

± X 

Light 
flux  Im 

± X 

10 

45 

20 

Reference  light flux:  45 Im at roughly 13.5 V 

10 

-  /  1C-  -

(1) 

(2) 

This  dimension  corresponds  to a distance  between  the  two  apertures 
having  a diameter  of  3.5 mm  each  of  them  resting  against  one of  the 
pins. 

The  filament  must  be  located  within  a cylinder  that  is coaxial  to  the 
axis of  the  lamp,  is 19 mm  in  length  and  is placed  symmetrically  in 
relation  to  the centre of  the  lamp.  The diamètre of  that  cylinder  is, 
in the case of  6 and  12 V  lamps:  d+4 mm  (for  the  reference  lamps: 
d/2 mm) and,  in the case of  24 V  lamps d+5 mm  "d" being  the  nominal 
diameter  of  the  filament  stated  by  the manufacturer. 

(3) 

The  deviation  of  the centre of  the  filament  from  the centre of  the 
length of  the  lamp  shall  not  be more  than a ±  2.0 mm  (for  standard 
lamps:  ± 0.5  mm)  In the direction  of  the axis of  reference. 

(4) 

4.5  mm  for  6 V  lamps. 

(5) 

16.5 mm  in the case of  24 V  lamps. 

-  1Z1  -

APPENDIX 8 

CATEGORY C21W LAMPS 

Lamp  for reversing  light 

C21W/1 

Reference  axis 

Dimensions 

en  mm 

b<° 

f(2) 

Lamp of existing 

manufacture 

Reference incandes 
cent lamp 

min. 

nom. 

max. 

40.0 

41.0 

42.0 

41  ± 0.5 

7.5 

10,5 

8 ± 1 

SV 8.5 cop In accordance with ICI publication 61 (sheet 7004 - 81 - 3) 

ELECTRICAL AND PHOTOMETRIC CHARACTERISTICS 

Nominal 

value 

Volts 

Watts 

Test voltage 

Volts 

Normal 

values 

Watts 

± X 

Light 
flux  Im 

± X 

12 

21 

13.5 

25 

6 

460 

15 

Reference light flux:  460 Im at roughly 13.5 V 

12 

21 

25  à 13,5 V 

6 

(1)  This dimension  corresponds  to the distance  between  apertures  having a 

diameter of 3.5 mm. 

(2)  The position of the filament  shall  be checked by means of a box system, 

sheet C21W/2. 

-13g-

C21W/2 

CATEGORY C21W 

Requirements  applying  to the checking  screen 

This  test  enables  it to be determined  whether  a  lamp meets the requirements by 
checking  that  the filament  is correctly  positioned  In relation to the 
reference axis and the centre of the length of the lamp. 

Central axis sought 

k  k 
1 

Dimensions in mm 

Reference axis 

a. 

r°' 

a 

h 

12  V 

4 .0  +  d 

14,5 

k 

2 .0 

d - nominal  diameter of filament  stated by manufacturer. 

For  reference  lamps:  - 2 . 0 +d 

k - 0 .5 

Test method and requirements: 

1  The lamp shall  be placed  in a socket  which can turn  through  360' about the 
reference axis  in such a way that  the head-on view  is obtained on the 
screen onto which the filament  image  is projected.  The reference plane on 
the screen shall  conincide with  that of the centre of the lamp.  The 
central  axis sought on the screen shall  coincide with the centre of the 
length of the lamp. 

2 

Head-on  view 

2.1 The projection of the filament  shall  be located entirely within the 

rectangle when the lamp  Is rotated  through  360*. 

2.2 The centre of the filament  shall  not diverge  from the central  axis sought 

by a distance of more  than  "k". 

-?3>*î  -

APPENDIX  9 

CATEGORY T4W  LAMPS 

T4W/1 

7>!>nr>o,, 

, 5 7m 

Dimensions 

en  mm 

Lamp of existing 

manufacture 

Reference incandes 
cent lamp 

min. 

nom. 

max. 

e 

13.5 

15.0 

16.5 

15.0 ± 0.3 

Lateral deviation 

(1) 

1.5 

0,5 max. 

fi 

90' 

90*  ± 5* 

(3) 
BA 9s caps in accordance with ICI publication 61 (sheet 7004 - 14 -6} 

ELECTRICAL AND PHOTOMETRIC CHARACTERISTICS 

Nominal 

values 

Volts 

6 

12 

24 

Watts 

4 

12 

4 

Test voltage 

Volts 

6.75  13.5 

28.0 

Watts 

4 

5 

4 to 13.5 V 

Normal 

values 

± X 

Light 
flux  Im 

± X 

10 

35 

20 

Reference  light flux:  35 Im at roughly 13.5 V 

10 

-  / u o  -

(1)  Maximum  lateral deviation from the centre of the filament  in relation to 

two reciprocally perpendicular planes containing the axis of reference 
and of which one  includes the pin axis. 

(2)  See  item 3.3. 

(3)  The cap shall have neither protuberances nor welds exceeding the maximum 

permissible diameter of the cap throughout  its length. 

APPENDIX  10 

CATEGORY  W5W  LAMPS 

W5W/1 

iUVcnair. 

Reference axis 

Reference plane 

Dimensions 

en  mm 

Lamp of existing 
manufacture 

Reference incandes 

cent lamp 

min. 

nom. 

max. 

e 

11.2 

12.7 

14.2 

12.7 * 0.3 

Lateral deviation 

(2) 

1.5 

0.5 max 

fi 

-15' 

0' 

+15» 

0* ± 5* 

W 2.1 x 9.5d cap in accordance with ICI publication 61 (sheet 7004^91-2) 

ELECTRICAL AND PHOTOMETRIC CHARACTISTICS 

Nominal 

values 

Volts 

6 

12 

24 

Watts 

5 

12 

5 

Test voltage 

Volts 

6.75  13.5 

28,0 

Watts 

5 

4 

3 to 13.5 V 

Normal 

values 

± X 

Light 
flux  Im 

± X 

15 

22 

30 

Reference light flux:  22 Im at roughly 13.5 V 

15 

(1)  This type is protected by patents and the ISO/ICI conditions shall 

invariably apply. 

(2)  Maximum  lateral  deviation  from the centre of the filament  in relation to 

two reciprocally  perpendicular  planes containing the reference axis and 
one of the planes of which  includes axis XX. 

(3)  See paragraph  3.5.3. 

-  IC  2 

APPENDIX 11 

CATEGORY R2 LAMPS 

Table of electrical and 
photometric  characteristics 

R2/4 

Lamp of existing 
manufacture 

Reference incandes 
cent lamp 

Volts 

6 

12 

24 

12 

Watts 

45  40 

45  40 

55  50 

45 

40 

Volts 

6.3 

13.2 

28.0 

Watts 

45  40 

45  40 

55  50 

45 
to 12.0 V 

40 
to 12.0 V 

Tolerance 

X 

+ 10 

+ 0 
- 10 

± 5 

Nominal 

values 

Test 
voltage 

Normal 

va Iues 

(2) 

Light 
flux 

Im 

Light flux for the 
measurements to be 
carried out in 
accordance with para. 
8.3 of this Regulation 

Im 

600 
min. 

400 
min. 

600 
min. 

400 
min. 

600 
min. 

400 
min. 

550 
max. 

550 
max. 

550 
max. 

,  -

450 

-

450 

-

450 

Reference  light flux at approximately 12 V  Im 

700 

450 

P45t - 41 cap in accordance with ICI publication 61 (sheet 7004 - 9 5 - 2) 

(1)  The values set out on the left  (on the right) relate to the main-beam 

(dipped-beam)  filaments. 

(2)  By way of a departure  from  item 3.3 of Annexe  11l-C the normal  values 

are to be measured  at the nominal  voltage. 

(3)  The window mentioned on this sheet  is no  longer  required.  The X value 

shall  be 1.3 min/1.7 max. 

- 1 U - Z-

APPENDIX 12 

CATEGORY H1 LAMPS 

Dimensions  in mi I I(metres 

H1/1 

ooip  axVi 

Two-nip design 

Reference axis 

Alternative 
single-nip 
design (2) 

Reference axis 

P 

Q 

/?</«/»ente  plan* 
Y - 1 -- 

L 

L  ^G 

Permissible filament axis 
eccentricity in 
relation to the reference 
axis 

r\ 

< 

c2i^>—=~_ 

_JC 

.' 

— 
T-  Reference 

axjf 

Reference axis 

2nd boss 

Reference axis 

Section A-! 

Maximum overall size 
of lamp in region 

P-<2 

L _ 4 C ^. 

Id! in 

i 

Limit of 

masking angle 

The lamp shall be colourless 

View H 

View C 

-  / w-4  -

H1/2 

Tolerances 

Lamp of existing 
manufacture 

Reference incand 
escent lamp 

(8) 

± 0.15 

*  1.0 

± 0.5 

Dimensions 

in  mm 

b 

(5) (9) 

• 

> 0,7 4 

25.0 

f(5) (9) 

6 V 

4.5 

12 V 

24 V 

5.5 

(6) 

9 

hi 

h2 

e 

0.5 d 

± 0.5 d 

± 0.25 d 

0 

45» 

(«) 

(8) 

± 12* 

± 0.20 

* 0.25 

± 3* 

P14 5e In accordance with ICI publication 61 (Sheet 7004 - 46 - 1) 

ELECTRICAL AND PHOTOMETRIC CHARACTERISTICS 

Nominal 

values 

Volts 

6 

12 

Watts 

55 

24 

70 

12 

55 

Test voltage 

Volts 

6.3 

13.2 

28.0 

Normal 

values 

Watts 

± X 

max. 
63 

max. 
68 

max. 
84 

max. 
68 o 13.2 V 

Light 
flux Im 

1 350 

1 550 

1 900 

± X 

15 

Reference light flux for headlamp tests:  1150 Im at roughly 12 V 

-/6s'-

H1/3 

(1) 

These  dimensions  define  the  reference  axis. 

(2) 

(3) 

(4) 

When  the  lamps  are  supplied  with  two power  supply  electrodes  within  the 
lamp  the  longer  electrode  shall  located  above  the  filament  (the  lamp 
being  viewed  as shown  in the  drawing). The  inner  structure  of  the  lamp 
shall  then  be such  that  any  interference  images and  light  reflections 
shall  be  as  reduced  as much  as possible,  for  example  by  attaching 
cooling  sleeves  to  the non-spiral  parts of  the  filament. 

The  cyclindrical  part  of  the bulb  along  length  "f" shall  be  such  that 
the  image  projected  from  the  filament  shall  not  be deformed  such  as 
significantly  to affect  the optical  results. 

Eccentricity  shall  only  be measured  in the  horizontal  and  vertical 
directions of  the  lamp  as shown  in the diagram.  The  points  to be 
measured  shall  be  the  points where  the projection  of  the  terminal  parts 
of  the outer  parts of  the spirals  that  is closest  or  furthest  from  the 
reference  plane  intersects  the  filament  axis. 

(5) 

The  aiming  direction  shall  be  the  line perpendicular  to  the  reference 
axis  located  within  the plane  defined  by  the  reference  axis and  the 
centre of  the  second  cap  boss. 

(6) 

Offset  of  filament  in relation  to  the  lamp  axis  at  27.5 mm  from  the 
reference  plane  in direction  K. 

(7) 

d  : diameter  of  filament. 

(8) 

Are  checked  by means of  a Box  system,  sheet  H1/4. 

(9) 

The  extremities  of  the  filament  are  defined  as  the  points  where  the 
projection  of  the outer  part  of  the  terminal  spirals  that  is closest  or 
furthest  from  the  reference  Intersects  the  reference  axis, the  aiming 
direction  being  that  defined  in note  5. 

-IU(,-

H1/4 

Requirements concerning  the  inspection screen 

This  test  enables  it to be determined  whether  a  lamp meets  the requirements by 
checking  that  the  filament  is correctly  positioned  in relation  to the 
reference axis and  to the  reference plane. 

Dimensions  in 
mi 11imetres 

«1 

02 

*>1 

b2 

<M 

6  V 

12  V 

1.4d 

1.9d 

0.25 

t 

6 

7 

C2 

3.5 

4.5 

24  V 

d - diameter  of  filament 

The beginning  of  the  filament  defined  in note 9  to sheet  H1/3 shall  lie 
between  lines Z-j and  Z2. 

The position of  the  filament  shall  only  be checked  in directions FH and FV as 
represented  by  the diagram  in sheet  H1/1. 

The  filament  shall  lie entirely  within  the  limits  stated. 

-!Cf9-  -

APPENDIX 13 

CATEGORY H2 LAMPS 

H2/1 

View according to A 

Dimensions in mi 11imetres 

Supporting plane 

Supporting plane 

View in accordance 
with  £ 

Lamp axis 

View in accordance with  P 

Filament axis 

L J L ^ Ï - ^I 

Lamp axis 

Filament axis 

JL  S 

Supporting plane 

Reference 
line 

y 

View.in accordance 
with 

Q 

Filament axis 

Supporting plane 

The lamp shall be colourless, 

-  IU9 

-

H2/2 

Dimensions 

In  mm 

Lamp from existing 

manufacture 

Reference 

incandescent lamp 

Tolerances 

(6) 

e 

f<6) 

(D (2) 

9 „,<» 
„2W 
w(.) (2) 

•*<'>  <4) 

6 V 

12 V 

24 V 

(5) 

± 0.15 

±  1.0 

± 0.50 

12,25 

6 V 

4.5 

12 V 

24 V 

5.5 

0.5 d 

± 0.5 d 

± 0.25 d 

7.1 

0,5 d - 0.35 

(5) 

(5) 

(5) 

(5) 

(5) 

(5) 

± 0,20 

± 0.25 

± 0.20 

± 0.25 

X511 cop in accordance with ICI publication 61 (sheet 7004-99-1) 

ELECTRICAL AND PHOTOMETRIC CHARACTERISTICS 

Nominal 

values 

Volts 

6 

12 

24 

Watts 

55 

70 

12 

55 

Test voltage 

Volts 

6.3 

13.2 

28.0 

Normal 

va Iues 

Watts 

max. 
63 

max. 
68 

max. 
84 

max. 
68 à 13.2 V 

Light 
flux  Im 

1 300 

1 800 

2 150 

± X 

15 

Reference light flux for 
headlamp tests:  1 300 Im at roughly 12 V 

- /  UA  -

H2/3 

(1)  d : diameter of filament. 

(2)  These offsets shall be measured within a transverse section that is 

perpendicular  to the axis of the bulb and passes through the extremity 
of the filament**) closest to the cap. 

(3)  The three Xs on the supporting plane show the positions of the tips of 
the three bosses bounding the supporting plane on the socket.  Centred 
as it is on those three points within a circle having a diameter of 3 mm 
it must display no visible deformation nor any cut which affects the 
locat ion of the lamp. 

(4)  These offsets shall be measured  in a transverse section that is 

perpendicular to the axis of the bulb and passes through the extremity 
of the filament**) that  is furthest from the cap. 

(5)  These are checked by means of a box system, sheet H2/4. 

(6)  The extremities of the filament are defined as the points where the 

projection of the outer part of the terminal spirals that  is closest or 
furthest from the cap  intersects the line parallel  to lines ZZ at a 
distance of 7.1 mm from this;  the aiming direction  is as defined by D 
(sheet H2/1). 

(*) The points to be measured are those where the outer part of the terminal 
spiral closest or furthest from the cap intersects the filament axis. 

Requirements attached  to the  inspection screen 

-HSO-

H2/4 

This test enables  it to be determined whether a  lamp meets requirements by 
checking  that  the filament  is correctly positioned  in relation to the x-x, y-y 
and z-z axes (**). 

_£*«_ 

a_ 

...  . 
View in 
accordance with C (*) 

View in 
accordance with D<*) 

\—y 

supporting plane 

Reference 
line 

The extremity of the filament***) closest  to the cap shall  lie between b1 and 
b2.  The filament shall  lie entirely within the  limits stated. 

6  V 

12  V 

24  V 

d  +  0.50 

d+  1.0 

d  -f  1.0 

0.25 

7.1 

0.5d  -  0.35 

6 

7 

ol 

a2 

b 1.  b2 

d1 

d2 

h 

d - diameter of filament 

Dimensions  in mi 11(metres 

(*)  See sheet H2/1. 
(**)  The extremity of the filament  is defined  in sheet H2/3 

H3/1 

APPENDIX  14 

CATEGORY  H3 LAMPS 

Dimensions  in mi I Iimetrès 

\\S 

Reference  axis 

a 

3  u 

2/ » ju  fmirh. 

m ox 

±  . , IQmn», 

Reference plane 

Reference notch 

Si 

The lamp shall be colourless 

APPENDIX 15 

CATEGORY W3W LAMPS 

Lj>,3'r>0A. 

W3W/1 

/3 
'r* 

Reference axis 

Reference  plane 

Dimensions 

in  mm 

Lamp of existing 
manufacture 

Reference incandes 
cent lamp 

min. 

nom. 

max. 

e 

11.2 

12.7 

14.2 

12.7 ± 0.3 

Lateral divergence 

(2) 

1.5 

0,5 max 

fi 

-15* 

0* 

+15* 

0* ± 5« 

W 2.1 x 9.5d cap In accordance with ICI publication 61 (sheet 7004-91-2; 

ELECTRICAL AND PH0T0WCTRIC CHARACTERISTICS 

Nominal 

values 

Volts 

6 

12 

24 

Watts 

5 

12 

5 

Test voltage 

Volts 

6.75  13.5 

28.0 

Watts 

5 

7 

5 a 13.5 V 

Normal 

values 

* * 

Light 
flux  Im 

± X 

10 

50 

20 

Reference light flux:  50 Im at roughly 13.5 V 

10 

(1)  This  type  is protected  by patents and the ISO/ICI  conditions shall  apply 

without  exception. 

(2)  Maximum  lateral  divergence of the centre of the filament  in relation to 
two reciprocally perpendicular  planes containing  the axis of the cap and 
one of which  includes  axis XX. 

(3)  See item 3.3. 

-  i<2  -

APPENDIX 16 

FILAMENT LAMPS FOR CATEGORY S1 AND S2 MOTORCYCLES 

dimensions  in mm 

36  roioc. 

Reference 
plane 

3  mm-wide  tab 

Main-beam filament 

Filament 
axis 

Dipped-beam filament 

Position of filaments 

Reference 
axis 

Position of dome 
plane 

Main-beam 
filament 

Dipped-beam 
filament 

Screer 

Filament 
axis 

I  v 

NB: 
Plane W  contains the reference axis and the line passing through the centres 
of the tabs.  Plan HH (normal position of dome) is perpendicular to plane  W 
and contains the reference axis. 

Dome ' Reference^ 
axis 

-  /< ISC+ 

-

CATEGORY S1 AND S2 LAMPS - DIMENSIONS 

Dimensions 

in  mm 

- e 

f 

I 

(3) 

c 

( J> 

b

(3) 

a 

h 

9 
J3) <*> 

fi 

Lamp of existing 
manufacture 

(5) 

Reference incandes 
cent lamp 

min. 

nom. 

max. 

32.35 

32.70 

33,05 

32.7  ± 0.15 

1.4 

1.8 

2.2 

1.8 ± 0.2 

4 

5.5 

7 

5.5  ± 0,5 

0.2 

0.5 

0.8 

0,5 ± 0,15 

- 0.15 

0.2 

0.55 

0.2 ± 0.15 

0.25 

0.6 

0.95 

0.6 ± 0.15 

- 0.5 

- 0.5 

0 

0 

0.5 

0 

± 0,2 

0.5 

0  ± 0.2 

- 2*30' 

0* 

2*30' 

0*  ± 1» 

BA, 20d cap in accordance with ICI publication 61 (sheet 7004 - 12 - 5) 

ELECTRICAL AND PHOTOMETRIC CHARACTERISTICS 

CATEGORr SI FILAMENT LAVFS 

Filament  lamps from 
normal production 

Reference incandes 
cent lamp 

(5) 

Nominal 
values 

Volts 

6 

12 

6 

Watts 

25  25 

25  25 

25 

25 

Test voltage 

Volts 

6.75 

13.5 

Normal 

values 

Watts 

25  25 

25  25 

± X 

5 

5 

5 

Lumens 

435  315 

435  315 

± X 

20 

20 

Reference flux at roughly 6 V:  398 and 284 Im respectively 

-

25  1  25 
at 6.75  V 

K-T--

CATEGORY  S2 FILAMENT  LAMPS 

Filament  lamps from 
normal production 

Reference  incandes 
cent  lamp 

(5) 

Nominal 
values 

Voits 

6 

12 

12 

Watts 

35 

35 

35 

35 

35 

35 

Test voltage 

Volts 

6.3 

13.5 

-

Watts 

35 

35 

35 

35 

35 
I  35 
à  13(5  V 

Normal 
values 

±  X 

5 

5 

Lumens 

650  465 

650  465 

5 
1 

±  X 

20 

20 

Reference  flux at  roughly  12 V:  568 and  426  Im respectively 

NB: 

(1) 

Colourless  or  selective  yellow  lamp;  the photometric  specifications 
relate  to colourless  lamps. 

(2) 

The  reference  plane  is perpendicular  to  the  reference  axis  and  is 
tangent  to  the upper  face of  the  4.5 mm-wide  tab. 

(3) 

Dimensions  a,  b, c and  B  refer  to a plane  that  is parallel  to  the 
reference  plane  and  intersects  the  two edges of  the  dome  at  a  distance 
of  e +  1.5  mm. 

(4) 

Permissible  angular  offset  from  the plane  containing  the edges of  the 
dome  in relation  to  its normal  position. 

(5) 

Requirements  for  the  type  approval  of  a  type. 

• ' "/ 

- 7 sé 

-

APPENDIX  17 

CATEGORY S3 FILAMENT  LAMPS 

26 ,0 mox 

I 

1 

1  o 
* e 

d l 

A? 

, 

/ 

Cri 

~z~or 

Dimensions  in mm 

(1) 

Reference  plane 

Reference  axis 

Dimensions 

Lamp of existing 

manufacture 

Reference incandes 
cent lamp 

(2) 

e 

f (6 V) 

f (12 V) 

(3) 

dl. d2 

min. 

nom. 

max. 

19.0 

19,5 

20.0 

19.5 ± 0.25 

3.0 

2.5 ± 0.5 

4.0 

- 0.5 

0 

+ 0.5 

± 0.3 

P 26s cop in accordance with ICI publication 61 (sheet 7004 - 36 - 1) 

ELECTRICAL AND PH0T0VETRIC CHARACTERISTICS 

Nominal 
values 

Volts 

Watts 

6 

12 

15 

Test voltage 

Volts 

6.75 

13,5 

Normal 
values 

Wotts 

± X 

Lumens 

± X 

15 

6 

240 

15 

Reference flux at roughly 6.75 V:  240 Im 

6 

15 

-

15 to 6.75  V 

6 

(1) 

Colourless;  the photometric  specifications  relate  to colourless  lamps. 

(2) 

Distance  linked  to the  light centre of  gravity. 

(3) 

Lateral  divergence of  the axis of  the filament  in relation  to the 
reference  axis.  It  is sufficient  to check  this divergence  in two planes 
that  are perpendicular  to each other. 

S4/1 

APPENDIX 18 

CATEGORY S4 LAMP FOR MOPED HEADLIGHT 

dimensions  in mm 

25  nvjjc 

o 
-a 

Reference axis 

Reference plane  ^/ 

Reference pin 

2 

Main-beam 
filament 
contact 

IK Dipped-beam 

filament 
contact 

This drawing has only 
a guidance value as 
regards the shape of 
the screen dome 

filament 

Dipped-beam  \ 
filament 

Position of screen dome 
T 

c * 1.5 

5P#^ 

Screen dome 

Plane W  contains the reference axis 
and passes through the centre of the 
pins.  Plane HH contains the reference 
axis and is perpendicular  to plane  W. 
Objective position of plane SS passing  through 
the edges of the screen dome parallel to 
plane HH. 

-  I^S  -

S4/2 

Dimensions 
in  mm 

Lamp of existing 

manufacture 

Reference lamp 

e 

f 

LC. LR 

(2) 

c 

( 2) 

b

(2) 

a 

h 

9 
J2) (5) 
fi 

BAX 15d cap 

(1) 

min. 

nom. 

max. 

33.25 

33.6 

33.95 

33.6 ± 0.15 

1.45 

1.8 

2.15 

1.8 ± 0.2 

2.5 

3.5 

4.5 

3.5 ± 0.5 

0.05 

0.4 

0,75 

0.4 ± 0.15 

- 0.15 

0.2 

0.55 

0.2 ± 0.15 

0.25 

0.6 

0,95 

0.6 ± 0.15 

- 0.5 

- 0.5 

-2'30' 

0 

0 

0 

0.5 

0  ± 0.2 

0.5 

0  ± 0.2 

2*30' 

0  ±1* 

ELECTRICAL AND PHOTOMETRIC CHARACTERISTICS 

Nominal voltage 

Nominal power 

(6) 

Test voltage 

Normal power 

(6) 

V 

W 

V 

W 

6 

12 

6 

15  15 

15  15 

15 

15 

6.75 

13.5 

15  15 

15  15 

15  1  15 
(a  6.75  V) 

Tolerance ± X 

6 

6 

6 

Normal  light flux 
(in Im) (4) (6J 

180 

125 190 

180 

125 190 

min 

min max 

min 

min max 

Reference light flux: 
rougly  6 V  (4) 

240 Im (main-beam headlamps) 
160 Im (dipped-beam headlamps) 

-  JS''/ -

(1) 

Cap  in  line with  ICI  publication  61. 

(2) 

Dimensions  a,  b, c and  6  relate  to a plane  that  is parallel  to  the 
reference  plane  and  intersects  the  two edges of  the  screen  dome  at  a 
distance  of  e +  1.5  mm. 

(3) 

The  reference  plane  is perpendicular  to  the  reference  axis  and  tangent 
to the upper  face of  the pin,  the  length  of which  is 2  mm. 

(4) 

The  lamp  is colourless  and  the photometric  characteristics of  the  table 
apply  to a colourless  lamp. 

(5) 

Permissible  divergence  from  the plane of  the  screen  dome  in relation  to 
its normal  position. 

(6) 

The  values  set  out  in the  left  hand  column  relate  to  the  main-beam 
filament  while  those  in the  right  hand  column  relate  to  the  dipped-beam 
filament. 

-  ibo  -

APPENDIX  19 

Sheet 1 

CATEGORY  HS-, LAMPS:  HALOGEN LAMPS  FOR  MOTORCYCLES 

Lamp  axis 

32.0 max. 

Dipped 

PX 43t-38 cap  [-• 

(Dimensions  in mm) 

Colour less Xr  selective yellow  lamp 

The drawings are not mandatory;  their  sole aim  is to state  the dimensions 
which are  to be  checked. 

Reference  axis 

Reference 

Dimension 

Tolerance 

6 V 

12 V 

6 V 

12 V 

o 

P 

« (1) 

n (D 

• (2) 

CX(3) 

28,5 

28.95 

max. 60,0 

max. 34,5 

45.0 

max. 40* 

+ 0,45 
- 0,25 

-

-

-

-

-

SOLELY  FOR  MOTORCYCLES 

-  Ul-

Character  i st  ics 

Sheet  2 

Lamp of existing manufacture 

Reference lamp 

Volts 

6W 

«( 4) 

(4) 

12 

Watts 

35 

35 

35 

35 

35 

35 

Nominal 
values 

Test 
voltage 

Normal 

values 

Volts 

Watts 

± X 

Light 
ftux% 
(Im) 

± X 

6,3 

13,2 

35 

5 

35 

5 

35 

5 

35 

5 

35 
at 13.2 
5 

35 
at 13.2 
5 

700 

440 

825 

525 

15 

450 

Measurement 
of light flux 
in accordance 
with para 3.8 
of this 
Regulation 

Im 

Reference flux at roughly 12 V 

Im 

700 

450 

PX43t-38 cap in accordance with ICI publication 61 (sheet 7004-34-1) 

- » 6? 

Sheet  3 

Table of dimensions shown  in the diagrams 
on sheets 4 et 5 (mm) 

B*4*r* 

m.... :....• 

Tolerances 

Lamps of 
existing 
manufacture 

Reference 
lamp 

6 V 

12 V 

6 V 

12 V 

6 V  |  12 V 

12 V 

a/26 

a/25 

M/29.5 

(•) 

(•) 

M/33 

b2/29.5 

(*) 

(*) 

b2/33V 

c/29.5 

c/31 

d 

(7) 

e 

f(5) (6) (8) 

9/25 

9/25 

(•) 

h/29.5 

*/»,<•> 

, (5) (8) 
1 r 
, (5) (6) 
•c 

p/33(*} 

q/33 

0.8 

0.8 

0 

± 0.35 

± 0.2 

± 0.55 

± 0.2 

± 0.35 

± 0.2 

b1/29.5 mv 

± 0.35 

± 0.15 

0 

± 0.35 

±  0.2 

b2/29.5 mv 

± 0.35 

± 0.15 

0.5 

± 0.35 

± 0.2 

c /29.5 mv 

±  0.30 

± 0.15 

min. 0.1 
max. 1,5 

-

-

28.5 

1.7 

0 

0 

0 

+ 0,45 
-  0,25 

+ 0.50 
-  0.30 

+ 0,2 
-  0,0 

+ 0.3 
- 0.1 

± 0.5 

± 0.3 

± 0,7 

± 0.3 

± 0.5 

± 0.3 

h /29.5 

± 0.30 

± 0.2 

3.5 

4.0 

± 0.8 

± 0.4 

3.3 

4.5 

,±  0.8 

± 0.35 

Depends on the 
shape of the dome 

_ 

_ 

P + S 
2 

* 0.6 

± 0.3 

(*)  Dimension  to be measured  at the distance  from the reference  plane  shown 

in mm following the dash. 

-IbZ 

-

Position of filaments (*) 

Sheet  4 

0-H 

Main-beam  filament  axis 

Dipped-beam  filament  axis 

Dimensions  in mi 11imetres. 

(*)  The drawing  is not mandatory  with  regard  to the shape of the screen dome 

- U>(+~ 

Position of the screen dome <*) 

O-H-fP 

Lamp axis 

b:/ 

^0 

Reference axis (9) 

Sheet 5 

M/ 

(*) The drawing  is not mandatory  with  regard to the shape of the screen  dome 

Additional  explanations on  sheets  4 and  S 

The  following  dimensions  are measured  in three  directions: 

1 

2 

3 

for  dimensions  a,  b-j, c, d, e,  f,  lp and  lc 

for  dimensions  g,  h, p, and q 

for  dimensions  b2 

Dimensions  p and  q are measured  in a plane  parallel  to  the  reference  plane, 33 
mm  from  this. 

Dimensions  b-j and  b2  are measured  in planes  parallel  to  the  reference 
plane,  29.5 and  33 mm  from  this. 

Dimensions  a and  g are measured  in planes  parallel  to  the  reference  plane  25 
and  26 mm  from  this. 

Dimensions  c and  h are measured  in planes parallel  to  the  reference  plane  29.5 
and  31 mm  from  this. 

-/66 -

APPENDIX 20 

HS2/1 

CATEOGORY HS2 LAMPS: HS2/1 HALOGEN LAMPS FOR MOPEDS 

Locating notch 

Direction b 

1  Reference axis ( 

-  'M 

Dimensions 

Lamp of existing 
manufacture 

Reference lamp 

e 

, (6 V )( 6) 

(6) 
f (12 V)V  ' 

h1. h2 

• X( 4) 

<( s) 

•6  ,( 7) 
1 *> 

min. 

nom. 

max. 

(3) 

11.0 

11.0 ± 0.15 

1.5 

2.5 

3.5 

2.5 ± 0.15 

2.0 

3.0 

4.0 

(3) 

0 

± 0.15 

40 

-  15' 

90* 

+ 15' 

90' ± 5» 

15* 

40* 

15* min. 

40* min. 

P x 13.5s cop in accordance with ICI publication 61 (sheet 7004-35-1) 

ELECTRICAL AND PHOTOtCTRIC CHARACTERISTICS 

Nominal 
values 

Volts (6) 

Watts 

6 

15 

12 

15 

6 

15 

Test voltage 

Volts 

6.75 

13.5 

Normal 

values 

Watts 

± X 

Light 
flux  Im 

15 

6 

320 

± X 

15 

15 

6 

320 

15 

Reference  light flux:  320 Im at roughly 6.75 V 

15.0 â 6.75 V 

6 

- /6S -

Notes 

(1) 

(2) 

Where  a yellow outside  lamp  is used  "m" and  "n" state  the  maximum 
dimensions of  that  lamp and where  there  is no outside  lamp  "m" states 
the maximum  length of  the  lamp. 

It must  be  possible  to  introduce  the  lamp  inside a cylinder  having a 
diameter  "s" that  is concentric  to the  reference  axis and  limited  by one 
of  its extremities  by  a plane  parallel  to the  reference  plane  at a 
distance of  20 mm  from  this and  at  the other  extremity  by  a  hemisphere 
having  a  radius of  £. 
2 

(3)  The  lamp shall  be blackened  up  to at  least  its cylindrical  part.  It 

must  moreover  overlap  the  inner  dome where  this  is viewed  in a direction 
perpendicular  to the  reference  axis.  The effect  sought  by  the 
blackening  may  also be obtained  by other  means. 

(4) 

The values  stated  in the  left  hand  column  correspond  to  the  main-beam 
while  those  in the  right  hand  column  to the dipped  beam. 

(5) 

The outer  spirals of  the  filaments  are defined  as being  the  first  and 
last  regularly  coiled  glowing  spirals,  i.e. which  form  the  correct 
winding  angle.  The spirals of  double-helix  filaments are defined  by  the 
envelope of  the primary  helix. 

(6) 

The points which  need  to be measured  on  the dipped-beam  filament  are  the 
intersections, viewed  in direction  1,  from  the  lateral  edge of  the dome 
with  the outer  part  of  the extreme  spirals  defined  in note  5. 

(7) 

"e" means  the distance  from  the  reference  plane  at  the beginning  of  the 
dipped-beam  filament  as defined  above. 

(8) 

The points which must  be measured  for  the main-beam  filament  are  the 
intersections, viewed  in direction  1, of  a plane  parallel  to plane  HH 
and  located  at  a distance of  0.8 mm  below  this, with  the outer  part  of 
the extreme  spirals  defined  in note  5. 

(9) 

The  reference  axis  is the  line perpendicular  to  the  reference  plane 
passing  through  the centre of  the circle  having  a diameter  "M"  (see 
sheet  1 ). 

(10)  Plane W  is the plane perpendicular  to the  reference  plane  passing 

through  the  reference  axis and  through  the point  of  intersection of  the 
circle  having  a diameter  "M" and  the median  line of  the  reference  tab. 

(11)  Plane HH  is the plane  perpendicular  to the  reference  plane  and  to plane 

W,  and  passing  through  the  reference  axis. 

- /M -

HS2/2 

(1) 

The  reference  axis  is perpendicular  to  the  reference  plane  and  passes 
through  the  intersection  of  that  plane  with  that  of  the  cap  collar. 

(2) 

To  be  placed  under  reservation. 

(3) 

To  be checked  by means of  a box  system,  HS2/3. 

(4) 

All  of  the  components  likely  to attenuate  the  light  or  have  any  affect 
on  the  light  beam  shall  be  included  within  the  angle  fX . 

(5) 

Angle  6 shows  the position  of  the plane  passing  through  the datum  notch. 

(6) 

In order  to avoid  rapid  lamp wear  the  supply  voltage  shall  not  exceed 
8.5  V  for  6 V  lamps and  15 V  for  12 V  lamps. 

(7) 

There  shall  not  be any optical  deformation  zones  beween  the outer  edges 
of  angles vXl  and  ^2  and  the  lamp  shall  not  have  a  radius of  curvature 
of  less  than  50% of  its true  diameter. 

- f ? 0-

HS2/3 

Requirements  concerning  project on the screen 

This  test  enables  it to be determined  whether  a  lamp  fulfils  requirements by 
checking  that  the position of the filament  in relation  to the axis and plane 
of  reference  is correct.  All of the dimensions are in mm. 

Reference  axis  <1! 

11.0  from  the plane of reference 

View A + B 

Reference 

a1 

a2 

bl 

b2 

d  (6 V) 

d  (12 V) 

c2 

Dimension 

d + 1,0 

d 4- 1.4 

0.25 

0.25 

4.0 

4.5 

1.75 

d - true  diameter of filament. 
The  filament  shall be situated  entirely within  the limits  shown. 
The  beginning of the filament  shall  lie between  lines Z-| and Z2. 

-m-

EXTERNAL PROJECTIONS FROM TWO OR THREE-WHEEL MOTOR VEHICLES 

CHAPTER 3 

-iu-

ANNEX 1 

1. 

1.1 

1.2 

1.3 

1.4 

1.5 

2. 

2.1 

2.1.1 

2.1.2 

2.1.3 

REQUIREMENTS APPLYING TO EXTERNAL PROJECTIONS 
FROM UNBODIED TWO-WHEEL MOTOR  VEHICLES 

DEFINITIONS 
For the purposes of this annex 

"outer  parts of the vehicle" 
means the parts of the vehicle  likely to be  involved with external 
obstacles  in the event of a collision. 

"grazing" 
means any contact which, under  certain conditions, could  cause 
injury by laceration. 

"collision" 
means any contact which, under  certain conditions, could  cause 
penetration  injuries. 

"type of vehicle  in respect of external  projections" 
means vehicles not differing essentially  from each other  with 
regard,  in particular, to the shape, dimensions, direction of 

t  travel  and hardness of the outer  parts of the vehicle. 

"radius of curvature" 
means radius "r" of the arc of the circle most  closely  approaching 
the rounded  shape of the part under  consideration. 

CRITERIA FOR DISTINGUISHING BETWEEN  "GRAZING" and "COLLISION" 

When the testing device  (shown  in Figure A  in Appendix  1) is moved 
along the vehicle as described  in item 4.2 below, the parts of the 
vehicle  touched by that device must be considered  to fall within: 

group 1:  if the parts of the vehicle graze the testing device, or 

group 2:  if the parts of the vehicle collide with the testing 
device. 

In order unambiguously to differentiate between group 1 parts or 
components and those falling within group 2 the testing  device 
must be applied  in accordance with the method  shown  in the 
fol lowing diagram: 

\

\

\\ 

\ 

\ 

\ 

\ 

\ 

0(.>  45" 

:  group  1 
:  group  2 

Testing  device 
(See  figure A in Appendix 1) 

3. 

3.1 

3.2 

3.3 

3.4 

3.5 

4. 

4.1 

4.1.1 

4.1.2 

-ir<r 

GENERAL  REQUIREMENTS 

Notwithstanding  the  requirements  of  item  3.2  the  outside  of  ail 
types  of  vehicle  shall  incorporate  no  pointed,  sharp  or  protruding 
parts,  pointing  outwards, of  such  a shape,  dimension,  angle  of 
direction  or  hardness  that  it  increases  the  risk  or  seriousness  of 
body  lesions  suffered  by  any  person  struck  or  grazed  by  the 
vehicle  in the event  of  an  accident. 

Vehicles  shall  be  designed  in such  a way  that  the  parts  with  which 
other  road  users  are  likely  to come  into  contact  comply  with 
items  5 and  6  below,  as  appropriate. 

All  external  projections  covered  by  this  annex  that  are  made  of  or 
covered  with  soft  rubber  or  plastic  having  a hardness  of  less  than 
60  Shore  A  are considered  to meet  the  requirements  set  out  in 
items 5 and  6  below. 

However,  the  following  specifications  shall  not  apply  to  the  space 
between  the  side  car  and  motorcycle  in motorcycle  combinations. 

Where  mopeds  are  fitted  with  pedals  compliance  with  all  of  the 
requirements  or  parts  of  these  laid  down  by  this  directive  in 
respect  of  the  pedals  is optional.  Where  the  requirements  are 
met  manufacturers'  shall  inform  the  authorities  receiving  the 
request  for  the  component  type  approval  of  external  projections 
from  a  type  of  vehicle,  and  shall  at  the  same  time  describe  the 
measures  taken  in order  to ensure  safety. 

not 

TEST  METHODS 

Testing  device  and  test  conditions 

The  testing  device  shall  be  as  described  in Appendix  1,  Fig.  A. 

The  test  vehicle  shall  be  held  in a straight  line and  a  vertical 
position.  The  steering  device  shall  be  free  to move  within  its 
normal  range. 

An  AM  50 percentile  anthropomorphic  dummy  shall  be  placed  on  the 
test  vehicle  in the  normal  driving  position  in such  a way  that  it 
does  not  hamper  the  free movement  of  the  steering  device. 

4.2 

Test  procedure 

The  test  device  shall  be moved  from  the  front  towards  the  rear  of 
the  test  vehicle,  and  (if  it  is able  to strike  the  testing  device) 
the  steering  control  shall  be  rotated  into  its  fully  locked 
position.  The  test  device  must  remain  in contact  with  the  vehicle 
(see  Figure  B  in Appendix  1 ).  The  test  shall  be  carried  out  on 
both  sides  of  the  vehicle. 

5. 

5.1 

5.2 

-/H-

CRITERIA 

The  criteria  set  out  in this  item  shall  not  apply  to  the  parts 
covered  by  the  requirements of  item 6  below. 

Apart  from  the exemption  set  out  in  item  3.3  above  the  following 
minimum  criteria  shall  apply: 

5.2.1 

Requirements  applying  to the group  1 parts: 

5.2.1.1 

Plates: 
-  the corners of  a single  plate  shall  have  a radius of  curvature 

of  at  least  3 mm 

-  the edges of  a single plate shall  have  a radius of  curvature of 

at  least  0.5  mm. 

5.2.1.2 

Stems: 
-  stems shall  have  a diameter  of  at  least  10 mm 
-  the edges on  the end of  a stem  shall  have  a radius of  curvature 

of  at  least  2 mm. 

5.2.2 

Requirements  applying  to group  2 parts: 

5.2.2.1 

Plates: 
-  the edges  and  corners shall  have  a radius of  curvature of at 

least  2 mm 

5.2.2.2 

Stems: 
-  shall  not  be  longer  than  half of  the  diameter  of  the stem  if 

that  diameter  is  less  than  20 mm. 

-  the  radius of  curvature of  the edges  at  the end  of  a stem  shall 
be at  least  2 mm  if the diameter  of  the stem  is at  least  20 mm. 

6. 

6.1 

6.2 

6.3 

6.4 

SPECIFIC  REQUIREMENTS 

The upper  edge of  the windscreen or  fairing  shall  have a  radius of 
curvature of  at  least  2 mm  or  else  be covered  with  an 
edge-protection material  in accordance with  item  3.3. 

The ends and  the outer  edges of  the clutch  and  brake  levers shall 
be perceptibly  spherical  and  have  a radius of  curvature of at 
least  7  mm. 

The  leading edge of  the  front  mudguard  shall  have a  radius of 
curvature of  at  least  2 mm. 

The  rear  edge of  any  filler  cap  located on  the upper  surface of 
the  fuel  tank  and  thus  likely  to be struck  by  the  rider  in a 
collision  shall  not  extend more  than  15 mm  above  the  underlying 
surface;  any connection with  the underlying  surface  shall  be 
smooth or  perceptibly  spherical.  If the  15 mm  requirement  cannot 
be met  other  measures - such  as a protective  device  located  behind 
the  filler  neck  - must  be provided  (see,  for  example,  the 
fol lowing  sketch). 

-i?<r-

E1 

W  M 

J>  J> ^tll 

ftp / / /  /  A 

6.5 

The  ignition keys shall  have  a protective  cap.  That  requirement 
does not  apply  to folding  keys or  keys  that  are  flush with  the 
surface. 

Appendix  1 

F i g u re  A 

(ID 

- m-

ANNEX  I I 

REQUIREMENTS  APPLYING  TO  EXTERNAL  PROJECTIONS  FROM 
BODIED  THREE-WHEEL  MOTOR  VEHICLES 

GENERAL 

The  requirements  set  out  in Directive  74/483/EEC1  relating  to  the 
external  projections  of  (category  M1) motor  vehicles  shall  apply 
to bodied  three-wheel  motor  vehicles  intended  for  the  carriage  of 
passengers. 

The  following  requirements  shall  apply  to bodied  three-wheel  motor 
vehicles  intended  for  the  carriage  of  goods. 

SCOPE 

This  annex  shall  apply  to external  projections  ahead  of  the  rear 
bulkhead  of  the cab on  vehicles  intended  for  the  carriage  of 
goods,  those  external  projections  being  restricted  to  the  outer 
surface  as  defined  below.  It does  not  apply  to outside  rear  view 
mirrors,  including  their  stem,  nor  to accessories  such  as  radio 
aerials  and  luggage  carriers. 

The  aim  is to  reduce  the  risk  or  seriousness  of  injuries  sustained 
by  any  person  coming  into contact  with  the outer  surface  of  the 
vehicle  in the  event  of  a  collision. 

1. 

1.1 

1.2 

2. 

DEFINITIONS 

For  the  purpose  of  this  annex: 

2.1 

2.2 

2.3 

2.4 

2.5 

"outer  surface" means  the part  of  the  vehicle  located  ahead  of  the 
rear  bulkhead  of  the  cab  as defined  in 2.5  below,  with  the 
exception  of  the  rear  bulkhead  itself,  but  including  components 
such  as  any  front  wing(s) and  front  bumper,  and  the  front 
wheel(s)  (if  fitted); 

"type  of  vehicle  in respect  of  external  projections"  means 
vehicles  not  differing  essentially  from  each  other  with  regard,  in 
particular,  to  the  shape, dimensions,  direction  of  travel  and 
hardness  of  the outer  parts of  the  vehicle; 

"cab" means  that  part  of  the  bodywork  constituting  the  compartment 
reserved  for  the driver  and  passenger,  including  its doors; 

"rear  cab  bulkhead"  means  the  part  situated  furthermost  to  the 
rear  of  the outer  surface of  the  compartment  reserved  for  the 
driver  and  passenger; 

"reference  plane"  a horizontal  plane  passing  through  the  centre  of 
the  front  wheel(s),  or  a horizontal  plane  located  50 cm  above  the 
ground,  the  lower  of  the  two  being  selected.  This  plane  is 
defined  for  a  laden  vehicle. 

1  OJ  L  266,  2.10.1974,  p. 4. 

-m-

2.6 

"floor  I ine" means  a  line  determined  as  follows:  a  vertical-axis 
cone  of  an  indeterminate  height  having  a  half-angle  of  15*  is 
moved  all  around  the outside  structure  of  the  vehicle  in such  a 
way  that  it  remains  tangent,  as  long  as  possible,  to  the  outer 
surface  of  the  bodywork.  The  floor  line  is  the  geometrical  trace 
of  the  tangency  points. 

When  the  floor  line  is determined  account  shall  not  be  taken  of 
the  exhaust  pipes, wheels  or  localized  operational  mechanical 
components  attached  to  the  floor  pan  such  as  Jacking  points, 
suspension  mountings,  attachment  points  for  towing  or  transport 
purposes.  It  is assumed  that  any  gaps  directly  above  the  wheel 
arches  are  filled  by  an  imaginary  surface  directly  prolonging  the 
adjacent  outside  surface.  In order  to determine  the  floor  line, 
depending  upon  the  type of  vehicle  under  consideration,  account 
shall  be  taken of  the  extremity  of  the  profile  of  the  body  panel, 
of  any  wing  or  wings  (if  fitted),  and  of  any  outside  angle  of  the 
bumper  section  (if  fitted).  If  there  are  simultaneously  two or 
several  tangency  points  it  is the  lowest  tangency  point  which 
determines  the  floor  line. 

"radius  of  curvature"  means  the  radius  of  the  arc  of  a  circle 
closest  to  the  rounded  shape  of  the  part  under  consideration. 

"laden  vehicle" means  the  vehicle  bearing  its  maximum 
technically-permissible  load,  that  load  being,  distributed  among 
the  axles  in accordance  with  the manufacturer's  instructions. 

GENERAL  REQUIREMENTS 

The  provisions  of  this  annex  shall  not  apply  to  the  parts of  the 
"outer  surface" of  the  vehicle  which,  when  the  vehicle  is unladen 
and  the  doors, windows  and  hatches  providing  access  to  the  cab 
etc.  are  in their  closed  position,  are  located: 

outside  an  area  the upper  limit  of  which  is a  horizontal  plane 
located  2 m  above  the  ground  and,  according  to  the  manufacturer's 
choice,  the  lower  limit  of  which  is either  the  reference  plane 
defined  in  item  2.6  above  or  the  floor  line  defined  in  item  2.7, 
or 

are  located  in such  a way  that  they  cannot  be  touched,  under 
static  conditions,  by  a sphere  1 0 0 mm  in  diameter. 

Where  the  reference  plane  constitutes  the  lower  limit  to  the  area 
account  shall  be  taken  of  those  parts  of  the  vehicle  lying  between 
two  vertical  surfaces:, one  tangent  to  the outer  surface  of  the 
vehicle  and  the other  parallel,  at  a distance  of  80 mm,  towards 
the  inside  of  the  vehicle  from  the  point  where  the  reference  plane 
is tangent  to  the  vehicle  bodywork. 

2.7 

2.8 

3. 

3.1 

3.1.1 

3.1.2 

3.1.3 

3.2 

The  "outer  surface" of  the  vehicle  shall  not  include  any  part, 
pointing  towards  the outside,  which  could  catch  against 
pedestrians,  cyclists, or  motor  cyclists. 

3.3 

3.4 

3.5 

4. 

4.1 

4.1.1 

4.1.2 

4.2 

4.2.1 

4.2.2 

4.2.3 

None  of  the  components  defined  in  item  4 below  may  incorporate  any 
pointed  or  sharp  component  facing  towards  the outside, or  any 
projection,  shape, dimensions,  direction  or  hardness  of  which 
would  be  likely  to  increase  the  risk  or  seriousness  of  corporal 
lesions  to a person  hit  or  grazed  by  the outer  surface  in the 
event  of  a col I is ion. 

Projections  from  the outer  surface  having  a hardness of  not  more 
than 60 Shore  (A) may  have  a radius of  curvature  less  than  the 
values  laid down  in  item 4 below. 

By way  of  a departure  in  item  4,  the  radius of  curvature  of  the 
outer  projections  shall  not  be  less  than  2.5  mm.  If that 
requirement  is not  met  the outside  projections  shall  be  covered  by 
a  form  of  protection  having  the characteristics  required  by  item  4 
or  item  3.4. 

SPECIFIC  REQUIREMENTS 

Ornamental  motifs,  trade  symbols,  commercial-logo  letters  and 
digits. 

Ornamental  motifs,  trade  symbols,  trade-logo  letters  and  digits 
shall  not  include  any  radius of  curvature  of  less  than  2.5  mm. 
This  requirement  shall  not  apply  to components  projecting  by  less 
than  5 mm  from  the adjacent  surface  provided  that  they  do not  have 
any  cutting  edges  pointing  to  the  outside. 

Ornamental  motifs,  trade  symbols,  trade-logo  letters  and  digits 
projecting  by more  than  10 mm  from  the  surrounding  surface  shall 
retract,  detach  or  fold  back  under  a force of  10 daN  exerted  on 
their  most  projecting  point  in any  direction  within  a  plane 
roughly  parallel  to  the surface  to which  they  relate. 

The  force of  10 daN  shall  be exerted  by means  of  a  flat-tipped 
punch  having  a maximum  diameter  of  50 mm.  Failing  this  an 
equivalent  method  shall  be used.  Once  any  ornamental  motifs  have 
been  retracted,  detached  or  folded  back  the  remaining  parts  shall 
not  project  by more  than  10 mm  or  incorporate  any  pointed,  sharp 
or  cutt ing edges. 

Headlamp  peaks  and  surrounds 

Projecting  peaks  and  surrounds  shall  be  permitted  on  headlamps 
provided  that  they  do not  project  by more  than  30 mm  from  the 
outer  transparent  surface of  the headlamp  and  that  their  radius of 
curvature  is at  no point  less  than  2.5  mm. 

Pop-up  headlamps  shall  meet  the  requirements  set  out  in  item  4.2.1 
above  in both  their  operating  and  concealed  position. 

The  provisions  of  item  4.2.1  above  shall  not  apply  to  headlamps 
that  are embedded  or  recessed  in the bodywork  if this  complies 
with  item  3.2  above. 

4.3 

GriI Is 

-180-

Grill  components  shall  have  radii  of  curvature, 
-  of  at  least  2.5 mm  if the  distance  between  consecutive 

components  exceeds  40 mm 

-  at  least  1 mm  if that  distance  lies between  25 mm  and  40 mm 
-  at  least  0.5  mm  if that  distance  is  less  than  25  mm. 

Headlamp  wash/wipe  system 

The  abovementioned  devices  shall  be mounted  in such  a way  that  the 
wiper-blade  spindle  is covered  with  a protector  having  a radius of 
curvature  of  at  least  2.5 mm  and  a minimum  area  of  150  mm2 
measured  in the  form of  a projection  over  a section  that  is at  the 
most  6.5  mm  from  the most  projecting  point. 

The  windscreen  and  headlamp-washer  nozzles  shall  have  a radius of 
curvature  of  at  least  2.5 mm.  If they  project  by  less  than  5 mm 
their  sharp  edges  pointing  to  the outside  shall  be  smooth 
polished. 

4.4 

4.4.1 

4.4.2 

4.5 

Wing  (if  fitted) 

4.6 

4.6.1 

4.6.2 

4.6.3 

4.6.4 

4.7 

4.7.1 

If the wing  is the part  of  the  vehicle  located  furthest  ahead  of 
the  cab  its constituent  parts  shall  be  designed  in such  a way  that 
ail  of  the  rigid  parts  facing  the outside  have  a  radius of 
curvature  of  at  least  5  mm. 

Protective  devices  (bumpers)  (if  fitted) 

The  extremities  of  the  front  protective  devices  shall  be  turned 
down  towards  the outer  surface  of  the  bodywork. 

The  components  of  the  front  protective  devices  shall  be  designed 
in such  a way  that  all  of  the  rigid  surfaces  pointing  to  the 
outside  cover  a radius of  curvature  of  at  least  5  mm. 

Accessories  such  as  tow hooks  and winches  shall  not  project  beyond 
the  foremost  surface of  the  bumpers.  However,  winches  may  projec* 
beyond  the  foremost  surface  of  the bumpers  provided  that  they  are 
covered,  when  not  in use, by  an  appropriate  protective  device 
having  a radius of  curvature  of  at  least  2.5  mm. 

The  requirements  set  out  in  item  4.5.2  shall  not  apply  to 
components  relating  to the bumpers  or  forming  part  thereof, nor  to 
components  integral  with  the bumpers  and  not  projecting  by  more 
than  5 mm.  The edges of  devices  protruding  by  less  than  5 mm 
shall  be smooth  polished.  The  specific  requirements  relating  to 
devices  attached  to the bumpers  and  referred  to  in other  items  in 
this Annex  shall  remain  applicable. 

Handles,  hi noes  and  push  buttons  for  doors,  bootlids  and  bonnets, 
access  shutters  and  flaps and  grab  handles 

Push  buttons  shall  not  protrude  by more  than  30 mm,  nor  grab 
handles  and  bonnet-locking grips  by more  than  70 mm,  or  any  other 
cases  by more  than  50 mm.  Their  radius of  curvature  shall  be at 
least  2.5  mm. 

4.7.2 

4.7.2.1 

4.7.2.2 

-181-

if the  handles  for  the  side  doors  are of  the  rotary  type,  they 
shall  meet  one of  the  two  following  conditions: 

where  the  handles  pivot  in parallel  to  the door  plane  the open 
extremity  of  the handle  shall  point  towards  the  rear.  That 
extremity  shall  be  folded  towards  the door  plane  and  be  located 
within  a protective  housing  or  be  recessed; 

handles pivoting  towards  the outside  in a direction  that  is not 
parallel  to the door  plane  shall,  in the closed  position,  be 
located within  a protective  housing  or  in a recess.  The  open 
extremity  shall  point  either  rearward  or  downward.  However, 
handles which  do not meet  this  latter  requirement  may  be  accepted 
if: 

-  they  have  an  independent  return  mechanism, 
-  where  the  return mechanisms  do not  operate  they  do not  protrude 

more  than  15 mm, 

-  in that  open  position  they  have a radius of  curvature  of  at 
least  2.5 mm  (that  condition  does not  apply  if,  in the 
fully-open  position,  the projection  is  less  than  5 mm,  in which 
case  the angles of  the parts pointing  outwards must  be  smooth 
polished), 

-  the  area of  their  free extremity  is not  less  than  150  mm2 
when measured  less than  6.5  mm  from  the point  protruding 
furthest  forward. 

4.8 

Side  air  and  rain  deflectors  and  window  dirt  deflectors 

Edges which  may  point  outwards  shall  have  a  radius of  curvature of 
at  least  1 mm. 

4.9 

Sheet  metal  edges 

Sheet  metal  edges shall  be permitted  provided  that  they  are 
covered  with  a protector  having  a radius of  curvature  of  at  least 
2.5  mm  or  with  a material  meeting  the  requirements  stated  In 
item  3.4. 

4.10 

Wheel  nuts, hubcaps  and  protective  devices 

4.10.1 

4.10.2 

Wheel  nuts, hubcaps  and  protective  devices  shall  not  incorporate 
any  projections  in the  form of  fins. 

When  the  vehicle  is travelling  in a straight  line no part  of  the 
wheels other  than  the  tyres  located  above  the  horizontal  plane 
passing  through  their  axis of  rotation  shall  extend  beyond  the 
vertical  projection,  in a horizontal  plane, of  the edge of  the 
body  panel  above  the wheel.  However, where  so  Justified  by 
operating  requirements  the protectors  covering  the wheel  nuts  and 
hubs may  extend  beyond  the vertical  projection of  that  edge, 
provided  that  the  radius of  curvature of  the  surface  of  the 
projecting  part  is at  least  5 mm  and  that,  in relation  to  the 
vertical  projection  of  the body-panel  edge,  the  projection  in no 
case  exceeds  30  mm. 

- m-

4.10.3 

Where  the  nuts and  bolts extend  outside  the  plane  projection  from 
the outer  surface of  the  tyres  (part  of  the  tyres  located  above 
the  horizontal  plane passing  through  the axis of  rotation  of  the 
wheel),  a protector  or  protectors  complying  with  item 4.10.2  above 
shalI  be  fitted. 

4.11 

Jacking  points and exhaust  pipes(s) 

4.11.1 

4.11.2 

Jacking  points and exhaust  pipes(s),  if any, shall  not  extend  more 
than  10 mm  beyond  either  the vertical  projection  of  the  floor  line 
or  the  vertical  projection of  the  intersection of  the  reference 
plane with  the outer  surface of  the  vehicle. 

By way  of  departure  from  this  requirement  an exhaust  pipe may  form 
a projection of more  than  10 mm  provided  that  its extreme  sharp 
ends are  rounded  off  to a minimum  radius of  curvature  of  2.5  mm. 

4.12 

The  projections and distances  shall  be measured  in accordance  with 
the  requirements  referred  to below. 

-183-

APPENDIX 

MEASUREMENT  OF  PROJECTIONS AND  GAPS 

1. 

1.1 

1.2 

1.3 

2. 

2.1 

3. 

3.1 

METHOD  OF  DETERMINING  THE  EXTENT OF  PROJECTION  OF  A  COMPONENT 
MOUNTED  ON THE OUTER  SURFACE 

The  extent  of  projection  of  a component  mounted  on  a convex  panel 
may  be determined  either  directly or  by  reference  to a sketch of 
an appropriate section of  that  component  in  its fitted  position. 

If the extent  of  the projection of  a component  mounted  on  a panel 
other  than convex  cannot  be determined  by means of  a  simple 
measurement  it must  be determined  via  the maximum  variation  in the 
distance  between  the centre of  a 100 mm  diameter  sphere  and  the 
nominal  line of  the panel  when  the sphere  is moved  while  remaining 
constantly  in contact  with  that  component. 

The  extent  of  projection  of,  in particular,  grab  handles shall  be 
measured  in relation  to a plane  passing  through  the  attachment 
points  for  those  handles. 

Figure  2 shows  an  example. 

METHOD OF  DETERMINING  THE  EXTENT OF  PROJECTION OF  HEADLAMP  PEAKS 
AND  SURROUNDS 

The  projection  beyond  the outer  surface of  the  headlamp  shall  be 
measured  horizontally  from  the point  of  tangency  of  a 
100 mm-diameter  sphere  as shown  in Figure  3. 

METHOD  OF  DETERMINING  THE  SIZE OF A GAP  BETWEEN  GRILL  COMPONENTS 

The  size of  any  gap between  grill  components  shall  be determinined 
via  the distance  between  two planes  passing  through  the points of 
tangency  of  the sphere  and  at  right  angles  to  the  line  joining 
those  same  points of  tangency.  Figures 4 and  5 give examples of 
the use of  that  method. 

- / » /-

ANNEX  I I I 

Appendix 1 

INFORMATION DOCUMENT 
IN RESPECT OF EXTERNAL PROJECTIONS FROM A 
TYPE OF TWO OR THREE-WHEEL MOTOR  VEHICLE 

(To be attached  to the application  for component  type approval  where  this  is 
submitted  independently of  the application  for vehicle  type  approval) 

Serial  No  (assigned  by the  applicant) 

The application  for component  type approval  in respect  of external  projections 
from of a type of  two or  three-wheel  motor  vehicle shall  contain  the 
information set out  in Annex  II to Council  Directive 92/61/EEC,  in Section A, 
points: 

0.1 

0.2 

0.4  to  0.6 

1.1 

1.2. 

in the  instance  provided  for by  item 3.5  in Annex  I to this Chapter, please 
describe, where  appropriate, the measures  taken  in order  to ensure  safety. 

- / S t-

ANNEX  I I I 

Appendix 2 

Name of Administration 

CERTIFICATE OF COMPONENT TYPE APPROVAL 
IN RESPECT OF EXTERNAL PROJECTIONS FROM A 
TYPE OF TWO OR THREE-WHEEL MOTOR VEHICLE 

MODEL 

Report No: 

by test i ng body 

Date 

Component type approval No 

Extension No 

1.  Make on trade name of vehicle 

2.  Type of veh i cIe 

3.  Manufacturer 's name and address 

4.  Name and address of manufacturer's representative (if any) 

5.  Vehicle submitted for testing on 

6.  Component type approvaI granted/refused* 

7.  Place 

8.  Date 

9.  Signature 

*  Delete as appropriate. 

-IB' 

CHAPTER  4 

REAR VIEW MIRRORS 
FOR TWO OR THREE-WHEEL  MOTOR  VEHICLES 

ANNEX 1 

DEFINITIONS 

1. 

2. 

3. 

4. 

4.1. 

4.2. 

"Rear view mirror" means a device other than a complex optical 
system, such as a periscope, the aim of which  is to guarantee a 
clear view towards the rear of the vehicle. 

"Inside rear view mirror" means a device as defined  in Item 1 that 
is intended, where appropriate, to be fitted  inside the passenger 
compartment of the vehicle. 

"Outside rear view mirror" means a device as defined  in Item 1 
that  Is intended to be mounted on an outside surface of the 
vehicle. 

"Type of rear view mirror" means devices which do not differ 
significantly from each other  in respect of the following 
essential characteristics : 

The dimensions and radius of curvature of the reflective surface 
of the rear view mirror; 

The design, shape or materials used  in rear view mirrors, 
including their attachment to the vehicle. 

5. 

' "Class of rear view mirrors" means all of the devices having in 

common certain characteristics or functions. These are subdivided 
as fol lows : 

j; ? 

Class I :  Inside mirrors, 

Class L :  "Main" outside mirrors. 

6. 

7. 

8. 

"r" means the average of the radii of curvature measured on a 
reflecting surface  in accordance with the method described in 
item 2 in Appendix 1. 

"Main radius of curvature at a point on the reflecting surface" 
means the values obtained using the apparatus defined in 
Appendix 1 measured on the major arc of the reflecting surface 
passing through the centre of that surface and  lying within a 
vertical plane (r() passing through the centre of that surface, 
and  lying within a horizontal plant, (r'|) and on the major arc 
that  is perpendicular to that segment. 

"Radius of curvature at a point on the reflecting surface  (rp)" 
means the arithmetical mean of the main radii of curvature rj 
and r'|, or  in other words : 

r,+ r'| 

rP 

9. 

10. 

11. 

11.1. 

11.2. 

12 

"Centre of  reflecting  surface" means  the barycentre of  the  visible 
zone of  the  reflecting  surface. 

- I 8 F I-

"Radius of  curvature of  the constituent  part  of  the  rear  view 
mirror" means  the  radius c of  the arc of  the circle which  most 
closely  approximates  the  rounded  form of  the part  under 
consideration. 

"Type of  vehicle  In respect of  rear  view mirrors" means  motor 
vehicles which  do not  differ  among  themselves  in respect  of  the 
following  essential  aspects : 

The  vehicle  characteristics which may  reduce  the  field of  view  and 
affect  the  fitting of  rear  view mirrors; 

The  positions and  types of mandatory  and optional  rear  view  mirror 
where  the  latter  are  fitted. 

"Driver's ocular  points" means  two points 65 mm  apart  located 
635 mm  vertically  above  the R point  relating  to  the  driving 
position  defined  in the appendix  to this annex.  The  straight  line 
Joining  these  is at  right  angles  to the vertical  median 
longitudinal  plane of  the vehicle. 
The  centre of  the segment  having  as  its extremities  the  two ocular 
points  is  located within  a vertical  longitudinal  plane which  must 
pass  through  the centre of  the driver's seating  position  as 
specified  by  the manufacturer. 

13 

"Ambinocular  vision" means  the entire  field  of  vision  obtained  by 
superimposing  the monocular  fields  for  the  right  and  left  eyes 
(see  figure  below). 

E 
OD) 
0E) 
ID) 
IE) 
I 
A 
B 
C 
D 

-  insider  rear  view mirror 

-  driver's eyes 

-  monocular  virtual  images 
-  ambinocular  virtual  image 
-  angular  view  from  the  left  eye 
-  angle of  view  from  the  right  eye 
-  angle of  binocular  view 
-  angle of  ambinocular  view 

-No-
APPENDIX 

PROCEDURE  FOR THE DETERMINATION  OF THE RADIUS OF CURVATURE  "r" 
OF THE REFLECTING SURFACE OF THE REAR VIEW MIRROR 

1. 

MEASUREMENTS 

1.1. 

Apparatus 

The piece of  apparatus known  as a  "spherometer" described  in 
Figure  1 shall  be used. 

1.2. 

Measuring  points 

1.2.1. 

1.2.2. 

The main  radii  of  curvature  are measured  at  three  points  as close 
as possible  to one-third, one-half  and  two-thirds of  the  length of 
the major  arc of  the reflecting  surface passing  through  the  centre 
of  that  surface,  in a vertical  plane, or of  the major  arc  passing 
through  the centre of  that  surface,  in a horizontal  plane,  if the 
latter  part  is the  longer. 

However,  if the dimensions of  the  reflecting  surface make  it 
impossible  to obtain  the measurements  defined  in  Item 7  in this 
Annex  the  inspecting bodies  responsible  for  the  tests may  proceed 
with measurements  at  this point  in two perpendicular  directions 
that  are as close as possible  to those  required  above. 

2. 

CALCULATION OF RADIUS OF CURVATURE  "r" 

"r", expressed  in millimetres,  is calculated  via  the  formula  : 

rpi  + rPx  +  rPj 

where  rpi -  radius of curvature of  the first  measuring  point, 

rp  - radius of  curvature of  the second measuring  point, 

rp  -  radius of  curvature of  the  third measuring  point. 

- Ml  -
Figure  1 

1. 

1.1. 

1.2. 

1.3. 

ANNEX  II 

STRUCTURAL  AND TESTING REQUIREMENTS APPLYING TO THE 
COMPONENT TYPE APPROVAL  OF REAR-VIEW MIRRORS 

GENERAL  REQUIREMENTS 

All  mirrors shall  be adjustable. 

The outer  edges of  the reflecting  surface shall  be encased  in a 
protective  housing  (cup, etc) which, throughout  its perimeter, 
shall  at  all  points and  in all  directions  have a  "c" value of not 
less than  2.5 millimetres.  If the reflecting  surface  protrudes 
beyond  the protective housing  the radius of  curvature  "c" on  the 
perimeter  protruding  beyond  the protective  casing  shall  be not 
less than 2.5 mm  and  the reflecting  surface  shall  retract  into  IM 
protective  housing under  a force of  50 Newtons applied  to the moat 
protruding  point  in relation  to the protective housing  in a 
horizontal  direction  approximately  parallel  to the median 
longitudinal  plane of  the vehicle. 

With  the  rear  view mirror  mounted on  a flat  surface all  of  its 
parts  in all  positions of  adjustment  of  the device and  all  of  the 
parts  remaining  attached  to the supporting  base after  the  test 
provided  for  in  Item 4.2 which  are  likely  to be struck, under 
static  conditions, by a sphere  that  is either  165 mm  in diameter 
in the case of  inside  rear  view mirrors, or  100 mm  in diameter  In 
the case of outside  rear  view mirrors, shall  have a radius of 
curvature  "c" of  at  least  2.5  mm. 

1.3.1. 

The edges of  the attachment  holes or  clearances, the  largest 
diagonal  diameter  of which  is  less than  12 mm,  are not  required  to 
meet  the  radius criteria  provided  for  in  Item  1.3 provided  that 
they  have been  rounded off. 

1.4. 

1.5. 

1.6. 

The  device used  to attach  a rear  view mirror  to a vehicle  shall fct 
designed  in such  a way  that  a cylinder  50 mm  in radius, the axis 
of which  is one of  the swivel  or  rotation  axes enabling  the  rear 
view mirror  as a whole  to swing  back  in the direction  under 
consideration  in the event  of  impact, shall  at  least  partly 
intersect  the surface  to which  the device  is attached. 

The parts of  the outside mirrors  referred  to  in  Items  1.2  and  1.3 
of which  the Shore A-hardness does not exceed 60 shall  be  exempted 
from  the corresponding  requirements. 

Parts of  inside mirrors having  a Shore A-hardness of  less than 50 
and which  are attached  to rigid  supports shall  not  be subject  to 
the provisions of  Items 1.2 and  1.3  save  in respect  of of  those 
supports. 

112) 

2. 

DIMENSIONS 

2.1. 

Inside mirrors  (class  I) 

The  reflecting  surface  shall  have  dimensions  such  that  it  is 
possible  to prescribe on  it a rectangle  one  side  of  which  Is 4 cm 
in  length  and  the other  is "a" : 

a  -  15 cm  x 

3 
! +  1 000 

r 

2.2. 

"Main" outside  mirrors  (class  L) 

2.2.1. 

The minimum  dimensions  of  the  reflecting  surface  shall  be  such 
that  : 

2.2.1.1. 

Its area  shall  not  be  less than  69  cm,, 

2.2.1.2. 

The  diameter  of  circular  mirrors  shall  not  be  less  than  94  mm, 

2.2.1.3. 

Where  rear  view mirrors  are  not  circular  their  dimensions  shall 
enable  a 78 mm-diametre  circle  to be prescribed  on  their 
reflecting  surface. 

2.2.2. 

The maximum  dimensions  of  the  reflecting  surface  shall  be  such 
that  : 

2.2.2.1. 

The  diameter  of  any  circular  rear  view mirror  shall  not  be  greater 
than  150  mm, 

2.2.2.2. 

The  reflecting  surface  of  any  non-circular  rear  view mirror  shall 
lie within  a rectangle  measuring  120 mm  x 200  mm. 

3. 

3.1. 

3.2. 

REFLECTING SURFACE  AND COEFFICIENTS OF  REFLECTION 

The  reflecting  surface  of  a mirror  shall  be  spherically  convex. 

The  "r" value  shall  not  be  less  than  : 

3.2.1. 

1,200  mm  in the  case of  inside mirrors  (class  I); 

3.2.2. 

3.3. 

Average  "r" of  the  radius of  curvature  measured  at  the  reflecting 
surface  shall  not  be  less  than  1,000 mm  nor  more  than  1,500 mm  in 
the case of  Class  L rear  view mirrors. 

The  value  of  the coefficient  of  regular  reflection,  determined  in 
accordance  with  the method  described  in Appendix  I to  this  Annex, 
shall  not  be  less  than  40 X. 

3.4. 

4. 

4.1. 

4.1.1. 

- m-

lf the reflecting surface  is of the dipping type (with "day" and 
"night" positions) it must, in its "day" position enable the 
colours of road traffic signs to be recognized. The value of the 
coefficient of regular reflection  in the "night" position shall 
not be  less than 4 %. 

The reflecting surface shall retain the characteristics required 
by Item 3.3 even after prolonged exposure to bad weather under 
normal conditions of use. 

TESTS 

Rear view mirrors shall be subjected to the tests described In 
Items 4.2 and 4.3. 

The test provided for  in Item 4.2  is not required for all outside 
mirrors no part of which  is less than 2 m from the ground whatever 
the setting selected, the vehicle being  laden up to its 
technically permissible all-up weight. 

The above exception also applies where rear view mirror 
attachments (attachment plates, stems, ball-joints, etc.) are at 
least 2 m above the ground and within the overall width of the 
vehicle. That width shall be measured  in the transverse vertical 
plane passing through the lower-most mirror attachments or through 
any other point ahead of that plane when this latter configuration 
gives a greater overall width. 

In this case, a description shall be supplied which states 
precisely that the rear view mirror  is to be fitted  in such a way 
that  its attachment point shall be located on the vehicle as 
described above. 

When this exemptio^n applies the stem shall be marked indelibly 
with the symbol 2 m. which must also be referred to on the 
component type approval certificate. 

4.2. 

Impact-behaviour test 

4.2.1. 

Description of test device 

4.2.1.1. 

The test device shall comprise a pendulum which  is able to swing 
about 2 horizontal axes that are at right angles to each other and 
one of which  is at right angles to the plane containing the 
release trajectory of the pendulum. 

The end of the pendulum shall comprise a hammer consisting of a 
rigid sphere having a diameter of 165 ± 1 mm covered by 5 mm of 
rubber having a Shore A hardness of 50. 

Provision  is made  for  a device  enabling  the maximum  angle  adopted 
by  the  stem  to be determined  in the  release  plane. 

- m-

A support  that  is rigidly  attached  to  the  body  of  the  pendulum 
mounts  the  samples  under  the  impact  conditions set  out  in 
Item  4.2.2.6. 

Figure  1 below  sets out  the dimensions  for  the  test  rig and  its 
specific  design  features. 

Figure 1 

4.2.1.2. 

The  impact  centre of  the pendulum  is  identical  with  the  centre of 
the  sphere  acting  as  the hammer,  it distance  "I" from  the  swing 
axis  in the  release  plane  is 1 metre ± 5 millimetres. The  reduced 
mass of  the pendulum  is m0  - 6.8  ± 0.05  kilogrammes  ("RIQ"  is 
linked  to  the  total  mass  "m" of  the pendulum  and  distance  Md" 
between  the  centre of gravity  of  the pendulum  and  its axis of 
rotation  via  relation mQ  - m°l). 
1 

4.2.2. 

Description of  test 

4.2.2.1. 

The  rear  view mirror  is attached  to  its base by means of  the 
procedure  recognized  by  the manufacturer  of  the device or, where 
appropriate, by  the builder  of  the vehicle. 

4.2.2.2. 

Directional  positioning  of  the  rear  view mirror  for  the  test 

4.2.2.2.1.  The mirror  is aligned on  the  testing  device on  the pendulum  in 
such  a way  that  the axes which  are horizontal  and  vertical  when 
the mirror  is fitted  to a vehicle  In accordance with  the 
applicants'  instructions are perceptibly  in the same  position. 

4.2.2.2.2.  When  a mirror  is adjustable  against  its base  the  test  shall  be 

carried  out  in the  least  acceptable  fold-back  position, within  the 
setting  limits provided  for by  the applicant. 

4.2.2.2.3.  Where  the rear  view mirror  can be moved  closer  to or  away  from  its 
base  the  relevant  device shall  be placed  in the position  in which 
the distance  between  the housing  and base  is shortest. 

4.2.2.2.4.  Where  the reflecting surface can be moved within  the housing  its 

setting  shall  be such  that  the upper  edge  furthest  from  the 
vehicle  shall  be  in the most  protruding  position  in relation  to 
the  housing. 

4.2.2.3. 

With  the exception  of  test  N*  2 for  inside  rear  view mirrors  see 
item 4.2.2.6.1) the pendulum  is  in the vertical  position while  the 
horizontal  and  vertical  longitudinal  planes passing  through  the 
centre of  the hammer  must  pass  through  the centre of  the 
reflecting surface  as defined  in Annex  1,  Item 9. The  longitudinal 
direction of  swing of  the pendulum  must  be parallel  to the median 
longitudinal  plane of  the vehicle. 

4.2.2.4. 

When, under  the setting  conditions  provided  for  in  Items 4.2.2.1 
and  4.2.2.2,  the components of  the  rear  view mirror  restrict  the 
return movement  of  the hammer  the point  of  impact  must  be 
realigned  in a direction  perpendicular  to the axis of  rotation or 
swivel  under  consideration. 

This shift  must  be  that which  is strictly  necessary  to the 
performance of  the  test.  It must  be  limited  in such  a way  : 

-  that  the sphere encompassing  the hammer  remains  at  least 

tangent  to the cylinder  defined  in  Item  1.4., 

-  or  that  hammer  contact  is at  least  10 mm  from  the perimeter  of 

the reflecting  surface. 

- / V f-

4.2.2.5. 

The  test  consists of  releasing  the  hammer  from  a  height 
corresponding  to a pendulum  angle  of  60 degrees  to  the  vertical  In 
such  a way  that  the  hammer  strikes  the  rear  view mirror  when  the . 
pendulum  reaches  its vertical  position. 

4.2.2.6. 

Mirrors  shall  be struck  in the  following  different  conditions  : 

4.2.2.6.1.  Inside mirrors  (Class  I) 

Test  N'  1  : The  point  of  impact  shall  be  that  defined  In 
Item  4.2.2.3,  the  impact  being  such  that  the  hammer  strikes  the 
rear  view mirror  on  the  reflecting-surface  side. 

Test  N*  2  : On  the edge of  the protective housing  in such  a way 
that  the  resultant  impact  is at  45 degrees  to  the  plane of  the 
reflecting  surface  and  is within  the  horizontal  plane  passing 
through  the centre of  that  surface. The  impact  is directed  to  the 
reflecting-surface  side. 

4.2.2.6.2.  Outside  mirrors  (Class  L) 

Test  N*  1  : The point  of  impact  is that  defined  in  item 4.2.2.3 or 
4.2.2.2,  the  impact  being  such  that  the  hammer  strikes  the  rear 
view mirror  on  its reflecting-surface  side. 

Test  N*  2  : The  point  of  impact  shall  be  that  defined  in 
Item 4.2.2.3 or  4.2.2.4,  the  impact  being  such  that  the  hammer 
strikes  the  rear  view mirror  on  the  side opposite  to  its 
reflecting  surface. 

4.3. 

Bending  test  on  the protective  housing  attached  to  the  stem 

4.3.1. 

Description  of  test 

The  protective  housing  is placed  horizontally  in a device  in such 
a way  that  it  is possible  solidly  to  lock  the  attachment  support 
adjusters.  In the direction  of  the  largest  dimension  of  the 
housing  the end  closest  to  the point  of  attachment  on  the  adjuster 
for  the support  shall  be  immobilized  by  a  15 mm-wide  rigid  stop 
covering  the entire width  of  the  housing. 

At  the other  end  a stop  identical  to  that  described  to  that  above 
is placed  on  the housing  in other  there  to apply  the  intended  test 
loading  (Figure 2 ). 

The end  of  the  housing  opposed  to  that  where  the  force  is 
exercised  may  be  locked  rather  than  held  in position  as shown  in 
Figure  2. 

Example of  rear  view mirror  bending-test  rig 

Metal  wedges 

Adjustable  stop 

Adjustable  support 

Weight  W 

Locking  mechanism 

4.3.3. 

The  test  loading shall  be 25 kilogrammes  and  it shall  be 
maintained  for one minute. 

Figure 2 

5. 

5.1. 

5.1.1. 

5.2. 

5.3. 

5.3.1. 

TEST  RESULTS 

- m-

In the  tests provided  for  in  Item  4.2  the pendulum  shall  continue 
to swing  in such  a way  that  the projection  on  the  release  plane 
and  the position  adopted  by  the stem  form  an angle of  at  least 
20 degrees with  the vertical. 

The  angle  shall  be measured  to an accuracy  of  ±  1 degree. 

This  requirement  shall  not  apply  to rear  view mirrors  stuck  to 
windscreens.  In this case  the  requirements  set  out  in  Item  5.2 
shall  apply  after  the  test. 

During  the  test  provided  for  in  Item 4.2  the  remaining  part  of 
rear  view mirrors glued  to windscreens  after  breakage of  the 
support  shall  not  protrude  beyond  the base by more  than  1 cm  and 
its configuration  following  the  test  shall  meet  the conditions set 
out  in  Item  1.3. 

During  the  tests provided  for  in  Items 4.2  and  4.3  the  reflecting 
surface  shall  not  shatter. 
However, shattering of  the  reflecting  surface  is acceptable  if 
either  of  the  following  conditions  is met  : 

the  fragments  stick  to the base of  the housing  or  to a  surface 
that  is solidly  linked with  this; however, partial  unsticking of 
the glass  is permitted  provided  that  this does not  exceed  2.4 mm 
either  side of  the cracks.  It  is acceptable  if small  shards  detach 
themselves  from  the surface of  the glass  at  the point  of  impact; 

5.3.2. 

the  reflecting  surface  shall  be made of  safety glass. 

-2CQ-
APPENDIX I 

1. 

1.1. 

1.2. 

1.3. 

1.4. 

1.5. 

TEST METHOD  INTENDED TO DETERMINE  REFLECTIVENESS 

DEFINITIONS 

Standardized  ICI A d)  illuminant  colorimetric  illuminant 
representing  a black  body  at  T68 - 2,855.6  Kelvin. 

Standardized  ICI A<1>: gaseous  atmosphere  tungsten  filament  lamp 
operating at  a proximal  colour  temperature  of 
T68  - 2,855.6  Kelvin. 

ICI  1931(1>  reference  colorimetric observer  : radiation  receiver 
the colorimetric  characteristics of which  correspond  to 
trichromatic  spectrum  components  x"U),  y(A), z(^) (see  table). 

ICI  trichromatic  spectrum  components  : trichromatic  components, 
within  the  ICI  (XYZ) system  of  the monochromatic parts of  a 
spectrum  of equal  energy. 

Photopic vision*1)  : normal-eye  vision when  adapted  to  luminance 
levels of  at  least  several  candelas per  square  meter. 

2. 

APPARATUS 

2.1. 

General 

The  apparatus  shall  incorporate  a  light  source  a support  for  the 
test  piece  a photoelectric cell  receiver  and  an  indicator 
(see  Figure  1) together  with  the necessary  means of  suppressing 
the effects of  stray  light. 

The  receiver  may  include  an Ulbricht  sphere  in order  to make  It 
easier  to measure  the coefficient  of  reflection of  non-plane 
(i.e.  convex) rear  view mirrors  (see  Figure 2 ). 

2.2. 

Spectral  characteristics of  the  light  source  and  receiver 

The  light  source shall  be a standardized  ICI A  source  associated 
with  an optical  system  enabling  a beam of  almost  parallel  light 
rays  to be obtained.  It  is recommended  that  a voltage  stabilizer 
be provided  for  in order  to maintain  a fixed  lamp  voltage 
throughout  the  functioning of  the apparatus. 

The  receiver  shall  include a photoelectric cell  the  spectral 
response of which  is proportional  to the photopic  luminosity 
function of  the  ICI  (1931) reference  colorimetric  observer 
(see  table). 
Any other  iIlumlnant-fIIter-receiver  combination  providing  an 
overall  equivalence  to the standardized  ICI A  illuminant  and 
photopic vision may  also be  adopted. 

(1) 

Definitions  extracted  from  ICI publication 50  (45), international 
electrotechnical  vocabulary,  group  45,  lighting. 

If the  receiver  incorporates  an  Ulbricht  sphere  the  inner  surface 
of  the  sphere  shall  be coated  with  matt  (diffuse) white 
non-selective  paint. 

- 20 i -

2.3. 

Geometrical  conditions 

The  beam  of  incident  rays must  preferably  form  an  angle  (6) of 
0.44  ±  0.09  radians  (25 ± 5*) with  the  perpendicular  to  the  test 
surface;  this  angle must,  however,  not  exceed  the upper  limit  of 
the  tolerance  i.e. 0.53  radians or  30*. The  axis of  the  receiver 
must  form  an angle  (6) equal  to  that  of  the beam  of  the  incident 
rays with  said  perpendicular  (see  Figure  1 ). On  its arrival  at  the 
test  surface  the  incident  beam  must  have  a diameter  of  at  least 
19 mm.  The  reflected  beam  must  not  be wider  than  the  sensitive 
surface of  the photoelectric cell, must  not  cover  less  than  50  % 
of  that  surface  and must,  if possible,  cover  the  same  portion of 
the  surface  as  the  beam  used  to calibrate  the  instrument. 

If the  receiver  includes  an Ulbricht  sphere  this  shall  have a 
minimum  diameter  of  127 mm.  The openings made  for  the  testpiece 
and  incident  beam  in the wall  of  the sphere  must  be of  sufficient 
size  to allow  the  incident  and  reflected  light  beams  to  pass 
through  in their  entirety.  The  photoelectric  cell  must  be 
positioned  in such  a way  as not  directly  to  receive  the  light  from 
the  incident  or  reflected  beams. 

t.4. 

Electrical  characteristics of  the combined  cell  and  indicator 

The  power  of  the photoelectric cell  displayed  on  the  indicator 
must  be a  linear  function of  the  light  intensity  of  the 
photosensitive  surface.  Provision  must  be made  for  (electrical  or 
optical) means  (or  both) of  easing,  resetting  and  adjusting  the 
calibration  settings. These  means must  not  affect  the  linearity or 
spectral  characteristics of  the  instrument. The  accuracy  of  the 
combined  receiver  and  indicator  shall  be ±  2 % of  the  full  scale 
or  ±  10 % of  the value measured  in accordance  with  the  smallest 
value. 

2.6. 

Testpiece  support 

Its mechanisms  must  enable  the sample  to be  located  in such  a way 
that  the  axis of  the source  arm  and  that  of  the  receiver  arm  meet 
at  the  level  of  the  reflecting  surface. That  reflecting  surface 
may  be within  the sample  rear  view mirror  or  its two sides, 
depending  on whether  this  is a primary  or  secondary  surface  mirror 
or  a prismatic  mirror  of  the  "ilip"  type. 

3. 

METHOD  OF  PROCEDURE 

3.1. 

Direct  calibration method 

- 202 -

ORIG  : FR 

Where  the direct  calibration method  is used  the  reference  shall  be 
air. This method  can be applied with  instruments  that  have been  so 
devised  as  to permit  calibration  at  full  scale by  aligning  the 
receiver  direct  with  the axis of  the  lights  (see  Figure 1 ). 

In certain  cases  (in order,  for  example,  to measure 
low-reflectiveness surfaces),  this method  enables  an  intermediate 
calibration point  to be  taken  (between 0 and  100 %  scale). 
In these  instances  it  is necessary  to  interpose  a neutral-density 
filter  having  a known  transmission  factor  within  the optical 
trajectory  and  to adjust  the calibration system  until  the 
indicator  shows  the percentage  transmission  corresponding  to the 
neutral-density  filter. That  filter must  be  removed  before  the 
reflectiveness measurements  begin. 

3.2. 

Indirect  calibration  measurements 

This  calibration  method  shall  apply  to  instruments  having  a  source 
and  receiver  with  a fixed geometrical  shape.  It requires a 
suitably  calibrated and maintained  reflection  standard. That 
standard  will  preferably  be a plane  rear  view mirror  the 
coefficient  of  reflection of which  is as close  as possible  to that 

'of  the examples  tested. 

3.3. 

Measurements on  a plane  rear  view mirror 

The  coefficient  of  reflection  of  plane-mirror  test  pieces may  be 
measured  using  instruments employing  the principle of  direct  or 
indirect  calibration. The value of  the coefficient  of  reflection 
is read  direct  from  the  instrument  dial. 

3.4. 

Measurements on  a non-plane  (convex) rear  view mirror 

Measurement  of  the coefficient  of  reflection of  non-plane  (convex) 
rear  view mirrors  requires  the use of  instruments  incorporating an 
Ulbricht  sphere within  the  receiver  (see Figure 2 ). 
If with  a standard  mirror  having  a coefficient  of  reflection of 
E %,  the sphere  readout  gives ne divisions with  an unknown  mirror, 
nx  divisions will  correspond  to a coefficient  of  reflection of 
X %, as given  by  the  following  formula  : 

X -  E nx 
ne 

Flgure  1  :  General  layout  drawing  of the reflectivity  measuring  apparatus 

using  the two calibration  methods 

Readout with settings 

Coefficient of 
reflection in  7. 

Calibration setting 

Resetting 

Testpiece 
support 

Light source and 
collimator 

•Photoelectric cell receiver 
in position for measurement 
and indirect calibration 

Figure  2  :  General  layout  drawing  of the reflectivity  measuring  equipment 

using  an Ulbricht  sphere  in the  receiver 

Light  source aoci 
collimator 

Coefficient  of 
reflection  in % 

Calibration 
setting 

•Test  piece  support 

Values for the spectral  trichromatic components of the ICI 1931<1> 
colorimetric reference observer 

This table has been extracted from publication ICI 50 (45) - 1970 

' 

A 
pm 

380 
390 
400 
410 
420 
430 
440 
450 
460 
470 
480 
490 
500 
510 
520 
530 
540 
550 
560 
570 
580 
590 
600 
610 
620 
630 
640 
650 
660 
670 
680 
690 
700 
710 
720 
730 
740 
750 
760 
770 
780 

x(A) 

y(A) 

x ( A) 

0.001  4 
0.004  2 
0.014  3 
0.043  5 
0.134  4 
0.283  9 
0.348  3 
0.336  2 
0.290  8 
0.195  4 
0.095  6 
0.032  0 
0.004  9 
0.009  3 
0.063  3 
0.165  5 
0.290  4 
0.433  4 
0.594  5 
0.762  1 
0.916  3 
1.026  3 
1.062  2 
1.002  6 
0.854  4 
0.642  4 
0.447  9 
0.283  5 
0.164  9 
0.087  4 
0.046  8 
0.022  7 
0.011  4 
0.005  8 
0.002  9 
0.001  4 
0.000  7 
0.000  3 
0.000  2 
0.000  1 
0.000  0 

0.000  0 
0.000  1 
0.000  4 
0.001  2 
0.004  0 
0.011  6 
0.023  0 
0.038  0 
0.060  0 
0.091  0 
0.139  0 
0.208  0 
0.323  0 
0.503  0 
0.710  0 
0.862  0 
0.954  0 
0.995  0 
0.995  0 
0.952  0 
0.870  0 
0.757  0 
0.631  0 
0.503  0 
0.381  0 
0.265  0 
0.175  0 
0.107  0 
0.061  0 
0.032  0 
0.017  0 
0.008  2 
0.004  1 
0.002  1 
0.001  0 
0.000  5 
0.000  2^2) 
0.000  1 
0.000  1 
0.000  0 
0.000  0 

0.006  5 
0.020  1 
0.067  9 
0.207  4 
0.645  6 
1.385  6 
1.747  1 
1.772  1 
1.669  2 
1.287  6 
0.813  0 
0.465  2 
0.272  0 
0.158  2 
0.078  2 
0.042  2 
0.020  3 
0.008  7 
0.003  9 
0.002  1 
0.001  7 
0.001  1 
0.000  8 
0.000  3 
0.000  2 
0.000  0 
0.000  0 
0.000  0 
0.000  0 
0.000  0 
0.000  0 
0.000  0 
0.000  0 
0.000  0 
0.000  0 
0.000  0 
0.000  0 
0.000  0 
0.000  0 
0.000  0 
0.000  0 

(1)  Abridged table. The y(/t ) and V( A ) values have been rounded up to four 

figures after the decimal point. 

(2)  Amended  in 1966 (from 3 to 2). 

APPENDIX  2 

COMPONENT  TYPE APPROVAL  AND MARKING  OF  REAR  VIEW  MIRRORS 

1. 

MARK ING 

Examples  of  a type of  rear  view mirror  submitted  for  component 
type  approval  shall,  in a clearly  legible  and  indelible  manner, 
receive  the manufacturer's  trade or  brand  mark  and  a space of 
sufficient  size  for  the component  type  approval  mark;  that  space 
shall  be  identified on  the drawings  accompanying  the  request  for 
component  type  approval. 

COMPONENT  TYPE  APPROVAL 

The  application  for  component  type  approval  shall  be  accompanied 
by  four  rear  view mirrors  : three  for  the  tests  and  one  to be kept 
by  the  laboratory  for  any  subsequent  check  which  may  prove  to be 
necessary. Other  examples  may  be  required  at  the  request  of  the 
laboratory. 

Where  the  type of  rear  view mirror  submitted  in accordance  with 
item  1 above meets  the  requirements  of  Annex  II component  type 
approval  shall  be granted  and  a component  type  approval  number 
assigned. 

This  number  shall  then  not  be  assigned  to another  type of  rear 
view mirror. 

MARKS 

All  rear  view mirrors  conforming  to a  type  that  has  been  component 
type  approved  in pursuance  of  this chapter  shall  bear  the 
component  type  approval  mark  as described  in Annex  V  to Council 
Directive  (EEC) No 92/61  of  30.6.1992 on  the  type  approval  of  two 
or  three-wheel  motor  vehicles. 
The  "a" value  defining  the dimensions of  the  rectangle  and  the 
figures  and  letters making  up  the mark  shall  be  not  less  than 6 mm 
large. 

The  component  type  approval  mark  receives  an  additional  symbol  I 
or  L specifying  the class of  rear  view mirror  type. An  additional 
symbol  shall  be  placed  close  to  the  rectangle  surrounding  letter 
"c"  in any  position whatsoever  in relation  to  this. 

The  component  type  approval  mark  and  the additional  symbol  shall 
be  affixed  to an essential  part  of  the  rear  view mirror  in such a 
way  that  they  are  indelible  and  highly  visible  when  the  rear  view 
mirror  is fitted  to  the  vehicle. 

2. 

2.1. 

2.2. 

2.3. 

3. 

3.1. 

3.2. 

3.3. 

-TÛL-

APPENDIX  3 

INFORMATION  DOCUMENT 
IN RESPECT OF 
A TYPE OF  REAR VIEW  MIRROR 
INTENDED FOR 
TWO OR THREE-WHEEL  MOTOR  VEHICLES 

(to be attached  to the application  for  component  type  approval  if this  is 
submitted  separately  from  the application  for  vehicle  type  approval). 

Order  number  (assigned  by  the applicant)  : 

The  application  for  the component  type approval  of  a  type of  rear  view mirror 
intended  for  two or  three-wheel  motor  vehicles  shall  contain  the  following 
information  : 

1. 

2. 

3. 

4. 

5. 

6. 

7. 

Make or  t rade name of  vehIcIe  : 

Name  and  address of manufacturer  : 

Name  and  address of manufacturer's  representative  (if  any)  : .. 

Class of  type of  rear  view mirror  : I / L<1) 

Symbol  2 m  provided  for  in  item  4.1.1  in Annex  II  : y e s / n o ^) 

Items 1.2.1  and  1.2.2  in L 90/17. 

Items 1.2.1  and  1.2.2  in L 90/17. 

(1) 

Delete  as  appropriate. 

- Z 0 9-
APPENOIX  4 

CERTIFICATE OF COMPONENT TYPE  APPROVAL 
IN RESPECT OF 
A TYPE OF REAR VIEW MIRROR 
INTENDED FOR 
TWO OR THREE-WHEEL MOTOR  VEHICLES 

Name of  administration 

Report  n* 

by  testing  body 

date 

Component  type approval  number 

Extension N 

1. 

2. 

3. 

5. 

6. 

7. 

8. 

9. 

Make or  trade name of  rear  view mirror  : . 

Type  and  class of  rear  view mirror  : 

Name  and  address of manufacturer  : 

Name and  address of manufacturer's  representative  (if  any) 

Rear  view mirror  submitted  for  testing on  : 

Component  type approval  granted/refused^1) 

Place  : 

Date  : 

Signature  : 

(1)  Delete  as  appropriate. 

1. 

1.1. 

1.2. 

1.3 

1.4 

2. 

2.1 . 

-?ûb-

ANNEX  III 

REQUIREMENTS GOVERNING THE FITTING OF REAR VIEW MIRRORS TO VEHICLES 

Position 

All  rear  view mirrors  shall  be attached  in such  a way  that  they 
remain  in a stable position under  normal  vehicle  driving 
condit ions. 

Rear  view mirrors  shall  be positioned  in such  a way  as  to enable 
the driver  sitting on  the seat  in his normal  driving  position, to 
view  the  road  to the  rear of  the vehicle. 

The  rear  view mirror(s) for unbodied  vehicles must  be  fitted  or 
set  in such  a way  that  the centre of  the  reflecting  surface  la at 
least  280 mm  towards  the outside of  the median  longitudinal  plane 
of  the vehicle.  Before  the measurement  the handlebars must  remain 
in the position  corresponding  the vehicle's  travelling  in a 
straight  line and  the rear  view mirror(s) must  be set  in their 
normal  position of use. 

Item 3 of  Annex  111  to Directive 71/127 applying  to category Ml 
and  N1  vehicles shall  apply  to bodied  vehicles. 

Number 

Minimum  number  of  rear  view mirrors  required  for  unbodied  vehicles 

Category  of  vehicle 

Main  outside 
mirror(s) 

Class L 

Moped 
Motorcycle 
Tricycle 

- 
- 

1 
2 
2 

m 

2.2 

Minimum  number  of  rear  view mirrors  required  for  bodied  vehicles 

- Z Ô 4-

Category of  vehicle 

Three-wheel  moped 

Tricycle 

Inside 
mirror 

Main outside 
mirror(s) 

Class  I 

Class L 

1<1) 

1<1) 

1  if there 
is an  inside 
mirror 
2  if there  is 
not  an  inside 
mirror 

2.3 

2.4 

2.5 

2.5.1 

2.5.2 

2.5.3 

3. 

3.1. 

Where  a single outside  rear  view mirror  is fitted  this shall  be 
located on  the  left  hand  side of  the vehicle  in those 
Member  States where  the traffic  drives on  the right  and on  the 
right  hand  side of  the vehicle  in those Member  States where  the 
traffic  drives on  the  left. 

Class  III  rear  view mirrors component  type approved  in accordance 
with  the provisions of Directive 71/127/EEC  relating  to rear  view 
mirrors  for motor  vehicles are also acceptable  for mopeds, 
motorcycles  and  tricycles. 

Maximum  number  of optional  rear  view mirrors 

The  fitting of  an outside  rear  view mirror  on  the side of mopeds 
opposite  to that of  the mandatory  rear  view mirror  referred  to in 
Item 2.1  is permissible. 

The  fitting of  an outside  rear  view mirror  on  the side of  bodied 
vehicles opposite  to that of  the mandatory  rear  view mirror 
referred  to  in  Item 2.2  is permissible. 

The  rear  view mirrors  referred  to  in  Items 2.5.1  and  2.5.2  shall 
meet  the requirements of  this chapter. 

Adjustment 

Drivers shall  be able  to adjust  rear  view mirrors  from  their 
driving position.  In the case of  three-wheel  vehicles  having 
body-work  the mirror may be adjusted with  the door  closed but  the 
window may  be open. However,  the mirror  may  in any  case be  locked 
in position  from  the outside. 

(1)  No  inside  rear  view mirror  is required  if the visibility  conditions 

referred  to  in  Item 4.1  below cannot  be met.  In this case  two outside 
rear  view mirrors  are  required, one on  the  left  and one on  the right 
hand  side of  the vehicle. 

3.2. 

4. 

4.1 

4.1.1 

-?fO -

Rear  view mirrors which  can  be  restored  to  their  original  position 
without  adjustment  after  being  pushed  backwards  are  not  subject  to 
the  requirements of  item  3.1. 

Field  of  vision  in the case of  bodied  vehicles. 

Inside  rear  view mirror 

The  field  of  vision  shall  be  that  defined  in  Item  5.2  in Annex  III 
to Directive  71/127/EEC. 

4.2 

Outside  rear  view mirror 

4.2.1 

4.3 

The  field of  vision  shall  be  that  defined  in  Items 5.3.1,  5.3.1.1, 
5.3.2  and  5.3.2.1  in Annex  111  to Directive  71/127/EEC. 

The  requirements  concerning  obstructions  to  the  field  of  vision  as 
defined  in  Item 5.7  in Annex  111  to Directive  71/127  shall  apply. 

-Zll  -
APPENDIX 1 

INFORMATION  DOCUMENT 
IN RESPECT OF 
THE FITTING OF A REAR VIEW MIRROR 
OR REAR VIEW MIRRORS 
TO A TYPE OF 
TWO OR THREE-WHEEL MOTOR  VEHICLE 

(to be attached  to the application for component  type approval  If this  is 
submitted  separately  from  the application  for  vehicle  type  approval). 

Order  number  (assigned  by  the applicant) : 

The application  for  the component  type approval  of  the  fitting of  a rear  view 
mirror  or mirrors  to a type of  two or  three-wheel  motor  vehicle  shall  contain 
the  information  set  out  in Annex  II to Directive  (EEC) No 92/61  of 30.6.1992: 

-  under  A,  item n* 

0.1. 

0.2. 

0.4. to 0.6. 

-  under  letter B,  item n*  1.1.1. to 1.1.5. 

- under  letter  C,  item n' 2.6.1. to 2.6.5. 

-VI-

APPENDIX 2 

CERTIFICATE OF COMPONENT TYPE APPROVAL 
IN RESPECT OF 
THE FITTING OF A MIRROR OR MIRRORS 
TO A TYPE OF TWO OR THREE-WHEEL MOTOR VEHICLE 

Name of administration 

Report n' 

by testing body 

date 

Component  type approval number N' 

Extension N* 

1. 

2. 

3. 

5. 

6. 

7. 

8. 

9. 

Make or trade name of vehicle  : 

Type and class of vehicle : 

Name and address of manufacturer  : 

Name and address of manufacturer's representative (if any) : . 

Vehicle submitted for testing on  : 

Component  type approval granted/refused^) 

PI ace : 

Date  : 

Signature  : 

(1)  Delete as appropriate. 

-It's 

CHAPTER  5 

MEASURES TO BE TAKEN AGAINST AIR POLLUTION 

CAUSED BY TWO- OR THREE-WHEEL MOTOR  VEHICLES 

-2IH-

LIST OF ANNEXES 

ANNEX  I: 

Specifications for measures  to be  taken against  air  pollution 
caused  by mopeds 

Appendix  1: Type  I test 

*Sub-appendix  1:  Operating cycle on  roller  bench  (Type  I test) 

*Sub-appendix  2:  Example N'1 of  an exhaust  gas collection  system 

*Sub-appendix  3:  Example N'2 of  an exhaust  gas collection system 

*Sub-appendix  4:  Method of  calibrating  the roller  bench 

Appendix  2: Type  II test 

ANNEX  II: 

Specifications for measures  to be taken against  air pollution 
caused  by motorcycles and motor  tricycles 

Appendix  1: Type  I test 

*Sub-appendix  1:  Operating  cycle of  petrol  engines  for  the Type i 

test 

*Sub-appendix  2:  Example  1 of  an exhaust  gas collection system 

*Sub-appéndix  3:  Example  2 of  an exhaust  gas collection  system 

Appendix  2: Type  II test 
*Sub-appendix  1:  Method of  calibrating  the on-road  power 

absorption  by  the  torque brake  for  motorcycles 
or motor  tr icycles 

ANNEX  III:  Specifications for measures  to be  taken against  air  pollution 

caused  by  two- or  three-wheel  motor  vehicles equipped with a 
compress ion-ignition engine 

Appendix  1: Steady-state operation  test over  the  full  load curve 

Appendix  2: Free acceleration  test 

Appendix  3: Limit  values applicable  in steady-state  tests 

Appendix  4: Specifications of opacimeters 

Appendix  5:  Installation and use of  the opacimeter 

ANNEX  IV:  Specifications for  the reference  fuel 

ANNEX  V: 

Information document  in respect of measures  to be  taken  against 
air  pollution caused by a type of  two- or  three-wheel  motor 
vehicle 

ANNEX  VI: 

Certificate of  component  type approval  in respect of measures  to 
be  taken against  air pollution caused by a type of  two- or  three-
wheel  motor  vehicle 

SPECIFICATIONS FOR MEASURES TO BE TAKEN AGAINST ATMOSPHERIC POLLUTION 
CAUSED BY MOPEDS 

ANNEX I 

1. 

1.1 

1.1.2 

1.1.3 

1.2 

1.3 

2. 

2.1 

2.2 

2.2.1 

DEFINITIONS 
For  the purposes of  this chapter: 

"Vehicle  type with  regard  to the emission of gaseous pollutants 
from  the engine" means mopeds which  do not  differ  in essential 
respects,  in particular  as regards  the following points: 

The equivalent  inertia determined  in relation  to the  reference 
mass, as  laid down  in  item 5.2 of Appendix  1; 

The characteristics of  the engine and  the moped  as defined  in 
items 1-6  and 8 of Appendix  3; 

"Reference mass" means  the mass of  the moped  in running order, 
increased  by a uniform mass of 75 kg.  The mass of  the moped  in 
running order  is  its total  unladen mass with  all  tanks  filled 
to at  least 90% of  their maximum  capacity; 

Gaseous pollutants 
"Gaseous pollutants" means carbon monoxide, hydrocarbons, and 
oxides of  nitrogen expressed  in terms of  nitrogen  dioxide 
(NO2) equivalence. 

TEST SPECIFICATIONS 

General 

The components  liable  to affect  the emission of  gaseous 
pollutants  shall  be so designed, constructed  and assembled  as 
to enable  the moped,  in normal  use, despite  the vibrations  to 
which  it may  be subjected,  to comply  with  the  requirements of 
this Annex. 

Description of  tests 

The moped  shall  be subjected  to Types  1 and  II tests, as 
specif ied below: 

2.2.1.1 

Type  I test  (checking  the average emissions of  gaseous 
pollutants  in a congested  urban  area). 

2.2.1.1.1 

The vehicle shall  be placed on a dynamometer  bench  equipped 
with  a brake and a flywheel.  A  test  lasting  a total  of 
448 seconds and comprising  four  cycles shall  be carried out 
without  interruption. 

Each  cycle shall  comprise  seven operations  (idling, 
acceleration, steady  speed, deceleration, etc.).  During  the 
test  the exhaust  gases shall  be diluted with  air  so that  the 
flow volume of  the mixture  remains constant.  Throughout  the 
test: 

--Z\'{-

a continuous  flow of  samples of  the mixture  shall  be passed 
into a bag  so that  the concentrations  (average  test  values) 
of  carbon monoxide, unburnt  hydrocarbons  and oxides of 
nitrogen  can be determined  in succession; 

the  total  volume of  the mixture  shall  be  measured. 

At  the end of  the test  the distance effectively  travelled shall 
be  recorded  from  the  total  shown on  the additive  revolution 
counter  driven by  the roller. 

The  test  shall  be carried out  by  the procedure  described  in 
Appendix  1.  The methods used  to collect  and  analyse  the gases 
shall  be those  laid down. 

Subject  to the provisions of  item 2.2.1.1.4  below,  the test 
shall  be carried  out  three  times.  The mass of  the carbon 
monoxide, hydrocarbons  and nitrogen oxides obtained  in each 
test  should  be  less than  the  limit  values set  out  In the  table 
be Iow. 

2.2.1.1.2 

2.2.1.1.3 

Stages 

HOMOLOGATION 
AND CONFORMITY 
OF  PRODUCTION 

CO 
(g/km) 
L1 

HC+NOx 
(g/km) 
L2 

01.01.1997  (1) 

6(1) 

3(1) 

01.10.1999  (1) 

1(2) 

1,2 

(1) 

(2) 

The  limit  values for  the masses of CO and HC+NOx  shall  be 
multiplied  by  the  factor  2  in the case of  three-wheel  mopeds and 
Iight  quadr icycles 

The  limit  for  the mass of CO shall  be 3.5 g/km  in the case of 
three-wheel  mopeds and  light  quadricycles. 

-m-

2.2.1.1.3.1 

However, one of  the three  results  for each of  the 
abovementioned  pollutants may  exceed  the  limit  value  prescribed 
for  the moped  concerned  by  a maximum of  10%, provided  that  the 
arithmetic  mean of  the three  results  is  less than  the 
prescribed  limit value.  If more  than one pollutant  exceeds  the 
prescribed  limit  values,  it  is  immaterial  whether  this occurs 
in the same  test or  in different  tests. 

2.2.1.1.4 

The number  of  tests prescribed  in  item 2.2.1.1.3 above shall  be 
reduced  under  the conditions described  below, where V1  is the 
result  of  the first  test  and V2  is the  result  of  the second 
test  for each of  the pollutants  referred  to  in  item  2.2.1.1.3. 

2.2.1.1.4.1 

Only  one  test  is required  if V1  < 0.70L  for  all  the  pollutants 
concerned. 

2.2.1.1.4.2 

Only  two tests are  required  if V1  <. 0.85L  for  all  the 
pollutants concerned  and  if, for  at  least one pollutant, 
V1  > 0.-70L.  In addition, for each of  the pollutants  concerned, 
V2 must  be such  that  V1  + V2 < 1.70L  and V2 < L. 

2.2.1.2 

Type  II test  (test of  carbon monoxide  and  unburnt 
hydrocarbons emissions at  idling  speed). 

2.2.1.2.1 

The mass of  carbon monoxide and  the mass of  unburnt 
hydrocarbons emitted  with  the engine  at  idling speed  shall  be 
measured  for one minute. 

2.2.1.2.2 

This  test  shall  be carried out  in accordance  with  the  procedure 
described  in Appendix 2. 

3. 

3.1 

3.1.1 

3.1.1.1 

3.1.2 

CONFORMITY  OF PRODUCTION 

The  provisions of  paragraph  1, Annex  IV to Directive  92/61/EEC 
on  the  type approval  of  two- or  three-wheel  motor  vehicles 
shall  apply  to the checking  of conformity  of  production. 

However, the  following approach  shall  be adopted  when  checking 
conformity  with  regard  to the  type  1 test: 

a vehicle  shall  be  taken  from  the production  line and  subjected 
to the  test  described  in  item 2.2.1.1  in this Annex.  The  limit 
values specified  shall  be  taken  from  the table  in  item 
2.2.1.1.3 under  the title  "conformity  of  production". 

If the vehicle  taken  from  the production  line does not meet  the 
requirements of  item 3.1.1  above  its manufacturer  may  request 
that measurements be  taken  from a sample of  vehicles  taken  from 
the production  line which  includes the vehicle  initially 
selected.  Its manufacturer  shall  lay down  the size of  the 
sample.  The arithmetical  mean  x of  the results obtained  with 
the sample and  the type S divergence of  the sample will  then be 
determined  for each pollutant  gas.  Series production  shall  be 
considered  to be  in conformity  if the following  condition  is 
met : 

--?/',-

x + k . S < L  1) 

where 

L:  is the limit  value  required by the table  in item  2.2.1.1.3, 

under  the heading  "conformity of production" for each 
pollutant gas under  consideration; 

k : 

statistical  factor  depending upon n and set out in the table 
below: 

N 

k 

n 

k 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

0.973 

0.613 

0.489 

0.421 

0.376 

0.342 

0.317 

0.296 

0.279 

11 

12 

13 

14 

15 

16 

17 

18 

19 

0.265 

0.253 

0.242 

0.233 

0.224 

0.216 

0.210 

0.203 

0.198 

Where n >. 20, k 

0.860 

\n 

n 
X -  5~~ Xj/n 
nr-i 

D 

n 

- x)2 

i-1 

n - 1 

where x'  is any one of the individual 
results obtained with sample n 

-IZC-

APPENDIX 1 

TYPE  I TEST 

(checking the average emission of pollutants  in a congested urban area) 

1. 

INTRODUCTION 

Procedure for Type  I test specified  in item 2.2.1.1  in Annex I 

2. 

2.1. 

OPERATING CYCLE ON THE DYNAMOMETER  BENCH 

Description of cycle 

The operating cycle on the dynamometer bench shall be that 
indicated  in the following table and plotted  in Appendix 1. 

Operating cycle on the dynamometer bench 

Phase 

Operation 

m/s2 

km/h 

sec 

Accélérât ion 

Speed 

Durât ion 

CumuI. 
t ime 
sec 

1 
2 
3 
4 
5 
6 
7 

Idi ing 
Accélérât ion) 
Steady speed) 
Decelerat ion) 
Steady speed 
Decelerat ion 
Id Iing 

Full throttle 
FulI throttle 
- 0.56 

- 0.93 

0 - max 
max 
max-20 
20 
2 0 -0 

8 

) 
) 57 
) 

36 
6 
5 

8 

65 
101 
107 
112 

2.2. 

General conditions for carrying out the cycle 

Preliminary  testing cycles shall be carried out  if necessary to 
determine how best to actuate the accelerator and, if 
necessary, the gears and brake. 

2.3. 

Use of the gearbox 

The gearbox shall be used  in accordance with the manufacturer's 
instructions.  If there are no manufacturer's  instructions the 
following rules shall apply: 

2.3.1 

Manual gearbox 

At a steady speed of 20 km/h, the engine speed shall as far as 
possible remain between 50 and 90% of maximum.  If this speed 
can be achieved using more than one gear, the moped shall be 
tested using the highest gear. 
During acceleration, the moped shall be tested using the gear 
which allows maximum acceleration.  The next highest gear shall 
be engaged at the  latest when the engine speed has reached 110% 
of rated maximum output.  During deceleration, the next  lowest 
gear shall be engaged before the engine begins to vibrate and 

-?Z  r 

at  the  latest  when  the engine  speed  has  fallen  to 30% of  rated 
maximum  output.  First  gear  shall  not  be engaged  during 
deceleration. 

2.3.2 

Automatic  gearbox  and  torque  converter 

2.4. 

2.4.1 

2.4.2 

2.4.3 

3. 

3.1. 

3.1.1 

3.1.2 

3.1.3 

3.1.4 

3.1.5 

The  "drive" setting  shall  be used. 

Tolerances 

A  tolerance of  1 km/h  above or  below  the theoretical  speed 
shall  be allowed  during all  phases. 

Speed  tolerances greater  than  those prescribed  shall  be 
permitted  during  phase  changes provided  that  the  tolerances  are 
never  exceeded  for more  than 0.5  second on  any one  occasion. 

If the moped  decelerates more  rapidly  than expected  without  use 
of  the brakes, the procedure  specified  in  item 6.2.6.3.  shall 
apply. 

Tolerances of 0.5  second  above or  below  the  theoretical  times 
shalI  be a I lowed. 

The  speed  and  time  tolerances  shall  be combined  as shown  in 
sub-Appendix  1 to this Annex. 

MOPED AND FUEL 

Test  moped 

The moped  shall  be presented  in good mechanical  condition.  It 
shall  have been  run  in and  have been driven  at  least  250 km 
before  the  test. 

The exhaust  device  shall  not  have any  leaks  likely  to  reduce 
the quantity  of gases collected, which  shall  be  the quantity of 
gases emerging  from  the engine. 

The  leak-tightness of  the  induction  system  may  be checked  to 
ensure  that  carburation  is not  affected  by an accidental  intake 
of  air. 

The  settings of  the engine  and  the moped's controls  shall  be 
those prescribed  by  the manufacturer.  This also applies,  in 
particular,  to the  idling speed  adjustment  (rotating  speed  and 
carbon monoxide  content  of  exhaust  gases),  to  the  automatic 
choke  and  to the exhaust  gas clean-up  system. 

The  laboratory  may  verify  that  the moped  delivers  the 
performance  specified  by  its manufacturer,  that  it can  be used 
for  normal  driving, and more particularly  that  it  is capable of 
starting  when cold  and when  hot  and  can  idle without  stalling. 

3.2. 

Fuel 

-ZVL-

The  fuel  used  for  the  test  shall  be  the  reference  fuel 
recommended  by  the  manufacturer,  the  specifications  for  which 
are  set  out  in Annex  IV.  If  the  engine  is  lubricated  by  a 
mixture,  the  oil  added  to  the  reference  fuel  shall  comply  as  to 
quality  and  quantity  with  the  manufacturer's  recommendations. 

4. 

4.1. 

TEST  EQUIPMENT 

Dynamometer  bench 

The  main  characteristics  of  the  bench  shall  be  as  follows: 

load  curve  equation:  on  the  bench  it  shall  be  possible, 
from  the  initial  speed  of  12  km/h,  to  reproduce,  with  a 
tolerance  of  ±15%,  the  power  developed  by  the  engine  when 
the  moped  is  travelling  along  a  flat  road  with  a  wind  speed 
of  virtually  zero. 
Otherwise  the  power  absorbed  by  the  brakes  and  the  internal 
friction  of  the  bench  (PA)  shall  be: 

at  a  speed  0  < V  <. 12  km/h: 
0  < PA  <  k v 312  +  5 %  k v 312  +  5  %  Pyso1 

for  a  speed  V  >  12  km/h: 

PA  -  kV3  ±  5 %  kv3  ±  5 %  PV 50

  1 

without  being  negative  (the  calibration  method  shall  comply 
with  the  provisions  of  Sub-appendix  4) 

basic  inert ia:  100  kg 
additional  inertias2:  from  10  to  10  kg 
the  roller  shall  have  a  revolution  counter  which  can  be 
reset  to  0,  so  as  to measure  the  distance  actually 
travel led. 

4.2. 

Gas-col lection  equipment 

4.2.1 

4.2.2 

The  gas-collection  equipment  shaI I consist  of  the  following 
components  (see  Sub-appendices  2  and  3  to  this  Appendix): 

A  device  to  collect  all  the  exhaust  gases  produced  during  the 
test,  whilst  maintaining  atmospheric  pressure  at  the  moped 
exhaust  outlet(s). 

A  tube  connecting  the  exhaust  gas  collection  equipment  and  the 
exhaust  gas  sampling  system. 

This  connecting  tube  and  the  gas  collection  equipment  shall  be 
made  of  stainless  steel,  or  of  another  material  which  will  not 
affect  the  composition  of  the  gases  collected  and  will  resist 
their  temperature. 

1  For  a  single  roller  having  a  diameter  of  400  mm. 
2  These  additional  masses  may  possibly  be  replaced  by  an  electronic  device 
provided  that  the  equivalence  of  the  results  is  demonstrated. 

4.2.3 

4.2.4 

4.2.5 

4.2.6 

4.2.7 

- 2 2 A-

A device  to suck  in the diluted  gases.  This device must 
guarantee  constant  flow of  a sufficient  volume  to ensure  that 
all  the exhaust  gases are sucked  in. 

A sampling probe attached  to the outside of  the gas collection 
device which  can collect  a constant  sample of  the dilution air 
using  a pump, a filter  and  a flow meter  for  the duration of  the 
test. 

A sampling probe directed  upstream  of  the  flow of  diluted gases 
to sample  the mixture  for  the duration of  the  test  at a 
constant  rate of  flow using,  if necessary, a filter, a flow 
meter  and  a pump.  The minimum  rate of  flow of  the gases  in the 
two sampling systems described  above shall  be at  least  150 l/h. 

Three-way  valves on  the sampling circuits described  above  to 
direct  the  flow of  samples either  to the atmosphere or  to their 
respective  sampling bags  for  the duration of  the test. 

Leak-tight  sampling bags to collect  the dilution air  and 
mixture of  diluted  gases which  are unaffected  by  the pollutants 
concerned  and of  sufficient  capacity  not  to disrupt  the normal 
flow of  sampling.  These  sampling bags shall  have automatic 
sealing  devices which  can be closed  rapidly  and  tightly, either 
on  the sampling  circuit  or on  the analysis  circuit  at  the end 
of  the test. 

4.2.8. 

There shall  be a method of measuring  the  total  volume of 
diluted  gases passing  through  the sampling device  during  the 
test. 

4.3. 

Analytical  equipment 

4.3.1. 

The sampling  probe may  consist  of  a sampling  tube  leading  into 
thé collecting bags or of a bag-emptying  tube.  The probe shall 
be of  stainless steel  or of  a material  which  will  not  affect 
the composition of  the gases.  The sampling probe and  the  tube 
connecting  it to the analyser  shall  be at ambient  temperature. 

4.3.2. 

Analysers  shall  be of  the following  types: 

the non-dispersive  type with  infra-red  absorption  for 
carbon monox ide; 
the flame-ionization  type  for  hydrocarbons 
the chemiluminescent  type  for oxides of  nitrogen. 

4.4. 

Accuracy of  instruments and  measurements 

4.4.1. 

4.4.2. 

As  the brake  is calibrated  in a separate  test  (item  5.1), it is 
not necessary  to  indicate  the accuracy  of  the dynamometer.  The 
total  inertia of  the rotating masses,  including  that of  the 
rollers and  the rotating  part of  the brake  (see  item 4.1), 
shall  be given  to within  +. 5 kg. 

The distance  travelled  by  the moped  shall  be determined  by  the 
number  of  revolutions made by  the  roller  to within  an accuracy 
of  + 10 m. 

-  'ITH  -

4.4.3. 

The  speed  of  the moped  shall  be measured  by  the  speed of 
rotation of  the  roller.  It shall  be measurable  to within  ± 1 
km/h  for  speeds  above  10 km/h. 

4.4.4. 

Ambient  temperature  shall  be measurable  to within  +. 2*  C. 

4.4.5. 

4.4.6. 

4.4.7. 

4.4.8. 

4.4.9. 

4.4.10. 

4.4.11. 

4.4.12. 

5. 

5.1. 

The  atmospheric  pressure  shall  be measurable  to within 
±  2 mbar. 

The  relative  humidity  of  the ambient  air  shall  be measurable  to 
within ± 5%. 

Irrespective of  the accuracy  with which  the sampling  gases are 
determined,  the accuracy  required  when measuring  the content of 
the various pollutants shall  be +. 3%.  The overall  response 
time of  the analysing  circuit  shall  be  less than one minute. 

The  content  of  the standard  (calibration) gases  shall  not 
differ  by more  than  +. 2% from  the  reference  value of  each gas. 
The diluents shall  be nitrogen  for  carbon monoxide  and  oxides 
of  nitrogen  and  air  for  hydrocarbons  (propane). 

The  speed of  the cooling  air  shal I be measurable  to within  + 5 
km/h. 

~~ 

The  tolerance  allowed over  the duration  of  the gas  sampling 
cycles  and operations shall  be +. 1 second. 
These  times shall  be measurable  with  an accuracy  of  0.1  second. 

The  total  volume of  the diluted  gases  shall  be measurable  to 
within  ±  3%. 

The  total  flow and  sampling  flow shall  be constant  to within 
±  5%. 

PREPARING THE TEST 

Sett ing of  brake 

The brake shall  be so adjusted  that  the  speed  of  the moped on 
the bench  at  full  throttle  shall  be equal  to the maximum  speed 
of  which  it  is capable on  the  road, with  a tolerance of  ± 1 
km/h.  This maximum  speed may  not  deviate  by more  than + 2 km/h 
from  the  rated maximum  speed  as specified  by  the  manufacturer. 
If the moped  is fitted  with  a device  to govern  the maximum 
speed  on  the  road,  the effect  of  this governor  shall  be  taken 
into account. 

The  brake may  be adjusted  using  a different  method  if the 
manufacturer  demonstrates  its equivalence. 

5.2. 

Adjustment  of  equivalent  inertias  to the moped's  translatory 
inertias. 

One or more  flywheels  shall  be used  enabling  a total  inertia of 
the  rotating masses  to be obtained  that  is proportional  to the 
reference mass of  the moped  within  the  following  limits: 

-Zï£-

Reference mass 
of moped P (kg) 

Equivalent  inertias 
(kg) 

105  < 
115  < 
125  < 
.135  < 
145  < 
165  < 
185  < 
205  < 
225  < 
245  < 
270  < 
300  < 
330  < 
360  < 
395  < 
435  < 

RM 
RM 
RM 
RM 
RM 
RM 
RM 
RM 
RM 
RM 
RM 
RM 
RM 
RM 
RM 
RM 
RM 

t 
< 
< 
? 
k 
< 
* 
* 
3 
* 
-< 
< 
S 
3 
"< 
* 
* 

105 
115 
125 
135 
145 
165 
185 
205 
225 
245 
270 
300 
330 
360 
395 
435 
475 

100 
110 
120 
130 
140 
150 
170 
190 
210 
230 
260 
280 
310 
340 
380 
410 

5.3. 

5.3.1 

5.3.2 

5.4. 

5.4.1 

Cooling  the moped 

For  the duration of the test, an auxiliary  forced-draught 
device  shall  be placed  in front  of the moped  in such  a way as 
to  direct  a flow of cooling  air on to the engine.  The air flow 
speed  shall  be 25 +5  km/h.  The blower's  air outlet  shall be 
at  least  0.2 m2  in section,  its plane  shall  be perpendicular 
to the longitudinal  axis of the moped  and it shall  be placed 
between  30 and 45 cm ahead of the moped's  front  wheel.  The 
device  for measuring  the linear  speed  of the forced  draught 
shall  be placed  in the middle of the jet of air 20 cm from the 
air  outlet.  As far as possible  the air speed  shall  be constant 
across  the whole  outlet  section. 

The  moped may also be cooled  using  the alternative  method 
described  below.  A flow of air of variable  speed  is directed 
at  the moped.  The blower  shall  be regulated  in such  a way that 
within  the operating  range,  which  is kept  below  10 km/h, the 
linear air speed  at the blower  outlet  is equal  to the 
equivalent  roller  speed  to within  ± 5 km/h.  At  equivalent 
roller  speeds of  less  than  10 km/h,  the forced-draught air 
speed may be zero.  The blower  outlet  shall  be at  least 
0.2  m2  in section  and its lower  edge  shall  be between  15 and 
20 cm above  ground  level.  The plane of the outlet  shall be 
perpendicular  to the longitudinal  axis of the moped  and it 
shall  be placed  between  30 and 45 cm in front  of the moped's 
front  wheel. 

Conditioning of the moped 

Immediately  before  starting  the first  test  cycle,  the moped 
shall  undergo  four  consecutive  test  cycles,  each  lasting 
112  seconds  in order  to warm  up the engine. 

-?Zé 

-

5.4.2. 

5.4.3. 

The  tyre pressure  shall  be  that  stated  by  the manufacturer  for 
normal  road use.  However,  if the diameter  of  the  rollers  is 
less than 500 mm, the pressure  in the  tyres may  be  increased by 
30-50%. 

Load on  the driving wheel:  the  load on  the driving  wheel  shall 
be equal  to within + 3 kg of  the  load on a moped  in normal  road 
use, with  a driver  weighing  75 kg, +5  kg, sitting  in an 
upright  position. 

5.5. 

Checking of  back-pressure 

5.5.1. 

During  the preliminary  tests a check  shall  be made  to ensure 
that  the back-pressure  set up by  the sampling  device does not 
deviate  from atmospheric pressure by more  than + 7 .5  mbar. 

5.6. 

Calibration of  analytical  apparatus 

5.6.1. 

Calibration of  analysers 

The quantity of gas at  the pressure  stated  to be  compatible 
with  the correct  functioning  of  the equipment  shall  be  injected 
into the analyser  by means of  the flowmeter  and  discharge gauge 
mounted on each  bottle.  The apparatus shall  be adjusted  to 
indicate as a stabilized  value  the value shown on  the 
standard-gas bottle.  Starting  from  the setting obtained with 
the maximum-content  bottle, the curve of  the  analyser's 
deviations shall  be drawn as a function of  the content  of  the 
various standard-gas bottles used. 

5.6.2. 

Overall  response  time of  the apparatus. 

The gas  from  the maximum-content  bottle shall  be  injected  into 
the end of  the sampling  probe.  A check  shall  be made  to ensure 
that  the  indicated  value corresponding  to maximum  deviation  is 
attained  in  less than one minute.  If this value  is not 
attained,  the analysing  circuit  shall  be  inspected  from end  to 
end  for  leaks. 

PROCEDURE  FOR BENCH TESTS 

Special  conditions  for  carrying out  the cycle 

The  temperature  in the place wher'e the roller  bench  is situated 
shall  be between 20 and  30'C throughout  the test. 

The moped  shall  be more or  less horizontal  during  the  test  so 
as  to avoid  any abnormal  distribution of  fuel  or  engine oil. 

During  the test  the speed  shall  be plotted  against  time  in 
order  that  the correctness of  the cycles performed  can be 
assessed. 

6. 

6.1. 

6.1.1. 

6.1.2. 

6.1.3. 

6.2. 

Starting  up  the  engine 

- m -

6.2.1. 

Once  the  preliminary  operations  on  the  equipment  for 
collecting,  diluting,  analysing  and  measuring  the  gases  have 
been  carried  out  (see  item  7.1  below),  the  engine  shall  be 
started  up  by  means  of  the  devices  provided  for  that  purpose, 
such  as  the  choke,  the  starter  valve,  etc.,  according  to  the 
manufacturer's  instructions. 

6.2.2. 

The  taking  of  samples  and  the  measuring  of  the  flow  through  the 
suction  device  shall  commence  at  the  beginning  of  the  first 
cycle. 

6.2.3. 

Idling 

6.2.3.1. 

Manual-shift  gearbox: 

To  enable  the  accelerations  to  be  performed  according  to  the 
normal  cycle  the  vehicle  shall  be  put  in  first  gear,  with  the 
clutch  disengaged,  five  seconds  before  commencement  of  the 
acceleration  following  the  idling  period  in  question. 

6.2.3.2. 

Automatic  gearbox  and  torque  converter: 

The  selector  shall  be  engaged  at  the  beginning  of  the  test.  If 
there  are  two  positions  "town"  and  "road",  the  "road"  position 
shalI  be  used. 

6.2.4. 

Accelerations 

At  the  end  of  each  idling  period,  acceleration  shall  be 
performed  by  fully  opening  the  throttle  and  if  necessary  using 
the  gearbox  in such  a  way  as  to  reach  the  maximum  speed  as 
quickly  as  possible. 

6.2.5. 

Steady  speed 

A  steady  maximum  speed  shall  be  maintained  by  keeping  the 
throttle  fully  open  until  the  following  deceleration  phase. 
During  the  phase  where  the  speed  is kept  at  a  steady  20  km/h, 
the  throttle  position  shall  be  kept  as  fixed  as  possible. 

6.2.6. 

Decelerations 

6.2.6.1. 

6.2.6.2. 

6.2.6.3. 

All  decelerations  shall  be  effected  by  completely  closing  the 
throttle,  the  clutch  remaining  engaged.  The  engine  shall  be 
disengaged  manually,  without  touching  the  gear  lever,  at  a 
speed  of  10  km/h. 

If  the  period  of  deceleration  is  longer  than  that  prescribed 
for  the  corresponding  phase,  the  moped's  brakes  shall  be  used 
to  keep  to  the  cycle. 

If  the  period  of  deceleration  is  shorter  than  that  prescribed 
for  the  corresponding  phase,  the  timing  of  the  theoretical 
cycle  shall  be  restored  by  an  idling  period  merging  into  the 
following  idling  operation.  In  this  case,  item  2.4.3.  is not 
applicab le. 

- nt  -

6.2.6.4. 

At  the end of  the second  deceleration  period  (stopping moped on 
the roller) the gear  shall  be put  into neutral  and  the clutch 
engaged. 

7. 

7.1. 

7.1.1. 

PROCEDURE  FOR SAMPLING AND ANALYSIS 

Samp Iing 

Sampling shall  begin as soon as the  test  commences, as 
indicated  in  item 6.2.2. 

7.1.2. 

The bags shall  be hermetically closed  as soon  as they are  full. 

7.1.3. 

At  the end of  the final  cycle  the device  for  collecting  the 
diluted  exhaust  gases and  the dilution air  shall  be closed  and 
the gases produced  by  the engine diverted  into the atmosphere. 

7.2. 

Analysis 

7.2.1. 

7.2.2. 

7.2.3. 

7.2.4. 

7.2.5. 

8. 

8.1. 

8.1.1. 

8.1.2. 

The gases contained  in each  bag shall  be analysed  as soon as 
possible  and  in any event  not  later  than  twenty minutes after 
filling of  the bags began. 

If the sampling probe  is not  left permanently  in the bags, the 
entry of  air  into the bags during  insertion of  the probe and 
escape of gases  from  the bags during extraction of  the probe 
shalI  be avoided. 

The analyser  shall  show a steady  value within one minute after 
being  connected  up  to the bag. 

The concentrations of  HC, CO and  N0X  in the samples of 
diluted exhaust  gases and  in the bags collecting  the dilution 
air  shall  be determined  from  the values shown or  recorded  by 
the measuring  equipment  by applying  the correct  calibration 
curves. 

The value adopted  as the content  of  the gaseous pollutants  in 
the gases analysed  shall  be  that  read off  after  stabilization 
of  the measuring  instrument. 

DETERMINATION OF THE QUANTITY OF GASEOUS POLLUTANTS  EMITTED 

The mass of  carbon gas emitted  during  the  test  shall  be 
determined  by means of  the formula: 

C 0M  - 1  . V  . dC0  . COc 
106 

S 

where 

COM  is the mass of carbon monoxide emitted  during  the test, 
expressed  invg/km; 

S  is the distance  actually  travelled expressed  in km,  obtained 
by multiplying  the total  number  of  revolutions  shown on  the 
revolution  counter  by  the circumference of  the  roller; 

- zz\ -

8.1.3. 

8.1.4. 

dço  is the density of  carbon monoxide  at a temperature of 0*C 
and at a pressure of  1013.3 mb, or  1.250  kg/m3; 

C 0C  is the volume concentration of  carbon monoxide  in the 
diluted  gases, expressed  in parts per million and  corrected  to 
take account  of  the pollution of  the dilution air: 

C 0C  - C 0e  - C 0d  (1 - J__) 
DF 

where 

8.1.4.1. 

8.1.4.2. 

C0e  is the concentration of carbon monoxide, measured  in 
parts per million,  in the sample of diluted  gases collected  in 
bag  SA; 

COq  is the concentration of  carbon monoxide, measured  in 
parts per million,  in the sample of  dilution  air  collected  in 
bag SB; 

8.1.4.3. 

DF  is the coefficient  specified  in  item 8.4  below; 

8.1.5. 

V  is the total  volume, expressed  in m3/test, of  diluted gases 
at  reference  temperature  O'C  (273'K) and  reference  pressure 
1013.3 mb: 

V - Vo  . N  (Pa - Pi)  . 273 

1013.3  . (Tp + 273) 

where 

8.1.5.1. 

Vo  is the volume of gas displaced  by pump P1  during one 
rotation  expressed  in m3/revolution.  This volume  is a 
function of  the differential  pressures between  the  inlet and 
outlet  sections of  the pump  itself; 

8.1.5.2. 

N  is the number  of  rotations made by  the pump P1 during  the 
four  test  cycles; 

8.1.5.3. 

Pa  is the atmospheric  pressure  expressed  in mbar; 

8.1.5.4. 

8.1.5.5. 

8.2 

Pi  is the mean  value, expressed  in mbar, during  performance of 
the  four  cycles of  the drop  in pressure  in the  inlet  section of 
pump  P1; 

Tp  Is the value, during  performance of  the  four  cycles, of  the 
temperature  of  the diluted gases measured  in the  inlet  section 
of pump  P1. 

The mass of unburnt  hydrocarbons emitted  through  the moped's 
exhaust  during  the  test  shall  be calculated  by means of  the 
formula: 

HCM  - 1  . V  dHC  .  HÇç 
106 

S 

where: 

8.2.1. 

H CM  is the mass of  hydrocarbons  emitted  during  the test, 
expressed  in g/km-, 

-ZZo-

8.2.2. 

s  is the distance  defined  in  item 8.1.2  above; 

8.2.3. 

8.2.4. 

dnC  is the density  of  hydrocarbons  at  a temperature  of  0*C 
and  a pressure of  1013.3 mb  (for  an  average  ratio of carbon  to 
hydrogen of  1:1.85), or  0.619  kg/m3; 

HCc  is the concentration of  the diluted gases expressed  in 
parts per million carbon equivalent  (for  example:  the 
concentration of propane multiplied  by  3) and  corrected  to take 
account  of  the dilution air: 

HCc - HCe - HCd  (1 - J_) 

DF 

where: 

8.2.4.1. 

8.2.4.2. 

HCe  is the concentration of  hydrocarbons, expressed  in parts 
per million carbon equivalent,  in the sample of  diluted gases 
collected  in bag  SA; 

HCd  is the concentration of  hydrocarbons, expressed  in parts 
per million  carbon equivalent,  in the sample  of  dilution air 
collected  in bag SB; 

8.2.4.3. 

DF  is the coefficient  specified  in  item 8.4; 

8.2.5. 

V  is the  total  volume  (see  item  8.1.5). 

8.3 

The mass of oxides of  nitrogen  emitted  through  the moped's 
exhaust  during  the test  shall  be calculated  by means of  the 
formula: 

N 0XM  - 1  -V. dN0  . N 0x o— | h-
106 

S 

where: 

8.3.1. 

N O XM  is the mass of oxides of  nitrogen  emitted  during  the 
test, expressed  in g/km; 

8.3.2. 

S  is the distance  defined  in  item 8.1.2  above; 

8.3.3. 

8.3.4. 

8.3.4.1. 

8.3.4.2. 

dN02  's *ne  density of  the oxides of  nitrogen  in the exhaust 
gases,  in NO2 equivalent,  at  a temperature  of  O'C  and a 
pressure of  1013.3 mb, or  2.05  kg/m3; 

NOxc  is the concentration of oxides of  nitrogen  in the diluted 
gases, expressed  in parts per million  and  corrected  to take 
account  of  the dilution air: 

NOxc - NOxe - NOxd  (1 - J_) 

DF 

where: 

NOxe  is the concentration of oxides of  nitrogen, expressed  in 
parts  per million,  in the sample  of  diluted  gases  collected  in 
bag  SA; 

NOxd  is the concentration of oxides of  nitrogen, expressed  in 
parts per million,  in the sample  of  dilution air  collected  in 
bag SB; 

8.3.4.3. 

DF  is the coefficient  specified  in  item 8.4  below; 

8.3.5. 

Kh  is the correction  factor  for  humidity 

- 2 3 i-

Kh - 

1 

1 - 0.0329 (H -  10.7) 

where: 

8.3.5.1. 

H  is the absolute  humidity  in grams of water  per  kg of  dry air 
H - 6.2111 

Pa - Pd 

where: 

. U.Pd  (o/kQ) 
U 
100 

8.3.5.1.1. 

U  is the percentage  humidity; 

8.3.5.1.2. 

Pd  is the saturated-water-vapour  pressure, expressed  in mbar, 
at  the test  temperature; 

8.3.5.1.3. 

Pa  is the atmospheric  pressure  in mbar. 

8.4 

DF  is a coefficient  expressed  by means of  the formula: 

DF - 

14.5 
C 02  + 0.5  CO + HC 

where: 

8.4.1. 

CO, CO2 and HC are concentrations of  carbon monoxide, carbon 
dioxide and hydrocarbons expressed  as a percentage of  the 
sample of  diluted gases contained  in bag  SA. 

9. 

PRESENTATION OF  RESULTS 

Results shall  be expressed  in g/km: 

HC  in g/km  - HC mass/S 
CO  in g/km  - CO mass/S 
NOx  in g/km  « NOx  mass/s 

where: 

HC mass 
CO mass 
NOx mass 
S 

see definition  in  item  8.2 
see definition  in  item 8.1 
see definition  in  item  8.3 
distance actually  covered  by  the moped 
during  the test. 

- ?32-

SUB-APPENDIX 1 

OPERATING CYCLE ON ROLLER BENCH (TYPE  I TEST) 

Speed (±1 km/h) and time (±.05 second) 
tolerances are combined geometrically 
for each point as shown  in the inset 

km/h  < 

5 

A 
3 
2 1 
1 

12  3  A  i> 

sec 

(Y is in m/s ) 

- - 0,93 

10  20  30  40 

80  90  100  110  120  t (s) 

101 

1 07  112 

-Z1Z  -

SUB-APPENDIX 2 

EXAMPLE NO 1 OF AN EXHAUST GAS COLLECTION SYSTEM 

to 

atmosphere 

di  Lut  i on 
a ir 

moped  e x h a u s t ^ - -, 
-"-* 
system 

^ 

to  atmosphere 

Measuring  the  total  volume  of  diluted 

exhaust  gases 

-  Z1Q  -

SUB-APPENDIX  3 

EXAMPLE  NO  2  OF  AN  EXHAUST  GAS  COLLECTION  SYSTEM 

to 

atmosphère 

bag  for  collecting 
d i l u t i on  a ir  —*• 

bag for collecting 
diluted gases 

d i l u t i on  a ir  probe 

fi  Iters 

flow meters with flow regulator 

to atmosphere 

t 

[diluted  I 
gases 
suction 
device 

measuring the total 
volume of the 
sample of di lu ted 
gases 

diluted gases probe 

-zi<;  -

SUB-APPENDIX  4 

METHOD OF CALIBRATING THE ROLLER  BENCH 

1. 

This Sub-appendix  describes  the method  which  shall  be used  for 
checking  that  the curve  for  the power  absorbed  by  the roller 
bench coincides with  the absorption  curve  required  under 
item 4.1  of Appendix  2. 

The measured  absorbed  power  includes  the power  absorbed  by 
friction and  the power  absorbed  by  the brake, but  does not 
include  the power  dissipated  by  friction  between  the  tyre and 
the  rol1er. 

2. 

PRINCIPLE OF THE METHOD 

This method makes  it possible  to calculate  absorbed  power  by 
measuring  the roller  deceleration  time.  The kinetic  energy of 
the device  is dissipated  by  the brake  and  by  the  friction of 
the roller  bench.  This method  does not  take account  of 
variations  in  internal  roller  friction  due  to the weight  of  the 
moped. 

PROCEDURE 

The  inertia simulation  system  corresponding  to the mass of  the 
moped  being  tested  shall  be engaged. 

The brake shall  be set  in accordance  with  item 5.1. of 
Appendix  2. 

The  roller  shall  be made  to turn at  velocity  v + 10km/h. 

The  roller  drive system  shall  be disconnected  and  the roller 
allowed  to decelerate  freely. 

The  time  taken by  the roller  to decelerate  from  velocity 
v + 0.1  v to velocity  v - 0.1  v shall  be noted. 

The absorbed  power  shall  be calculated  by means of  the formula: 
P A - 0.2  x M v2 
t 

x  10"3 

where: 
P A  is the power  absorbed  by  the roller  bench, expressed  in kw 
M  is the equivalent  inertia expressed  in kg 
v  is the test  velocity  referred  to  in  item 3.3. above  expressed 
in m/s 

It  is the time, expressed  in seconds, taken by  the  roller  to 
decelerate  from v + 0.1  v to v - 0.1  v. 

The phases described  in  items 3.3.  to 3.6. shall  be  repeated  to 
cover  the range of  speeds  10 to from  50 km/h,  in units of  10 
down  to 10 km/h 

The curve  representing  absorbed  power  as a function of  speed 
shalI  be drawn. 

3. 

3.1. 

3.2. 

3.3. 

3.4. 

3.5. 

3.6. 

3.7. 

3.8. 

3.9 

It shall  be ensured  that  the curve  is within  the  tolerance 
specified  in  item  4.1, Appendix  1. 

- tu  -

Absorbed  power  (PA  in kW) 

1 

PV  50 

PV  12 

/I 

" 77A 

+ 51 PV  50 

•  51 KV3 

-  51 PV  50 

/,?// 

50 

Speed  in km/h 

-  211  -

APPENDIX  2 

Type  11  test 

(measuring  emissions  of  carbon  monoxide  and  hydrocarbons 
at  idling  speed) 

1. 

INTRODUCTION 

2. 

2.1. 

2.2. 

2.3. 

2.4. 

2.5. 

2.6. 

3. 

3.1. 

3.2. 

3.3. 

3.4. 

Procedure  for  Type  II  test  specified  in  item  2.2.1.2.  of 
Annex  I. 

MEASUREMENT  CONDITIONS 

The  fuel  used  shall  be  that  prescribed  in  item  3.2  of 
Appendix  1. 

The  lubricant  used  sha I I also  comply  with  the  provisions  of 
item  3.2. of  Appendix  1. 

The  mass  of  emissions  of  carbon  monoxide  and  hydrocarbons  shall 
be  measured  immediately  after  the  Type  I test  described  in 
item  2.1. of  Appendix  1, once  the  values  have  stabilized,  with 
the  engine  at  idling  speed. 

In  the  case  of  mopeds  with  manual  transmission  gearboxes,  the 
test  shall  be  carried  out  with  the  gear  lever  in  the  "neutral" 
position  and  with  the  clutch  engaged. 

In  the  case  of  mopeds  with  automatic  transmission  gearboxes, 
the  test  shall  be  carried  out  with  the  clutch  engaged  and  with 
the  driving  wheel  immobile. 

The  idling  speed  of  the  engine  during  the  idling  period  shall 
be  adjusted  in accordance  with  the manufacturer's  instructions. 

SAMPLING  AND  ANALYSIS  OF  EXHAUST  GASES 

The  electromagnetic  valves  shall  be  set  in  the  position  for 
direct  analysis  of  the  diluted  exhaust  gases  and  the  dilution 
air. 

The  analyser  shall  show  a  steady  value  within  one  minute  after 
being  connected  up  to  the  probe. 

The  concentrations  of  HC  and  CO  in  the  samples  of  diluted 
exhaust  gases  and  in the  dilution  air  shall  be  determined  from 
the  values  shown  or  recorded  by  the measuring  equipment  by 
applying  the  correct  calibration  curves. 

The  value  adopted  as  the  content  of  the  gaseous  pollutants  in 
the  gases  analysed  shall  be  that  read  off  after  stabilization 
of  the measuring  instrument. 

4. 

4.1. 

4.1.1. 

4.1.2. 

4.1.3. 

- zsg -

DETERMINATION  OF THE QUANTITY  OF GASEOUS  POLLUTANTS  EMITTED 

The mass of  carbon gas emitted  during  the  test  shall  be 
determined  by means of  the  formula: 

COM « 

v  • dco  • £2c 
106 

where 

CO^  is the mass of  carbon monoxide  emitted  during  the  test, 
expressed  in g/km; 

dço  is the density of  carbon monoxide  at  a temperature  of  O'C 
and  at  a pressure of  1013.3 mbar, or  1.250  kg/m3; 

C0C  is the volume concentration of  carbon monoxide  in the 
diluted gases, expressed  in parts per  million  and  corrected  to 
take account  of  the pollution of  the dilution  air: 

COc  - C0e  - C0d  (1 - J_) 

DF 

where 

4.1.3.1. 

4.1.3.2. 

C0e  is the concentration of  carbon monoxide, measured  in 
parts  per million,  in the sample  of  diluted  gases; 

COQ-  is the concentration of  carbon monoxide, measured  in 
parts  per million,  in the sample  of  dilution  air; 

4.1.3.3. 

DF  is the coefficient  specified  in  item  4.3  below; 

4.1.4. 

V  is the  total  volume, expressed  in m/min, of  diluted  gases at 
reference  temperature  0"C  (273 K) and  reference  pressure  1013.3 
mbar : 

V - Vo  . N  (Pa - Pi)  . 273 

1013.3  . (Tp + 273) 

where 

4.1.4.1. 

Vo  is the volume of  gas displaced  by  pump  P1  during one 
rotation  expressed  in m3/revolution.  This  volume  is a 
function of  the differential  pressures  between  the  inlet  and 
outlet  sections of  the pump  itself; 

4.1.4.2. 

N  is the number  of  rotations made  by  the pump  P1  during  the 
idling  test  divided  by  the  time  in minutes; 

4.1.4.3. 

Pa  is the atmospheric  pressure  expressed  in mbar; 

4.1.4.4. 

4.1.4.5. 

Pi  is the mean  value, expressed  in mbar,  during  the  test of  the 
drop  in pressure  in the  inlet  section  of  pump  P1; 

Tp  is the value, during  performance  of  the  four  cycles, of  the 
temperature  of  diluted  gases measured  in the  inlet  section of 
pump  P1. 

4.2 

The mass of unburnt  hydrocarbons emitted  through  the moped's exhaust 
during  the  test  shall  be calculated  by means of  the  formula: 

- ZV) -

HCM  -  V  dHC  .  HÇ£ 
106 

where: 

4.2.1. 

4.2.2. 

4.2.3. 

H CM  is the mass of  hydrocarbons emitted  during  the test, 
expressed  in g/km; 

dHC  is the density of  hydrocarbons  at a temperature of  0*C 
and a pressure of  1013.3 mbar  (for an average  ratio of 
carbon  to hydrogen of  1:1.85), or  0.619  kg/m3; 

HCc  is the concentration of  the diluted  gases expressed  in 
parts per million carbon equivalent  (for  example:  the 
concentration of  propane multiplied  by  3) and  corrected  to 
take account of  the dilution air: 

HCc - HCe - HCd  (1 - J_) 

DF 

where: 

4.2.3.1. 

4.2.3.2. 

HCe  is the concentration of  hydrocarbons expressed  in parts 
per million carbon equivalent  in the sample of  diluted 
gases; 

HCd  is the concentration of  hydrocarbons  expressed  in parts 
per million carbon equivalent  in the sample of  dilution 
air ; 

4.2.3.3. 

DF  is the coefficient  specified  in  item 4.3. below. 

4.2.4. 

V  is the  total  volume  (see  item 4.1.4.) 

4.3 

DF  is a coefficient  expressed  by means of  the  formula: 

DF - 

14.5 
C 02  + 0.5  CO + HC 

where: 

4.3.1. 

CO, CO2 and HC are concentrations of  carbon monoxide, 
carbon dioxide and  hydrocarbons expressed  as a  percentage 
of  the sample of  diluted gases. 

- Z<f o -

ANNEX  I I 

SPECIFICATIONS OF MEASURES TO BE TAKEN AGAINST AIR  POLLUTION 
CAUSED BY MOTORCYCLES AND MOTOR  TRICYCLES 

1. 

1.1 

1.1.1 

1.1.2 

1.2 

1.3 

1.4 

2. 

2.1 

2.2 

2.2.1 

DEFINITIONS 
t 
For  the purposes of  this chapter: 

"Vehicle  type with  regard  to the  limitation of  the emission of 
gaseous pollutants from  the engine" means motorcycles  and motor 
tricycles which do not  differ  in essential  respects, in 
particular  as regards  the  following points: 

The equivalent  inertia determined  in relation  to the  reference 
mass, as  laid down  in  item 5.2 of Appendix  1; 

The characteristics of  the engine and  the vehicle  as defined  in 
items  1-6  and 8 of Appendix  3; 

"Reference mass" means  the mass of  the vehicle  in running 
order,  increased  by a uniform mass of 75 kg.  The mass of  the 
motorcycle  and motor  tricycle  in running order  is  its total 
unladen weight  with  all  tanks  filled  to at  least 90% of  their 
max imum capacity; 

"Crankcase" means  the spaces  in or external  to the engine which 
are connected  to the oil  sump by  internal  or  external  ducts 
through which gases and  vapours can escape; 

"Gaseous pollutants" means carbon monoxide, hydrocarbons, and 
oxides of  nitrogen expressed  in terms of  nitrogen  dioxide 
(N02) equivalence. 

TEST SPECIFICATIONS 

General 

The components  liable  to affect  the emission of  gaseous 
pollutants shall  be so designed, constructed  and  assembled  as 
to enable  the motorcycle or motor  tricycle,  in normal  use, 
despite  the vibrations  to which  it may  be subjected, to comply 
with  the  requirements of  this Annex. 

Description of  tests 

Depending on  their  category  and  as explained  below, the 
motorcycle or motor  tricycle shall  be subjected  to Type  1 and 
II tests, as specified  below: 

2.2.1.1 

Type  I test  (checking  the average emissions of  gaseous 
pollutants  in a congested  urban  area). 

2.2.1.1.1 

The  test  shall  be carried  out  by  the procedure  described  in 
Appendix  1.  The methods used  to collect  and  analyse  the gases 
shall  be  those  laid down. 

(15] 

2.2.1.1.2 

2.2.1.1.2.1 

-ZH\  -

Subject  to the provisions of  item 2.2.1.1.3 below,  the test 
shall  be carried  out  three  times.  According  to the  reference 
mass of  the motorcycle or motor  tricycle  the masses of  the 
carbon monoxide, hydrocarbons  and  nitrogen oxide obtained  in 
each  test  shall  be  less than  the  limit  values shown  in Tables I 
and  II.  The mass of oxides of  nitrogen  per  kilometre shall  be 
measured  only  as a guide. 

However, one of  the three  results  for  each of  the 
abovementioned pollutants may  exceed  the  limit  value  prescribed 
for  the motorcycle or motor  tricycle concerned  by  a maximum of 
10%, provided  that  the arithmetic mean of  the  three  results  is 
less than  the prescribed  limit  value.  If more  than one 
pollutant  exceeds  the prescribed  limit  values,  it  is  immaterial 
whether  this occurs  in the same  test or  in different  tests. 

2.2.1.1.3 

The number  of  tests prescribed  in  item 2.2.1.1.2 above shall  be 
reduced  under  the conditions described  below, where VI  is the 
result of  the  first  test  and V2  is the  result  of  the second 
test  for each of  the pollutants referred  to  in  item 2.2.1.1.2. 

2.2.1.1.3.1 

Only one  test  is required  if V1  < 0.70L  for  all  the  pollutants 
concerned. 

2.2.1.1.3.2 

Only  two tests are  required  if V1  < 0.085L  for  all  the 
pollutants concerned  but  if, for  at  least one  pollutant, 
V1  > 0.70L.  In addition, for each of  the pollutants concerned, 
V2 must  be such  that V1  + V2 < 1.70L and V2 < L. 

2.2.1.2 

Type  II test  (test of  carbon monoxide  emissions  at  idling 
speed). 

2.2.1.2.1 

The carbon monoxide  content  of  the exhaust  gases emitted at 
idling speed  shall  not exceed  4.5% by volume. 

2.2.1.2.2 

This specification shall  be verified  during  the  test  described 
in Appendix  2. 

-  ZWL-

Table I 

LIMITS  FOR TWO-STROKE  MOTORCYCLES 
AND TRICYCLES AND DATES OF THEIR  ENTRY  INTO FORCE 

Component  type approval  and 
conformity of production 

01.01.97(1) 

C0-8g/km 

HC-4g/km 

N0x-0,1g/km 

(1)  However,  for  tricycles  and  quadricycles, the  limit  values  shall  be 

multiplied  by  a factor  of  1.5. 

-m-z  -

Table  I I 

LIMITS FOR  FOUR-STROKE  MOTORCYCLES 
AND TRICYCLES AND DATES FOR THEIR  ENTRY  INTO FORCE 

Component  type approval  and 
conformity  of  production 

01.01.97(1) 

C0-13g/km 

HC-3g/km 

N0x-0,3g/km 

(1) 

However,  for  tricycles  and  quadricycles,  the  limit  values shall 
be multiplied  by a factor  of  1.5. 

3. 

3.1. 

3.1.1. 

-  Zkk  -

CONFORMITY OF PRODUCTION 

The  provisions set out in paragraph  1, Annex VI to 
Directive 92/61/CEE on the type  approval  of two- or  three-wheel 
motor  vehicles  shall  apply  when  checking  the conformity of 
product ion. 

However,  if the mass of the carbon monoxide or hydrocarbons 
produced by the vehicle  selected  from the production  line 
exceeds the above  limits,  its manufacturer  has the option of 
asking  that  measurements be carried out on a sample of series-
production  vehicles which  contains the vehicle  initially 
selected.  The manufacturer  shall  determine  the size n of the 
sample.  Arithmetical  mean x of the results obtained  from the 
sample and standard  deviation S of the sample  shall  then be 
determined  for each  pollutant  gas.  Series  production  shall 
then be considered  to conform  if the following  condition is 
met: 

x + k . S < LD 

where 

limit  value  laid down  in the Table  in item  2.2.1.1.3,  under 
the  title  "conformity of production"  for each  pollutant gas 
under  consideration 

statistical  factor  depending  upon n and set out in the 
fol lowing  table 

N 

k 

n 

k 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

0.973 

0.613 

0.489 

0.421 

0.376 

0.342 

0.317 

0.296 

0.279 

11 

12 

13 

14 

15 

16 

17 

18 

19 

0.265 

0.253 

0.242 

0.233 

0.224 

0.216 

0.210 

0.203 

0.198 

0.860 

n>20 

1) 

S2-  Z 

(x - x )2 

n - 1 

where x is any one of the individua 
results obtained  with  sample n 

- ?<K -

APPENDIX 1 

TYPE  I TEST 

(checking  the average emission of  pollutants  in a congested  urban  area) 

1. 

INTRODUCTION 

1.1 

2. 

2.1. 

Procedure  for Type  I test  specified  in  item 2.2.1.1 of 
Annex  I I. 

The motorcycle or motor  tricycle shall  be placed on a 
dynamometer  bench equipped  with  a brake and a  flywheel.  A test 
lasting a total  of  13 minutes and comprising  four  cycles shall 
be carried out without  interruption.  Each  cycle shall  comprise 
15 operations  (idling, acceleration, steady  speed, 
deceleration, etc.).  During  the test  the exhaust  gases shall 
be diluted with  air  so that  the  flow volume of  the mixture 
remains constant.  Throughout  the  test  a continuous flow of 
samples of  the mixture  shall  be passed  into a bag  so that 
concentrations  (average  test  values) of  carbon monoxide, 
unburnt  hydrocarbons, oxides of  nitrogen  and  carbon  dioxide can 
be determined  in succession. 

OPERATING  CYCLE ON THE DYNAMOMETER  BENCH 

Description of  cycle 

The operating  cycle on  the dynamometer  bench  shall  be  that 
indicated  in the  following  table and  plotted  in Sub-
appendix  1. 

2.2. 

General  conditions  for  carrying out  the cycle 

2.3. 

2.3.1 

2.3.1.1 

2.3.1.2 

Preliminary  test  cycles shall  be carried  out  if necessary  to 
determine  how best  to actuate  the accelerator  and  brake 
controls so as to achieve a cycle approximating  to the 
theoretical  cycle within  the prescribed  limits. 

Use of  the gearbox 

Use of  the gearbox  shall  be determined  as follows: 

At  constant  speed, the engine speed  shall  as far  as possible 
remain between SO and 90% of maximum.  If this speed  can be 
achieved  using more  than one gear, the engine  shall  be  tested 
using  the highest gear. 

During  acceleration, the engine shall  be  tested using  the gear 
which  allows maximum  acceleration.  The next  higher  gear  shall 
be engaged  at  the  latest when  the engine  speed  has  reached 110% 
of  rated maximum output.  If a motorcycle or motor  tricycle 
reaches a speed of  20 km/h  in first gear  or  35 km/h  in second 
gear, the next  higher  gear  shall  be engaged  at  these speeds. 

-  Z4fi  -

In these cases, no other  change  into higher  gears shall  be 
permitted.  If, during  the acceleration  phase, the gear  are 
changed  at  fixed motorcycle or motor  tricycle  speeds, the 
following steady  speed phase shall  be performed  with  the gear 
which  is engaged when  the motorcycle or motor  tricycle  begins 
the steady  speed  phase,  irrespective of  the engine  speed. 

2.3.1.3 

During  deceleration, the next  lower  gear  shall  be engaged 
before  the engine  reaches virtual  idling speed  and at  the 
latest when  the engine speed  has fallen  to 30% of  rated maximum 
output, whichever  occurs earlier. First  gear  shall  not  be 
engaged  during deceleration. 

2.3.2 

2.4. 

2.4.1 

2.4.2 

2.4.3 

2.4.4 

Motorcycles or motor  tricycles equipped with  automatic 
gearboxes shall  be tested with  the highest  gear  engaged 
("drive").  The accelerator  shall  be operated  in such  a way  as 
to obtain as steady  an acceleration  as possible  so that  the 
transmission  engages  the different  gears  in the normal  order. 
The  tolerances specified  in  item 2.4  shall  apply. 

Tolerances 

A tolerance of  1 km/h  above or below  the theoretical  speed 
shall  be allowed  during all  phases.  Speed  tolerances greater 
than  those prescribed shall  be permitted  during phase  changes 
provided  that  the tolerances are never  exceeded  for more  than 
0.5  second on any one occasion,  in all  cases subject  to the 
provisions of  items 6.5.2  and  6.6.3. 

A  tolerance of 0.5  second above or  below  the  theoretical  times 
shalI  be a I lowed. 

The speed  and  time  tolerances shall  be combined  as  indicated  in 
Sub-appendix  1. 

The distance  travelled during  the cycle shall  be measured  with 
a  tolerance of ± 2%. 

OPERATING CYCLE ON THE DYNAMOMETER  BENCH 

No of 
ops 

Operat ions 

Phase Accelerat ion 

(m/sec2) 

Speed 
(km/h) 

Durât ion 
op. 

1 
2 
3 
4 
5 
6 
7 
8 
9 
10 
11 
12 
13 
14 
15 
16 
17 
18 

IdIi ng 
Accélérât ion 
Steady  speed 
Decelerat ion 
Decelerat ion, 
IdIi ng 
Accélérât ion 
Steady  speed 
Deceleration 
Decelerat ion, 
IdIi ng 
Acceleration 
Steady speed 
Decelerat ion 
Steady  speed 
Decelerat ion 
Decelerat ion, 
Idling 

clutch  diseng 

clutch diseng. 

clutch diseng. 

1 ,04 

0,69 
0,92 

0,74 

0,75 
0,92 

0,53 

0,52 

0,68 
0,92 

0 - 15 
15 
15 - 10 
1 0 -0 

0 - 32 
32 
3 2 - 10 
1 0 -0 

0 - 50 
50 
50 - 35 
35 
35 - 10 
1 0 -0 

(sec) 

11 
4 
8 
2 
3 
21 
12 
24 
8 
3 
21 
26 
12 
8 
13 
9 
3 
7 

1 
2 
3 

4 

5 
6 
7 

8 
9 
10 
11 
12 
13 

14 

15 

(*)  PM - Gearbox  in neutral, clutch engaged 

K - Clutch  disengaged. 

of each 
phase 
(sec) 

Cum. 
t ime 
(sec) 

11 
15 
23 
25 
28 
49 
61 
85 
93 
96 
117 
143 
155 
163 
176 
185 
188 
195 

Gear  to be used  in the case of 

a manual  gearbox 

6  sec. PM/5 sec. K(*) 

See  i tern 2.3. 

16 sec. PM/5 sec. K 

K 

See  item 2.3. 

16 sec. PM/5 sec. K 

K 

See  item 2.3. 

7  sec. PM 

K 

i 

11 
4 
8 

5 
21 
12 
24 

11 
21 
26 
12 
8 
13 

12 
7 

3. 

3.1. 

3.1.1 

3.1.2 

3.1.3 

3.1.4 

3.1.5 

-M-

MOTORCYCLE  OR  MOTOR  TRICYCLE  AND  FUEL 

Test  motorcycle  or  motor  tricycle 

The  motorcycle  or  motor  tricycle  shall  be  presented  in  good 
mechanical  condition.  It  shall  have  been  run  in  and  have  been 
driven  at  least  1000  km  before  the  test.  The  laboratory  may 
decide  whether  a motorcycle  or  motor  tricycle  which  has 
travelled  less  than  1000  km  before  the  test  may  be  accepted. 

The  exhaust  device  shall  not  have  any  leaks  likely  to  reduce 
the  quantity  of  gases  collected,  which  shall  be  those  gases 
emerging  from  the  engine. 

The  tightness  of  the  admission  system  may  be  checked  to  ensure 
that  carburation  is not  affected  by  an  accidental  intake  of 
air. 

The  engine  settings  of  the  motorcycle  or  motor  tricycle  shall 
be  those  prescribed  by  the  manufacturer. 

The  laboratory  may  verify  that  the  motorcycle  or  motor  tricycle 
delivers  the  performance  stated  by  the  manufacturer,  that  it 
can  be  used  for  normal  driving,  and  more  particularly  that  it 
is capable  of  starting  when  cold  and  when  hot. 

3.2. 

Fuel 

The  fuel  used  for  the  test  shall  be  the  reference  fuel  whose 
characteristics  are  given  in Annex  IV.  If  the  engine  is 
lubricated  by  a mixture,  the  oil  added  to  the  reference  fuel 
shall  comply  as  to  quality  and  quantity  with  the  manufacturer's 
recommendat ions. 

4. 

4.1. 

TEST  EQUIPMENT 

Dynamometer  bench 

The  main  characteristics  of  the  bench  shall  be  as  follows: 

Contact  between  roller  and  tyre  of  each  driving  wheel: 

diameter  of  roller  >_ 400mm; 
Equation  for  power-absorption  curve:  from  an  initial  speed 
of  12 km/h,  the  test  bench  shall  be  able  to  reproduce,  with 
a  tolerance  of  ±15%,  the  power  developed  by  the  engine  when 
the  motorcycle  or  motor  tricycle  is  travelling  along  a  flat 
road  with  wind  speed  virtually  zero.  Otherwise  the  power 
absorbed  by  the  brakes  and  the  internal  friction  of  the 
bench  shall  be  calculated  according  to  the  provisions  of 
item  11  of  Sub-appendix  2  to  Appendix  2.  Other  wise  the 
power  absorbed  by  the  brakes  and  the  internal  friction  of 
the  bench  shaII  be: 

-  Additional  inertias:  10  kg  and  10  kg1> 

K  V  3 +  5% Of  K  V  3 ±  5% of  PV 50 

1) 

These  are  additional  masses  which  may  perhaps  be  replaced  by  an 
electronic  device,  provided  that  the  equivalence  of  the  results  is 
demonstrated. 

4.1.1 

4.2. 

4.2.1 

4.2.2 

4.2.2.1 

4.2.2.2 

4.2.2.3 

4.2.2.4 

4.2.2.5 

4.2.2.6 

-?VI -

The  distance  effectively  travelled  shall  be  measured  using  a 
revolution  counter  driven  by  the  roller  which  drives  the  brake 
and  the  flywheels. 

Equipment  for  sampling  the  gases  and  measuring  their  volume. 

Sub-appendices  2  and  3  contain  a  diagram  showing  the  principle 
for  collecting,  diluting,  sampling  and  measuring  the  volume  of 
exhaust  gases  during  the  test. 

The  following  items  describe  the  components  of  the  test 
equipment  (against  each  component  is given  the  abbreviation 
used  in  the  sketch  in  Sub-appendices  2  and  3.  The  testing  body 
may  authorize  the  use  of  different  equipment  provided  that  it 
gives  equivalent  results): 

a  device  to  collect  all  the  exhaust  gases  produced  during  the 
test;  this  is generally  an  open  device,  which  maintains 
atmospheric  pressure  at  the  moped  exhaust  pipe(s). 
Nevertheless,  a  closed  system  may  be  used  provided  that  the 
back-pressure  conditions  are  complied  with  (with  ±  125  mm  of 
H 2 O ).  The  gases  must  be  collected  in  such  a  way  that  there 
is not  sufficient  condensation  to  have  a  significant  effect  on 
the  nature  of  the  exhaust  gases  at  the  test  temperature; 

a  tube  (Tu)  connecting  the  exhaust  gas  collection  equipment  and 
the  exhaust  gas  sampling  system.  This  connecting  tube  and  the 
gas  collection  equipment  shall  be  made  of  stainless  steel,  or 
of  another  material  which  will  not  affect  the  composition  of 
the  gases  collected  and  will  resist  their  temperature; 

a  heat  exchanger  (Sc)  capable  of  limiting  the  variation  in  the 
temperature  of  the  diluted  gases  at  the  pump  intlet  to  within 
±  5'C  for  the  duration  of  the  test.  This  exchanger  must  be 
equipped  with  a  pre-heating  system  capable  of  bringing  the 
gases  up  to  its operating  temperature  (with  a  tolerance  of 
±  5'C)  before  the  test  commences; 

a  displacement  pump  (P1)  to  suck  in  the  diluted  gases  driven  by 
a  motor  which  can  operate  at  various  rigorously  constant 
speeds.  The  pump  must  guarantee  constant  flow  of  a  sufficient 
volume  in order  to  ensure  that  all  the  exhaust  gases  are  sucked 
in.  A  device  which  uses  a  critical  float  Venturi  may  also  be 
used ; 

a  device  which  can  continually  record  the  temperature  of  the 
diluted  gases  entering  the  pump; 

a  sampling  probe  (S3)  attached  to  the  outside  of  the  gas 
collection  device  which  can  collect  a  constant  sample  of  the 
dilution  air  using  a  pump,  a  filter  and  a  flow  meter  for  the 
duration  of  the  test; 

4.2.2.7 

4.2.2.8 

4.2.2.9 

4.2.2.10 

4.2.12.11 

-  •?&  -

a  sampling  probe  (S2), placed  before  the  displacement  pump  and 
directed  upstream  of  the  flow  of  diluted  gases  to  sample  the 
mixture  of  diluted  gases  for  the  duration  of  the  test  at  a 
constant  rate  of  flow  using,  if  necessary,  a  filter,  a  flow 
meter  and  a  pump.  The  minimum  rate  of  flow  of  the  gases  in  the 
two  sampling  systems  described  above  shall  be  at  least  150  l/h; 

two  filters  (F2  and  F 3 ), placed  after  probes  S2  and  S3 
respectively,  designed  to  filter  out  the  solid  particles 
suspended  in  the  flow  of  the  sample  collected  in  the  bags. 
Particular  care  shall  be  taken  to  ensure  that  they  do  not 
affect  the  concentrations  of  gaseous  components  in  the  samples; 

two  pumps  (P2  and  P3)  to  take  samples  from  probes  S2  and  S3 
respectively  and  to  fill  bags  Sa  and  Sb; 

two  hand-adjustable  valves  (V2  and  V3)  installed  in  series  with 
pumps  P2  and  P3  respectively  in order  to  regulate  the  flow  of 
the  sample  sent  into  the  bags; 

two  rotameters  (R2  and  R3)  installed  in series  in  the  lines 
"probe,  filter,  pump,  valve,  bag"  (S2,  F2,  P2, V2,  Sa  and  S3, 
F3,  P3,  V3,  Sb  respectively)  so  that  instant  visual  checks  can 
be  made  on  the  flow  of  the  sample  at  any  moment; 

4.2.2.12  * 

leak-tight  sampling  bags  to  collect  the  dilution  air  and 
mixture  of  diluted  gases  which  are  of  sufficient  capacity  not 
to  disrupt  the  normal  flow  of  sampling.  These  sampling  bags 
shall  have  automatic  sealing  devices  on  the  side  of  the  bag 
which  can  be  closed  rapidly  and  tightly,  either  on  the  sampling 
circuit  or  on  the  analysis  circuit  at  the  end  of  the  test; 

4.2.2.13 

two  differential  pressure  manometers  (gl  and  g2)  installed: 

g1  - 

g2  - 

before  pump  P1  in order  to measure  the  difference  in 
pressure  between  the  mixture  of  exhaust  gases  and 
dilution  air  and  the  atmosphere-, 
before  and  after  pump  P1  in order  to measure  the 
increase  in pressure  exerted  on  the  flow  of  gas; 

4.2.2.14. 

a  revolution  counter  to  count  the  number  of  revolutions  made  by 
the  rotary  displacement  pump  P1; 

4.2.2.15 

three-way  valves  on  the  sampling  circuits  described  above  to 
direct  the  flow  of  samples  either  to  the  atmosphere  or  to  their 
respective  sampling  bags  for  the  duration  of  the  test. 
Rapid-action  valves  shall  be  used.  They  shall  be  manufactured 
from  materials  which  do  not  affect  the  composition  of  the 
gases-,  they  shall  also  have  discharge  cross-sections  and 
shapes  which  minimize  load  losses  as  far  as  technically 
possible. 

4.3. 

Analytical  equipment 

4.3.1. 

Measuring  the  concentration  of  hydrocarbons 

4.3.1.1 

A  flame-ionization analyser  shall  be used  to measure  the 
concentration of unburnt  hydrocarbons  in the samples collected 
in bags Sa and Sb, during  the test. 

4.3.2. 

Measuring  the concentrations of  CO and  C 02 

4.3.2.1 

A non-dispersive  infra-red  absorption  analyser  shall  be used  to 
measure  the concentrations of  carbon monoxide  CO and  carbon 
dioxide  C 02  in the samples collected  in bags Sa and  Sb during 
the test. 

4.3.3. 

Measuring  the concentration of  N0X 

4.3.3.1 

A chemiluminescent  analyser  shall  be used  to measure  the 
concentrations of oxides of  nitrogen  (NOx)  in the  samples 
collected  in bags Sa and Sb during  the test. 

4.4. 

Accuracy  of  instruments and  measurements 

4.4.1. 

4.4.2. 

4.4.3 

4.4.4. 

4.4.5 

4.4.6 

4.4.7. 

As  the brake  is calibrated  in a separate  test,  it  is not 
necessary  to  indicate  the accuracy  of  the dynamometer.  The 
total  inertia of  the rotating masses,  including  that of  the 
rollers and  the rotating  part  of  the brake  (see  item 5.2), 
shall  be given  to within +. 2%. 

The speed of  the motorcycle or motor  tricycle  shall  be measured 
by  the speed of  rotation of  the rollers connected  to the brake 
and  the  fIywheels.  11 shalI  be measurable  to within  ±  2 km/h 
from  0 to 10 km/h and  to within  +, 1 km/h 'for speeds above  10 
km/h. 

The  temperature  referred  to  in  item 4.2.2.5 shall  be measurable 
to within ±  1*C.  The  temperature  referred  to  in  item  6.1.1 
below shall  be measurable  to within ±  2'C. 

The atmospheric  pressure  shall  be measurable  to within + 1 mm 
of mercury. 

The drop  in pressure  in the mixture of  diluted gases entering 
pump P1  (see  item 4.2.2.13)  compared  with  atmospheric  pressure 
shall  be measurable  to within ± 3 mm of mercury.  The 
difference  in pressure of  the diluted gases entering  the 
sections before and  after  pump P1  (see  item 4.2.2.13)  shall  be 
measurable  to within ± 3 mm of mercury. 

The  volume displaced  at each  complete  rotation of  pump P1  and 
the displacement  value at  the  lowest  possible  pump  speed, as 
recorded  by  the revolution counter, shall  make  it possible  to 
determine  the overall  volume of  the mixture of exhaust  gases 
and dilution  air  displaced  by pump P1  during  the  test  to within 
± 2%. 

Irrespective of  the accuracy  with which  the standard  gases are 
determined, the measuring  range of  the analysers  shall  be 
compatible with  the accuracy  required  to measure  the content of 
the various pollutants  to within  +. 3%. 

-2ÇZ-

The  flame-ionization  analyser  which  measures  the concentration 
of  hydrocarbons  shall  be capable  of  reaching  90% of  the full 
scale  in  less than one  second. 

The content  of  the standard  (calibration) gases  shall  not 
differ  by more  than +. 2% from  the  reference  value of each gas. 
The diluent  shall  be nitrogen. 

PREPARING THE TEST 

Sett ing of  brake 

The brake  shall  be so adjusted  that  the speed  of  the motorcycle 
or motor  tricycle  during  the steady  speed  phase  shall  be 
between  45 km/h  and  55 km/h. 

4.4.8. 

5. 

5.1. 

5.1.1 

5.1.2 

The brake  shall  be adjusted  as  follows: 

5.1.2.1 

An adjustable  stop  to keep  the maximum  speed  between  45 km/h 
and  55 km/h  shall  be  fitted  to  the  fuel  supply  device.  The 
speed of  the motorcycle or motor  tricycle  shall  be measured  by 
means of  a precision  tachometer  or  deduced  from measuring  the 
time over  a given distance on  a flat  dry  road  in both 
directions  with  the stop  closed. 

5.1.2.2 

5.1.2.3 

5.1.2.4 

5.1.3 

The measurements  shall  be  repeated  at  least  three  times  in both 
directions  and  shall  be made over  a distance of  at  least  200 m 
with  a sufficiently  long acceleration  distance.  The  average 
speed  shall  be  calculated. 

Other  systems may  also be used  to measure  the power  required  to 
propel  the vehicle  (e.g. measuring  the  torque on  the 
transmission, measuring  deceleration,  etc.). 

The motorcycle or motor  tricycle  shall  then  be placed  on  the 
dynamometer  bench  and  the brake  adjusted  so as  to obtain  the 
same speed  as that  attained  in the road  test  (with  the fuel-
regulating  device  in the stop  position  and  the same gear 
selected).  This brake adjustment  shall  be maintained 
throughout  the  test.  Once  the brake  has been  adjusted,  the 
fuel-regulating  device  shall  be  removed. 

Setting  the brake on  the basis of  road  tests shall  be allowed 
only  if the difference  in barometric  pressure  between  the  road 
and  the premises  in which  the dynamometer  bench  are  housed  is 
not more  than ±  10 Torr  and  the difference  in air  temperature 
is not  more  than ± 8*C. 

If the above method  is not  applicable,  the bench  shall  be set 
in accordance  with  the values  in the  table  in  item 5.2.  The 
table shows power  values as a function of  reference mass at a 
speed of  50 km/h.  This power  shall  be determined  using  the 
method  described  in Sub-appendix  2. 

-zsi-

5.2 

Adjustment  of equivalent  inertias  to the  translatory  inertias 
of  the motorcycle or motor  tricycle. 
One or more  flywheels  shall  be used  enabling  a total  inertia of 
the  rotating  masses  to be obtained  proportional  to the 
reference mass of  the motorcycle  or motor  tricycle within  the 
fol lowing  Iimi ts: 

Reference  mass 
(in  kg) 

Equivalent 
inert ias 
(in kg) 

105 
115 
125 
135 
150 
165 
185 
205 
225 
245 
270 
300 
330 
360 
395 
435 
480 
540 
600 
650 
710 
770 
820 
880 
940 
990 
1050 
1110 
1160 
1220 
1280 
1330 
1390 
1450 
1500 
1560 
1620 
1670 
1730 
1790 
1870 
1980 
2100 
2210 
2320 
2440 

< 
< 
< 
< 
< 
< 

< 
< 
< 
< 
< 
< 
< 
< 
< 

< 
< 
< 
< 
< 
< 
< 
< 
< 
< 
< 
< 
< 
< 
< 
< 
< 
< 
< 
< 
< 
< 
< 
< 
<* 
< 
< 
< 
< 

105 
115 
125 
135 
150 
165 
185 
205 
225 
245 
270 
300 
330 
360 
395 
435 
480 
540 
600 
650 
710 
770 
820 
880 
940 
990 
1050 
1110 
1160 
1220 
1280 
1330 
1390 
1450 
1500 
1560 
1620 
1670 
1730 
1790 
1870 
1980 
2100 
2210 
2320 
2440 

R 
R 
R 
R 
R 
R  '< 
R * 
R 
R 
R 
R 
R 
R 
R 
R 
R 
R 
R 
R 
R 
R * 
R « 
R « 
R 4: 
R .< 
R S 
R s 
R « 
R $ 
R * 
R * 
R « 
R * 
R s 
R * 
R * 
R * 
R s 
R .< 
R * 
R « 
R * 
R * 
R $ 
R * 
R  6 
R 

100 
110 
120 
130 
140 
150 
170 
190 
210 
230 
260 
280 
310 
340 
380 
410 
450 
510 
570 
620 
680 
740 
800 
850 
910 
960 
1020 
1080 
1130 
1190 
1250 
1300 
1360 
1420 
1470 
1530 
1590 
1640 
1700 
1760 
1810 
1930 
2040 
2150 
2270 
2380 
2490 

5.3. 

Conditioning  of  the motorcycle or motor  tricycle 

5.3.1. 

5.3.2. 

5.3.3. 

Before  the  test, the motorcycle  or motor  tricycle  shall  be 
stored  at  a  temperature of  between  20' and  30'C.  After  the 
motor  has  idled  for  40 seconds, two complete  cycles shall  be 
performed  before  the exhaust  gases are collected. 

The  tyre pressure  shall  be  that  indicated  by  the manufacturer 
for  performance of  the preliminary  road  test  to set  the brake. 
However,  if the diameter  of  the rollers  is  less than 500 mm, 
the pressure  in the tyres may  be  increased  by  30-50%. 

The mass on  the driven wheel  is the same as when  the motorcycle 
or motor  tricycle  is used under  normal  driving  conditions with 
a driver weighing 75 kg. 

5.4. 

Calibration  of  analytical  apparatus 

5.4.1. 

Calibration of  analysers 

The quantity  of gas at  the  indicated  pressure  compatible  with 
the correct  functioning  of  the equipment  shall  be  injected  into 
the analyser  by means of  the flow meter  and  discharge  gauge 
mounted on each  bottle.  The apparatus  shall  be adjusted  to 
indicate as a stabilized  value  the value  shown on  the 
standard-gas  bottle.  Starting  from  the setting  obtained  with 
the maximum-content  bottle, the curve of  the  analyser's 
deviations  shall  be drawn as a function of  the content  of  the 
various standard-gas  bottles used.  For  the regular  calibration 
of  flame-ionization analysers, which  should  be done at  least 
once a month, mixtures of  air  and  propane  (or  hexane) with 
rated  concentrations of  hydrocarbon  equal  to 50% and 90% of  the 
full  scale shall  be used.  For  regular  calibration of non-
dispersive  infra-red  absorption  analysers, mixtures of  nitrogen 
with CO and CO2 respectively  shall  be measured  at  rated 
concentrât ions of  10%, 40%, 60%, 85% and 90% of  the  full scale. 
For  calibration of  the chemiluminescent  Nox  analyser  mixtures 
of  nitrous oxide  (NO) diluted  in nitrogen with  a nominal 
concentration of  50% and 90% of  the  full  scale  shall  be used. 
For  the  test  calibration, which  shall  be carried  out  before 
each  series of  tests  it  is necessary,  for all  three  types of 
analyser, to use mixtures containing  the gases  to be measured 
to a concentration equal  to 80% of  the full  scale.  A dilution 
device may  be used  to bring  the standard  gas up  to a 
concentration of  100% of  the concentration  required. 

PROCEDURE  FOR BENCH TESTS 

Special  conditions  for carrying out  the cycle 

The  temperature  in the premises where  the roller  bench  is 
situated  shall  be between  20 and  30'C  throughout  the  test, and 
shall  be as close as possible  to the  temperature  of  the 
premises where  the motorcycle or motor  tricycle  were 
condi t ioned. 

6. 

6.1. 

6.1.1. 

6.1.2. 

6.1.3. 

-Z£T-

The motorcycle or motor  tricycle shall  be more or  less 
horizontal  during  the  test  so as to avoid  any  abnormal 
distr ibut ion of  fuel. 

At  the end of  the first  40 second  idling period  (see 
item 6.2.2), a flow of  air of  variable  speed  shall  be  directed 
at  the motorcycle or motor  tricycle.  Two complete  cycles shall 
then be performed  during which  no exhaust  gases are collected. 
The  ventilation  system  shall  include a mechanism  controlled by 
the speed of  the bench  roller  so that,  in the range  from 
10 km/h  to 50 km/h, the  linear  air  speed  at  the blower  outlet 
shall  be equal  to the relative speed of  the  roller  with  an 
approximation of  10%.  For  roller  speeds below  10 km/h  the air 
speed may  be zero.  The end section of  the air  blower  device 
shall  have  the  following characteristics: 

i) 
ii) 
iii) 

surface  area of  at  least 0.4m2; 
lower  edge between 0.15  and  0.20  m above ground  level; 
distance  from  the  leading edge of  the motorcycle or 
motor  tricycle between  0.3  and  0.44  m. 

6.1.4 

6.1.5 

During  the  test, speed  shall  be plotted  against  time  in order 
to check  that  the cycles have been performed  correctly. 

The  temperatures  of  the cooling water  and  the crankcase oil may 
be  recorded. 

6.2. 

Starting  up  the engine 

6.2.1. 

Once  the preliminary operations on  the equipment  for 
collecting, diluting, analysing  and measuring  the gases have 
been  carried  out  (see  item 7.1  below),  the engine  shall  be 
started  up by means of  the devices provided  for  that  purpose, 
such  as the choke, the starter  valve, etc., according  to the 
manufacturer's  instructions. 

6.2.2. 

The engine  shall  be kept  idling  for  a maximum  of  40 seconds. 
The  first  cycle  shall  begin when  the  taking of  samples and  the 
measuring of  the pump  rotations commences. 

6.3 

Use of  the manual  choke 

The  choke  shall  be cut out  as soon as possible  and  in principle 
before  acceleration  from 0 to 50 km/h.  If this  requirement 
cannot  be met,  the moment  of actual  cut-out  shall  be  indicated. 
The choke shall  be adjusted  according  to the manufacturer's 
instruct ions. 

6.4 

Id Iing 

6.4.1 

Manual-shift  gearbox: 

6.4.1.1 

During  periods of  idling  the clutch  shall  be engaged  and  the 
gears  in neutral . 

- 2S7 -

6.4.1.2 

6.4.1.3 

6.4.1.4 

To  enable  the  accelerations  to  be  performed  according  to  the 
normal  cycle  the  vehicle  shall  be  put  in  first  gear,  with  the 
clutch  disengaged,  five  seconds  before  commencement  of  the 
acceleration  following  the  idling  period  in  question. 

The  first  idling  period  at  the  beginning  of  the  cycle  shall 
consist  of  six  seconds  of  idling  in  neutral  with  the  clutch 
engaged  and  five  seconds  in  first  gear  with  the  clutch 
disengaged. 

For  the  idling  periods  during  each  cycle  the  corresponding 
times  shall  be  16  seconds  in  neutral  and  five  seconds  in  first 
gear  with  the  clutch  disengaged. 

6.4.1.5 

The  last  idling  period  in  the  cycle  shall  consist  of 
seven  seconds  in  neutral  with  thé  clutch  engaged.; 

6.4.2 

6.4.3 

6.5 

6.5.1 

6.5.2 

6.6 

6.6.1 

6.6.2 

6.6.3 

6.6.4 

Semi-automatic  gearboxes:  the  manufacturer's  instructions  for 
driving  in  town,  or  in  their  absence  instructions  applicable  to 
manual  gearboxes,  shall  be  followed. 

Automatic  gearboxes:  the  selector  shall  not  be  operated  at  any 
time  during  the  test  unless  the  manufacturer  specifies 
otherwise. 
gearboxes  shall  apply. 

In  the  latter  case  the  procedure  for  manual 

Accelerations 

Accelerations  shall  be  so  performed  that  the  rate  of 
acceleration  is as  constant  as  possible  throughout  the 
operat ion. 

If  the  acceleration  capacities  of  the  motorcycle  or  motor 
tricycle  are  not  sufficient  to  perform  the  acceleration  cycles 
within  the  prescribed  tolerances,  the  motorcycle  or  motor 
tricycle  shall  be  driven  with  the  throttle  completely  open 
until  the  speed  prescribed  for  the  cycle  has  been  reached  and 
the  cycle  shall  then  continue  normally. 

Decelerations 

All  decelerations  shall  be  effected  by  completely  closing  the 
throttle,  the  clutch  remaining  engaged.  The  engine  shall  be 
disengaged  at  a  speed  of  10  km/h. 

If  the  period  of  deceleration  is  longer  than  that  prescribed 
for  the  corresponding  phase,  the  vehicle's  brakes  shall  be  used 
to  keep  to  the  cycle. 

If  the  period  of  deceleration  is  shorter  than  that  prescribed 
for  the  corresponding  phase,  the  timing  of  the  theoretical 
cycle  shall  be  restored  by  an  idling  period  merging  into  the 
following  idling  operation. 
applicable. 

In  this  case,  item  2.4.3.  is  not 

At  the  end  of  the  second  deceleration  period  (stopping 
motorcycle  or  motor  tricycle  on  the  rollers)  the  gear  shall  be 
put  into  neutral  and  the  clutch  engaged. 

(16] 

6.7 

Steady  speeds 

-  2 S> 

6-7.1 

5.7.2 

7. 

7.1. 

7.1.1. 

7.1.2. 

7.1.3. 

7.1.4 

7.1.5 

7.2 

7.2.1 

7.2.2 

7.2.3 

7.2.4 

7.2.5 

7.3 

7.3.1 

"Pumping" or  the closing of  the  throttle  shall  be avoided  when 
passing  from acceleration  to the  following  steady  speed. 

Periods of constant  speed  shall  be achieved  by  keeping  the 
accelerater  position  fixed. 

PROCEDURE  FOR SAMPLING, ANALYSING AND MEASURING THE VOLUME OF 
EMISSIONS 

Operations  to be carried out  before  the motorcycle or motor 
tricycle  is started up. 

The bags for collecting  the standard  samples, Sa and Sb, shall 
be emptied and sealed. 

The  rotary  displacement  pump P1  shall  be activated  without 
starting up  the revolution  counter. 

The pumps P2 and P3 for  taking  the samples  shall  be  activated 
with  the valves set  to divert  the gases produced  into the 
atmosphere; the  flow  through  valves V2 and V3 shall  be 
regulated. 

The  recording  devices of  the  temperature  gange T and  the 
pressure gauges  gl  and g2 shall  be put  into operation. 

The  revolution  counter  CT and  the roller revolution  counter 
shalI  be set  to zero. 

Beginning  of  sampling  and  volume  measurement 

After  the preliminary  40-second  idling period  and  after  two 
preparatory  cycles  (first moment  of  the first  cycle) the 
operations  specified  in  item 7.2.2  to 7.2.5  below  shall  be 
performed  all  at exactly  the same time. 

The diversion  valves shall  be set  to collect  the standard 
samples, which  have previously  been directed  towards  the 
atmosphere, continuously  through  probes S2 and  S3  in bags Sa 
and Sb. 

The moment  at which  the test  begins  shall  be  indicated  on  the 
analogue graphs which  record  results  from  the  temperature  gauge 
T  and  the differential  pressure gauges g1  and g2. 

The counter  which  records  the  total  number  of  revolutions  of 
pump P1 shall  be started up. 

The device  referred  to  in  item 6.1.3  which  directs a flow of 
air  at  the motorcycle or motor  tricycle  shall  be started up. 

End of  sampling and measurement  of  volume 

At  the end of  the  fourth  test  cycle  the operations  described  in 
items 7.3.2  to 7.3.5  below shall  be performed  at exactly  the 
same  time. 

- zs'fe -

7.3.2 

7.3.3 

7.3.4 

7.3.5 

The diversion  valves shall  be  set  to close  bags Sa and  Sb and 
to discharge  into the atmosphere  the standard  samples  sucked  in 
by pumps P2 and P3 through  probes S2 and S3. 

The moment  at which  the test  finishes shall  be  indicated on  the 
analogue graphs referred  to  in  item  7.2.3 

The pump P1  revolution counter  shall  be  stopped. 

The device  referred  to  in  item 6.1.3  which  directs a  flow of 
air  at  the motorcycle or motor  tricycle  shall  be  stopped. 

7.4 

Analysis of  the standard  samples  in the bags 

As soon as possible and  in any event  not  later  than 20 minutes 
after  the end of  the tests, analyses  shall  be  carried  out  to 
determine: 

the.concentrât ions of  hydrocarbons, carbon monoxide, oxides 
of  nitrogen and carbon dioxide  in the sample of  dilution 
air  contained  in bag Sb; 

the concentrations of  hydrocarbons, carbon monoxide, oxides 
of  nitrogen and carbon dioxide  in the sample of  diluted 
exhaust  gases contained  in bag Sa; 

7.5 

Measuring  the distance  travelled 

The distance  S actually  travelled, expressed  in km, shall  be 
obtained  by multiplying the total  number of  revolutions shown 
on  the  revolution counter  by  the size of  the  roller  (see 
item  4.1.1). 

8. 

8.1. 

DETERMINATION OF THE QUANTITY OF GASEOUS POLLUTANTS  EMITTED 

The mass of  carbon gas emitted  during  the  test  shall  be 
determined  by means of  the formula: 

C 0M  - 1  . V  . dco  . Ç 0. 
106 

S 

where 

8.1.1. 

C0|y| is the mass of carbon monoxide emitted  during  the test, 
expressed  in g/km. 

8.1.2. 

S  is the distance defined  in 7.5  above. 

8.1.3. 

8.1.4. 

den  's t ne  d e nsity  of carbon monoxide  at a temperature of  0*C 
and at a pressure of 760 mm of mercury  -  1.250  kg/m3; 

C 0C  is the volume concentration of carbon monoxide  in the 
diluted gases, expressed  in parts per million and  corrected  to 
take account  of pollution of  the dilution air: 

C 0C  - C 0e  - C0d  (1 - J__) 

DF 

where 

- 2*i -

8 , 1« 4 . 1. 

8.1.4.2. 

C0e  is the concentration of  carbon monoxide, measured  in 
parts per million,  in the sample of  diluted  gases  collected  in 
bag  SA; 

COd  is the concentration of  carbon monoxide, measured  in 
parts per million,  in the sample of  dilution  air  collected  in 
bag SB; 

8.1.4.3. 

DF  is the coefficient  specified  in  item 8.4  below; 

8.1.5. 

V  is the  total  volume, expressed  in m3/test, of  diluted  gases 
at  reference  temperature  O'C  (273'K) and  reference  pressure 
760 mm  of  mercury: 

V - Vo  . N  (Pa - Pi)  . 273 

760  .  (Tp + 273) 

where 

8.1.5.1. 

Vo  is the volume of gas displaced  by pump  P1  during one 
rotation  expressed  in m3/revolution.  This  volume  is a 
function of  the differential  pressures  between  the  inlet  and 
outlet  sections of  the pump  itself. 

8.1.5.2. 

N  is the number  of  rotations made by  the pump  P1  during  the 
four  test  cycles. 

8.1.5.3. 

Pa  is the atmospheric  pressure expressed  in mm of  mercury. 

8.1.5.4. 

8.1.5.5. 

8.2 

Pi  is the mean  value, expressed  in mb,  during  performance of 
the  four  cycles of  the drop  in pressure  in the  inlet  section of 
pump  P1 ; 

Tp  is the value, during  performance  of  the  four  cycles, of  the 
temperature  of  the diluted  gases measured  in the  inlet  section 
of  pump  P1. 

The mass of unburnt  hydrocarbons emitted  through  the exhaust  of 
the motorcycle  or motor  tricycle  during  the  test  shall  be 
calculated  by means of  the  formula: 

HCM  - 1  . V  dHC  .  HÇ_ç 
106 

S 

where: 

8.2.1. 

H CM  is the mass of  hydrocarbons  emitted  during  the  test, 
expressed  in g/km; 

8.2.2. 

S  is the distance  defined  in  item 7.5  above; 

8.2.3. 

8.2.4. 

dHç  is the density  of  hydrocarbons  at  a temperature  of  O'C 
and  a pressure of 760 mm of mercury  for  an average  ratio of 
carbon  to hydrogen of  1:1.85, or  0.619  kg/m3; 

HCc  is the concentration of  the diluted  gases expressed  in 
parts  per  million  carbon equivalent  (for  example:  the 
concentration of  propane multiplied  by  3) and  corrected  to take 
account  of  the dilution air: 

- z& -

HCc - HCe - HCd  (1 - i_) 

DF 

where: 

8.2.4.1. 

8.2.4.2. 

HCe  is the concentrât ion of  hydrocarbons, expressed  in parts 
per million  carbon equivalent,  in the sample of  diluted  gases 
collected  in bag SA; 

HCd  is the concentration of  hydrocarbons, expressed  in parts 
per million carbon equivalent,  in the sample of  dilution air 
collected  in bag SB; 

8.2.4.3. 

DF  is the coefficient  specified  in  item 8.4  below; 

8.2.5. 

V  is the total  volume  (see  item  8.1.5). 

8.3 

The mass of oxides of nitrogen emitted  through  the exhaust  of 
the motorcycle or motor  tricycle during  the  test  shall  be 
calculated  by means of  the formula: 

N 0xM  - 1  .V. dN0  . NO_xo—-|h-
106 

S 

where: 

8.3.1. 

N 0xM  js  t ne  mass of oxides of nitrogen emitted  during  the 
test, expressed  in g/km; 

8.3.2. 

S  is the distance defined  in  item 7.5  above; 

8.3.3. 

8.3.4. 

dN02  is the density of  the oxides of  nitrogen  in the exhaust 
gases,  in NO2 equivalent, at a temperature of  O'C  and a 
pressure of  760 mm of mercury  « 2.05  kg/m3; 

NOxc  is the concentration of oxides of  nitrogen  in the diluted 
gases, expressed  in parts per million and  corrected  to take 
account  of  the dilution air: 

NOxc - NOxe - NOxd  (1 - J_) 

DF 

where: 

8.3.4.1. 

8.3.4.2. 

NOxe  is the concentration of oxides of  nitrogen, expressed  in 
parts per million,  in the sample of  diluted gases; 

NOxd  is the concentration of oxides of  nitrogen, expressed  in 
parts per million,  in the sample of  dilution air  collected  in 
bag Sb; 

8.3.4.3. 

DF  is the coefficient  specified  in  item 8.4  below; 

8.3.5. 

Kh  is the correction  factor  for  humidity 

Kh - 

1__ 

1 - 0.0329 (H -  10.7) 

where: 

8.3.5.1. 

H  is the absolute  humidity  in grams of water  per  kg of  dry air 

-16/ -

H - 6.2111 

. U.Pd  (o/kq) 

Pa - Pd 

U 
100 

where: 

8.3.5.1.1. 

U  is the percentage  humidity; 

8.3.5.1.2. 

Pd  is the saturated-water-vapour  pressure, expressed  in mm of 
mercury, at  the test  temperature; 

8.3.5.1.3. 

Pa  is the atmospheric  pressure  in mm of mercury; 

8.4 

DF  is a coefficient  expressed  by means of  the  formula: 

DF - 

14.5 
C 02  + 0.5 CO + HC 

where: 

% vol . 

8.4.1. 

CO, CO2 and HC are concentrations of  carbon monoxide, carbon 
dioxide  and hydrocarbons expressed  as a percentage of  the 
sample of diluted  gases contained  in bag Sa. 

SUB-APPENDIX 1 
ENGINE OPERATING CYCLE  FOR THE TYPE  1 TEST 

Vkm/h 

K  -  Declutching 
PM-  Neutral 
Idling 
R  - 

Speed  (+  1 km/h) and time  (+  1 second)  tolerances 
are  combined  geometrically  for  each  point  as shown 
in  the  inset 

50  km/h 

35  km/h 
32 km/h 

15 km/h 

10  km/h 

1 

2  3  4 

ii"  r 
r-i 

IT  *'• 
f—, 

H 

2i" 

ir 

—* 

f-

n 

24" 

'»  U) 

I I" 

"f 

f" 

11 

71" 

i? 

?f," 

. 
i 

km/h 

S? 

,* 

<r 

12 

•  *•  sec 

3  4 

i 

t 

( s e c) 

13 

14 

ir> 

iG  17  in 

1?" 

I?" 

A 

13"  â 
i 

8"  . 
1 
5€^u.^nce.  n tun b us 
P a r t ed  phdM. fccm^s 

7" 

\ 

*• 

-2iZ-

SUB-APPENDIX  2 

EXAMPLE  NO  1  OF  AN  EXHAUST  GAS  COLLECTION  SYSTEM 

atmosphere 

c/  R2 

motorcycle or  motor 
tricycle  exhaust  pipes 

to  atmosphere 

-'Ut- 

-

SUB-APPENDIX  3 

EXAMPLE  NO 2 OF AN EXHAUST GAS COLLECTION  SYSTEM 

bag  for collecting 
di luting air 

oi i.uvion air  probe 

F3  c ^ a ui 

r.ioturcycle or 
motor  tricycle 
exhaust  pipes 

to  atmosphere 

bag for collectinc 
o-i luted  gases 

flow  meters 

to  atmosphere 

t 

diluted 
czses 
suction 
device 

P1 

Measuring tne 
total  volume 
o* the sample 
of  diluted 
gases 

diluted  gases  probe 

-*2É5 -

APPENDIX  2 

Type  I I test 

(measuring  emissions  of  carbon  monoxide 
at  idling  speed) 

1. 

INTRODUCTION 

2. 

2.1 

2.2 

2.3 

2.4 

3. 

3.1. 

3.2. 

3.3. 

Procedure  for  Type  II  test  specified  in  item  2.2.1.2. of 
Annex  I I. 

MEASUREMENT  CONDITIONS 

The  fuel  used  shall  be  that  prescribed  in Sub-appendix  1. 

The  concentration  by  volume  of  carbon  monoxide  and  hydrocarbons 
shall  be  measured  immediately  after  the  Type  I test  with  the 
engine  at  idling  speed. 

In  the  case  of  motorcycles  or  motor  tricycles  with  manual  or 
semi-automatic  gearboxes,  the  test  shall  be  carried  out  with 
the  gear  lever  in the  "neutral"  position  and  with  the  clutch 
engaged. 

In  the  case  of  motorcycles  or  motor  tricycles  with  automatic 
transmissions,  the  test  shall  be  carried  out  with  the  selector 
in position  "zero" or  "park". 

SAMPLING  OF  GASES 

The  exhaust  outlet  shall  be  fitted  with  a  sufficiently  leak-
tight  extension  piece  so  that  the  exhaust  gas  sampling  probe 
can  be  inserted  of  at  least  60  cm  without  increasing 
back-pressure  by  more  than  125 mm  H2O  and  without  affecting 
operation  of  the motorcycle  or  motor  tricycle.  Nevertheless, 
the  shape  of  the  extension  piece  shall  be  such  as  to  avoid 
appreciable  dilution  of  exhaust  gases  by  air  at  the  point  of 
the  sampling  probe.  If  the motorcycle  or  motor  tricycle  is 
equipped  with  more  than  one  exhaust  outlet,  either  these 
outlets  shall  be  connected  up  to  a common  pipe  or  carbon 
monoxide  concentrations  shall  be  tested  at  each  outlet,  with 
the  results  of  the measurements  being  the  arithmetical  mean  of 
these  concentrations. 

The  concentrations  of  CO  (C CO) and  C02  (C C02)  shall  be 
determined  by  reading  off  the  results  shown  by  the  instruments 
or  recording  devices  and  using  the  appropriate  calibration 
tables. 

The  corrected  concentration  of  carbon  monoxide  in  two-stroke 
engines  shalj  be : 

Cco  corr  - CCo 

Ifj 
cCo +  CC02 

(vol  -  %) 

3.4. 

The corrected concentration of carbon monoxide  in four-stroke 
eng ines sha I I be : 

-zu>-

Ceo c o rr  * CC0 

1^ 

CC0 + CC02 

(vol - %) 

3.5 

It shall not be necessary  to correct  the concentration of C CO 
(item 3.2) measured according to the formulae given in 
items 3.3 or 3.4  if the sum of the concentrations measured 
(C CO + C C02) is 10 or more for two-stroke engines or 15 or 
more for four-stroke engines. 

SUB-APPENDIX 1 

METHOD OF CALIBRATING THE ON-ROAD  POWER  ABSORPTION 
BY THE DYNAMOMETER  IN THE CASE OF MOTORCYCLES OR MOTOR  TRICYCLES 

This Sub-appendix  describes a method  used  to determine on-road  power 
absorption using  a roller bench. 

The absorbed  power  measured  on  the road  includes  the power  absorbed  by 
friction and  the power  absorbed  by  the power  absorption device.  The  roller 
bench  shall  be operated  above  the range of  test  speeds. 
activate  the roller  bench  shall  then be disconnected  from  the bench  and  the 
rotational  speed of  the roller(s) decreases. 

The device used  to 

The kinetic energy of  the device  is dissipated  by  the roller  bench  power 
absorption unit  and by  the friction of  the  roller  bench.  This method  takes no 
account  of  variations  in  internal  friction within  the roller  due  to the 
rotating mass of  the motorcycle or motor  tricycle.  The difference  between  the 
time the free  rear  roller  stops and  the time  the motor  driven  front  roller 
stops can be  ignored  in the case of  a bench  with  two rollers. 

Procedures  shall  be as follows: 

1. 

2. 

3. 

4. 

5. 

6. 

7. 

8. 

The  rotational  speed of  the roller  shall  be measured  if this has not 
already  been done.  An additional  measuring wheel, a revolution 
counter, or  another  method may  be used. 

The motorcycle or motor  tricycle  shall  be placed on  the  roller  bench 
or  another  method  shall  be used  to make  the roller  bench  function. 

The  flywheel, or  any other  of  the  inertia  simulation  systems most 
commonly  used with  the roller  bench  for  the particular  category of 
motorcycle or motor  tricycle mass  shall  be engaged. 

The  roller  bench  shall  be brought  to a speed of  50 km/h. 

The power  absorbed  shall  be  recorded. 

The  roller  bench  shall  be brought  to a speed of  60 km/h. 

The device used  to activate  the roller  bench  shall  be  disconnected. 

The  time  taken  for  the roller  bench  to decrease  from a speed of 
55 km/h  to a speed of  45 km/h shall  be  recorded. 

9. 

The power  absorption device shall  be set  to a different  level. 

10. 

Stages 4 to 9 above shall  be repeated  as often  as required  to cover 
the range of  the on-road  powers used. 

11. 

The absorbed  power  shall  be calculated  by means of  the  formula: 

2 

2 

Pd " M-| (V-| - V2)  0.03858 M-, 
2000 t 

t 

where 

-Zé>v;-

Pd 
M1 
V1 
v2 
t 

power  in kW 
equivalent  inertia  in kg 
initial  velocity  in m/s  (55 km/h  «  15.28 m/s) 
final  velocity  in m/s  (45 km/h  -  12.50 m/s) 

time  taken by  the  roller  to decelerate  from 55 km/h  to 

45 km/h 

12. 

Diagram  showing  the power  absorbed  by  the roller  bench  according  to 
the power  indicated  for  the test  speed of  50 km/h  referred  to  in 
phase  4 below. 

Absorbed  power 
Pw(kw) 

d 

34 

21 

1 

Indicated power 

(kW) 

- Ucl  -

ANNEX  I I I 

ADDITIONAL  SPECIFICATIONS  FOR  MEASURES  TO  BE  TAKEN  AGAINST  VISIBLE 
AIR  POLLUTION CAUSED  BY TWO- OR  THREE-WHEEL  MOTOR  VEHICLES 
EQUIPPED  WITH A COMPRESS ION-IGNITION  ENGINE 

1. 

DEFINITION 

For  the  purposes  of  this  chapter 

1.1 

2. 

2.1 

2.2 

2.2.1 

2.2.2 

2.2.2.1 

"Vehicle  type" means motor  vehicles  which  do  not  differ  in 
essential  respects  as  regards  the  characteristics of  the 
vehicle  and  the engine  as defined  in Appendix  7. 

TEST  SPECIFICATIONS 

General 

The  components  liable  to affect  the  emission  of  visible 
pollutants  shall  be  so designed,  constructed  and  assembled  as 
to enable  the  vehicle,  in normal  use, despite  the  vibration  to 
which  it may  be  subjected,  to continue  to comply  with  the 
requirements  of  this  Annex. 

Specifications of  cold-starting  device 

The  cold-starting  device  shall  be  designed  and  constructed  in 
such  a way  that  it can  not  continue  to operate  or  be  put  into 
operation  whilst  the engine  is operating  normally. 

The  provisions  of  item  2.2.1  above  shall  not  apply  if one or 
more  of  the  following  conditions  is met: 

While  the  cold-starting  device  is  in operation,  the  light 
absorption  coefficient  of  the gases  emitted  by  the  engine  under 
steady-state  operation,  as measured  by  the  procedure  laid  down 
in Appendix  1,  remain  within  the  limits  set  out  in Appendix  4. 

2.2.2.2 

Continued  operation  of  the  cold-starting  device  causes  the 
motor  to stop  after  a  reasonable  period. 

2.3 

2.3.1 

2.3.2 

Specifications concerning  emissions  of  visible  pollutants. 

Emissions  of  visible  pollutants by  the  type of  vehicle 
presented  for  type-approval  shall  be measured  using  the  two 
methods  described  in Appendices  1 and  2, which  respectively 
describe  tests under  steady-state  operation  and  tests  under 
free  acceleration. 

Emissions  of  visible  pollutants measured  according  to  the 
method  described  in Appendix  1 shall  not  exceed  the  limits  laid 
down  i n Append i x 3. 

~Tïo  -

2.3.3 

In the case of  an engine with  turbocharger, the absorption 
coefficient  measured  under  acceleration  in neutral  shall  not  exceed 
the  limit  laid down  in Appendix  3 for  the rated  flow value which 
corresponds  to the maximum  absorption coefficient  measured  under 
steady-state  operation  tests plus 0.5  m~1. 

2.3.4 

The use of equivalent  measuring equipment  shall  be allowed.  If 
equipment  other  than  that  described  in Appendix  4  is used,  proof 
shall  be given of  its equivalence  for  the  type of engine  concerned. 

-zv-

APPENDIX 1 

STEADY-STATE-OPERATION TEST OVER  THE FULL LOAD CURVE 

INTRODUCTION 

Procedure  for determining  emissions of  visible  pollutants under 
different  conditions of  steady-state operation over  the full 
load curve. 

The  test may  be performed  either  on an engine or on a vehicle. 

PRINCIPLE OF  MEASUREMENT 

The opacity of  the exhaust  gases produced  by  the engine 
operating  at  full  load under  steady-state  conditions  shall  be 
measured. 

A sufficient  number  of measurements  ranging  from  the maximum 
rated  speed  to the minimum  rated  speed  shall  be made.  The 
extreme measuring  points shall  be at  the  two extremities of  the 
interval  defined  above, and one measuring  point  shall  coincide 
with  the speed  at which  the engine  develops maximum  power  and 
the speed  at which  it develops maximum  torque. 

TEST CONDITIONS 

Motor  vehicle 

The engine or  the vehicle shall  be presented  in good  mechanical 
condition.  The engine must  have been  run  in. 

The engine shall  be  tested with  the equipment  specified  in 
Appendix  5 to this Annex. 

When  testing  an engine,  its power  shall  be measured  in 
accordance with  the special  regulation on maximum  power, but 
the tolerances  laid down  in  item 3.1.4  shall  apply.  When 
testing a vehicle, checks shall  be made  to ensure  that  the fuel 
flow rate  is no  lower  than  that  specified  by  the manufacturer. 

As regards  the power  of  the engine measured  on  the bench  during 
steady-state operation  testing over  the full  load curve, the 
following  tolerances shall  be allowed  according  to the power 
declared  by  the manufacturer: 

-  maximum  power  +. 2% 
-  at other measuring  points + 6%/-2% 

The exhaust  device shall  not  have any  leaks  likely  to dilute 
the gases emitted  by  the engine.  If an engine  has more  than 
one exhaust  outlet, they  shall  be  linked up  to one  single 
outlet  at which  the opacity  shall  be measured. 

1. 

1.1 

1.2 

2. 

2.1 

2.2 

3. 

3.1 

3.1.1 

3.1.2 

3.1.3 

3.1.4 

3.1.5 

-zyi-

3.1.6 

The settings of  the engine  shall  be  those prescribed  by  the 
manufacturer  for normal  use.  In particular, the cooling water 
and oil  shall  both be at  the normal  temperatures  prescribed  by 
the manufacturer. 

3.2 

Fuel 

3.3 

3.3.1 

The  reference diesel  fuel  the specifications for which  are set 
out  in Annex  IV shall  be used  for  the test. 

Test  laboratory 

The absolute  temperature T, expressed  in K, of  the air1 
admitted  into the engine shall  be measured  no more  than  15 cm 
before  the air  is admitted  to the air  filter or,  If there  is no 
air  filter, no more  than 15 cm  from  the air  intake. 
Atmospheric pressure ps, expressed  in kPa, shall  also be 
measured  and  the atmospheric  factor  fa shall  be determined  in 
accordance with  the provisions  in the special  regulation on 
maximum  power,  in accordance with  the  following provisions: 

3.3.1.1 

Engines with  natural  aspiration or  a mechanical  supercharger: 

fa 

l p s' 
' ps 

V2987 

0,7 

3.3.1.2 

Engines with  turbocharger  with or without  charge-air  cooling: 

0,7 
1,5 
fa  -  /ai)  .  /_!_) 

\ps' 

\ 298 ' 

3.3.2 

If a test  is to be recognized  as valid, the parameter  fa must 
be such  that  0.98  < fa < 1.02. 

3.4 

Sampling and measuring equipment 

The  light absorption  coefficient  of exhaust  gases shall  be 
measured  using an opacimeter which meets  the specifications of 
Appendix  4 and  is  installed  in accordance with  the 
specifications of Appendix 5. 

4. 

4.1 

EVALUATING THE LIGHT-ABSORPTION COEFFICIENT 

The nominal  flow of gas shall  be calculated  for each of  the 
rotation speeds for which  the absorption  coefficient  is 
measured  in accordance with  item 2.2 above by means of  the 
fol lowing  formulae: 

-  two-stroke engines G - Vn 
60 

-  four-stroke engines G - Vn 

120 

The test may be performed  in an air-conditioned  test cell where  the 
atmospheric  conditions can be controlled. 

U7 

-zîi-

where 

G  «  the  nominal  flow  of  gas  in  litres  per  second  (l/s) 
V  «  the  cylinder  capacity  expressed  in  litres  (I) 
N  -  the  rotation  speed  expressed  in  rpm 

4.2 

If  the  nominal  flow  value  does  not  correspond  with  one  of  the 
values  given  in  the  table  in Appendix  3,  the  limit  value  to  be 
used  shall  be  determined  by  interpolating  a  proportional  value 

1. 

1.1 

1.1.1 

1.1.2 

1.2 

1.3 

1.4 

2. 

2.1 

2.2 

2.3 

2.4 

APPENDIX  2 

FREE ACCELERATION  TEST 

TEST CONDITIONS 

Tests shall  be performed  on an engine  installed on  a test  bench 
or on a vehicle. 

If the engine  is tested on a bench,  it shall  be  tested  as soon 
as possible  after  the  test  to check opacity  under  steady-state 
operation over  the  full  load curve.  In particular  the cooling 
water  and oil  shall  both  be at  the normal  temperatures 
prescribed  by  the manufacturer. 

If the engine  is tested on a stationary  vehicle,  the engine 
shall  first  be operated  under  its normal  operating  conditions 
either  on  the  road or  in a dynamic  test.  The measuring  test 
shall  be conducted  as soon  as possible  after  the end of  this 
warming-up per iod. 

The combustion  chamber  shall  not  have been  cooled  or  clogged by 
excessive  idling  before  the  test. 

The  test  conditions set  out  in  items 3.1, 3.2  and  3.3 of 
Appendix  1 shall  apply. 

The conditions concerning  the sampling  and measuring  equipment 
set  out  in  item  3.4 of Appendix  1 shall  apply. 

TEST  PROCEDURE 

Emissions of  visible  pollutants  under  free acceleration  shall 
be measured  with  the motor  operating  at maximum  rated  speed  and 
at max imum power. 

When  the test  is carried  out  on  the bench,  the engine  shall  be 
disconnected  from  the brake,  this being  replaced  either  by  the 
driven  rotating  parts when  the gearbox  is  in neutral, or  by an 
inertia  that  is perceptibly  equivalent  to that  of  those parts. 

When  the  test  is carried  out  on a vehicle  the gearbox  control 
shall  be  in neutral  and  the clutch  engaged. 

With  the engine  idling,  the accelerator  shall  be operated 
rapidly  but  gently  in order  to obtain maximum  flow  from  the 
injection pump.  This position  shall  be maintained  until 
maximum  engine  speed  has been  achieved  and  the governor  cuts 
in.  As soon  as this speed  has been  reached,  the  accelerator 
shall  be released  until  the engine  returns  to  idling speed  and 
the opacimeter  again  registers  accordingly. 

2.5 

2.6 

2.6.1 

2.6.2 

- z%-

The operation  described  in  item 2.5  above  shall  be  repeated at 
least  six  times  in order  to clear  the exhaust  system  and, if 
necessary,  in order  to reset  the measuring  equipment.  The 
maximum opacity  values obtained  at each  successive  acceleration 
shall  be  recorded until  a stabilized  value  is obtained.  No 
account  shall  be taken of  values  recorded  during  the  idling 
period  following  each  acceleration  period.  Values shall  be 
considered  to have stabilized when  four  consecutive values come 
within a range of no more  than 0.25  m~1  and  do not  form a 
decreasing  series.  The absorption  coefficient  XM  recorded 
shall  be  the arithmetic mean of  these  four  values. 

Engines equipped with  a turbocharger  shall, where  appropriate, 
be governed  by  the following special  conditions: 

In the case of engines equipped  with  a turbocharger  which  is 
either  driven by a coupler  or  is driven mechanically  by  the 
engine and may  be disconnected, two complete measuring  cycles 
shall  be performed  with  preliminary  acceleration, the 
compressor  being connected  for one and disconnected  for  the 
other;  the measurement  result  adopted  shall  be  the higher  of 
the two; 

If the engine has more  than one exhaust  outlet, the  tests shall 
be performed  by combining  all  the outlets  in one  suitable 
device  to mix  the gases  together  and discharge  them  through one 
sole outlet; however, tests under  free acceleration may  be 
performed  at each of  the outlets,  in which  case  the value used 
to calculate  the corrected  absorption  coefficient  shall  be the 
arithmetic mean of  the values  recorded  at each outlet  and the 
test  shall  be considered  valid only  if the extreme  values 
measured  do not  differ  by more  than 0.15  m"1. 

3. 

DETERMINATION OF THE CORRECTED  VALUE  FOR  THE  ABSORPTION 
COEFFICIENT 

These provisions shall  apply  if the absorption  coefficient 
under  steady-state  operation  has actually  been  arrived  at on 
the same derivative engine  type. 

3.1 

Symbols 

XM - 

Xj_ • 

SM  - 

SL  - 

the value of  the absorption  coefficient  under 
acceleration  in neutral, measured  as  laid down  in 
item 2.6; 

the corrected  value of  the absorption  coefficient 
under  free acceleration; 

the value of  the absorption coefficient  measured  under 
steady-state operation  (see  item 2.1  of Appendix  1) 
which  is closest  to the prescribed  limit  value 
corresponding  to the same nominal  flow; 

the value of  the absorption coefficient  laid down  in 
item 4.2 of Appendix  1 for  the nominal  flow 
corresponding  to the measuring  point  which  gave  the 
value  SM-

3.2 

Since  absorption  coefficients  are  expressed  in  m- 1,  the 
corrected  value  XL  is  given  by  the  smaller  of  the  following 
two  expressions: 

- tri -

SM 

or 

XL  -  XM  +  0.5 

APPENDIX 3 

LIMIT VALUES APPLICABLE  IN STEADY-STATE TESTS 

Nom i naI fIow G 
Iitrès/second 

Absorption coefficient k 
m"1 

< 42 
45 
50 

55 
60 
65 
70 

75 
80 
85 

90 
95 
100 

105 
110 
115 

120 
125 
130 

135 
140 
145 

150 
155 
160 

165 
170 
175 

180 
185 
190 

195 
>200 

2,26 
2,19 
2,08 

1,985 
1,90 
1,84 
1,775 

1,72 
1,665 
1,62 

1,575 
1,535 
1,495 

1,465 
1,425 
1,395 

1,37 
1,345 
1,32 

1,30 
1,27 
1,25 

1,225 
1,205 
1,19 

1,17 
1.155 
1,14 

1,125 
1,11 
1,095 

1,08 
1,065 

mis. : 

Although the above values have been rounded off to the nearest 
0.01 or 0.005, this does not mean that the measurements have to 
be made to this degree of accuracy. 

APPENDIX  4 

SPECIFICATIONS FOR OPACIMETERS 

1. 

FIELD OF  APPLICATION 

2. 

2.1 

2.2 

2.3 

3. 

3.1 

3.2 

3.2.1 

3.2.2 

This Appendix  defines the conditions which must  be met  by the 
opacimeters used  in the tests described  in Appendices  1 and 2. 

BASIC SPECIFICATIONS FOR OPACIMETERS 

The gas to be measured  shall  be contained  in a chamber  whose 
internal  surface  is non-reflecting. 

The effective  length of  the passage of  rays of  light  through 
the gas being measured  shall  be determined  taking  into account 
the possible effect of  the devices  to protect  the  light source 
and  the photoelectric cell.  This  length  shall  be  indicated on 
the apparatus. 

The opacimeter's measurement  indicator  shall  have  two scales, 
one  in absolute units of  light absorption  from 0  to  (m~1) and 
the other  a  linear  scale  from 0 to 100; on both  scales 0 shall 
indicate  total  light and  the maximum  total  absence of  light. 

MANUFACTURING  SPECIFICATIONS 

General 

The opacimeter  shall  be such  that, under  steady-state  operating 
conditions, the smoke chamber  shall  be  full  of  smoke with 
uni form opaci ty. 

Smoke chamber  and opacimeter  housing 

The possibility  of unwanted  light  reaching  the photoelectric 
cell  as a result of  internal  reflection or  the effects of 
diffusion  shall  be kept  to a minimum  (e.g. by  colouring 
internal  surfaces matt  black  and arranging  them  in a suitable 
way). 

The optical  characteristics shall  be such  that  the combined 
effect  of  diffusion and  reflection  does not exceed one unit on 
the  linear scale when  the smoke chamber  is full  of  smoke with 
an absorption coefficient  in the region of  1.7 m""1. 

3.3 

Light  source 

3.4 

3.4.1 

The  light source shall  be an  incandescent  lamp with  a colour 
temperature between  2 800 and  3 250"K. 

Receiver 

The  receiver  shall  consist of  a photoelectric cell  with a 
spectral  response curve similar  to the photopic  curve of  the 
human eye  (maximum  response  in the 550/570 nm band,  less 
than 4% of  this maximum  response below 430 nm and  above 
680  nm). 

3.4.2 

3.5 

3.5.1 

- 2 f t-

Construction  of  the electrical  circuit  containing  the 
measurement  indicator  shall  be such  that  the output  current  of 
the photoelectric cell  is a  linear  function of  the  intensity  of 
light  received  in the  range of operating  temperatures  of  the 
photoelectric  eel I. 

Measurement  scale 

The  light  absorption  coefficient  k shall  be calculated  by means 
of  the  formula  t  - d0. e ~K L, where  L  is the effective  length 
of  the passage of  light  beams  through  the gas being  measured, 
6Q  is the  flow of  light  in and 0  is the  flow of  light  out. 
When  the effective  length L of  a type of opacimeter  may  not  be 
evaluated  directly  according  to  its geometry,  the  actual  length 
L shall  be  determined: 

-  either  by  the method  described  in  item  4, or 
-  by comparison  with  another  type of opacimeter  whose 

actual  length  is known. 

3.5.2 

The  relation  between  the  linear  scale  from  0  to  100 and  the 
absorption  coefficient  k shall  be arrived  at  by means of  the 
fol lowing  formula: 

3.5.3 

3.6 

3.6.1 

3.6.2 

3.6.3 

* - 1  loge  d  - _N_J 
100 

L 

where  N  is the  reading on  the  linear  scale  and  k  the 
corresponding  absorption coefficient  value. 

The measurement  indicator  of  the opacimeter  shall  allow  reading 
of  an absorption  coefficient  of  1.7 m~1  with  an accuracy  of 
0.025 m~1. 

Setting  and  testing  the measuring  equipment 

The electrical  circuit  of  the photoelectric  cell  and  the 
indicator  shall  be adjustable  so  that  the needle  can be set  to 
zero when  the  flow of  light  passes  through  a smoke  chamber 
filled with  clean  air or  a chamber  with  identical 
characterist ics. 

With  the  lamp off  and  the electrical  measuring  circuit  off  or 
short-circuited,  the  reading  from  the scale of  absorption 
coefficients  shall  b e o o a n d,  with  the measuring  circuit  on 
again  the value shall  still  b e ^ o. 

An  intermediate  check  shall  be carried out  by  placing  in the 
smoke  chamber  a filter which  represents  a gas whose  absorption 
coefficient, k, measured  as described  in  item  3.5.1,  is known 
to be between  1.6 m~1  and  1.8 m~1.  The  k value must  be 
known  to within 0.025 m~1.  The check  is designed  to  ensure 
that  the value  differs by no more  than  0.05  m~1  from  that 
shown on  the measurement  indicator  once  the  filter  has  been 
inserted  between  the  light  source  and  the photoelectric cell. 

3.7 

3.7.1 

3.7.2 

3.7.3 

3.7.4 

3.8 

3.8.1 

3.8.2 

3.8.3 

3.8.4 

3.9 

3.9.1 

-Z&D -

Opacimeter  response 

The  response  time of  the electrical  measuring  circuit, which is. 
the  time  it takes  for  the  indicator  to reach  a total  deflection 
of  90% of  the full  scale when  a screen  is  inserted  which  fully 
obscures  the photoelectric  cell, shall  be between  0.9  and  1.1 
second. 

Damping  of  the electrical  measuring  circuit  shall  be such  that 
the  initial  exceeding  of  the  final  stable  value  after  any 
momentary  variation  in the  input  value  (e.g.  the check  filter) 
does not  exceed  4% of  this value  in the units  in the  linear 
scale. 

The  response  time of  the opacimeter  to physical  phenomena  in 
the smoke chamber, which  is the period of  time beween  the 
gases  first entering  the measuring  device  and  the gases 
completely  filling  the smoke  chamber,  shall  not  be more  than 
0.4  second. 

These provisions shall  apply  only  to opacimeters used  to 
measure opacity  under  free acceleration. 

Pressure of  the gas  to be measured  and  the scavenging  air. 

The  pressure of  the exhaust  gases  in the smoke  chamber  shall 
not  differ  from  that of  the ambient  air  by more  than 75 mm 
water  column. 

Variations  in the pressure of  the gases being measured  and  the 
scavenging  air  shall  not  cause  the absorption  coefficient  to 
vary  by more  than 0.05 m~1  for  a gas corresponding  to an 
absorption  coefficient  of  1.7 m~1. 

The opacimeter  shall  be  fitted  with  devices  capable of 
measuring  the pressure  in the smoke  chamber. 

The manufacturer  of  the appliance  shall  indicate  the  limits in 
variation of  the pressure of  the gas and  the scavenging  air  in 
the smoke  chamber. 

Temperature  of  the gas being  measured. 

Throughout  the smoke  chamber,  the  temperature  of  the gas at  the 
time of measurement  shall  be between  70'C and  a maximum 
temperature  specified  by  the manufacturer  of  the opacimeter, 
such  that  readings over  this  range of  temperatures  shall  not 
vary  by more  than 0.1  m~1  when  the chamber  is full  of  a gas 
with  an absorption coefficient  of  1.7 m~1. 

3.9.2 

The opacimeter  shall  be equipped  with  devices  to measure 
temperature  in the smoke  chamber. 

4. 

4.1 

4.1.1 

4.1.2 

4.1.3 

4.2 

4.2.1 

4.2.2 

4.2.3 

4.2.4 

4.2.5 

4.2.5.1 

4.2.5.2 

-2gl -

EFFECTIVE  LENGTH  "L" OF THE  OPACIMETER 

General 

In certain  types of opacimeter,  the gases  between  the  light 
source  and  the photoelectric  cell, or  between  the  transparent 
components  protecting  the  light  source  and  the photoelectric 
cell, does not  have constant  opacity.  In these  cases  the 
effective  length  L  is that  of  a column of  gas of  uniform 
opacity  resulting  in the same  light  absorption  as  that  observed 
when  the gas passes  through  the opacimeter  normally. 

The effective  length of  the passage of  the  light  rays  is 
obtained  by comparing  the  reading  N on  the opacimeter  operating 
normally  with  the reading  N0  obtained  with  the  opacimeter 
modified  so that  the  test  gas  fills a carefully  defined  length 

Lo-

Comparative  readings shall  be  taken  in rapid  succession  in 
order  to determine  the correct  place of  zero. 

Method  of evaluating L 

The  test  gases shall  be  the exhaust  gases  with  constant  opacity 
or  absorbent  gases with  a density  in the order  of  that  of  the 
exhaust  gases. 

A column  L0 of  the opacimeter  which  may  be uniformly  filled 
with  the  test  gases  and with  bases more or  less  perpendicular 
to the direction  of  the  light  rays shall  be  determined 
accurately.  This  length L0  shall  be close  to the  supposed 
effective  length of  the opacimeter. 

The  average  temperature  of  the  test  gases  in the smoke  chamber 
shalI  be measured. 

If necessary,  an expansion  vessel  with  sufficient  capacity  to 
neutralize pulsations  and of  compact  shape may  be  incorporated 
into the sampling  line, as near  the probe  as possible.  A 
cooling device may  also be  installed.  Addition of  an  expansion 
vessel  and  a cooling  device  shall  not  unduly  affect  the 
composition of  the exhaust  gases. 

The  test  to determine  effective  length  shall  consist  in passing 
a sample  of  test  gas alternately  through  the opacimeter 
operating  normally  and  through  the same  apparatus modified  as 
described  in  item 4.1.2. 

The  readings given  by  the opacimeter  shall  be  recorded on a 
continuous basis during  the  test  with  a recording  device  whose 
response  time  is as equivalent  to that  of  the opacimeter  as 
possible. 

With  the opacimeter  operating  normally,  the  reading  on  the 
linear  scale  shall  be N and  that  of  the average  temperature of 
the gases expressed  in degrees Kelvin  shall  be T. 

- l%7 -

4.2.5.3 

With  the known  length LQ  filled  with  the same  test  gas, the 
reading on  the  linear  scale shall  be NQ  and  that  of  the 
average  temperature of  the gases expressed  in degrees Kelvin 
shalI  be T0. 

4.2.6 

The effective  length shall be: 

L - L0  T 

log ( 1 - 

) 

N 
100 

T0 

log  ( 1 - _ No  ) 

100 

4.2.7 

4.2.8 

The  test  shall  be repeated with at  least  four  test gases  to 
give  readings spaced  regularly  along  a  linear  scale  from  20 to 
80. 

The effective  length L of  the opacimeter  shall  be  the 
arithmetic mean of  the effective  lengths obtained  as defined  in 
item 4.2.6  with each of  the test gases. 

-  ?Jè'i-

APPENDIX 5 

INSTALLATION AND USE OF THE OPACIMETER 

1. 

FIELD OF APPLICATION 

2. 

2.1 

2.1.1 

2.1.2 

2.1.3 

2.1.4 

2.1.5 

2.1.6 

This Appendix  contains specifications for  the  installation and 
use of opacimeters designed  for use  in the  tests described  in 
Appendices  1 and 2. 

SAMPLING OPACIMETER 

Installation  for  steady-state  testing 

The  ratio between  the surface area of  the section of  the probe 
and  that of  the exhaust  pipe shall  be at  least  0.05.  The 
back-pressure measured  in the exhaust  pipe at  the probe  inlet 
shall  not exceed  75 mm of water. 

The probe shall  be a tube with  its open end  facing  forwards  in 
the axis of  the exhaust  pipe, or of  the extension  piece  if 
used.  It shall  be placed  in a section where distribution of 
the gas  is approximately uniform.  In order  to achieve  this, 
the probe shall  be placed  as far downstream of  the exhaust  pipe 
as possible, or extension  piece  if used, so that,  if D  is the 
diameter  of  the exhaust  pipe at  its outlet, the end of  the 
probe  is placed  in a rectilinear  section  having  a  length of at 
least 6 D upstream of  the sampling point  and  3 D  downstream. 
If an extension  tube  is used no air  shall  be allowed  to enter 
at  the joint. 

The pressure  in the exhaust  pipe and  the nature of  the drop  in 
pressure  in the sampling  line shall  be such  that  the probe 
collects a sample which  is virtually  equivalent  to that which 
would  be obtained  by  isokinetic sampling. 

If necessary, an expansion  vessel  of  compact  shape and with 
sufficient  capacity  to neutralize any  pulsations may  be 
incorporated  into the sampling  line, as near  the probe  as 
possible.  A cooling  device may  also be  installed.  The 
expansion  vessel  and  the cooling  device shall  be so designed 
that  they do not unduly  affect  the composition of  the exhaust 
gases. 

A butterfly  valve, or  another  means of  increasing  the sampling 
pressure, may  be  fitted  inside  the exhaust  pipe  at  least  3 D 
downstream  of  the sampling probe. 

The pipes between  the probe, the cooling device, the expansion 
vessel  (if used) and  the opacimeter  shall  be as short  as 
possible, whilst meeting  the pressure  and  temperature 
requirements  laid down  in  items 3.8  and  3.9  in Appendix  4.  The 
pipes shall  slope upwards  from  the sampling point  to the 
opacimeter  and  there shall  be no sharp bends where  soot  can 
accumulate.  If not  incorporated  in the opacimeter, a bypass 
valve shall  be  fitted  upstream. 

2.1.7 

2.2 

2.2.1 

2.2.2 

2.2.3 

2.2.4 

During  the  test,  checks  shall  be  made  to ensure  that  the 
provisions  of  item  3.8  in Appendix  4 on  pressure  and  those  of 
item  3.9  on  temperature  in  the  measuring  chamber  are  being  met. 

Installation  for  tests  under  free  acceleration. 

The  ratio  between  the  surface  area  of  the  section  of  the  probe 
and  that  of  the exhaust  pipe  shall  be  at  least  0.05.  The 
back-pressure  measured  in the  exhaust  pipe  at  the  probe  inlet 
shall  not  exceed  75 mm  of  water. 

The  probe  shall  be  a  tube  with  its open  end  facing  forwards  in 
the  axis  of  the exhaust  pipe, or  of  the  extension  piece  if 
used.  It shall  be  placed  in a  section  where  distribution  of 
the  gas  is approximately  uniform.  In order  to  achieve  this, 
the  probe  shall  be  placed  as  far  downstream  of  the  exhaust  pipe 
as  possible,  or  extension  piece  if used,  so  that,  if  D  is  the 
diameter  of  the  exhaust  pipe  at  its outlet,  the  end  of  the 
probe  is placed  in a  rectilinear  section  having  a  length  of  at 
least  6  D upstream  of  the  sampling  point  and  3 D  downstream. 
If an  extension  tube  is used  no  air  shall  be  allowed  to  enter 
at  the  joint. 

The  sampling  system  shall  be  such  that  all  engine  speeds  the 
pressure  of  the  sample  in the  opacimeter  is within  the  limits 
laid  down  in  item  3.8.2  of  Appendix  4.  This  can  be  checked  by 
noting  the  pressure  of  the  sample  at  idling  speed  and  at 
maximum  speed  under  no  load.  Depending  on  the  type  of 
opacimeter,  the  pressure  of  the  sample  can  be  controlled  by 
installing  a  collar  or  a butterfly  valve  in  the  exhaust  pipe  or 
the  extension  piece.  Whatever  the method  used,  the 
back-pressure  measured  in  the  exhaust  pipe  at  the  probe  inlet 
shall  not  exceed  75 mm  of  water. 

The  pipes  connected  to  the opacimeter  shall  be  as  short  as 
possible.  The  pipe  shall  slope  upwards  from  the  sampling  point 
to  the  opacimeter  and  there  shall  be  no  sharp  bends  where  soot 
can  accumulate.  A  bypass  valve  may  be  installed  before  the 
opacimeter  to  isolate  the  exhaust  gases,  except  when 
measurements  are  being  taken. 

3. 

TOTAL  FLOW  OPACIMETER 

3.1 

3.2 

The  only  general  precautions  to  be observed  for  tests  under 
steady  state  operation  and  under  free  acceleration  are  as 
fol lows  : 

The  pipes  connecting  the  exhaust  system  and  the  opacimeter 
shall  be  such  that  no outside  air  may  enter. 

The  opacimeter  connection  pipes  shall  be  as  short  as  possible 
as  for  the  sampling  opacimeters.  The  pipes  shall  slope  upwards 
from  the  exhaust  pipe  to  the opacimeter  and  there  shall  be  no 
sharp  bends  where  soot  can  accumulate.  A  bypass  valve  may  be 
installed  before  the opacimeter  to  isolate  the  flows  of  exhaust 
gases,  except  when  measurements  are  being  taken. 

3.3 

t . * 

A  cooling  system  upstream  of  the  opacimeter  may  also  be 
necessary. 

-  zs<-

ANNEX  IV 

SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE REFERENCE  FUEL  (PETROL) 
Technical  characteristics of  the reference  fuel: 
CEC 08-A-85  (Type:  MpremiumM  unleaded  petrol) 
to be used  for  the test on  two- or  three-wheel  vehicles 

Character ist ics 

Limits and units 

ASTM  Method1> 

Research octane  number  (RON) 
Motor  octane number  (MON) 
Specific gravity  at 15'C 

max. 

min. 

95.0 
85.0 

0.748 

0.762 

D  2699 
D  2700 
D  1298 

Vapour  pressure  (Reid) 

0.56  bar 

0.64  bar 

D  323 . 

DistiIlation 
Initial  boiIing point 

-10 %  vol. 
-50 %  voI. 
-90 %  voI. 

Final  boiIing point 

Residue 

Hydrocarbon  analysis 

-olef ins 
-aromat ics 

•paraff ins 

24 *C 
42 *C 
90 *C 
155 *C 
190 'C 

40 *C 
58 *C 
110 *C 
180 *C 
215  *C 
2  % 

86 
86 
86 
86 
86 
86 

(of which 
5% voI. 
benzol*) 

20 %  voI. 

D  1319 

45 %  vol. 
add it ional 

*D 3606/D  2267 

D  1319 

Hydrocarbon/hydrogen  ratio 

rat io 

Resistance  to oxidation 

480 min 

D  525 

Gasoline existent  gum 

4 mg/100ml 

D  381 

Sulphur  content 

0.04  % 
by mass 

D  1266/D 2622 
/D2785 

Copper-strip  corrosion, 50*C 

1 

D  130 

Lead  content 
Phosphorus  content 

0.005 g/l 
0.0013 g/l 

D  3237 
D  3231 

*) NB:  Addition of elements containing oxygen  prohibited. 

1)  Initials of  the American  Society  for Testing  and Materials, 1916 Race 

Street, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania  19103, USA 

2Sb-

SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE REFERENCE  FUEL  (DIESEL) 
(CEC RF 03-A-84) 

Character ist ics 
Specific  gravity  at 15'C 

Limits and uni ts 
min. 0,835 kg/I 
max. 0,845 kg/I 

Cetane  index 

Dist iIlat ion point 
50%  voI. 
90%  voI. 

Final  point 

Viscosity  at 40*C 

Sulphur  content 
2785 

Flashpoint 

Cold  f iIter plugging 
point 

min. 49 
max. 53 

min. 245*C 
min. 320"C 
max. 340'C 
max.  370"C 

min. 2,5 mm^/s 
max. 3,5 mm2/s 
min. to carry over 

max. 0,30 %  (mass) 

min. 55'C 

max.-5'C 

ASTM method 

D  1298 

D 613 

D 86 

D 445 

D  1266, D 2622 ou D 

D 93 

(CEN) 

EN116 

or  IP309 

Conradson  carbon  (residue) 

max. 0,20 %  (mass) 

D 189 

10 % 

Ash  content 

max. 0,01 %  (mass) 

D 482 

Water  content 

max. 0,05 %  (mass) 

D 95 or D 1744 

Copper-strip  corrosion 
at  100*C 

max. 1 

Neutralization  number 

max. 0,20 mg KOH/g 

Oxidation  resistance 

max . 2,5 mg/100ml 

D 130 

D 974 

D 2274 

Note  1 : The equivalent  ISO methods  shall  be specified  if these  have  been 

published  for all  the characteristics  listed above. 

Note 2: The figures given under  "Distillation"  refer  to total  quantities 

evaporated  (including  losses). 

Note 3: This  fuel may be made of straight  run distillates and cracked 

distillates;  it may be sulphur-free.  It may not contain  metallic 
add it ives. 

- ?8j  -

Note 4: The values stated  in the specifications are  "actual  values".  The 

terms used  to determine  limit  values were  those  in the ASTM 
Standard  D 3244  "Defining  a basis  for  Petroleum  Product  Quality 
Disputes", and  the maximum was set  by  taking  a minimum  difference of 
2R above  zero; a maximum  and  a minimum  were  set  by  taking  a minimum 
difference  of  4R  (R - reproducibility). 

Although  this measure  is necessary  for  statistical  reasons, a fuel 
producer  should  strive  for  the zero value when  the maximum  stipulated 
is 2R, and  the average  value when  there  is a minimum  and  a maximum. 
The  terms of ASTM  Standard  D 3244 shall  be applied when  determining 
whether  a fuel  meets  these specifications. 

Note 5:  If  it  is necessary  to calculate  the  thermal  efficiency of  an engine or 
a vehicle,  the calorific  value of  the fuel  may  be obtained  by means of 
the following  formula: 

Lower  calorific  value  (in MJ/kg) « 

(46.423 - 8.792d2 + 3.170d) (1 -  (x +y  +s) + 
9.420s -  2.499X 

where 

d - density  measured  at  15*C 

x - water  content,  in terms of mass  (%  divided  by  100) 

y - ash  content,  in terms of mass  (%  divided  by  100) 

s - sulphur  content,  in terms of mass  (%  divided  by 100). 

-  28F-

ANNEX V 

INFORMATION DOCUMENT 
IN RESPECT OF MEASURES TO COUNTER  ATMOSPHERIC POLLUTION 
CAUSED BY A TYPE OF TWO- OR THREE-WHEEL MOTOR  VEHICLE1) 

(to be attached  to the application  for  component  type  approval 
where  this  is submitted  spearately  from  the application for 
vehicle  type  approval) 

Order  number  (assigned  by  the  applicant) 

The application  for  component  type approval  in respect  of measures  to counter 
atmospheric  poI lut ion-caused by a type of  two- or  three-wheel  motor  vehicle 
shall  contain  the  information  set out  in Annex  II to Directive  92/61/CEE of 
30 June  1992, under  A,  in  items: 

0.1. 

0.2. 

0.4.  to 0.6. 

2.  to 2.3.2. 

3. to 3.2.2. 

3.2.4.  to 3.2.4.4. 

3.2.6.  to 3.2.6.7. 

3.2.7.  to 3.2.13. 

3.5. to 3.6.3.1.2. 

4.  to 4.6. 

1) The manufacturer  shall  supply  data equivalent  to those  set out  below  for 

conventional  engines or systems. 

(18] 

ANNEX VI 

CERTIFICATE OF COMPONENT  TYPE  APPROVAL 
IN RESPECT OF MEASURES TO COUNTER  ATMOSPHERIC POLLUTION  CAUSED 
BY A TYPE OF TWO- OR THREE-WHEEL  MOTOR  VEHICLE 

MODEL 

Name of 

Administrât ion 

Report  No 

by  testing  body 

date 

Component  type  approval 

Extension  No 

1.  Make or  trade  name of  vehicle 

2.  Type of  veh icle 

3.  Manufacturer's  name  and  address 

4.  Name  and  address of manufacturer's  representative  (if  any) 

5..  Vehicle  submitted  for  test  on 

6.  Component  type approval  granted/refused' 

7.  Place 

8.  Date 

9.  Signature 

* Delete  as  appropriate 

-2C\0 

-

CHAPTER  6 

FUEL  TANKS 
FOR TWO OR THREE-WHEEL  MOTOR  VEHICLES 

1. 

1.1 

1.2 

1.3 

ANNEX 

BUILD  REQUIREMENTS 

GENERAL 

Fuel  tanks shall be made with materials the thermal, mechanical 
and  chemical  behaviour of which  continue to be appropriate  under 
their  intended  conditions of use. 

Fuel  tanks and the adjacent  parts shall be designed  in such a way 
as not to generate any electrostatic charge which  could  cause 
sparking  between the tank and the chassis of the vehicle  which 
could be  likely to ignite the fuel/air  mixture. 

Fuel  tanks shall  be made  in such a way as to withstand  corrosion. 
They  shall  pass the leak-tightness  tests  carried out by their 
manufacturer  at a pressure  that  is twice the relative  service 
pressure and, in any case,  is at  least  equal  to an absolute 
pressure of 130 kPa.  Any excess  pressure or any pressure 
exceeding  the service  pressure  shall  be automatically  released by 
appropriate devices  (orifices, safety  valves, etc.).  The 
ventilation orifices shall  be designed  in such a way as to 
preclude any risk of  ignition.  The fuel  shall  be unable to flow 
from the filler cap or any devices  fitted  in order  to release 
excess pressure even  if the tank  is fully  inverted;  dripping  will 
be  tolerated. 

2. 

TESTS 

Fuel  tanks made of anything other  than metal  are to be tested as 
described  below and in that  order : 

2.1. 

PERMEABILTY  TEST 

2.1.1. 

Test  method 

The  fuel  tank  shall  be tested at a temperature of 313 K ± 2 K. 
The  test  fuel  to be used  shall  be the reference  fuel  defined in 
Chapter V on measures to counter  atmospheric  pollution by two or 
three-wheel  wheel  motor  vehicles. 

The  tank  shall be filled up to 50% of its rated  capacity  with 
reference  fuel  and allowed  to rest  In the ambient  air at a 
temperature  of 313 K ± 2 K until  there  is a constant  weight  loss. 
That  period  shall  be at  least  four  weeks  (pre-storage  period). The 
tank  shall  be emptied  and then  refilled to 50% of its rated 
capacity  with  test  fuel. 

The  tank  shall  then be stored  under  the stabilizing  conditions at 
a  temperature of 313 K ± 2 K until  its contents are at the test 
pressure. The tank  shall  then be closed. The pressure  rise  in the 
tank  during  the test may be compensated. 

-212-

The weight  loss due  to diffusion  must  be  determined  during  the 
eight-week  test. During  that  test  a maximum  quantity of  20 g may 
escape, on  average, every  24 hours.  If the  diffusion  losses  are 
greater  the  fuel  loss must  also  be  determined  at  an  ambient 
temperature  of  296 K ±  2 K,  all  other  conditions  being  maintained 
(pre-storage  at  313 K ±  2 K ). The  loss determined  under  those 
conditions  shall  not  exceed  10 g per  24 hours. 

When  the  test  is conducted  with  internal  pressure  compensation, 
which  must  be mentioned  in the  test  report,  the  fuel  loss 
resulting  from  the pressure  compensation  must  be  taken  into 
account  when  the diffusion  loss  is established. 

2.2. 

SHOCK  TEST 

2.2.1. 

Test  method 

The  fuel  tank  shall  be  filled  up  to  its nominal  capacity  with  a 
mixture of  50 % water  and ethylene  glycol  or  with  any  other 
coolant  which  does not  attack  the  fuel  tank material,  the 
cryoscopic  point  of which  is  lower  than  243 K ±  2 K. 

The  temperature  of  the substances  contained  in the  fuel  tank 
during  the  test  shall  be  253 K ± 5 K. The  tank  shall  be  cooled 
down  at  a corresponding  ambient  temperature.  It  is also  possible 
to  fill  the  fuel  tank with  a suitably  refrigerated  liquid  provided 
that  the  fuel  tank  is  left  at  the  test  temperature  for  at  least  an 
hour. 

A pendulum  shall  be used  for  the  test.  Its  impact  head  shall  take 
the  form  of  an equilateral  triangular  pyramid  having  a  radius of 
curvature  of  3.0 mm  at  its peaks and  tips. With  a mass of  15 kg 
the  pendulum's  energy  may  not  be  less  than  30.0  J. 

The  points on  the  fuel  tank  to be  tested  shall  be  those  considered 
at  risk  as  a result  of  the  fitting of  the  tank  and  its position  on 
the  vehicle. There must  be no  liquid  leakage  following  a  single 
impact  at  one of  those points. 

2.3. 

MECHANICAL  STRENGTH 

2.3.1. 

Test  method 

The  fuel  tank  shall  be  filled  up  to" its rated  capacity,  the  test 
liquid used  being  water  at  326 K ±  2 K. The  relative  internal 
pressure  shall  not  be  less  than  30 kPa. Where  the  fuel  tank  has 
been  designed  to withstand  relative  internal  pressure  of  use 
greater  than  15 kPa,  the  relative  test  pressure  to be  applied 
shall  be double  the  relative  internal  use  pressure  for which  the 
tank  has  been  designed. 
The  tank  shall  remain  closed  for  a period of  5 hours. 

No  deformation  which  may  arise may  render  the  fuel  tank unusable.' 
(For  example,  the  tank must  not  be  perforated).  Account  shall  be 
taken of  the  specific  fitting  conditions  if the deformation  of  the 
tank  is to be  assessed. 

2.4. 

FUEL-RES ISTENCE TEST 

2.4.1. 

Test  method 

Six  tensile-test  pieces of  approximately  the same  thickness  shall 
be  taken  from  the  flat  faces. Their  tensile  strength  and  elastic 
limits shall  be established  at  296 K i  2 K at  an elongation  rate 
of  50 mm/min.  These  values must  be compared  with  the  tensile 
strength  and  elasticity  values obtained  via  similar  tests using  a 
fuel  tank  that  has already  been  stored  for  the pre-storage  period. 
The material  must  be considered  to be acceptable  if there  has  been 
no difference  in tensile  strength  of more  than 25%. 

2.5. 

FIRE-RES ISTENCE TEST 

2.5.1. 

Test  method 

The  tank  material  shall  not  burn  at  a flame  speed  greater  than 
0.64  mm/sec  in the  test  set  out  in Appendix  1. 

2.6. 

HIGH-TEMPERATURE  TEST 

2.6.1. 

Test  method 

The  fuel  tank,  filled  to 50% of  its rated  capacity  with  water  at 
293 K ±  2 K,  shall  not  display  plastic  deformation  or  leaks after 
storage  for  one  hour  at  an ambient  temperature  of  343 K ±  2 K. 
After  the  test  the  tank  shall  always be  fully  usable. 
The  testing  device  shall  take account  of  the  fitting  conditions. 

2.7 

ABRASION  TEST 

2.7.1 

This  test  shall  apply  solely  to fuel  tanks  that  are  fully  exposed 
and  intended  for  two-wheel  motor  vehicles. 

2.7.2 

Test  method 

The  tank,  filled  to 50% of  its rated  capacity  with  a  liquid  which 
does  not  attack  the material, shall  be  laid on  its side on  a  road 
surface.  That  surface  shall  be coated  with  concrete  or  bitumen 
and  be  clean  and  dry  during  the  tests. 
The  tank  shall  be drawn  along  by a  traction  sling  in such  a way  as 
to reach  a speed  of  25 km/h  in not  more  than  six  seconds.  Once 
that  speed  has been  reached  the  tank  shall  be  released  and  then 
allowed  to stop  solely  as a result  of  its friction  against  the 
ground.  That  speed  shall  be measured  to a  tolerance of  10%.  If a 
leak  then occurs  it shall  not  exceed  30 g/min.  The  measurement 
shall  last  for  at  least  one minute  and  at  the most  three minutes. 
The  results  shall  be  recorded  immediately  on  conclusion of  the 
test. 

APPENDIX 1 

1. 

TEST EQUIPMENT 

1.1. 

Test chamber 

A totally enclosed  laboratory fume hood with a heat-resistent 
test-observation window (Note 1). 

The fume extractor fan shall be shut down during the test and 
restarted  immediately after the test  in order to remove any toxic 
combustion products. 

The test may also be carried out  inside a metal box placed beneath 
the fume hood with the extractor fan operating. 

The top and bottom walls of the box must  incorporate ventilation 
holes enabling sufficient air for the combustion to pass through 
while not subjecting the burning sample to a draught. 

Note 1 : A mirror may be used  in certain test enclosures in order 

to provide a rear view of the sample. 

1.2. 

Supporting base 

A  laboratory supporting base including two grips which can be set 
in any position by means of swivel joints. 

1.3. 

Burner 

A gas-fired BUNSEN (or TIRRIL) type with a 10 mm nozzle. 

The nozzle shall not receive any accessory. 

1.4. 

Metal mesh 

Mesh size 20. Square of 100 x 100 mm. 

1.5. 

Timer 

A timer or similar device with divisions not greater than 1 sec. 

1.6. 

1.7. 

2. 

2.1. 

Water bath 

Graduated scale 

Graduation  in mi 11(metres. 

TEST SAMPLE 

At  least 10 test samples 125 ± 5 mm  long x 12.5 ± 0.2 mm wide must 
be taken direct from a typical fuel tank. 

2.2. 

2.3. 

2.4. 

3. 

3.1. 

3.2. 

3.3. 

lf otherwise  prevented  by  the shape of  the  fuel  tank  part  of  the 
tank  shall  be moulded  into a plate  that  is 3 mm  thick  and 
sufficient  in area  to enable  the necessary  samples  to be  taken. 

The  samples must  normally  be  tested  in their  type-approval  state, 
unless otherwise  specified. 

Two  lines, one  at  25 mm  and  the other  at  100 mm  from one end  shall 
be cut  into each  sample. 

The edges of  the  test  samples  shall  be sharply  defined.  Edges 
obtained  by sawing  shall  be  fine-sanded  down  in order  to obtain a 
smooth  finish. 

TEST  METHOD 

The  sample  shall  be attached  to one of  the grips on  the  base by 
the end  closest  to the  100 mm mark,  its  longitudinal  axis  being 
horizontal  and  its transverse axis at  45' to the  horizontal. Below 
the  test  sample  a  (roughly  100 x 100 mm) woven metal  screen  shall 
be attached  beneath  the  test  sample, be  located  10 mm  horizontally 
below  the edge of  the sample  and protrude  roughly  13 mm  beyond  the 
edge of  the sample  (see Figure  1 ). Before each  test  any  residue 
remaining on  the metal  screen  shall  be burnt  or  the  screen 
replaced. 

A bath  full  of oil  shall  be placed on  the  fume  hood  table  in such 
as way  as to receive any  incandescent  particles which  may  fall 
during  the  test. 

The air  supply  to the burner  shall  be set  in such  a way  as  to 
obtain  a blue  flame  roughly  25 mm  high. 

The burner  shall  be placed  such  that  its flame  touches  the outer 
edge of  the  test  sample  as shown  in Figure  1 and  at  the  same  time 
the  timer  shall  be  started. 

The  flame shall  be held  in contact  for  30 seconds  and  if the 
sample  deforms, melts or  shrinks away  from  the  flame  the  flame 
shall  be moved  in order  to maintain  contact  with  the  sample. 

Significant  deformation of  the sample  during  the  test  may 
invalidate  the result. The burner  shall  be withdrawn  after 
30 seconds or when  the  flame  front  reaches  the  25 mm  mark.  If it 
reaches  this earlier  the burner  shall  be moved  at  least  4 mm  away 
from  the sample  and  the fume  hood. 

3.4. 

3.5. 

When  the  flame  front  reaches  the 25 mm mark  the  time,  in seconds, 
shall  be noted on  the timer  as time t-j. 

The  timer  shall  be stopped  when  combustion  (with or  without  flame) 
stops or  reaches  the mark  100 mm  from  the  free  end. 

3.6. 

The  time on  the  timer,  in seconds, shall  be noted  as  time  t. 

3.7. 

-z%-

if the combustion  does not  reach  the  100 mm mark  the unburnt 
length  from  the  100 mm  arc  along  the  lower  edge of  the  sample 
shall  be measured,  rounded  up  to the nearest  millimetre. 

The  burnt  length  shall  be equal  to  100 mm  less the unburnt  length 
expressed  in mm. 

3.8. 

If a sample  has burnt  up  to or  beyond  the  100 mm  mark  the 
combustion  speed  shall  be : 

75 
t - t, 

in mm/sec 

3.9. 

4. 

4.1. 

4.2. 

The  test  shall  be  repeated  (3.1  to 3.8) until  three  samples  have 
burnt  up  to or  beyond  the  100 mm mark or  ten samples  have  been 
tested. 

If one  sample out  of  10 burns up  to the  100 mm mark  or  beyond  the 
test  (3.1  to 3.8) shall  be  repeated  on  10 new  samples. 

EXPRESSION OF  RESULTS 

If at  least  two samples  have burnt  up  to the  100 mm  mark  the 
average  speed  of combustion  (in mm/sec) which  must  be stated  shall 
be  the average of  the combustion  speeds of  all  of  the samples  that 
have burnt  up  to the mark. 

The  average  combustion  time and  length of  combustion  shall  be 
stated  if no sample out  of  ten or  not  more  than  1 out  of  20 has 
burnt  up  to the  100 mm  mark. 

4.2.1. 

Average  Combustion Time  (ACT) : 

ACT -  (t -  30 seconds) 
number  of  samples 

rounded  up or  down  to the nearest  5-second  multiple  : 
thus  "less than  5 seconds" must  be stated  if combustion  lasts  lesf 
than 3 seconds  following withdrawal  of  the burner. 
In no case must  an ACT of  0 be given. 

4.2.2. 

Average  Combustion  Length  (ACL) : 

ACL  -  (100 mm  - unburnt  length) 

number  of  samples 

rounded  up or  down  to the nearest  multiple of  5 mm; 
where  there are combustion  lengths of  less than  3 mm  state  "less 
than 5  mm". 
In no case must  an ACL of  0 be given. 

Where  a single  sample  burns up  to the mark  the combustion  length 
shall  be counted  as  100 mm. 

4.3. 

The  complete  results must  include the  following  information : 

4.3.1. 

Identification of  the sample,  including  the method  of  preparation 
and  storage. 

-w -

4.3.2. 

Average  sample  thickness  to be ±  1 %. 

4.3.3. 

Number  of  samples  tested. 

4.3.4. 

Dispersion of  the combustion  time values. 

4.3.5. 

Dispersion of  the combustion  length values. 

4.3.6. 

4.3.7. 

If a sample  does not  burn up  to the mark  because  it drips,  runs or 
breaks up  into burnt  particles  this must  be  stated. 

If a sample  is reignited  by burning material  deposited  on  the 
woven metal  screen  that must  be  stated. 

Figure  1  : TEST  APPARATUS 

Testpiece 

45a 

-1W-

APPENDIX 2 

INFORMATION DOCUMENT 
IN RESPECT OF THE 
FUEL TANK 
FOR A TYPE OF TWO OR THREE-WHEEL MOTOR VEHICLE 

(to be attached to the application for component type-approval where this is 
submitted separately from the application for vehicle type-approval) 

Order N* (assigned by the applicant) : 

The application for component type approval  in respect of the fuel tank for a 
type of two or three-wheel motor vehicle shall contain the  information set out 
in Annex  II to Directive 92/61/EEC of 30.6.1992, under A  in items: 

0.1. 

0.2. 

0.4. to 0.6. 

3.2.2. to 3.2.3.3. 

In addition the following  information  is required: 

(a) 
(b) 
(c) 

make or trade name of tank 
manufacturer's name and address 
name and address of manufacturer's representative (if any). 

-W\  -

APPENDIX  3 

CERTIFICATE OF COMPONENT TYPE APPROVAL 
IN RESPECT OF THE 
FUEL TANK 
FOR A TYPE OF TWO OR THREE-WHEEL MOTOR  VEHICLE 

Name of  administration 

Report  N* 

by Test ing Body 

Date 

Component  type approval  number 

Ex tens ion No 

1. 

2. 

3. 

4. 

5. 

6. 

7. 

8. 

9. 

Make or  trade name of  veh i cle  : 

Type of  veh i cIe  : 

Manufacturer's name and address  : 

Name and  address of manufacturer's  representative  (if  any) 

Vehicle  submitted  for  test on  : 

Component  type approval  granted/refused  (*) 

Place  : 

Date  : 

Signature  : 

(*) 

Delete  as appropriate. 

ANNEX  II 

REQUIREMENTS CONCERNING  THE FITTING OF  FUEL  TANKS 

AND  FUEL  SUPPLY SYSTEMS TO TWO OR  THREE-WHEEL MOTOR  VEHICLES 

1. FUEL  TANK 

Tank  attachment  systems shall  be designed, manufactured  and  installed  in 

such  a way  as  to  fulfil  their  function whatever  the driving  conditions. 

2. FUEL SUPPLY  SYSTEM 

Engine  fuel  system  components  shall  be suitably  protected  by  a part  of  the 

frame or  bodywork  in such  a way  that  they  cannot  strike  against  obstacles 

on  the ground.  That  protection  is not  required  if the components  in 

question, when  located  beneath  the vehicle, are  further  from  the ground 

than  the part  of  the  frame or  bodywork  that  is  located  immediately  ahead of 

them. 

The  fuel  supply  system  shall  be designed, manufactured  and  installed  in 

such  a way  as  to withstand  the effects of  any  internal  and  external 

corrosion  to which  it  is exposed.  No motion  due  to  torsion,  flexing  and 

vibration of  the vehicle  structure, engine  and  transmission  shall  subject 

fuel-system  components  to abnormal  friction or  stressing. 

-loi  -

APPENDIX 1 

INFORMATION  DOCUMENT 
IN RESPECT OF  THE 
FITTING OF A  FUEL TANK OR  TANKS 
TO A TYPE OF TWO OR THREE-WHEEL  MOTOR  VEHICLE 

(to be  attached  to  the application  for  component  type-approval  where  this  is 
submitted  separately  from  the application  for  vehicle  type-approval) 

Order  N'  (assigned  by  the  applicant) 

The  application  for  component  type  approval  in respect  of  the  fitting  of  a 
fuel  tank or  tanks  to a type of  two or  three-wheel  motor  vehicle  shall  contain 
the  information set  out  in Annex  II to Directive 92/61/EEC of  30.6.1992, under 
A,  in  items: 

0.1. 

0.2. 

0.4.  to  0.6. 

3.2.3.3 

-?û£ -

APPENDIX 2 

CERTIFICATE OF COMPONENT TYPE APPROVAL 
IN RESPECT OF 
THE FITTING OF A FUEL TANK OR TANKS 
TO A TYPE OF TWO OR THREE-WHEEL MOTOR VEHICLE 

Name of administration 

Report N* 

by Testing Body 

Date 

Component type approvaI number 

Ex tens ion No 

1. 

2. 

3. 

4. 

5. 

6. 

7. 

8. 

9. 

Make or trade name of vehicle  : 

Type of veh i cIe : 

Manufacturer's name and address  : 

Name and address of manufacturer's representative (if any) 

Vehicle submitted for test on  : 

Component type approval granted/refused  (*) 

Place  : 

Date  : 

Signature  : 

(*) 

Delete as appropriate. 

"5CS -

CHAPITRE 7 

ANT I-TAMPERING MEASURES FOR MOPEDS AND MOTORCYCLES 

1- 

1.1 

1.2 

1.3 

1.3.1 

1.3.2 

1.3.3 

1.3.4 

1.4 

1.5 

1.6 

1.7 

- s w-

ANNEX 

DEFINITIONS 

For  the  purposes  of  this  Chapter: 

"Anti-tampering  measures  for  two-wheeled  mopeds  and  motorcycles" 
means  a series of  technical  requirements  and  specifications  the 
aim  of  which  is to prevent,  as  far  as possible,  unauthorized 
modifications which  may  prejudice  safety,  in particular  by 
increasing  vehicle  performance,  and  damage  the  environment. 

"Vehicle  performance" 
means  the maximum  speed  of  mopeds  and  the engine  power  of 
motorcycles. 

"Vehicle  categories" 
means  vehicles  subdivided  into  the  following  categories: 

Category  A  vehicles  - mopeds. 

Category  B  vehicles  - motorcycles  with  a cylinder  capacity  less 
than  or  equal  to  125 cc  and  a power  less  than or  equal  to  11 kW 

Category  C  vehicles  - motorcycles  with  a power  less  than or 
equal  to 25 kW  and  a power/mass  ratio  less  than  or  equal  to 
0.16  kW/kg. 

Category  D vehicles  - motorcycles  other  than  those  in  categories 
B or  C. 

"Unauthorized  modification" 
means  a modification which  is not  permitted  by  this  Chapter. 

"InterchangeabiIity  of  parts" 
means  the  interchangeabiIity  of  parts which  are  not  identical. 

"Inlet  conduit" 
means  the  combination  of  the  inlet  passage  and  the  intake  pipe. 

"Inlet  passage" 
means  the  passage  for  the  intake of  air  within  the  cylinder, 
cylinder-head  or  crankcase. 

(19 

1.8 

1.9 

1.10 

1.11 

2. 

2.1 

2.1.1 

"Intake  pipe" 
means  a part  connecting  the  carburettor  or  air-control  system 
and  the  cylinder,  cylinder-head  or  crankcase. 

"Intake  system": 
means  the  combination  of  the  inlet  conduit  and  the  intake 
silencer. 

"Exhaust  system" 
means  the combination  of  the exhaust  pipe,  expansion  box  and  the 
exhaust  silencer. 

"Special  tools" 
means  tools which  are made  available  to distributers  authorized 
by  the  vehicle  manufacturer  and  are  not  available  to  the  general 
pub lie. 

GENERAL  PROVISIONS 

InterchangeabiIity  of  non-identical  parts  between  component-
type-approved  vehicles. 

For  any  vehicle  in categories  A or  B,  the  interchangeabiIity  of 
the  following  components: 

(a) for  two-stroke  vehicles:  cylinder/piston,  carburettor, 

intake  pipe, exhaust  system 

(b) for  four-stroke  vehicles:  cylinder  head,  camshafts, 

cylinder/piston,  carburettor,  intake  pipe,  exhaust  system 

between  that  vehicle  and  any  other  vehicle  from  the  same 
manufacturer  shall  not  be  permitted  if such  interchangeabiIity 
results  in  the  vehicle's  power  exceeding  the  limits  for  its 
category  in the  case  of  category  A  vehicles  or  the  vehicle's 
maximum  design  speed  increasing  by  more  than  10%  in the  case  of 
category  B  vehicles. 

2.1.2 

The  interchangeabiIity  of  components  between  a  category  C 
vehicle  and  a vehicle  from  the  same  manufacturer  in  another 
category  shall  not  be  permitted  unless  either: 

the  difference  in power  between  the  vehicles  in question  is 
less  than  or  equal  to 10% 
at  least  two of  the  following  components  account  for  at 
least  75% of  the  difference  in  performance: 

(a)  for  two-stroke  vehicles:  exhaust  and  intake  systems, 

exhaust  timing,  ignition  curve,  cylinder/piston,  crankshaft, 
connecting  rod,  carburettor 

2.1.3 

2.1.4 

2.2 

2.3 

2.3.1 

(b) for  four-stroke  vehicles:  cylinder  head  (intake  and/or 

exhaust) camshaft,  piston/cylinder, exhaust  and  intake 
systems, crankshaft,  connecting  rod, carburettor,  electronic 
engine-control  unit. 

For  any  vehicle  from  the same manufacturer  in category  D, the 
interchangeabiIity of  the components  indicated  in point  2.1.1(a) 
and  (b) shall  be prohibited  if more  than 75% of  the  difference 
in power  between  the vehicles  in question  is attributable  to a 
single one  of  the components,  and  in any  case  the maximum  power 
of 74 kW must  not  be  exceeded. 

In cases  involving  the  interchangeabiIity of  components,  the 
manufacturer  shall  ensure  that  the competent  authorities  are 
provided  with  the necessary  information and, where  appropriate, 
the necessary  vehicles  to enable  them  to verify  that  the 
requirements  of  this paragraph  have been  met. 

The manufacturer  shall  declare  that  modifications of  the 
following characteristics shall  not  increase  the maximum  power 
of  a motorcycle  by more  than  10% or  increase  the maximum  speed 
of  a moped  by more  than  5 km/h: 

-  ignition  (advance,  etc.),  fuel  feed  system. 

Motorcycles  shall  comply  with  the  requirements  of  one of  the 
following  points  2.3.1  or  2.3.2  or  2.3.3: 

An  unremovable  sleeve  shall  be  located  in the  inlet  conduit.  If 
such  a sleeve  is  located  in the  intake pipe,  the  latter  shall  be 
fixed  to  the engine  block  by means of  shear-bolts or  bolts 
removable only  using  special  tools. 

The  sleeve  shall  have minimum  hardness of  60 HRC.  In the 
restricted  section  it shall  not  exceed  4 mm  in thickness. 

Any  interference  with  the sleeve  aimed  at  removing  or  modifying 
it shall  lead  to either  the destruction  of  the  sleeve  and  its 
support  or  complete  and  permanent  malfunctioning of  the  engine 
until  it  is restored  to  its approved  condition. 

A marking  with  indication  of  the vehicle  category  or  categories 
as defined  in point  1.3  shall  be  legible on  the surface of  the 
sleeve or  not  far  from  it. 

2.3.2 

Each  intake  pipe  shall  be  fixed with  shear-bolts  or  bolts 
removable  only  using  special  tools.  A  restricted  section, 
indicated  on  the outside, shall  be  located  inside  the pipes;  at 
that  point  the wall  shall  not  exceed  4 mm  in thickness, or  5 mm 
if using  a  flexible material, such  as  rubber  for  example. 

- 3 o? -

Any  interference  with  the pipes aimed  at modifying  the 
restricted  section  shall  lead  to either  the destruction  of  the 
pipes or  complete  and  permanent  malfunctioning of  the  engine 
until  they  are  restored  to their  approved  condition. 

A marking  with  indication of  the vehicle  category  or  categories 
as defined  in point  1.3  shall  be  legible on  the pipes. 

2.3.3 

The  part  of  the  inlet  conduit  located  in the cylinder  head  shall 
have  a restricted  section.  In the whole  inlet  passage  there 
shall  not  be  a more  restricted  section  (except  the  valve-seat 
section). 

Any  interference  with  the conduit  aimed  at modifying  the 
restricted  section  shall  lead  to either  the destruction  of  the 
pipe or  complete  and  permanent  malfunctioning of  the  engine 
until  it  is restored  to  its approved  condition. 

A marking  with  indication of  the vehicle  category  as defined  in 
point  1.3  shall  be  legible on  the cylinder  head. 

The  restricted  section  referred  to  in the above  points shall 
have  a different  diameter  according  to the motorcycles: 

The manufacturer  shall  supply  the diameter  of  the  restricted 
section and  prove  to the competent  authorities  that  this 
restricted  section  is the most  critical  for  the passage  of 
gases, and  that  there  is no other  section which,  if modified 
could  increase  vehicle performance  by more  than  10%.<1) 

Removing  the air  filter must  not  have  the effect  of  increasing  a 
moped's maximum  design  speed  by more  than 15%. 

SPECIFIC  REQUIREMENTS 

Cylinder-head  gasket:  after  mounting, the maximum  thickness of 
a cylinder-head  gasket,  if any, shall  not  exceed 
-  1.3 mm  for mopeds,  and 
-  1.6 mm  for  motorcycles. 

2.3.4 

2.3.5 

2.4 

3. 

3.1 

(1) Four  years  after  this Directive  comes  into application,  the  maximum 
diameters  of  the  restricted  section  for  the  various  types  of 
motorcycles  shall  be  determined  numerically  following  the  procedure 
set  out  in  Article  ...  on  the  basis  of  the  diameters  of  the 
restricted  sections  supplied  by  the  manufacturer. 

3.2 

3.3 

3.4 

3.5 

3.6 

3.7 

3.8 

-"50*-

Cylinder/crankcase  gasket  for  two-stroke  engines:  the  maximum 
thickness of  any  gasket  between  the  base of  the cylinder  and  the 
crankcase,  if any,  shall  not  exceed  0.5  mm,  after  mounting. 

Piston  for  two-stroke  engines:  the  piston,  when  in position at 
top  dead  centre, shall  not  cover  the  inlet  port.  This 
requirement  does not  apply  to  those  parts of  the  transfer  port 
which  coincide  with  the  inlet  port  in the case of  vehicles  the 
engine of  which  is equipped  with  an  induction  system 
incorporating  reed  valve(s). 

For  two-stroke engines, rotation of  the piston  through  180* 
shall  not  increase engine  performance. 

Without  prejudice  to the provisions of  point  2.3,  there shall  be 
no artificial  restriction  in the  inlet  and  exhaust  passages. 
The  valve guides of  a  four-stroke  engine  are not  considered  to 
be artificial  restrictions. 

The  part(s) of  the exhaust  system  inside  the silencer(s) which 
determine(s) the effective  length of  the exhaust  pipe  shall  be 
affixed  to thé silencer(s) or  expansion  box(es)  in such  a way 
that  it  (they) cannot  be  removed. 

In the case of  vehicles  in categories A  and  B, any  component 
(mechanical, electrical, structural, etc.) which  limits  full 
engine  load  (e.g. a  throttle  control  stop or  a  twist-grip  stop) 
shall  be  forbidden.  In the case of  vehicles  in categories C  and 
D,  such  components  shall  be allowed  provided  that  they  can  be 
modified  only  using  tools  designed  to cut  metal. 

If a category  A vehicle  is equipped  with  electrical/electronic 
devices which  limit  its speed,  the  vehicle  manufacturer  shall 
provide data  and evidence  to  the  test  authorities  to  demonstrate 
that  modification  or  disconnection of  the  device or  its wiring 
system  will  not  increase  the moped's maximum  speed  by more  than 
5  km/h. 

Electrical/electronic  devices which  cut  and/or  inhibit  spark 
ignition  are  forbidden  if their  operation  results  in an  increase 
in fuel  consumption  or  unburnt  hydrocarbon  emissions. 

Electrical/electronic  devices which  vary  spark  advance  shall  be 
designed  in such  a way  that  the engine  power, measured  with  the 
device  functioning, does not  differ  by more  than  10% from  the 
power  measured  with  the  device  disconnected  and with  spark 
advance  set  for maximum  road  speed. 

3.9 

4. 

4.1 

4.1.1 

The  maximum  road  speed  shall  be  achieved  with  the  spark  advance 
set  within  ±5*  of  the  value  specified  for  the  development  of 
max imum  power. 

In the  case  of  an engine  equipped  with  a  reed  valve,  this  shall 
be  fixed  with  shear-bolts  which  prevent  re-using  its support  or 
are  removable  only  using  special  tools. 

REQUIREMENTS  FOR  THE  IDENT IF ICAT ION OF  A VEHICLE  ENGINE  TYPE 

Marking  of  parts or  components: 

The  parts or  components  listed  below  shall  be  durably  and 
indelibly  marked  with  the  code  number(s)  and  symbols  assigned 
for  identification  purposes  either  by  the  vehicle  manufacturer 
or  by  the manufacturers  of  such  parts or  components.  Such 
marking  may  take  the  form of  a  label  provided  that  it  remains 
legible  in normal  use  and  cannot  be  detached  without  being 
destroyed. 

In general,  this marking  shall  be  visible  without  the  necessity 
of  dismantling  the  part  in question  or  other  parts of  the 
vehicle.  However, where  the  bodywork  or  other  parts of  the 
vehicle  obscure  a marking,  the  vehicle  manufacturer  shall 
provide  the competent  authorities  with  indications  for  opening 
or  dismantling  the  parts  in question  and  the  location  of  the 
markings. 

4.1.2 

The  letters,  figures or  symbols  used  shall  be  at  least  2.5  mm  in 
height  and  shall  be easily  legible.  However,  for  the marking  of 
parts  such  as  those  specified  in points  4.1.3.7 and  4.1.3.8 
below,  the minimum  height  shall  be  as  specified  in Chapter  9. 

4.1.3 

The  parts  and  components  referred  to  in point  4.1.1  above  are 
the  fol lowing: 

4.1.3.1 

intake  silencer  (air  filter) 

4.1.3.2 

carburettor  or  equivalent  device 

4.1.3.3 

inlet  pipe  (if  cast  separately  from  the  carburettor  or  cylinder 
or  crankcase) 

4.1.3.4 

cylinder 

4.1.3.5 

cylinder  head 

4.1.3.6 

crankcase 

4.1.3.7 

exhaust  pipe(s)  (if  separate  from  the silencer.) 

4.1.3.8 

silencer(s) 

-vo-

4.1.3.9 

transmission  driving  part  (front  chain  wheel  (sprocket) or 
pu I ley) 

4.1.3.10 

transmission  driven  part  (rear  chain  wheel  (sprocket) or  pulley) 

4.1.3.11 

any  electrical/electronic  devices  for  engine  management 
(ignition,  injection, etc.) and  all  the different  electronic 
cards  in the  case of  a device  which  is designed  to be  opened 

4.1.3.12 

restricted  section  (sleeve or  other). 

4.2 

4.2.1 

Anti-tampering  control  plate 

A plate of  at  least  60 mm  x 40 mm  shall  be  fixed  to each  vehicle 
in a durable manner  (it may  be adhesive  but  not  detachable 
without  prejudice  to  its  integrity)  in an easily  accessible 
place  on  the  vehicle. 

On  this -plate the manufacturer  shall  indicate: 

4.2.1.1 

his name or  trade  mark 

4.2.1.2 

the  letter  representing  the  vehicle  category 

4.2.1.3 

4.2.1.4 

4.2.2 

4.2.3 

4.2.4 

for  the  transmission  driving  and  driven  parts,  the number  of 
cogs  (in  the case of  a sprocket), or  the  diameter  (in mm)  in the 
case of  a pu I ley 

the  code  number(s) or  symbol(s)  identifying  the  parts  or 
components  marked  in accordance  with  point  4.1  above. 

Letters,  figures or  symbols  shall  be  at  least  2.5  mm  in height 
and  shall  be easily  legible.  A simple  drawing  showing  the 
correspondence between  parts or  components  and  their  code 
numbers  or  symbols  is given  in Figure  1. 

In the  case of  components  type-approved  for  the vehicle  in 
accordance  with  this Chapter  which  are  alternatives  to  those 
listed  in point  4.1.3  and  are  sold  by  the  vehicle  manufacturer, 
the code  number(s) or  symbol(s) of  such  alternatives shall  be 
shown  either  on  the control  plate or  on  a sticker  (which  shall 
remain  legible  in normal  use  and which  cannot  be  detached 
without  being  destroyed),  to be supplied  with  the component  for 
attachment  next  to  the control  plate. 

In the case of  components  type-approved  for  the  vehicle  in 
accordance  with  this Chapter  which  are  alternatives  to  those 
listed  in point  4.1.3  and  are  sold  by  a manufacturer  other  than 
the vehicle manufacturer,  the code  number(s) or  symbol(s) of 
such  alternatives shall  be shown on  a sticker  (which  shall 
remain  legible  in normal  use  and which  cannot  be  detached 
without  being  destroyed)  to be supplied  with  the component  for 
attachment  next  to the control  plate. 

FtGURE  1 

-'SI2-

Appendix 1 

INFORMATION DOCUMENT  IN RESPECT OF ANT I-TAMPERING MEASURES 
FOR A TYPE OF MOPED OR MOTORCYCLE 

(to be attached to the application for component type-approval where this is 
submitted separately from the application for vehicle type-approval) 

Serial No (assigned by the applicant) 

The application for component type-approval  in respect of anti-tampering 
measures for a type of moped or motorcycle shall contain the  information set 
out  in Annex  II to Council Directive 92/61/EEC of 30 June 1992. 

-  in Section A, points: 

0.1 
0.2 
0.4 to 0.6 
3.2.1.1 to 3.2.1.3 
3.2.1.5 
3.2.4.1 to 3.2.4.1.3 
or 
3.2.4.2 to 3.2.4.2.3.2 
or 
3.2.4.3 to 3.2.4.3.2.2 
3.2.9 and 3.2.9.1 
4 to 4.5 

Appendix  2 

CERTIFICATE OF COMPONENT  TYPE-APPROVAL 
IN RESPECT OF ANT I-TAMPERING  MEASURES 
FOR A TYPE OF MOPED OR  MOTORCYCLE 

Name of  administration 

Report  No  ...  by  testing  body  ...  date  ... 

Component  type-approval  number 

Extension  number 

1. Trade  name of  vehicle: 

2. Type of  vehicle: 

3. Manufacturer's  name  and  address 

4. Name  and  address of manufacturer's  representative  (if  any) 

5. Vehicle  submitted  for  test  on 

6.  Component  type  approval  has been  granted/refused 

7.  Place: 

8. Date 

9.  Signature: 

* 

Delete  as  appropriate. 

- 1\k -

CHAPTER 8 

ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY 
OF TWO- OR THREE-WHEEL MOTOR VEHICLES 

-  ZK-

LIST OF  ANNEXES 

ANNEX  I 

CONDITIONS APPLYING  TO  VEHICLES 

ANNEX  II 

METHOD OF MEASURING WIDE-BAND  ELECTROMAGNETIC  RADIATION  FROM 
VEHICLES 

ANNEX  III 

METHOD OF MEASURING  NARROW-BAND  ELECTROMAGNETIC  RADIATION  FROM 
VEHICLES 

ANNEX  IV 

METHODS OF TESTING VEHICLE  IMMUNITY  TO ELECTROMAGNETIC  RADIATION 

ANNEX  V 

METHODS OF MEASURING WIDE-BAND ELECTROMAGNETIC  RADIATION  FROM 
SEPARATE  TECHNICAL  UNITS  (STUs) 

ANNEX  VI 

METHOD OF MEASURING NARROW-BAND  ELECTROMAGNETIC  RADIATION  FROM 
SEPARATE  TECHNICAL UNITS  (STU) 

ANNEX  VII 

METHODS OF TESTING  THE  IMMUNITY  OF SEPARATE  TECHNICAL  UNITS  (STUs) 
TO ELECTROMAGNETIC  RADIATION 

ANNEX  V IM  MODELS  FOR  INFORMATION  DOCUMENT  (APPENDIX  1) AND CERTIFICATE OF 

COMPONENT  TYPE APPROVAL  (APPENDIX  2) 

ANNEX  IX 

MODELS  FOR  INFORMATION  DOCUMENT  (APPENDIX  1) AND CERTIFICATE OF 
COMPONENT  TYPE APPROVAL  (APPENDIX  2) OF A TYPE OF  SEPARATE 
TECHNICAL  UNIT  (STU) 

- 3 1 6-

ANNEX I 

CONDITIONS APPLYING TO VEHICLES 

1. 

DEFINITIONS 

For the purposes of this Chapter: 

1.1. 

1.2 

1.3 

1.4 

1.5 

1.6 

1.7 

'electromagnetic compatibility' means the ability of a vehicle or 
one of  Its electrical/electronic systems to function satisfactorily 
in its electromagnetic environment without  introducing  intolerable 
electromagnetic disturbances to anything  in that environment. 

'electromagnetic disturbance' means any electromagnetic phenomenon 
which may degrade the performance of a vehicle or one of its 
electronic/electrical systems.  An electromagnetic disturbance may 
be electromagnetic noise, an unwanted signal or a change  in the 
propagation medium itself. 

'electromagnetic immunity' means the ability of a vehicle or one of 
Its electronic/electrical systems to perform without degradation of 
quality  In the presence of specific electromagnetic disturbances. 

'electromagnetic environment* means all electromagnetic phenomena 
present  in a given situation. 

'reference  limit' means the nominal  level to which both the 
component type approval of the vehicle type and the conformity-of-
production limit value refer. 

'reference antenna' means a balanced ha If-wave dipole tuned to the 
measured frequency. 

'wide-band emission' means any emission which has a bandwidth 
exceeding that of a specific receiver or measuring  instrument. 

- m 

1.8 

1.9 

1.10 

1.11 

'narrow-band emission' means any emission which has a bandwidth 
less than that of a specific receiver or measuring  instrument. 

'electronic/electrical separate technical unit  (STU)' means the 
electronic  and/or electrical component, or the set of components 
provided  for  installation in a vehicle, together with all 
electrical  connections and associated wiring for the execution of 
several  specific  functions. 

'separate technical unit test' means the test carried out on one or 
more specific separate technical  units. 

'vehicle type with regard to electromagnetic compatibility', given 
the fact  that  there are no fundamental  differences  from one vehicle 
to another, means  Inter  at  fa: 

1.11.1 

the general  layout of the electronic and/or  electrical  components, 

1.11.2 

1.11.3 

1.12 

the overall  size, layout and shape of the engine mounting and the 
disposition of the high-voltage wiring (where present), 

the raw material  from which both the vehicle chassis and bodywork 
are constructed  (e.g., a chassis or body made of glass fibre, 
aluminium or steel). 

'type of separate technical  unit in relation to electromagnetic 
compatibility' means a separate technical  unit  that does not differ 
from other units in its essential  aspects, e.g., 

1.12.1 

the function performed by the separate  technical  unit; 

1.12.2 

the general  layout of the electronic and/or electrical  components. 

1.13 

2. 

2.1 

'direct  vehicle control' 
the vehicle control  performed by the rider acting on the steering, 
the brakes and the accelerator  control. 

APPLICATION  FOR COMPONENT TYPE APPROVAL 

Applications for component  type approval of a vehicle type with 
regard to electromagnetic compatibility shall be accompanied not 
only by the  information provided  for in Annex VI11  (Appendix  1) but 
also by the following: 

- 'm 

2.1.1 

a catalogue describing all the specific combinations of 
electronic/electrical systems or separate technical units, the 
types of bodywork for the type of vehicle being component type 
approved and the proposed wheel base versions. 
Electronic/electrical systems and separate technical units are 
described as specific  if they are capable of emitting significant 
wide- and narrow-band radiation  levels and/or affect the direct 
control exercised over the vehicle (see item 5.4.2.2 of this 
Annex). 

2.1.2 

a separate technical unit that  is representative in terms of the 
compatibility test chosen from the various combinations of 
electric/electronic systems designed for series-production 
purposes. 

2.2 

The application for component type approval  in respect of the 
electromagnetic compatibility of a type of separate technical unit 

2.2.1 

documents describing the technical characteristics of the system; 

2.2.2 

a typical example of that STU. Where  it considers this to be 
necessary, the competent authority may request a further example. 

3. 

3.1 

MARKING 

All electronic/electrical components, with the exception of the 
various  ignition connecting cables, shall bear the following: 

3.1.1 

the make or name of the manufacturer of the systems and system 
components; 

3.1.2 

the trade description: 

3.2 

4. 
4.1 

4.2 

these marks must be indelible and clearly legible. 

COMPONENT TYPE APPROVAL OF A VEHICLE TYPE 
If the vehicle submitted for testing meets the requirements of this 
Chapter, component type approval shall be granted and shall be 
valid for all the specific combinations set out  in the list 
referred to in item 2.1.1. 

However, the testing bodies responsible for the component 
type-approval tests may only waive the immunity test referred to in 
item 5.4  In the case of vehicles fitted with electrical or 
electronic devices, if, in the event of the failure of such 
devices, the safety functions performed by the braking, 
light-signalling, audible-warning and steering systems are  in no 
way  impaired.  Such exemptions, with  duly substantiated reasons, 
must be mentioned explicitly in the test report. 

4.3 

Component type approval of the vehicle. 
The following ways of component type approving the vehicle are 
aval table: 

- S/<? -

4.3.1 

Component  type  approval  of  a complete  installation on  the  vehicle. 
A complete  installation on  the  vehicle  may  achieve  component  type 
approval  directly  by  passing  tests conducted  in accordance  with  the 
limits and  procedures  laid  down  in  item 5.  If this  route  is chosen 
by  a vehicle  manufacturer  no separate  STU  testing  is  required. 

4.3.2 

Component  approval  of  vehicle  type  via  individual  STU  tests. 

The  vehicle manufacturer  may  obtain  component  type  approved  for  the 
vehicle  by  demonstrating  to  the  approval  authority  that  all  of  the 
relevant  STUs  have  been  individually  approved  in accordane  with 
this Chapter  and  have been  installed  in accordance  with  any 
conditions attached  thereto. 

4.4 

Component  type approval  of  an  STU 

A STU may  be  component  type  approved  if  it passes  tests  conducted 
in accordance  with  the  limits and  procedures  laid  down  in  item  5. 
Approval  may  be granted  for  fitting  to any  vehicle  type or  to a 
specific  vehicle  type or  types  as  requested  by  the  manufacturer. 

5. 

5.1 

REQUIREMENTS 

General  requirements 

All  vehicles  and  STUs  shall  be designed  and  constructed  In such  a 
way  that, under  normal  conditions of  use,  they meet  the  conditions 
laid  down  in this  Chapter. 

However,  the measuring  methods used  in checking  the  immunity  of 
vehicles  and  STUs  to electromagnetic  radiation  described  in 
Annexes  IV and VII  respectively  are only  required  three  years  after 
the  date of  entry  into  force of  this  Chapter. 

5.2 

Requirements  relating  to wide-band  radiation  from  vehicles 

5.2.1 

Measuring  method 

The electromagnetic  radiation  generated  by  the  vehicle  type 
submitted  for  testing  shall  be measured  by  the method  described  in 
Annex  11. 

5.2.2. 

Vehicle  reference  limits  (wide-band) 

5.2.2.1 

If measurements  are  taken using  the method  described  in Annex  II, 
in respect  of  a vehicle-antenna  distance  of  10.0 ±  0.2  m,  the 
radiation  reference  limit  will  be  34 dB microvolts/m 
(50 microvolts/m)  in the  30-75 MHz  frequency  band  and  34-45 dB 
microvolts/m  (50-180 microvolts/m)  in the 75-400 MHz  frequency 
band.  As  stated  in Appendix  1 to  this Annex,  this  limit will 
increase  logarithmically  (linearly) for  frequencies  above  75 MHz. 
In the  400-1000 MHz  frequency  band  the  limit  remains  constant  at 
45 dB  (180 microvolts/m). 

-'£70 

5.2.2.2 

If measurements  are  taken using  the method  described  in Annex  II, 
in respect  of  a vehicle-antenna  distance of  3.0 ±  0.5  m,  the 
radiation  reference  limits will  be 44 dB microvolts/m  (160 
microvolts/m)  in the 30-75 MHz  frequency  band  and  44-55  db  (160-546 
microvolts/m)  in the 75-400 MHz  frequency  band.  As  stated  in 
Appendix  2  to  this Annex,  this  limit will  increase  logarithmically 
(linearly)  for  frequencies  above 75 MHz.  In the  400-1000 MHz 
frequency  band  the  limit  remains constant  at  55 dB  (546 
microvolts/m). 

5.2.2.3 

The measured  values expressed  in dB  (microvolts/m), must  be at 
least  2.0  dB below  the reference  limit  for  the vehicle  submitted 
for  testing. 

5.3 

Requirements  relating  to narrow-band  radiation  emissions  from 
vehicles 

5.3.1 

MEASURING  METHOD 

The electromagnetic  radiation  from  the  vehicle  submitted  for 
testing  is to be measured  by  the method  described  in Annex  III. 

5.3.2 

Vehicle  Reference  limits  for  vehicle  narrow-band  radiation 

5.3.2.1 

5.3.2.2 

If measurements  are  taken using  the method  described  in Annex  III, 
in respect  of  a vehicle-antenna distance of  10.0 ±  0.2 m,  the 
radiation  reference  limit will  be 24 dB  (16 microvolts/m)  in the 
30-75 MHz  frequency  band  and  24-35 dB  (16-56 microvolts/m)  in the 
75-400 MHz  frequency  band.  As stated  in Appendix  3  to  this Annex, 
this  limit will  increase  logarithmically  (linearly) for  frequencies 
above  75 MHz.  In the 400-1000 MHz  frequency  band  the  limit  remains 
constant  at  35 dB  (56 microvolts/m). 

If measurements  are  taken using  the method  described  in Annex  III, 
in respect  of  a vehicle-antenna distance of  3.0 ±  0.05  m,  the 
radiation  reference  limits will  be 34 dB  (50 microvolts/m)  In the 
30-75 MHz  frequency  band  and  34-45 dB  (50-180 microvolts/m)  in the 
75-400 MHz  frequency  band.  As stated  in Appendix  4  to  this Annex, 
this  limit  will  Increase  logarithmically  (linearly) for  frequencies 
above 75 MHz.  In the 400-1000 MHz  frequency  band  the  limit  remains 
constant  at  45 dB  (microvolts/m). 

5.3.2.3 

The measured  values  for  the vehicle  type submitted  for  testing 
expressed  in dB  (microvolts/m), must  be at  least  2.0  dB  below  the 
reference  limit. 

5.4 

Requirements  regarding  vehicle  immunity  to electromagnetic 
radiation. 

5.4.1 

Measuring  method 

Tests  to determine  the  immunity  of  the vehicle  type  to 
electromagnetic  radiation must  be conducted  in accordance with  the 
method  described  in Annex  IV. 

(20 

- '57/-

5.4.2 

Vehicle  immunity  reference  limits 

5.4.2.1 

5.4.2.2 

If measurements  are  taken using  the method  described  in Annex  IV, 
the  field  strength  reference  limit must  be 20 volts/m  r.m.s. across 
the  20-1000 MHz  frequency  band. 

The  vehicle  representative of  the  type submitted  for  testing must 
not  display  any deterioration  in the direct  control  of  the  vehicle 
which  might  be observed  by  the driver  or  by  any other  road  user 
when  the  vehicle  in question  is  in the state  defined  in Annex  IV, 
item 4, and when  it  Is subjected  to the  field  strength  expressed  in 
volts/m,  which  must  be 25% above  the  reference  level. 

5.5 

Requirements  concerning  wide-band  STU  radiation 

5.5.1 

Measuring  method 
The electromagnetic  radiaton  generated  by  the STU  submitted  for 
component  type  approval  shall  be measured  by  the method  described 
in Annex  V. 

5.5.2 

STU wide-band  reference  limits 

5.5.2.1 

If measurements  are  taken using  the method  described  in Annex  V, 
the  radiation  reference  limit  shall  be 64-54 dB  (micro-volts/m) 
within  the 30-75 MHz  frequency  band,  this  limit  decreasing 
logarithmically  and  54-65 dB micro-volts/m)  in the 75-400 MHz  band, 
this  limit  increasing  logarithmically  as shown  in Appendix  5 to 
this Annex.  In the 400-1000 MHz  frequency  band  the  limit  remains 
constant  at  65 dB  (1800 - micro-volts/m). 

5.5.2.2 

The measured  values  for  STU submitted  for  approval, expressed  in dB 
(micro-volts/m),  shall  be at  least  2.0  dB below  the  reference 
limits. 

5.6 

Requirements  concerning  narrow-band  STU  radiation. 

5.6.1 

Method  of  measurement 

The electromagnetic  radiation  generated  by  the STU  submited  for 
component  type approval  shall  be measured  in accordance with  the 
method  described  in Annex  VI. 

- Iz z  -

5.6.2 

STU narrow-band  reference  limits 

5.6.2.1 

If measurements are taken using  the method described  in Annex VI, 
the radiation  refrence  limit shall  be 54-44 dB  (microvolts/m) in 
the 30-75 MHz  frequency  band, and 44-55 dB  (microvolts/m)  in the 
75-400 MHz band,  this  limit  increasingly  logarhithmically as stated 
in Appendix  6  to this Annex.  In the 400-1000 MHz  frequency  band 
the  limit  remains constant  at 55 dB  (560 microvolts/m). 

5.6.2.2 

The measured  values, for  the STU submitted  for  component  type 
approval, expressed  In dB  (microvolts/m), shall  be at  least  2.0 dB 
below  the  reference  limits. 

5.7 

Requirements concerning  the  immunity of STUs to electromagentic 
radiation 

5.7.1 

Method of  measurement 

The  immunity  to electromagnetic radiation of  the STU  submitted  for 
component  type approval  shall  be  tested  by means of one of  the 
methods described  in Annex  VII. 

5.7.2 

STU  immunity  reference  limits. 

5.7.2.1 

5.7.2.2 

6. 

6.1 

If measurements are taken using  the methods described  in Annex VII, 
the  immunity  test  reference  Ieve Ies shall  be  10 volts/m  for  the 
Stripllne  testing method, 50 volts/m  for  the TEM-cell  test  method, 
40 mA  for  the Bulk Current  Injection  ( B CD  test method  and  20 
volts/m  for  the Radiated  Field  testing method. 

The STUs representative of  the type submitted  for  testing shall  not 
exhibit  any malfunction which  is able to cause any degradation  in 
the direct  control  of  the vehicle which can be noticed  by  the 
driver or other  road user  if the vehicle  is  in the state defined  in 
Annex  IV,  item 4, at a field  strength or  current  expressed  in 
appropriate  linear units 25 per  cent  above  the reference  limit. 

CONFORMITY OF  PRODUCTION 

For  the purposes of checking  the conformity of  a series-produced 
vehicle, production must  comply with- the conditions  laid down  in 
this Chapter  with  regard  to wide-band  and narrow-band  radiation,  if 
the  levels measured do not exceed by more  than 2 dB  the  reference 
limits  laid down  in  items 5.2.2.1 or 5.2.2.2 and 5.3.2.1 or 
5.3.2.2. 

6.2 

6.3 

6.4 

6.5 

6.6 

- 3 Z3 ~ 

If at  least  one  of  the measured  levels  relating  to  the  series-
produced  vehicle exceeds  by more  than  2 dB  (25%) the  reference 
limits  stipulated  in  items 5.2.2.1, 5.2.2.2,  5.3.2.1  or  5.3.2.2  (as 
the case may  b e ), the manufacturer  may  request  that  a  random  sample 
of  at  least  six  series-produced  vehicles  be used  as  the  basis  for 
the  abovementioned measurements.  The  results  for  each  frequency 
band  will  be  interpreted  using  the statistical  methods  described  In 
Annex  V I M.  if, for  practical  reasons,  less  than  six, are  vehicles 
available  for  test  purposes  each  additional  vehicle  must  comply 
with  the  reference  limits stipulated  in  items 5.2.2.1,  5.2.2.2, 
5.3.2.1  and  5.3.3.2  (as the case may b e ). 

For  the  purposes of  checking  the conformity of  a series-produced 
vehicle, production shall  be deemed  to meet  the conditions  laid 
down  in this Chapter  if the vehicle  in question  displays  no 
deterioration  in the direct  control  of  the vehicle  which  might  be 
noticed  by  the  driver  or  by  any other  road  user  when  the  vehicle  in 
question  is  in the state  defined  in Annex  IV,  item  4, and when  it 
is subjected  to a field  strength, expressed  in volts/m,  of  up  to 
80% of  the  reference  limits  laid down  in  item  5.4.2.1  above. 

If the  series-produced  vehicle  does not  meet  the  conditions  laid 
down  in  item  6.3,  the manufacturer  may  request  that  a  random  sample 
of  at  least  six  series-produced  vehicles  be used  as  the basis  for 
further  measurements.  The  results  for  each  selected  frequency  will 
be  interpreted  using  the statistical  method  indicated  in Annex  IX. 
If, for  practical  reasons, the number  of  vehicles  available  for 
test  purposes  is  less than  six, each  additional  vehicle must  comply 
with  the  reference  limits stipulated  in  item  5.4.2.1  above. 

When  the conformity  of  an STU  taken  from  series  production  is 
checked  it will  be presumed  that  production  complies  with  this 
Chapter  in respect  of  the wide-band  and  narrow-band  radiation  if 
the  levels  do not  exceed  the  reference  limits  laid  down  in 
items 5.5.2.1  and  5.6.2.1  respectively  by more  than  2 dB. 

If at  least  one  of  the  levels measured  for  the STU  taken  from 
series  production  exceeds  the  reference  limits  laid  down  in 
items 5.5.2.1  and  5.6.2.1  by more  than  2 dB  (25%),  their 
manufacturers  may  urge  that  said  measurements  be carried  out  on a 
sample  of  at  least  6 STUs  taken  from  said  series  production.  The 
results  for  each  frequency  band  shall  be  interpreted  by means of 
the statistical  methods  set  out  in Annex  VIII.  If, for  practical 
reasons  less  than 6 STUs are available  for  carrying  out  the  tests, 
each  additional  STU  shall  fall  within  the  reference  limits  required 
in  items 5.5.2.1  and  5.6.2.1. 

-  zzu. 

6.7 

6.8 

7. 

7.1 

7.2 

7.3 

7.4 

When  the  conformity  of  an STU  taken  from  series production  is 
checked  it  is required  that  that  production  complies  with  this 
Chapter  in respect  of  immunity  to electromagnetic  radiation  if the 
STU  do not  display  any  disfunction which  could  cause  any 
deterioration  in the direct  control  of  the vehicle  which  could  be 
noticed  by  the  driver  or  any other  road  user  if the  vehicle  were 
the state  defined  in Annex  IV,  item 4 under  force  fields or 
currents  up  to a maximum  of  80% of  the  reference  limits  required  in 
Item 5.7.2.1  (if  appropriate). 

If the  STU  taken  from  series production  do not  meet  the  conditions 
set  out  in  item 6.7  in this Annex  their  manufacturer  may  urge  that 
the measures  be carried out  on  a sample  of  at  least  6 STUs  taken 
from  said  series production.  The  results  for each  frequency 
selected  should  be  interpreted  by means of  the method  described  in 
Annex  IX.  If, for  practical  reasons  less than 6 STU  are  available 
for  the  tests each  additional  STU  sahll  fall  within  the  reference 
limits  required  in  item  5.7.2.1. 

EXCEPTIONS 

Vehicles  with  compression  ignition  engines  are  assumed  to  comply 
with  the  requirements  laid down  in  item 5.2.2. 

Vehicles or  electrical/electronic  systems  not  incorporating  an 
electron oscillator  with  an operating  frequency  of  more  than 9  kHz 
are  assumed  to comply  with  the  requirements  laid  down  in  item  5.3.2 
and  in Annex  ill. 

Vehicles  not  fitted  with  any  sensitive  electronic  device  shall  be 
exempted  from  the  tests set  out  in Annex  IV. 

It shall  not  be  considered  necessary  to carry  out  any  immunity  test 
on  STUs, the  functions of  which  are not  considered  essential  for 
the direct  control  of  the  vehicle. 

/?A/A/£*  X 

-  Z'K, -

ANNE*  1 

(\P?ENt>ix 

1 

flNhlEX  T 

fiPPEKlLi* 

3 

-  sZg  -

ANNEX 

X 

APP£Nb'iX 

4 

ANN£X.  X 

APPENbix 

£ 

-  ZIP  -

/9/VA/5X 

I 

fiPPENù'iX 

é 

FREOUENCy -  MEGAHERTZ  -  LOGARITHMIC 

See item.  £.6.2.4 

s2<  -

ANNEX II 

METHOD OF MEASURING WIDE-BAND ELECTROMAGNETIC RADIATION 
FROM VEHICLES 

1. 

1.1 

GENERAL 

Measuring equipment 

The measuring equipment must meet the conditions laid down in 
Publication No 16, Edition 2, of the International Special 
Committee on Radio Interference (CISPR). 
A quasi-peak detector must be used to measure wide-band 
electromagnetic radiation. 

1.2 

Test method 

The test  is designed to measure wide-band radiation from spark 
ignition systems and electric motors within systems designed for 
continuous use (e.g., electric traction motors, heating 
system/demister motors and fuel pumps). 
As regards the choice of reference antenna, that choice being 
determined by common agreement between manufacturers and testing 
bodies: the distance  in the vehicle may be either 10 or 3 metres. 
In both cases, the conditions set out  in item 3 beiow must be 
complled with. 

2. 

EXPRESSION OF THE RESULTS 

The measured results are expressed  in dB (microvolts/m) for 
bandwidths of 120 kHz.  If the measuring equipment's actual 
bandwidth B (expressed  in kHz) does not correspond exactly to 120 
kHz, shall be readings taken  in microvolts/m are converted to a 
bandwidth of 120 kHz after multiplication by a factor of 120/B, 
where B must be less than 120 kHz. 

TEST CONDITIONS 

The test surface must be horizontal and untrammelled and free of 
electromagnetic reflective surfaces within a minimum radius of 30 
m, measured from a point mid-way between the vehicle and the 
antenna (see Fig. 1 in Appendix 1).  Alternatively, the test 
surface may be any  location that fulfils the conditions shown in 
Fig. 2 in Appendix 1. 

Both the measuring equipment and the test cab or the vehicle in 
which the measuring equipment  is situated are positioned within the 
part of the test surface shown  in Fig. 1 in Appendix 1.  Where the 
test surface fulfils the conditions stated  in Fig. 2 in Appendix 1, 
the measuring equipment must  lie outside the part shown  in Fig. 2. 

3. 

3.1. 

3.2 

- zzz, -

3.3 

3.4 

4. 

4.1 

Closed  installations may  be used  for  the  tests,  if  it  is to be 
demonstrated  that  a correlation exists between  these  installations 
and  the external  test  surface.  Such  installations are not  subject 
to the dimensional  conditions  laid down  in Figs  1 and  2 of 
Appendix  1, except  for  the condition  relating  to the distance 
between  the vehicle  and  the antenna  and  to the height  of  the 
latter. 

In order  to ensure  the absence of  any  noise or  extraneous  signals 
of  a  level  that might  materially  affect  the measurements, such 
measurements must  be  taken before and  after  the main  test.  If the 
vehicle  is present  during  these measurements, steps must  be  taken 
to ensure  that  no emission  from  the vehicle can  significantly 
affect  the measurements  (e.g., the  ignition key  should  be  removed 
or  the battery  disconnected  when  the vehicle  is withdrawn  from  the 
test  surface).  For  both  types of measurement,  the noise or 
extraneous  signal  must  be at  least  10 dB below  the  limits stated  in 
Annex  I (point  5.2.2.1 or  5.2.2.2, as the case may  be), save  for 
intentional  narrow-band  ambient  emissions. 

STATE OF THE VEHICLE DURING THE TEST 

Eng i ne 

The engine must  function at  its normal  operating  temperature  and, 
where  a gear  box  is fitted, must  be  in neutral.  If this  is not 
possible  for  practical  reasons, alternative solutions must  be 
sought  by agreement  with  the manufacturer  and  the authorities 
responsible  for  carrying out  the tests.  Steps must  be  taken  to 
ensure  that  the gear-changing mechanisms do not  exert  any  influence 
on electromagnetic  radiation  from  the vehicle.  During  each 
measurement,  the engine must  operate  as follows: 

Engine  type 

Measurement  methods 

Spark  ion It Ion 
One  cylinder 
More  than one cylinder 

Quasi-peak 

2500 rpm 
1500 rpm 

± 1 0% 
±  10% 

Electric  motors 

3/4 of  the maximum 
operating  power  declared 
by  the manufacturer 

4.2 

Equipment  controlled by  the driver 

The equipment  controlled  by the driver  (including  such  components 
as heating-fan  and  air-conditioning motors and excluding  other 
components  such  as seat  and windshield  or windscreen-washer  motors) 
is designed  for  steady-state operation cycle at  100% and must 
operate  in such  a way  as to absorb  the maximum  current.  The 
drivers  clothing  shall  not  include any metal  parts which may  affect 
thé  result  of  the measurements. 

- '?3 s -

4.3 

4.4 

5. 

5.1 

Tests must  not  be carried  out  in the  rain,  nor  must  they  be  carried 
out  for  10 minutes  after  It has stopped  raining. 

The  driver  must  occupy  the driving  position  assigned  to him  if, in 
the  Judgment  of  the  testing  body,  this  represents  the  worst-case 
scenario. 

ANTENNA  TYPE, POSITION AND  ORIENTATION 

Antenna  type 
Any  type of  linearly  polarized  antenna  is permitted,  provided  that 
it can  be  standardized  with  the  reference  antenna. 

5.2 

Measurement  height  and  distance 

5.2.1 

Height 

5.2.1.1 

Tests  at  10 m 

The  antenna  phase mid-point  must  be  3.00  ±  0.05  m  above  the  vehicle 
plane. 

5.2.1.2 

Tests  at  3 m 

The  antenna  phase mid-point  must  be  1.80 ±  0.05  m  above  the  vehicle 
pIane. 

5.2.1.3 

No part  of  the  antenna  receiving  components  must  be  less than  0.25 
m  from  the  vehicle  plane. 

5.2.2 

Measuring  distance 

5.2.2.1 

Tests  at  10 m 

The  horizontal  distance  from  the antenna  phase mid-point  to  the 
external  surface  of  the vehicle  must  be  10.0 ±  0.2  m. 

5.2.2.2 

Tests  at  3 m 

The  horizontal  distance  from  the antenna  phase mid-point  to  the 
external  surface  of  the vehicle must  be  3.00 ±  0.05  m. 

5.2.2.3 

If the  test  is carried  out  in a closed  installation  with  the  object 
of  creating  an electromagnetic screen  against  radiofrequencies,  the 
position of  the  antenna  receiving  components  must  not  be  less  than 
(0.5) m  from  any  type of  radiofrequency  absorption  material  or  less 
than  (1.5) m  from  the closed  installation.  There must  be  no 
absorption  material  between  the  receiving  antenna  and  the  vehicle 
under  test. 

5.3 

Position  of  the  antenna  in relation  to the  vehicle 

The  antenna  must  be positioned  successively  on  each  side of  the 
vehicle  parallel  to the  longitudinal  median  plane of  the  vehicle 
and  in  line with  the mid-point  of  the engine  (see Fig.  3,  Appendix 
1). 

- 

'*>%t+ 

-

5.4 

Position of  the  antenna 

Readings are  taken  for each measuring  point,  first  with  the antenna 
vertically  polarized  and  then horizontally  polarized  (see Fig. 3, 
Append i x  1). 

5.5 

Measurements 

The maximum  value of  the  four measurements  taken  in accordance with 
items 5.3  and 5.4  for each  frequency  is regarded  as  the 
characteristic measurement  for  this  frequency. 

6. 

6.1 

FREQUENCIES 

Measurements 

Measurements are  taken over  a range of  frequencies  from  30 to 
1000 MHz.  It  is considered  highly  likely that  a vehicle  complies 
with  the requisite  limits over  the entire  frequency  range  if it 
meets  the  limits  laid down  the following  11  frequencies: 45, 65, 
90,  150, 180, 220, 300, 450, 600, 750 and 900 MHz.  Should  the 
limit  be exceeded  during  the  tests, steps must  be  taken  to confirm 
that  this  is due  to the vehicle  and not  to ambient  radiation. 

6.2 

Tolerances 

Single  frequency  Tolerance 
(MHz) 

(MHz) 

45, 65, 90, 150, 180 
and  220 
300, 450, 600 
750 and 900 

±  5 

+ 20 

The  tolerances are applied  to the frequencies stated  above with  the 
aim of  avoiding  interference  in transmissions operating  at, or 
close  to, the nominal  frequencies during  the measurements. 

ANNEX  I I 
APPENDIX 1 
FIGURE 1 

VEHICLE TEST  SURFACE 

Clear  horizontal  surface  free of electromagnetic  reflection 

See CISPR  12, Edition 3 

-  'izc  -

ANNEX  I I 
APPENDIX 1 
FIGURE 2 

VEHICLE  TEST  SURFACE 

Clear  horizontal  surface  free of electromagnetic  reflection 

Delimitation of  the surface  defined  by an ellipse 

See CISPR  12, Edition 2 

(21; 

-Ill 

ANNEX 

I I 

APPENDIX  1 
FIGURE  3 

1- 10,0 ± 0.2 m  . 

(3.00 ± 0,05 m) 

3.00 ± 0.05 m 
(1,80 ±0.05 m) 

Dipole  antenna  In  position  to  measure  the  vertical  radiation  components 

Elevation 

VEHICLE 

10.0  ± 0 2 mj 
(3.00 ± 0.05 m) 

Eb)G-\UE 

mùi-po-uv^erf \k£ tHaihe. 

Dipole  antenna  In  position  to  measure  the  horizontal  radiation  components 

Plane 

- 

- «* 

-

ANNEX  III 

METHOD OF MEASURING NARROW-BAND  ELECTROMAGNETIC RADIATION  FROM  VEHICLES 

1. 

1.1 

GENERAL 

Measuring  equipment 

The measuring equipment  must  comply with  the conditions  laid down 
in Publication  No  16, Edition  2, of  the  International  Special 
Committee on Radio  Interference  (CISPR). 
A mean-value detector  is used  to measure  narrow-band 
electromagnetic  radiation. 

1.2 

Test  method 

The  test  is designed  to measure  narrow-band  electromagnetic 
radiation  such  as that which may  be generated  by a 
microprocessor-based  system or  from another  narrow band  source. 

As  regards  the choice of  antenna, that  choice  being  determined  by 
common  agreement  between  the manufacturer  and  testing  body,  the 
distance  from  the vehicle may  be either  10 or  3 metres.  In both 
cases,  the conditions set out  in  item 3 below must  be  complied 
with.  In the  initial  stage  (2-3 minutes)  it  is possible,  through 
the choice of  antenna  position and polarization,  to scan  the  range 
of  frequencies  listed  in  item 6.1  by  the use of  a spectrum  analyser 
or  an  automatic  receiver  to  indicate  the maximum  transmitting 
frequencies.  This can be useful  for  selecting  the  frequencies  to 
be  tested  in each  band  (see  item 6 ). 

2. 

EXPRESSION OF THE  RESULTS 

3. 

3.1. 

3.2 

The measured  results are expressed  in dB  (microvolts/m). 

TEST CONDITIONS 

The  test  surface must  be horizontal  and untrammelled  and  free of 
electromagnetic  reflections within  a minimum  radius of  30 m, 
measured  from  a point  mid-way  between  the vehicle  and  the  antenna 
(see Fig.  1  in Appendix  1, Annex  II).  Alternatively, the  test 
surface may  be any  location  that  fulfils  the conditions  shown  in 
Fig. 2  in Appendix  1, Annex  II. 

Both  the measuring  equipment  and  the test  cab or  the vehicle  In 
which  the measuring equipment  is situated  are positioned within  the 
test  surface, but only  in the part  shown  in Fig.  1  in Appendix  1, 
Annex  II.  Where  the  test  surface  fulfils all  the conditions set 
out  in Fig. 2  in Appendix  1, Annex  II, the measuring equipment  must 
lie outside  the part  shown  in that  figure. 

- ZV\ 

Closed  installations may  be used  for  the  tests, provided  that  it 
can  be  demonstrated  that  a correlation  exists  between  these 
installations and  the external  test  surface.  Such  installations 
are  not  subject  to the dimensional  conditions  laid  down  in Figs 1 
and  2  in Appendix  1, Annex  II, except  as  regards  the  distance 
between  the  vehicle  and  the antenna  and  to the  height  of  the 
latter. 

In order  to ensure  the absence of  any  noise or  extraneous  signals 
of  a  level  that  might  materially  affect  the measurements,  such 
measurements  must  be  taken  before  and  after  the main  test.  Steps 
must  be  taken  to ensure  that  no emission  from  the vehicle  can 
significantly  affect  the measurements  (e.g.,  the  ignition  key 
should  be  removed  or  the battery/batteries disconnected  when  the 
vehicle  is withdrawn  from  the  test  surface).  For  both  types of 
measurement,  the noise or  extraneous  signal  must  be  at  least  10 dB 
below  the  interference  limits contained  in Annex  I (item  5.3.2.1  or 
5.3.2.2,  depending on  the distance  between  the vehicle and  the 
antenna),  save  for  intentional  narrow-band  ambient  emissions. 

STATE OF  THE VEHICLE  DURING THE  TESTS 

The  vehicle's  electronic  systems must  be  in their  normal  operating 
mode  and  the  vehicle must  be stationary. 

The  ignition must  be connected.  The engine must  not  be  running. 

Tests must  not  be carried  out  in the  rain, nor  must  they  be  carried 
out  for  10 minutes  after  it has stopped  raining. 

ANTENNA  TYPE, POSITION AND  ORIENTATION 

Antenna  type 
Any  type of  linearly  polarized  antenna  is permitted,  provided  that 
it can  be  standardized  with  the  reference  antenna. 

3.3 

3.4 

4. 

4.1 

4.2 

4.3 

5. 

5.1 

5.2 

Measurement  height  and  distance 

5.2.1 

Height 

5.2.2.1 

Tests  at  10 m 

The  antenna  phase mid-point  must  be  3.00 ±  0.05  m  above  the  vehicle 
plane. 

5.2.1.2 

Test  at  3 m 
The  antenna  phase mid-point  must  be  1.80  + 0.05  m  above  the  vehicle 
pIane. 

5.2.1.3 

No part  of  the antenna's  receiving  components  must  be  less  than 
0.25  m  from  the  vehicle  plane. 

- ZU'O 

5.2.2 

Measuring distance 

5.2.2.1 

5.2.2.2 

5.2.2.3 

5.3 

5.4 

5.5 

6. 

6.1 

Test at 10 m 
The horizontal distance from the antenna phase mid-point to the 
external surface of the vehicle must be 10.0 ± 0.2 m. 

Test at 3 m 
The horizontal distance from the antenna phase mid-point to the 
external surface of the vehicle must be 3.00 ± 0.05 m. 

if the test  is carried out  in a closed  installation with the object 
of creating an electromagnetic screen against radiofrequencies, the 
position of the antenna receiving components must not be less than 
(0.5) m from any type of radiofrequency absorption material or less 
than (1.5) m from the wall of the installation in question.  There 
must be no absorption material between the receiving antenna and 
the vehicle under test. 

Position of the antenna  in relation to the vehicle 
The antenna must be positioned successively on each side of the 
vehicle parallel  to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicle 
and  in line with the mid-point of the engine (see Figs 1 2 and 3, 
Appendix 1, Annex  II). 

Position of the antenna 
Readings are taken for each measuring point, with the antenna both 
vertically and horizontally polarized (see Fig. 3, Appendix 1, 
Annex  II). 

Measurements 
The maximum values of the four measurements taken for each 
frequency  in accordance with  items 5.3 and 5.4 are regarded as the 
characteristic measurement  for this frequency. 

FREQUENCIES 

Measurements 
Measurements are taken over a range of frequencies from 30 to 
1000 MHz.  This range is divided  into 11 bands.  In each band a 
test should be carried out on a single frequency  in order to check 
that  it is within the required  limits.  It is considered highly 
likely that a vehicle complies with the requisite  limits over the 
entire frequency range if the vehicle  in question meets the limits 
laid down for a frequency selected from each of the following 11 
frequency bands: 30-45, 45-80, 80-130, 130-170, 170-225, 225-300, 
300-400, 400-525, 525-700, 700-850 and 850-1000 MHz. 

Should the limit be exceeded during the tests, steps must be taken 
to confirm that this is due to the vehicle and not to ambient 
radiation. 

-  ZUI 

6.2 

If, during  the  first  test  carried  out  in accordance  with  the  test 
method  described  in  item  1.2,  the narrow-band  radiation  for  any of 
the  bands  defined  in  item 6.1  are  at  least  10 dB  below  the 
reference  limit,  then  the  vehicle  is deemed  to  fulfil  the 
conditions  laid  down  In this Annex  for  the  frequency  band  under 
consideration.  Accordingly,  the  full  test  is not  necessary. 

METHODS OF TESTING VEHICLE  IMMUNITY  TO ELECTROMAGNETIC  RADIATION 

ANNEX  IV 

1. 

1.1 

GENERAL 

Test  methods 

These  tests are designed  to demonstrate  the  insens itivity of  the 
vehicle  to any  factor  which may  alter  the quality  of  its direct 
control. The vehicle must  be exposed  to the electromagnetic fields, 
described  in this Annex, and must  be monitored  during  the  tests. 

2. 

EXPRESSION OF THE  RESULTS 

The  field  strengths must  be expressed  in volts/m  for  all  the  tests 
described  in this Annex. 

3. 

TEST CONDITIONS 

The  test  equipment  must  be capable of generating  the  field 
strengths  in the  range of  frequencies defined  in this Annex, and 
must  meet  the  (national)  legal  requirements  regarding 
electromagnetic signal.  The control  and monitoring equipment  must 
not  be susceptible  to radiation  fields whereby  the  tests could  be 
inval(dated. 

STATE OF THE VEHICLE DURING THE TESTS 

The mass of  the vehicle must  be  that  when  the vehicle  is  in running 
order. 

The engine must  turn  the driving wheels at  a constant  speed 
predetermined  by  the  testing  authority  in agreement  with  the 
vehicle manufacturer.  The vehicle must  be placed on  a  suitably 
loaded dynamometer  or,  if no dynamometer  is available, must  rest  on 
electronically  insulated  axle  supports at  a minimum  distance  from 
the  ground. 

4. 

4.1 

4.1.1 

4.1.2 

The dipped-beam  headlights must  be switched  on. 

4.1.3 

The  left or  right  direction  indicators must  be on. 

4.1.4 

Ail  other  vehicle  systems must  be operating normally. 

4.1.5 

There must  be no electrical  connection  between  the vehicle  and  the 
test  surface  and no connections between  the vehicle  and  the 
equipment,  save where so required  by  items 4.1.1  or  4.2.  Contact 
between  the wheels and  the test  surface  is not  regarded  as an 
electrical  connection. 

-  Z(/3> " 

4.2 

4.3 

4.4 

5. 

5.1 

5.1.1 

5.1.2 

5.1.3 

Where  STUs  are  involved  in the direct  control  of  the  vehicle  and 
where  these  systems  do not  operate  under  the  conditions  described 
in  item  4.1.1,  the  testing  authority  may  carry  out  separate  tests 
on  the  systems  in question  under  conditions agreed  with  the  vehicle 
manufacturer. 

During  the  tests on  the vehicle, only  non-interference-generating 
equipment  may  be used  (see  item 8 ). 

Under  normal  conditions,  the vehicle  must  be  facing  the  antenna. 

TYPE, POSITION AND ORIENTATION OF THE FIELD  GENERATOR 

Type of  field  generator 

The  criterion  for  the selection  of  the  field  generator  type  is the 
capacity  of  the  latter  to attain  the prescribed  field  strength  at 
the  reference  point  (see  item 5.4) and  at  the  appropriate 
frequencies. 

Either  the  antenna(s) or  a  transmission  line system  (TLS) may  be 
used  as  the  field-generating  device(s). 

The  design  and orientation  of  any  field  generator  must  be such  that 
the  field  generated  is polarized  in one of  the  following ways, the 
way  being  determined  by common  agreement  between  the  manufacturer 
and  test ing  body: 

either  vertically  between  20 and  1000 MHz, 

(i) 
(ii)  or  horizontally  in the 20-30 MHz  band, 

the means  of  polarization being  selected  by  common  agreement 
between  the manufacturer  and  approval  body. 

5.2 

Measurement  height  and  distance 

5.2.1 

Height 

5.2.1.1 

The  phase mid-point  of  all  antennas must  not  be  less  than  1.5 m 
above  the vehicle  plane. 

5.2.1.2 

No part  of  the  antenna  radiator  elements must  be  less  than  0.25 m 
from  the  vehicle  plane. 

5.2.2 

Measuring  distance 

5.2.2.1 

It will  be  possible  to obtain  a closer  approximation of  the 
operating  conditions  if the  field  generator  is placed  as  far  as 
possible  from  the vehicle.  This  distance must  be  in the  range  1 to 
5  m. 

- 

to  it -

5.2.2.2 

If the  test  is carried  out  in a closed  installation,  the  radiator 
elements of  the  field generator  must  not  be  less than  0.5  m  from 
any  type of  radiofrequency  absorption  material  and  not  less  than 
1.5 m  from  the wall  of  the  installation  in question.  There must  be 
no absorption material  between  the  transmitting  antenna  and  the 
vehicle  under  test. 

5.3 

Position  of  the antenna  in relation  to the  vehicle 

5.3.1 

5.3.2 

5.3.3 

The  field  generator  must  be positioned  in the  longitudinal  median 
plane of  the  vehicle. 

No part  of  the TLS, except  the vehicle  plane, must  be  less  than  0.5 
m  from  any  part  of  the  vehicle. 

Any  field  generator  placed  on  the vehicle must  cover  at  least  75% 
of  the  length of  the  vehicle. 

5.4 

Reference  point 

5.4.1 

The  reference  point  is the point  at  which  the  field  strengths  are 
established  and  is defined  as  follows: 

5.4.1.1 

Horizontally, at  less than  two metres  from  the antenna  phase  mid 
point  or, vertically, at  less than one metre  from  the TLS  radiator 
elements. 

5.4.1.2 

In the  longitudinal  median  plane of  the  vehicle 

5.4.1.3 

At  a height  of  1.0  ±  0.05  m  above  the  vehicle  plane. 

5.4.1.4 

Or: 

5.5 

At  1.0 ±  0.2  m  behind  the vertical  centre  line of  the  vehicle's 
front  wheel  in the case of  tricycles 

or: 

At  0.2 ±  0.2  m behind  the vertical  centre  line of  the  vehicle's 
front  wheel  (item  D  in Appendix  2)  in the case of  motorcycles. 

If the  testing  authority  chooses  to subject  the  rear  part  of  the 
vehicle  to  radiation,  the  reference  point  shall  be established  as 
stated  in  item  5.4.  In this case  the  vehicle  shall  be  positioned 
with  its front  part  facing  in the opposite  direction  to  the  antenna 
and  as  if  it had  been  rotated  horizontally  through  180  degrees 
about  its central  point.  The  distance  between  the antenna  and  the 
nearest  part  of  the outer  surface of  the vehicle must  remain  the 
same  (see Appendix 3 ). 

-  ? d / < r-

6. 

6.1 

6.1.1 

6.1.2 

REQUISITE  TEST  CONDITIONS 

Range of  frequencies, duration  of  the  tests, polarization. 
The  vehicle  shall  be exposed  to electromagnetic  radiation  in the 
20-1000 MHz  frequency  range. 

The  tests shall  be carried  out  at  the  following  12 frequencies: 27, 
45, 65, 90, 150, 180, 220,  300, 450, 600, 750 and  900 MHz ±  10% for 
2S  at  +. 10%  in each  frequency. 

One of  the polarization  modes  described  in  item  5.1.3  shall  be 
selected  by  common  agreement  between  the manufacturer  and  testing 
body. 

6.1.3 

AM  other  test  parameters  are as defined  in this Annex. 

6.2 

Tests  to check  deterioration  in direct  control 

6.2.1 

6.2.2 

6.2.3 

7. 

7.1 

7.1.1 

A  vehicle  is deemed  to fulfil  the  requisite  immunity  conditions  if, 
during  the  tests carried  out  in the manner  required  by  this Annex, 
there  are  no abnormal  changes  in the speed  of  the vehicle's  drive 
wheels,  there  are no signs of operational  deterioration which  might 
mislead  other  road  users and  there  are  no other  noticeable 
phenomena  which  could  result  in a deterioration  in the  direct 
control  of  the  vehicle. 

For  vehicle observation  purposes, only  the monitoring  equipment 
described  in  item 8 may  be  used. 

If a vehicle  does  not meet  the  requirements of  the  tests defined  in 
item 6.2,  steps must  be  taken  to verify  that  the  faults occurred 
under  normal  conditions  and  are  not  attributable  to  spurious 
fields. 

GENERATION OF THE REQUISITE FIELD  STRENGTH 

Test  method 

In order  to create  the  field  test  conditions,  the  "substitution 
method"  is used. 

7.1.2 

Substitut ion method 

For  each  desired  test  frequency  a  field  generator  power  level  must 
be  set  so as  to produce  the  field  strength  (defined  in  item 5) at 
the  test  surface  reference  point  in the absence of  the  vehicle. 
This  power  level, along with  any other  parameters  directly  related 
to the power  required  to define  the  field, shall  be measured  and 
the  results  recorded.  The  results are  then used  for  the  type 
approval  tests, unless modifications made  to the  apparatus or 
equipment  require  a repetition of  this process. 

-'SU-

7.1.3 

7.1.4 

7.1.5 

The vehicle  is then brought  to the test  installation and  positioned 
in accordance  with  the conditions  laid down  in  item 5.  The power 
required  by  item 7.1.2  is then applied  to the field  generator  for 
each of  the  frequencies  indicated  in point  6.1.1. 

Whatever  field-definition parameter  is chosen  in accordance  with 
the conditions  laid down  in  item 7.1.2, the same parameter  must  be 
used  in order  to determine  the strength of  that  field  throughout 
the test. 

For  the purposes of  this test, the same field generating  equipment 
and  the same equipment  configuration must  be used  as  in the 
operations conducted  in pursuance of  item 7.1.2. 

7.1.6 

Field  strength  measuring  device 

Under  the substitution method, the device used  to determine  the 
field  strength  during  the calibration  stage should  take  the  form 
either  of  a compact  isotropic probe  for measuring  field  strength or 
of  a calibrated  receiving  antenna. 

During  the calibration phase of  the substitution method,  the phase 
mid-point  of  the  field-strength measuring  device must  coincide  with 
the reference  point. 

If a calibrated  receiving  antenna  is used as the  field  strength 
measuring device, readings will  be obtained  in three directions at 
right angles  to each other.  The equivalent  isotropic  value 
corresponding  to these measurements  is to be regarded  as the field 
strength. 

In order  to take account of differences  in vehicle geometry, a 
number  of  reference  points must  be established  for  the  relevant 
test  installat ion. 

7.1.7 

7.1.8 

7.1.9 

7.2 

Field  strength  contour 

7.2.1 

During  the calibration  phase  (before  the vehicle  is positioned  on 
the  test  surface) the field strength must  not be  less than 50% of 
the nominal  field  strength  at  the following  locations: 

(i) 

for  all  field-generating devices, 1.00 +.0.05 m on  either 
side of  the reference point on a  line passing  through  this 
point, and  perpendicular  to the  longitudinal  median  plane of 
the vehicle; 

(ii)  in the case of  a TLS, 1.50 + 0.05 m on a  line passing  through 
the reference  point, and situated  in the  longitudinal  median 
plane of  the vehicle. 

-34? -

7.3 

Characteristics of the test signal to be generated 

7.3.1 

Peak deviation of the curve 

The peak deviation of the test signal curve must be the same as 
that associated with an unmodulated sinusoidal wave whose r.m.s. 
value  in volts/m  is defined  in item 5.4.2  in Annex I. 

7.3.2 

Test signal waveform 

The  test  signal  must  be  a  radio-frequency  sinusoidal  wave, 
amplitude-modulated  by  a  sinusoidal  1  kHz  wave  at  a  modulation  rate 
m of  0.8  ±  0.04  m. 

7.3.3 

Modulation rate 

The modulation rate m  is defined as follows: 

8. 

8.1 

Peak deviation of the curve - minimum deviation 

Peak deviation of the curve + minimum deviation 

INSPECTION AND MONITORING EQUIPMENT 

For the purposes of monitoring the external part of the vehicle and 
the passenger compartment and of determining whether the conditions 
laid down  in item 6.2 have been met, use shall be  made of a video 
camera or cameras. 

~ Zb& " 

ANNEX IV 
APPENDIX 1 

a  r 

The reference point  is in this plane 

1.0 ±0.2 m 

Vertical axis of the front wheel  (item C) 

-  1Ucx 

-

ANNEX  IV 
APPENDIX  2 

The  reference  point  is  in this plane 

Front  axis 
(item  D) 

-  z<c 

ANNEX IV 
APPENDIX 3 

First  stage 

Determine  the reference  point 

second  stage 

Rotate  the vehicle 

Rear 

Front 

Vehicle 

vehicle 

Reference point 

Front 

Rear 

Distance maintained between vehicle and antenna 

Antenna 

- VTf 

ANNEX  V 

METHOD OF MEASURING WIDE-BAND  ELECTROMAGNETIC  RADIATION 
FROM  SEPARATE  TECHNICAL UNITS  (STU) 

1. 

1.1 

GENERAL 

Measuring  equipment 

The measuring equipment  must  meet  the conditions  laid down  in 
Pubication No  16, Edition  2, of  the  international  Special  Committee 
on Radio  Interference  (CISPR). 
A quasi-peak  detector  must  be used  to measure  wide-band 
electromagnetic emissions. 

1.2 

Test  method 

This method  is designed  to measure  wide-band  emissions  generated  by 
spark-ignition systems or  by electric motors  fitted  to  systems 
designed  for  continuous use  (e.g. electric  traction motors, heating 
system/demister  motors,  fuel  pumps  etc.). 

2. 

EXPRESSION OF THE  RESULTS 

3. 

3.1 

3.2 

3.3 

The measured  results are expressed  in dB  (microvolts/m) for a 
bandwidth  of  120 kHz.  If the measuring  equipment's  actual 
bandwidth  B  (expressed  in kHz) does not  correspond  exactly  to 
120 kHz, any  readings  taken  in micrpvolts/m  are  converted  to a 
bandwidth  of  120 kHz after  multiplication  by  a factor  of  120/B, 
where B must  be  less than  120 kHz. 

TEST CONDITIONS: 

The  testing  surface  shall  meet  the conditions  laid down  in 
publication  No  16, edition  2, of  the  International  Special 
Committee  on  Radio  Interference  (CISPR).  (See  Figure  1 in 
Appendix  1 to  this  Annex.) 

The measuring  equipment  and  the  test  cab or  the vehicle  in which 
the measuring equipment  is situated  shall  be positioned outside  the 
area  shown  in Figure  1, Appendix  1 to  this Annex. 

Covered  equipment  may  be used  for  the  tests  if  it  is demonstrated 
that  there  is a correlation  between  the  results obtained  therewith 
and  those obtained  by using an outside  surface which  has  been 
approved  for  the  tests.  Covered  test  equipment  has  the  advantage 
of enabling  tests  to be conducted  in all  weathers, within  a 
controlled  environment  and with  improved  measurement  repeatability 
deriving  from more  stable  electrical  characteristics.  This  covered 
facility does not  need  to meet  the dimensional  conditions  set  out 
in figure  1, Appendix  1 to this Annex, apart  from  the  distance 
between  the antenna  and  the STU  and  the height  of  the  antenna. 

3.4 

4. 

4.1 

4.2 

4.3 

-  Zi  7 

In order  to ensure  that  there  is no  extraneous  noise  or  signals of 
such  a magnitude  that  they  could  materially  affect  the 
measurements,  the  background  radiation  will  be measured  before  and 
after  the main  test.  For  both  of  these measurements  both  the 
noises  and  extraneous  signals  shall  be  at  least  10 dB  below  the 
limits  set  out  in  item  5.5.2.1  in Annex  1, except  in  the  case of 
deliberate  narrow-band  transmissions  within  the  environment. 

STATE  OF  THE  STU  DURING THE  TEST 

The  STU  shall  be  in  its normal  operating  state. 

Measurements  must  not  be carried  out  in the  rain  or  for  10 minutes 
after  the  rain  has  stopped. 

The  STU  and  its cable  harnesses  shall  be  placed  on  insulated 
supports  50 +  10-0 mm  above  the earth  plate.  However,  if one of 
the  parts  of  the  STU was  intended  to be  electrically  connected  to 
the metal  bodywork  of  the vehicle  that  part  shall  be  situated  on 
the earth  plate  and  it shall  be  connected  electrically  thereto. 

The  earth  plate  shall  be  a metal  sheet  at  least  0.25  mm  thick.  The 
minimum  dimensions  of  the earth  plate  will  depend  upon  the  size of 
the  STU  but  it will  have  to be  sufficiently  large  to  receive  the 
cable  harness  and  the  components  of  the  vehicle  system.  The  earth 
plate  shall  be  connected  to  the earth  conductor.  It shall  be 
located  1.0 ±  0.1  m  above  the ground  and  run  parallel  thereto. 

The  STU  shall  be  ready  to operate  and  be  connected  in accordance 
with  the  conditions  laid  down.  The  power  distribution  cable 
harness  shall  run  parallel  to  the edges of  the  earth  plate  and  be 
no more  than  200 mm  from  the edge  of  that  plate  that  is closest  to 
the  antenna. 

The  STU  shall  be  earthed  in accordance  with  the  manufacturer's 
specifications:  no  additional  earth  connections  are  permitted. 

The minimum  distance  between  the STU  and  all  of  the  other 
conducting  structures  such  as  the walls of  a protected  area 
(except,  however,  for  the base  plate  below  the  test  piece) shall  be 
at  least  1.0 m. 

4.4 

Power  for  the  STU  shall  be  supplied  by  a  50/  Line  Impedence 
Stabilizing  Network  (LISN) which  shall  be  connected  electrically  to 
the earth  plate. The  power  supply  voltage  shall  be maintained  at 
±  10% of  the  nominal  operating  voltage  of  the  system.  All  ripple 
voltage  shall  be  less  than  1.5% of  the nominal  operating  voltage of 
the  system  measured  at  the LISN monitoring  port. 

(22| 

-  is  s -

4.5 

5. 

5.1 

If the  STU  comprised  more  than one  unit  the  best  way  of  linking 
these  would  be  by using  the cable  harness  intended  for  use on  the 
vehicle.  If this  is not  available  the minimum  length  between  the 
electronic  control  unit  and  the  LISN must  be  1.5  m.  All  of  the 
cables  in the  harness  must  end  in the most  realistic way  possible, 
preferably  with  the  actual  loads and  actuators.  If other  equipment 
were  needed  for  the proper  functioning of  the  STU  it would  be 
necessary  to compensate  for  its contribution  to  the  emissions 
measured. 

ANTENNA  TYPE, POSITION  AND  ORIENTATION 

Antenna  type 

Any  type of  linearly  polarized  antenna  is permitted  provided  that 
it can  be  standardized  with  the  reference  antenna. 

5.2 

Measurement  height  and  distance 

5.2.1 

Height 

The  phase  centre  of  the antenna  shall  be 0.50  ±  0.05  m  above  the 
earth  plate. 

5.2.2 

Measuring  distance 

The  horizontal  distance  measured  between  the  antenna  phase 
mid-point  and  the edge of  the earth  plate  shall  be  1.00  ±  0.05  m. 
No part  of  the  antenna  shall  be  less  than  0.5  m  from  the  earth 
plate. 

The  antenna  shall  be placed  parallel  to  the plane  perpendicular  to 
the earth  plate  and  shall  run along  that  edge of  the  plate  along 
which  the main  parts of  the  cable  harness  run. 

5.2.3 

If the  test  is carried  out  in a closed  installation  with  the  object 
of  creating  an electromagnetic  screen  against  radio  frequencies, 
the antenna  receiving  components  must  not  be  less  than  0.5  m  from 
any  type of  radio  frequency  absorption  material  or  less  than  1.5 m 
from  the wall  of  the  closed  installation.  There  must  be  no 
absorption material  between  the  receiving  antenna  and  the  STU  for 
the  vehicle  under  test. 

5.3 

Orientation  and  polarization  of  the  antenna 

Readings  shall  be  taken  at  the measuring  point  with  the  antenna 
polarized  horizontally  and  then  vert leally. 

5.4 

Measurements 

The  highest  value  for  the  two measurements  taken  in accordance  with 
item  5.3  for  each  single  frequency  shall  be  regarded  as  the 
characteristic measurement  for  that  frequency. 

-  Z<i*  -

6. 

6.1 

FREQUENCIES 

Measurements 

The measurements  shall  be  taken over  a range of  frequencies  from  30 
to 1000 MHz.  It  is considered  highly  likely  that  an STU will  be 
considered  to fall  within  the  limits  for  the  full  range of 
frequencies  if  it does not  exceed  the  limits  laid down  for  the 
following  11  frequencies:  45, 65, 90, 150, 180, 220, 300, 450, 
600, 750, 900 MHz.  Should  the  limit  be exceeded  steps  should  be 
taken  to confirm  that  this  is due  to the STU and  not  to  ambient 
radiation. 

6.2 

Tolerances 

Single  frequency  Tolerance 
(MHz) 

(MHz) 

45, 65, 90, 150, 180 
and  220 

±  5 

300, 450, 600 
750 and 900 

+ 20 

The  aim of  the  tolerances  applying  to the  frequencies  set  out  above 
is to avoid  interference  in transmissions  operating  at, or  close 
to, the nominal  frequencies  during  the measurements. 

- 1«  -

ANNEX V 
Append i x 1 
Figure 1 

CONFINES OF THE TESTING SURFACE 

Free area not  including any electromagnet leal Iy-reflecting surface 
See CISPR 16 (draft) 

Z<£ -

ANNEX  VI 

METHOD  OF MEASURING  NARROW-BAND  ELECTROMAGNETIC  RADIATION 
FROM  SEPARATE  TECHNICAL  UNITS  (STUs) 

GENERAL 

Measuring  equipment 
The measuring  equipment  shall  meet  the conditions  laid  down  in 
publication No  16, edition  2 by  the  International  Special  Committee 
on  Radio  Interference  (CISPR). 

A mean-value  detector  is used  to measure  the  narrow-band 
electromagnetic  radiation. 

Test  method 
The  test  is designed  to measure  narrow-band  electromagnetic 
radiation  such  as  that  which  may  emanate  from  a micro-processor 
based  system.  In the  initial  stage  (2-3 minutes)  it  is 
permissible, once  an antenna  polarization  has been  selected,  to 
scan  the  range of  frequencies  identified  in  item 6.1  by using  a 
spectrum  analyzer  to pinpoint  the maximum  transmission  frequencies. 
This can make  it easier  to select  the  frequencies  to be  tested. 
(See  item  6.) 

EXPRESSION  OF  THE  RESULTS 
The  results of  the measurements  shall  be expressed  in dB 
(micro-volts/m). 

TEST  CONDITIONS 
The  test  surface  shall  meet  the conditions  laid  down  in publication 
No  16, edition  2, of  the  International  Special  Committee  on  Radio 
Interference  (CISPR).  (See  Figure  1  in Appendix  1 to Annex  V.) 

The measuring  equipment,  the  test  cab, or  the vehicle  in which  the 
measuring  equipment  is situated  shall  be outside  the  area  shown  in 
Figure  1  in Appendix  1 to Annex  V. 

Closed  installations may  be used  for  the  tests, provided  that  it 
can  be demonstrated  that  a correlation exists between  these 
Installations and  the external  test  surface.  These  test 
installations have  the advantage  that  all  of  the  measuring 
equipment  is at  all  times operating  in a controlled  environment  and 
its repeatability  is  improved  as a result  of  its more  stable 
electrical  characteristics.  The  closed  testing  installations are 
not  subject  to  the dimensional  conditions  laid down  in Figure  1 in 
Appendix  1 to Annex  V, except  for  the condition  relating  to  the 
distance  between  the STU  and  the antenna  and  to the  height  of  the 
latter. 

In order  to ensure  the absence  of  any  noise or  extraneous  signals 
of  a  level  that  might  materially  affect  the measurements,  the 
background  radiation shall  be measured  before  and  after  the main 
test. 
signals must  be at  least  10 dB below  the value  given  in  item 
5.6.2.1,  in Annex  I, save  for  intentional  narrow-band  emissions. 

For  both  types of measurement,  the noise or  extraneous 

1. 

1.1 

1.2 

2. 

3. 
3.1 

3.2 

3.3 

3.4 

4. 

4.1 

4.2 

4.3 

4.4 

4.5 

-  ^1 

-

STATE  OF  THE  STU  DURING  THE  TESTS 

The  STU  shall  be  in  its normal  operating  state. 

No measurements  will  be  taken while  it  is raining  on  the  STU  nor 
for  ten minutes  after  it has stopped  raining. 

The  STU  and  its cable  harnesses  shall  be placed  on  insulated 
supports  50 ±  10 - 0 mm  above  the earth  plate.  However,  if one of 
the parts of  the  STU  is  intended  to be  connected  electrically  to 
the metal  bodywork  of  the vehicle  that  part  must  be  located  on  and 
be connected  electrically  to the earth  plate. 

The  earth  plate  shall  have  to  take  the  form  of  a metal  sheet  at 
least  0.25  mm  thick.  The minimum  size of  the earth  plate will 
depend  upon  the  size of  the STU,  but  it will  have  to be 
sufficiently  large  to receive  the  vehicle  system's  components  and 
cable  harness.  The  earth  plate  shall  be  connected  to  the 
earth-conductor  and  instructions  shall  be  located  at  a height  of 
1.0  ±  0.1  m  above  the ground  and  run parallel  to  this. 

The  STU  shall  be  ready  to operate  and  connected  in accordance  with 
the  instructions.  The  power  distribution  cables  shall  run  parallel 
to and  lie at  the most  at  the most  100 mm  from  the edge of  the 
earth  plate  that  is closest  to  the  antenna. 

The  STU  shall  be earthed  as specified  by  the manufacturer:  no 
additional  earth  connections  shall  be  permitted. 

The  distance  between  the  STU  and  the other  conducting  structures, 
such  as  the walls of  a shielded  area  (except  for  the earth  plate 
supporting  the  test  object) shall  be at  least  1.0  m. 

The  power  shall  be  applied  to  the  STU  via  a 50/ Line  Impedance 
Stabilizing  Network  (LISN),  that  is connected  electrically  to  the 
earth  plate.  The  electrical  supply  voltage  shall  remain  within 
+  10% of  the nominal  operating  voltage of  the  system.  Any  ripple 
voltage  shall  be  less  than  1.5% of  the nominal  operating  voltage  of 
the  system  measured  at  the LISN monitoring  port. 

If the  STU  consists  of more  than one  component  the best  way  of 
linking  these  together  is to use  the cable  harness  intended  for  use 
on  the  vehicle.  If such  a harness  is not  available  the  distance 
between  the electronic  control  unit  and  the LISN must  be at  least 
1.5 m.  All  of  the cables  in the  harness  shall  end  in the most 
realistic manner  possible  and,  preferably,  receive  real  loads  and 
actuators.  If other  equipment  is needed  for  the proper  functioning 
of  the STU  it will  be necessary  to compensate  for  its contributions 
to  the emissions  measured. 

-  1<s  -

5. 

5.1 

ANTENNA  TYPE, POSITION AND ORIENTATION 

Antenna  type 

Any  type of  linearly polarized  antenna  shall  be permitted,  provided 
that  it can be standardized  with  the  reference  antenna. 

5.2 

Measurement  height  and  distance 

5.2.1 

Height 

The phase centre of  the antenna  shall  be 0.50 ±  0.05  m  above the 
earth plate. 

5.2.2 

Measuring  distance 

The horizontal  distance measured  between  the antenna  phase 
mid-point  and  the earth  plate shall  be  1.00 ±  0.05  m.  No part  of 
the antenna  shall  be  less than 0.5 m  from  the earth  plate. 

The antenna  shall  lie parallel  to a plane  that  is perpendicular  to 
the earth  plate and  runs along  that  edge of  the plate along which 
the main parts of  the harness are  situated. 

5.2.3 

If the  test  is carried out  in a closed  installation with  the object 
of creating  a screen  against  radiofrequencies,  the  antenna's 
receiving  components  shall  not  be  less than 0.5 m  from  any  type of 
radiofrequency  absorption material  or  less than  1.5 m  from  the wall 
of  the screen  In question.  There shall  be no absorption material 
between  the  receiving  antenna and  the vehicle under  test. 

5.3 

Orientation  and  polarization of  antenna 

Readings are  to be  taken at  the measuring point, with  the antenna 
polarized  horizontally  and  then  vertically. 

5.4 

Measurements 

The greater  of  the  two measurements  taken  in accordance with  item 
5.3  for each  frequency  shall  be regarded  as  the characteristic 
measurement  for  that  frequency. 

6. 

6.1 

FREQUENCIES 

Measurements 

Measurements are  taken over  a range of  frequencies  from  30 to 1000 
MHz.  This  range  is divided  into 11 bands.  In each band  a test may 
be carried out  on a single  frequency  in order  to check  that  It  is 
within  the required  limits,  it  is considered  that  the STU meets 
the requisite  limits over  the entire  frequency  range  if  it does not 
exceed  the  limits  laid down  for  the  following  11  frequency bands: 
30-45,  45-80, 80-130, 130-170, 170-225, 225-300, 300-400, 400-525, 
525-700, 700-850 and 850-1000 MHz. 
Should  the  reference  limit be exceeded  during  the  tests,  it must  be 
confirmed  that  this  is due  to the STU  and not  to ambient  radiation. 

-  i<a  -

6.2 

If, during  the  first  measurement  conducted  in accordance  with  item 
1.2,  the  narrow-band  radiation  emissions  for  any  of  the  bands 
referred  to  in  item 6.1  are  at  least  10 dB  below  the  reference 
limit,  then  the  STU  is deemed  to meet  the  conditions  laid  down  in 
this Annex  for  the  frequency  band  under  consideration.  Where  this 
is so,  the  full  test  is optional. 

-  160  -

ANNEX  VI I 

METHODS  OF  TESTING  STU  IMMUNITY  TO  ELECTROMAGNETIC  RADIATION 

1. 

1.1 

GENERAL 

Test  methods 

STUs  shall  not  exceed  the  limits  (see Annex  I,  item  5.7.2.1)  for 
one of  the  following  test  methods, at  their  manufacturers 
discretion,  within  the  range of  20-1000 MHz-. 

-  Strip line  test:  see  Figure  1  in Appendix  1 to  this  Annex. 

-  Bulk  current  injection  test:  see  Figures  1 and  2  in Appendix  2 
to this  Annex. 

-  TEM-cell  test:  see  Figure  1  in Appendix  3 to  this  Annex. 

-  Free-field  STU  immunity  test:  see  Figure  1  in Appendix  4  to  this 
Annex. 

NB:  Owing  to  the  radiation  of  electromagnetic  fields while  they 
are  in progress  all  of  the  tests will  be carried  out  in a  shielded 
area  . 

2. 

EXPRESSION  OF  THE  RESULTS 

The  field  strengths  shall  be expressed  in volts/m  and  the  injected 
current  shall  be expressed  In mi 11(amperes  for  all  of  the  tests 
described  in this  Annex. 

TEST  CONDITIONS 

The  test  equipment  shall  be capable of  generating  the  test  signal 
required  for  the  frequency  ranges  defined  in this Annex.  The 
location of  the  tests shall  meet  the  (national)  legal  requirements 
regarding  electromagnetic  signal  emissions. 

The  control  and  monitoring  equipment  shall  not  be  affected  by  any 
radiation  fields which  could  invalidate  the  tests. 

STATE OF  THE  STU  DURING THE  TEST 

The  STU  shall  be  in  its normal  operating  state.  It must  be 
arranged  as shown  in this Annex  unless otherwise  required  by  a 
specific  individual  test  method. 

3. 

3.1 

3.2 

4. 

4.1 

4.2 

4.3 

4.4 

4.5 

5. 

5.1 

5.2 

- 

Zbt-

The  STU  and  its wiring  harnesses  shall  be placed  on  insulated 
supports  50 ±  10 - 0 mm  above  the earth  plate.  However,  if one  of 
the  parts  of  the  STU  is  intended  to be  connected  electrically  to 
the metal  bodywork  of  the vehicle  that  part  shall  be  placed  on  and 
be  connected  electrically  to  the earth  plate.  This  shall  take  the 
form  of  a metal  sheet  that  is at  least  0.25  mm  thick,  except  where 
a TEM-cell  test  is used. 

The minimum  size of  the earth  plate  shall  depend  upon  the  size  of 
the STU,  but  shall  be  large enough  to receive  the  STU  components 
and  harnesses.  The earth  plate  shall  be  connected  to an  earth 
conductor. 

The  earth  plate  shall  be 1.0 ± 0 .1  m  above  the  test-facility  floor. 
The  STU  shall  be  at  least  1.0 m  away  from  all  of  the  other 
conducting  structures  such  as  the walls of  a shielded  area  (except 
for  the  earth  plate which  is  located  below  the  test  piece)  except 
where  a TEM-cell  test  is used. 

Power  shall  be  applied  to  the  STU  via  a Line  Impedence  Stabilizing 
Network  (LISN) which  shall  be connected  electrically  to  the  earth 
plate.  The  electrical  supply  voltage  shall  be  held  at ±  10% of  the 
nominal  operating  voltage  of  the system.  Any  ripple  voltage  shall 
be  less  than  1.5% of  the  nominal  operating  voltage  of  the  system 
measured  at  the  LISN monitoring  port. 

Any  extraneous  equipment  needed  to operate  thé STU  shall  be  in 
place  during  the calibration  stage.  No extraneous  equipment  shall 
be  less  than  1 m  from  the  reference  point  during  the  calibration. 

In order  to obtain  reproducible  results  the  tests  and  measurements 
will  be  repeated.  The  test-signal  generating  equipment  and  its 
configuration  shall  be  to  the  same  specification  as  that  used 
during  each  of  the appropriate  calibration phases  (items 7.2,  8.2 
and  10.3  in this  Annex). 

MEASURING  FREQUENCIES, DURATION OF  TESTS 

Measurements  will  be  conducted  within  the  frequency  range  of 
20-1000 MHz. 

The  tests  shall  be carried  out  with  the  following  12  frequencies: 
27 MHz, 45 MHz, 65 MHz, 90 MHz,  150 MHz,  180 MHz, 220 MHz, 300 MHz, 
450 MHz, 600 MHz, 750 MHz, 900 MHz ±  10% for  two s ±  10%  in each 
frequency. 

- 36 2 

6. 

6.1 

6.2 

6.3 

7. 

7.1 

CHARACTERISTICS  OF  TEST  SIGNAL  TO BE  GENERATED 

Peak  deviation of  the curve. 
The  peak  deviation  of  the  test  signal  shall  be equal  to  that  for a 
non-modulated  sinusoidal  wave, whose  r.m.s. value  is defined  in 
Annex  1,  item  4.7.2.. 

Test  signal  wave  form 
The  test  signal  shall  be a radio  frequency  sine wave,  amplitude 
modulated  by  a 1 kHz  sinusoidal  wave  at  a modulation  depth, m, of 
0.8 ±  0.04. 

Modulation  depth 
The modulation  depth, m,  is defined  as: 

m - Peak  deviation  of  the curve - minimum  deviation 
Peak  deviation  of  the curve  + minimum  deviation 

STRIPLINE  TESTING 

Test  method 
This  test  method  consists of  subjecting  the wiring  harnesses 
connecting  the  components  in an STU  to specified  field  strengths. 

The  test  method  enables  homogeneous  fields  to be generated  between 
an active  conductor  (the Stripline), and  an earth  plate  (the 
conducting  surface of  the mounting  table),  between which  part  of 
the wiring  harness may  be  inserted. 

7.2 

Field  strength  measurement  in the  stripline 

At  each  desired  test  frequency,  a  level  of  power  shall  be  fed  into 
the Stripline  to produce  the  required  field  strength  in the  test 
area,  the STU  being  absent. 

This  level  of  power, or  another  parameter  that  is directly  related 
to  the  power  required  to restore  the  field,  shall  be measured  and 
the  results  recorded.  These  results shall  be used  for  type 
approval  tests unless  changes occur  in the  facilities or  equipment 
which  necessitate  this procedure  being  repeated. 

During  this process,  the  field  probe  head  shall  be kept  beneath  the 
active  conductor,  and  pointed  in  longitudinal, vertical  and 
transverse  directions.  The  probe's electronics  shall  be  housed  as 
far  away  as possible  from  the  longitudinal  Stripline  axis. 

-  Z6Z 

-

7.3 

InstalIing of  the  STU 

7.3.1 

The  electronic  controller(s) for  the STU  shall  be mounted  on  the 
earth  plate  but  outside  the stripline  with  one  of  its  edges 
parallel  to  the  active  conductor  of  the  stripline.  It shall  be 
200 ±  10 mm  from  a  line on  the earth  plate  directly  below  the  edge 
of  the  active  conductor. 

7.3.2 

All  edges of  the  active  conductor  shall  be at  least  200 mm  from  any 
peripheral  measuring  device. 

The wiring  harness  for  the STU  shall  run  horizontally  between  the 
active  conductor  and  the earth  plate. 

Alternatively  an 800 mm  stripline may  be used  to  test  the  wiring 
and  sensors  in the electronic  controller(s).  The  electronic 
controller  for  the STU  shall  be placed  at  the  centre  of  the  test 
surface  together  with  the associated  wiring  and  sensors  as shown  in 
Fig.  2  in Appendix  1.  In order  to produce  a homogeneous  field  and 
to obtain  repeatable measurements,  the  test  piece 
larger  than  1/3 of  the distance  between  the plates. 

shall  not  be 

7.4 

Power, signal  and  control  wires 

7.4.1 

The minimum  length of  the wiring  harness  to be  placed  under  the 
Stripline, and which  shall  also  include  the power-supply  lines for 
the electronic  control  unit  shall  be  1.5 m unless  the  wiring 
harness  in the  vehicle  is shorter  than  1.5 m.  In that  case,  the 
length of  the wiring  harness shall  be  that  of  the  longest  harness 
used  in the vehicle  installation.  Any  harness  branches  occurring 
shall  run  perpendicular  to the  longitudinal  axis of  the  line. 

7.4.2 

Alternatively,  the  fully extended  length of  the wiring  harness, 
including  that  of  the  longest  branch, shall  be  1.5  m. 

8. 

8.1 

BULK  CURRENT  INJECTION  TEST 

Test  method 
This  is a method  of  conducting  immunity  tests by using  a  current 
injection  probe  to  induce currents directly  into a wiring  harness. 
This probe  consists of  a coupling  clamp  through  which  the  STU 
cables  pass.  The  immunity  test  can  then be carried out  by  varying 
the  frequency  of  the  induced signals. 

8.2 

8.3 

8.4 

36U  -

The  STU may  be  installed on an earth  plate  as described  in  item 4.2 
or  in a vehicle  in accordance  with  the vehicle  design 
specification. 

Calibration of  bulk  current  injection  probe 
Before  the  tests begin,  the  injection  probe  shall  be  attached  to 
the calibration  fixture  shown  in Fig. 2  in Appendix  1 to  this 
Annex.  The  power  required  to achieve  the current  specified  in 
Annex  1, shall  be monitored  continuousI y while  the  test-frequency 
range  is swept. 
This method  determines, before  the  test,  the direct  relationship 
between  power  and  current,  that  same  power  being  applied  to the 
injection  probe when  this  is connected  to the STU  via  the 
calibration wire.  It should  be noted  that  the power  measured  at 
the  Injection probe  is the direct  power. 

Installation of  the STU 
If the  system  is mounted  on  the earth  plate  as described  in 
item 4.2  all  of  the  cables  In the wiring  harness must  be  finished 
as  realistically  as possible  and  preferably  with  real  loads and 
actuators. 
For  both  vehicle-mounted  and  earth-piate mounted  systems  the 
current  injection  probe  shall  be wound  in turn  around  all  the wires 
in the wiring  harness  at  100 ±  10 mm  from  each  connector  for  the 
STU's electronic  control  units,  instrumentation modules or  active 
sensors,  as  illustrated  in Appendix  1, Fig. 2. 

Power/signal  and  control  wires 
Where  an  STU  is mounted  on  an earth  plate  as described  in  item 4.2, 
a wiring  harness  shall  link a LISN with  the main  electronic  control 
unit.  This  harness  shall  run parallel  to  the edge of  the  earth 
plate,  100 mm  ±  10 mm  from  its edge. 

This  harness  shall  contain  the  positive  lead  connecting  the  vehicle 
battery  to  this  ECU  and,  if used  on  the  vehicle,  the  negative  lead 
wire. 

The  distance  from  the ECU  to the LISN  shall  be  1.5 m i  0.1  m or  may 
be  the  harness  length  between  the  ECU  and  the battery  as used  on 
the  vehicle,  if known, whichever  is the shorter.  If the  vehicle 
harness  is used  then  any  line branches  along  its  length  shall  be 
routed  along  the earth  plate  but  perpendicular  to  its edge of  axis. 
Otherwise  the STU wires which  are  in this  length  shall  break out  at 
the  LISN. 

9. 

9.1 

9.2 

9.3 

9.4 

- Z6< 

TEM-CELL  TEST 

Test  method 
The TEM  (Transverse  Electromagnetic Mode) Cell  generates 
homogeneous  fields  between  the  internal  conductor  (partition) and 
housing  (earth  plate).  It  is used  for  testing  the STUs. 

Field  strength  measurement  in a TEM  cell 
The  field  strength  sensor  is placed  in the upper  half of  the TEM 
cell.  In this part  of  the TEM cell  the electronic  control  unit(s) 
has only  a slight  effect  on  the  test  field.  The output  of  this 
sensor  determines  the  field  strength.  Alternatively,  the  following 
equation may  be used  to determine  the electrical  field: 

¥  (P x 

I) 

E - 

Electric  field  intensity 

P  - 

Cell-input  power  (W) 

Z - 

Cell  impedance  (50/) 

d - 

Distance  in metres between  the upper  wall  and  the  plate 
(partition) 

Dimensions  of  TEM  cell 
In order  to maintain  a homogeneous  field  in the TEM  cell  and  to 
obtain  repeatable measurements,  the height  of  the STU  shall  not  be 
more  than  1/3 of  the  inside height  of  the  cell. 

Power,  Signal  and  Control  wires 
The TEM  cell  shall  be attached  to a board  equipped  with  a co-axial 
socket  and  a plug  connector  with  an  adequate  number  of  pins.  The 
power  supply  and  signal  leads running  from  the plug  connector  on 
the cell  wall  shall  be directly  connected  to  the  testpiece. 

The external  components  such  as sensors, power-supply  units  and 
control  units are  connected: 

via  a shielded  peripheral 

(i) 
(ii)  via  the vehicle  next  to  the TEM  cell 
(iii) directly  to the shielded  socketboard. 

Shielded  cables must  be used  in connecting  the TEM  cell  to  the 
peripherals or  the  vehicle. 

-  166 -

"FREE  FIELD" STU  IMMUNITY  TEST 

This method  consists of  testing  STUs by exposing  a complete  STU  to 
electromagnetic  radiation. 

10. 

10.1 

10.2 

Type,  position  and orientation  of  the  field  generator 

10.2.1 

Type  of  field  generator 

10.2.1.1 

Any  field  generator  chosen  shall  be able  to achieve  the  desired 
field  strength  at  the  reference  point  at  the  appropriate 
frequencies. 

10.2.1.2 

The  field  generating  device may  be one or  more  antenna(s) or  a 
plate  antenna. 

10.2.1.3 

The  field  generating  device  shall  be designed  and  aligned  in such  a 
way  that  the  field  is polarized  either: 

(i)  vertically, between  20 and  1000 MHz or 

(ii)  horizontally  between  20 and  30 MHz 

10.2.2 

Measuring  height  and  distance 

10.2.2.1 

Height 

10.2.2.1.1  The  phase  centre of  the antenna  shall  not  be  less than  0.5  m  above 

the earth  plate on which  the STU  is resting. 

10.2.2.1.2  No  radiating  part  of  the antenna  shall  be closer  than  0.25  m  to the 

STU  base  plate  base. 

10.2.2.2 

Measuring  distance 

10.2.2.2.1  In-service conditions may  best  be approximated  by placing  the  field 

generator  as  far  from  the STU  as possible.  This distance  will  be 
between  2 and  5 m. 

10.2.2.2.2  If the  test  is carried  out  in an enclosed  facility,  the  antenna's 

radiating  components  shall  be no closer  than  0.5  m  to any  radio 
absorbent  material  and no closer  than  1.5 m  to  the wall  of  the 
facility.  There  shall  be no absorbent  material  between  the 
transmitting  antenna  and  the  STU. 

10.2.3 

Position  of  the antenna  in relation  to the  STU 

10.2.3.1 

The  field  generator  shall  not  be closer  than 0.5  m  to the edge of 
the earth  plate. 

-  361 

10.2.3.2 

The  phase  centre  of  the  field  generator  shall  be on  a plane  which: 
(i) 
(ii)  is perpendicular  to the edge of  the earth  plate  along  which 

is perpendicular  to the earth  plate 

the main  part  of  the wiring  harness  runs 

and 
(iii) bisects  the edge of  the earth  plate  at  the midpoint  of  the 

main  part  of  the wiring  harness. 

The  antenna  shall  be placed  parallel  to a plane which  is 
perpendicular  to and  coincident  with  the edge of  the  earth  plate 
along  which  the main  part  of  the wiring  harness  runs. 

10.2.3.3 

Any  field  generator  which  is placed  above  the earth  plate or  the 
STU shall  completely  cover  the  STU. 

10.2.4 

Reference  point 

10.2.4.1 

The  reference  point  is the point  at which  the  field  strength  is 
measured.  It  is defined  as  follows: 

10.2.4.1.1  Horizontally  at  least  2 m  from  the antenna  phase  centre  or, 

vertically,  at  least  1 m  from  the  radiating  components  of  a plate 
antenna. 

10.2.4.1.2  On  a plane  which: 
(i) 
(ii)  is perpendicular  to the edge of  the earth  plate  along  which 

is perpendicular  to  the earth  plate 

the main  part  of  the wiring  harness  runs 

and 
(iii) bisects  the edge of  the earth  plate  and  the midpoint  of  the 

main  part  of  the wiring  harness. 

10.2.4.1.3  The  reference  point  shall  be coincident  with  the midpoint  of  the 

main  part  of  the  harness which  runs along  the edge  of  the  earth 
plate  closest  to  the antenna  and  100 ±  10 mm  above  the earth  plate. 

10.3 

Generation  of  required  field  strength 

10.3.1 

Test  method 

10.3.1.1 

The  "Substitution Method"  shall  be used  to ensure  that  the  test 
field  conditions  are met. 

10.3.1.2 

Substitut ion method 

The  STU  having  been  removed,  sufficient  power  shall  be  fed  into  the 
field  generator  at  each  desired  test  frequency,  to produce  the 
required  field  strength  at  the  reference  point  (as defined  in 
item  10.2) on  the  test  surface.  This  level  of  power, or  any  other 
parameter  directly  related  to the power  required  to produce  the 
field,  shall  be measured  and  the  results  recorded.  These  results 
shall  be used  for model  approval  tests unless  changes occurring  in 
the  facilities or  equipment  necessitate  this  procedure  being 
repeated. 

-  ZÙ'Z  -

10.3.1.3 

The  STU,  which  may  include  an  additional  earth  plate,  shall  then  be 
introduced  into  the  test  facility  under  the  conditions  set  out  in 
item  10.2.  If a  second  earth  plate  is used,  it shall  be  within 
0.5  mm  of  the  bench  earth  plate  and  be  electrically  connected  to 
it.  The  required  power,  as  defined  in  item  10.3.1.2, shall  then  be 
applied  to  the  field  generator  at  each  of  the  frequencies  defined 
in  item  5. 

10.3.1.4 

Extraneous  equipment  must  be  a minimum  of  1 m  from  the  reference 
point  during  calibration. 

10.3.1.5 

Whatever  parameter  was  chosen  to produce  the  field  in  accordance 
with  item  10.3.1.2, the  same  parameter  shall  be  used  to  reproduce 
the  desired  field  strength  during  the  test. 

10.3.1.6 

Field  strength  measuring  device 
The  device  used  to determine  the  field  strength  during  the 
calibration  phase  of  the  substitution  method  shall  be  a  compact 
isotropic  field  measuring  probe. 

10.3.1.7 

The  phase  centre  of  the  field  strength  measuring  device  shall  be 
positioned  at  the  reference  point. 

10.3.2 

Field  strength  contour 

10.3.2.1 

During  the  calibration  phase  of  the  substitution  method  (before 
introduction  of  the  STU  into  the  test  area),  the  field  strength 
shall  not  be  less  than  50% of  the  nominal  field  strength 
1.0  ±  0.05  m  either  side  of  the  reference  point  on  a  line  running 
through  that  point  and  parallel  to  the  edge  of  the  earth  plate. 

(23 

-  1(A 

ANNEX VII 
APPENDIX 1 

STRIPLINE TEST 

1 . 
2 • 
3 • 
4 • 
5 • 
6 « 
7 -
8 -
9 -
10 
11 
12 
13 
14 
15 
16 
17 
18 
19 

shielded  component 
cable  harness 
STU 
closing  resistance 
frequency  generator 
variant 
battery 
power  supply 
filter 
peripheral 
filter 
peripheral  video circuit 
optoelectronic  converter 
optical  lines 
unshielded  peripheral 
shielded  peripheral 
optoelectronic  converter 
insulated  base 
video  camera 

14 

-3'?/-

ANNEX  VU 
APPENDIX  2 
Figure 1 

-3?2-

ANNEX  VII 
APPENDIX  2 
Figure 2 

PRO BE  CflLlBUflTtoN 

clKcoiT 

- 3 ?3 

ANNEX VII 
APPENDIX 3 

Figure 1 

TEM-CELL TEST 

1 -
2 -
3 -
4 -
5 * 
6 -
7 -
8 -
9 * 
10 
11 

outer conductor, shielding 
inner condustor  (partition) 
insulator 
input 
insulator 
port 
Junction panel 
STU power supply 
50il closing resistance 
insulator 
STU (maximum height: one third of the distance between the eel 
floor and the diaphragm). 

_—-•--?$& 

-  Ziu  -

ANNEX  VI  I 
APPEND I 

A 

Figure  1 

FREE  -  Ft EL D 

TEST 

ANNEX  VI I I 

APPENDIX 1 

MODEL 
INFORMATION  DOCUMENT  IN RESPECT OF  THE 
ELECTROMAGNETIC  COMPATIBILITY OF A TYPE OF 
TWO OR  THREE-WHEEL MOTOR  VEHICLE 

(to be attached  to the application  for  component  type  approval 
where  this  is submitted  separately  from  the application  for  vehicle 
type  approval) 

Order  No  (assigned  by  the  applicant): 

The application  for  component  type approval  in respect  of  the electromagnetic 
compatibility of  a type of  two or  three-wheel  motor  vehicle  shall  contain  the 
information set out  in Annex  II to Council  Directive No 92/61/EEC of 
30 June 1992: 

Under  A  in  items: 
0.1, 0.2, 0.4  to  0.6 
1.1  and  1.4 
3.0  to 3.6,  3.1.2 
4.1  and  4.2 
Under  B  in items: 
1.1  to  1.1.5 
Under  C  in items: 
2.1, 2.1.3, 2.1.4, 2.3  to 2.7.2, 2.8  to 2.8.2.4. 

Where  appropriate, a brief  description of  the electrical  and/or  electronic 
components  used  in the  transmission, suspension, braking,  lighting,  light-
signalling  and  steering  systems must  also be supplied  by  the applicant  for 
component  type approval. 

- SH  -

ANNEX VI I I 

APPENDIX 2 

MODEL 

Name of administration 

CERTIFICATE OF COMPONENT TYPE APPROVAL  IN RESPECT OF THE 
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY OF A TYPE OF 
TWO OR THREE-WHEEL MOTOR VEHICLE 

Report No 

by Test ing Body 

Date 

Component type approvaI No 

Extens ion No 

1. 

2. 

3. 

4. 

5. 

6. 

7. 

8. 

9. 

Make of vehicle: 

Type of vehicle (plus details of any other versions or variants) 

Manufacturer's name and address: 

Name and address of manufacturer's representative 

(if any): 

Vehicle submitted for test on: 

Component  type approval granted/refused^*) 

Place: 

Date: 

Signature: 

(*)  Delete as appropriate 

-  vil  -

ANNEX  IX 

APPENDIX 1 

MODEL 
INFORMATION  DOCUMENT  IN RESPECT  OF  THE 
ELECTROMAGNETIC  COMPATIBILITY OF  A TYPE  OF 
SEPARATE  TECHNICAL  UNIT 

(to be  attached  to  the  application  form  for  component  type 
approval) 

Order  No  (assigned  by  the  applicant) 

The  application  for  component  type  approval  in respect  of  the electromagnetic 
compatibility  of  a  type of  separate  technical  unit  shall  contain  the 
information  set  out  in Annex  II  to Council  Directive  92/61/EEC of  30 June  1992 
concerning  the  relevant  separate  technical  unit. 

ANNEX XI 

APPENDIX 2 

Name of administration 

MODEL 
CERTIFICATE OF COMPONENT TYPE APPROVAL  IN RESPECT OF THE 
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY OF A TYPE OF 
SEPARATE TECHNICAL UNIT 

Report No 

by Test ing Body 

Date 

Component  type approvaI No 

Extens ion No 

1. 

2. 

3. 

4. 

5. 

6. 

7. 

8. 

9. 

Make of separate technical unit: 

Type of separate technical unit  (plus details of any other versions 
or variants): 

Manufacturer's name and address: 

Name and address of manufacturer's representative 

(if any): 

Separate technical unit submitted for test on: 

Component  type approval granted/refused^*) 

Place: 

Date: 

Signature: 

(•) 

Delete as appropriate 

- 379 -

CHAPTER 9 

PERMISSIBLE SOUND LEVEL AND EXHAUST SYSTEM 

OF TWO- OR THREE-WHEELED MOTOR VEHICLES 

-  380 -

LIST OF  ANNEXES 

ANNEX  I: 

SOUND LEVEL  LIMITS  IN (dB(A)) AND DATES OF  ENTRY  INTO FORCE FOR 
COMPONENT TYPE APPROVAL  REGARDING  THE PERMISSIBLE SOUND LEVEL OF 
A TYPE OF  TWO- OR  THREE-WHEELED MOTOR  VEHICLE 

ANNEX  II:  REQUIREMENTS FOR TWO-WHEELED MOPEDS 

1. Definitions 

2. Component  type-approval  regarding  the sound  level  and  original 

exhaust  system,  as a technical  unit, of  a type of  two-wheeled 
moped 

3. Component  type-approval  of  a non-original  exhaust  system or 

components  thereof, as technical  units,  for  two-wheeled  mopeds 

Appendix  1 A -  Information sheet  regarding  the permissible  sound  level  and 

original  exhaust  system of  a type of  two-wheeled  moped 

B - Certificate of  component  type-approval  regarding  the 

permissible  sound  level  and original  exhaust  system(s) of a 
type of  two-wheeled  moped 

Appendix  2 A -  Information sheet  for a non-original  exhaust  system  or 

component(s)  thereof, as  technical  unit(s),  for  two-wheeled 
mopeds 

B - Certificate of  component  type-approval  for  a non-original 

exhaust  system  for  two-wheeled  mopeds 

ANNEX  III:  REQUIREMENTS  FOR  MOTORCYCLES 

1.  Definitions 

2. Component  type-approval  regarding  the sound  level  and original 
exhaust  system,  as technical  unit, of  a  type of  motorcycle 

3. Component  type-approval  of  a non-original  exhaust  system or 
components  thereof, as  technical  units, for  motorcycles 

Appendix  1 A -  Information sheet  regarding  the permissible  sound  level  and 

original  exhaust  system of  a type of  motorcycle 
B - Certificate of  component  type-approval  regarding  the 

permissible  sound  level  and original  exhaust  system(s) of a 
type of  motorcycle 

Appendix  2 A -  information sheet  for a non-original  exhaust  system  or 

component(s)  thereof, as technical  unit(s),  for  motorcycles 

B - Certificate of  component  type-approval  for  a non-original 

exhaust  system  for  motorcycles 

ANNEX  IV: 

REQUIREMENTS  FOR THREE-WHEELED MOPEDS AND TRICYCLES 

1. Definitions 

2. Component  type-approval  regarding  the sound  level  and original 

exhaust  system,  as a technical  unit, of  a  type of 
three-wheeled  moped or  tricycle 

-  381  -

3. Component  type-approval  of  a non-original  exhaust  system or 
components  thereof, as  technical  units, for  three-wheeled 
mopeds  and  tricycles 

Appendix  1 A -  Information sheet  regarding  the permissible sound  level  and 
original  exhaust  system  of  a type of  three-wheeled moped or 
tricycle 

B - Certificate of  component  type-approval  regarding  the 

permissible  sound  level  and original  exhaust  system(s) of a 
type of  three-wheeled moped  or  tricycle 

Appendix  2 A -  Information  sheet  for  a non-original  exhaust  system  or 

component(s)  thereof, as  technical  unit(s),  for  three-wheeled 
mopeds or  tricycles 

B - Certificate of  component  type-approval  for  a non-original 
exhaust  system  for  three-wheeled  mopeds or  tricycles 

ANNEX  V: 

PRODUCTION  CONFORMITY  REQUIREMENTS 

ANNEX  VI:  MARKING  REQUIREMENTS 

- 382 -

ANNEX I 

SOUND LEVEL LIMITS IN dB(A) AND DATES OF ENTRY  INTO FORCE 
FOR COMPONENT TYPE-APPROVAL REGARDING THE PERMISSIBLE SOUND LEVEL 
OF A TYPE OF TWO- OR THREE-WHEELED MOTOR VEHICLE 

Vehicles 

Sound  level  limits 
with effect from 

1.1.1997 

1. Two wheeI 
mopeds 

< 25 km/h 
> 25 km/h 

- three wheel 

2. Motocycles 
<. 80 cm3 
> 80 < 175 cm3 
> 175 cm3 

3. Tricycles 

66 
71 

76 

75 
77 
80 

80 

-  383 -

ANNEX  II 

REQUIREMENTS  FOR TWO-WHEELED  MOPEDS 

1. 

DEFINITIONS 

For  the purposes of  this chapter: 

1.1. 

1.1.1. 

"type of  two-wheeled  moped  as regards  its sound  level  and 
exhaust  system" means mopeds which  do not  differ  as  regards 
the  following essential  characteristics: 

type of engine  (two- or  four-stroke,  reciprocating  piston 
engine or  rotary-piston engine, number  and  capacity  of 
cylinders, number  and  type of  carburettors  or  injection 
systems, arrangement  of  valves, maximum  power  and 
corresponding  speed); 

the  cubic  capacity  of  rotary-piston engines  should  be 
considered  as double  the volume of  the  chamber; 

1.1.2. 

transmission  system,  in particular  the number  and  rat ios of 
the gears; 

1.1.3. 

number,  type and  arrangement  of  exhaust  systems. 

1.2. 

1.2.1 

1.2.2 

1.3 

1.3.1 

1.3.2 

"exhaust  system" or  "silencer" means  a complete  set  of 
components  necessary  to  limit  the noise  caused  by  a moped 
engine  and  its exhaust. 

"original  exhaust  system or  silencer" means  a system  of  the 
type  fitted  to the vehicle  at  the  time of  type-approval  or 
extension  of  type-approval.  It may  be  the one  first  fitted or 
a  replacement. 

"non-original  exhaust  system or  silencer" means  a system  of a 
type other  than  that  fitted  to the vehicle  at  the  time of 
type-approval  or extension  of  type-approval.  It may  be used 
only  as a replacement  exhaust  system  or  silencer. 

"exhaust  systems of differing  types" means  systems which  are 
fundamentally  different  in one of  the  following ways: 

systems  comprising  components  bearing  different  factory  or 
trade marks; 

systems comprising  any  component  made of materials of 
different  characteristics or  comprising  components  which  are 
of  a different  shape or size-, 

1.3.3. 

systems  in which  the operating  principles of  at  least  one 
component  are  different; 

1.3.4. 

systems  comprising  components  in different  combinations. 

- 384 -

1.4. 

"component of an exhaust system" means one of the individual 
components which together form the exhaust system (such as 
exhaust pipework, the silencer proper) and the  intake system 
(air fi Iter) if any. 

If the engine has to be equipped with an  intake system (air 
filter and/or  intake noise absorber) in order  to comply with 
the maximum permissible sound  levels, the filter and/or the 
absorber must be treated as components having the same 
importance as the exhaust system. 

2. 

COMPONENT TYPE-APPROVAL REGARDING THE SOUND LEVEL AND ORIGINAL 
EXHAUST SYSTEM, AS A TECHNICAL UNIT, OF A TYPE OF TWO-WHEELED 
MOPED 

2.1. 

NOISE OF THE MOPED  IN MOTION (measuring conditions and method 

for testing of the vehicle during component type-approval). 

2.1.1. 

Limits:  cf. Annex I. 

2.1.2. 

Measuring  instruments 

2.1.2.1. 

Acoustic measurements 
The apparatus used for measuring the sound  level must be a 
precision sound-level meter of the type described in 
International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) publication 
179 'Precision sound-level meters', second edition. 
Measurements must be carried out using the 'fast' response and 
the 'A' weighting also described  in that publication. 

At the beginning and end of each series of measurements the 
sound-level meter must be calibrated  in accordance with the 
manufacturer's  instructions, using an appropriate sound source 
(e.g. pistonphone). 

2.1.2.2 

Speed measurements 

Engine speed and moped speed on the test track must be 
determined to within ± 3%. 

2.1.3. 

Conditions of measurement 

2.1.3.1. 

Condition of the motorcycle 

The combined weight of the rider and the test equipment used 
on the moped must be no more than 80 kg and no less than 
70 kg.  If necessary, weights must be added to the moped to 
bring the combined weight up to at  least 70 kg. 

During the measurements the motorcycle must be  in running 
order  (including coolant, oils, fuel, tools, spare wheel and 
rider). 

(24) 

385 -

Before  the measurements  are made  the motorcycle  must  be 
brought  to  the normal  operating  temperature.  If the 
motorcycle  is fitted  with  fans with  an  automatic  actuating 
mechanism,  this system must  not  be  interfered  with  during  the 
sound  measurements.  For motorcycles  having more  than  one 
driven wheel, only  the drive provided  for  normal  road 
operation  may  be used.  Where  a motorcycle  is fitted  with a 
sidecar,  this must  be  removed  for  the purposes  of  the  test. 

2.1.3.2. 

Test  site 

The  test  site must  consist  of  a central  acceleration  section 
surrounded  by a substantially  flat  test  area.  The 
acceleration  section must  be  flat;  its surface must  be dry  and 
such  that  surface  noise  remains  low. 

On  the  test  site  the variations  in the  free  sound  field 
between  the sound  source  at  the centre of  the  acceleration 
section  and  the microphone  must  not  exceed  i  1 dB.  This 
condition  will  be deemed  to be met  if there  are  no  large 
objects which  reflect  sound,  such  as  fences, rocks, bridges or 
buildings, within  50 m of  the centre  of  the  acceleration 
section.  The  surface of  the site must  be made of  hard 
material  such  as concrete, asphalt  or  any other  acoustically 
equivalent  material  within  a minimum  radius of  10 m around  the 
centre  of  the acceleration section  and  be  free of  powdery 
snow,  long grass,  loose soil  or  cinders. 

The microphone  must  not  be obstructed  in any way  which  could 
affect  the  sound  field, and  no person may  stand  between  the 
microphone  and  the sound  source.  The observer  carrying  out 
the measurements  must  so position  himself  as not  to affect  the 
readings of  the measuring  instrument. 

2.1.3.3. 

Mi see 11aneous 

Measurements  may  not  be  taken  in unfavourable  weather 
conditions and  in particular  in gusting winds. 

The wind  speed must  be  <, 3 m/s.  The measurements  will  be 
acceptable  if there are gusts of  <. 5 m/s. 

For  measurements,  the A-weighted  sound  level  of  sound  sources 
other  than  those of  the moped  to be  tested  or  of  wind  effects 
must  be  at  least  10 dB(A) below  the  sound  level  produced  by 
the  moped. 

If the difference  between  the ambient  noise  and  the measured 
noise  is between  10 and  16 dB(A),  in order  to calculate  the 
test  results  the appropriate  correction  must  be  subtracted 
from  the  readings on  the sound-1 eve I meter, as  in the 
fol lowing  graph: 

-  386 -

cfl(A) 

0/ 

0,3 

0,? 

OJ 

dB(A) 

"i«* 

16 

Difference  between  ambient 

noise and  noise  to be measured 

A suitable windshield  may  be  fitted  to the microphone  provided 
that  account  is taken of  its effect  on  the sensitivity  and 
directional  characteristics of  the microphone. 

2.1.4. 

Method  of  Measurement 

2.1.4.1 

Nature and  number  of  measurements 

The maximum  sound  level  expressed  in A-weighted  decibels 
(dB(A)) must  be measured  as the moped  travels between  lines 
AA'  and BB'  (figure 1 ).  The measurement  will  be  invalid  if an 
abnormal  discrepancy  between  the peak  value  and  the general 
sound  level  is recorded. 

At  least  two measurements must  be taken on each  side of  the 
moped. 

2.1.4.2 

Positioning of  the microphone 

The microphone must  be  located 7.5 m  from  the  reference  line 
CC  (figure  1) of  the  track  and  1.2 m above ground  level. 

-  387 -

2.1.4.3. 

Conditions of  operation 

The moped  must  approach  line AA'  at  an  initial  steady  speed* as 
specified  in 2.1.4.3.1.  When  the  front  of  the moped  reaches 
line AA'  the  throttle must  be  fully opened  as quickly  as 
practically  possible  and  kept  in that  position  until  the  rear 
of  the moped  reaches  line BB';  the  throttle must  then  be 
returned  as quickly  as possible  to  the  idle  position. 

For  all  measurements  the moped  must  be  ridden  in a  straight 
line over  the acceleration  section  keeping  the  longitudinal 
median  plane of  the moped  as close  as possible  to  line  C C. 

2.1.4.3.1. 

Approach  speed 

The  moped  must  approach  line AA'  at  a steady  speed  of  30 km/h 
or  at  its top  speed  if this  is  less  than  30 km/h. 

2.1.4.3.2. 

Selection  of  gear  ratio 

If the moped  is fitted  with  a manual-shift  gearbox  the 
highest  gear  which  allows  it  to cross  line AA'  at  at  least 
half  the  full-power  engine  speed  must  be  selected. 

If  the moped  has an automatic  transmission,  it must  be 
ridden  at  the speeds  indicated  in 2.1.4.3.1. 

2.1.5. 

Results  (test  report) 

2.1.5.1. 

The  test  report  drawn up  for  the purpose  of  issuing  the 
document  referred  to  in Appendix  1B must  indicate  any 
circumstances  and  influences  affecting  the  results of  the 
measurements. 

2.1.5.2. 

Readings  taken  from  the  sound-level  meter  must  be  corrected  in 
accordance  with  2.1.3.3.  The  corrected  values must  be  rounded 
off  to  the nearest  decibel. 

2.1.5.3. 

2.1.5.4. 

Only  those measurements whose  variation  in two  consecutive 
tests on  the same  side of  the moped  is  less  than or  equal  to 
2  dB(A) may  be used  for  the purpose  of  issuing  the  document 
referred  to  in Appendix  1B. 

To  take  account  of  inaccuracies  in the measurements,  the 
result  of  each  measurement  must  be  arrived  at  by  deducting 
1  dB(A)  from  the value obtained  in accordance  with  2.1.5.2. 

If  the  average of  the  four  results of  the measurements  does 
not  exceed  the maximum  permissible  level  for  the  category  to 
which  the moped  being  tested  belongs,  the  limit  laid  down  in 
2.1.1. will  be deemed  as being  complied  with. 

This  average  value will  constitute  the  result  of  the  test. 

-  388 -

Figure 1 

TEST  FOR  VEHICLE  IN MOTION 

Figure 2 
TEST  FOR  STATIONARY  VEHICLE 

Height  of  centre of  exhaust  outlet 

-  389 

2.2. 

NOISE  FROM  STATIONARY  MOPED  (measuring  conditions  and  method 
for  testing of  the vehicle  in use) 

2.2.1. 

Sound-pressure  level  in the  immediate  vicinity  of  the moped 

In order  to facilitate  subsequent  noise  tests on mopeds  in 
use,  the sound-pressure  level  must  also be measured  in the 
immediate  vicinity  of  the exhaust-system  outlet  (silencer)  in 
accordance  with  the  following  requirements,  the  result  of  the 
measurement  being  entered  in the  test  report  drawn  up  for  the 
purpose of  issuing  the document  referred  to  in Appendix  1B. 

2.2.2. 

Measuring  instruments 

A precision  sound-1 eve I meter  as defined  in 2.1.2.1  must  be 
used. 

2.2.3. 

Conditions of  measurement 

2.2.3.1. 

Condition of  the moped 

Before  the measurements  are made  the moped  engine must  be 
brought  to the normal  operating  temperature.  If the moped  is 
fitted  with  fans with  an automatic  actuating  mechanism,  this 
system  must  not  be  interfered  with  during  the  sound 
measurements. 

During  the measurements  the gearbox  must  be  in neutral  gear. 
If  it  is  impossible  to disconnect  the  transmission,  the 
driving  wheel  of  the moped  must  be allowed  to rotate  freely, 
for  example  by placing  the vehicle on  its centre  stand. 

2.2.3.2. 

Test  site  (Figure  2) 

Any  area  in which  there are no significant  acoustic 
disturbances may  be used  as a  test  site.  Flat  surfaces which 
are  covered  with  concrete, asphalt  or  some other  hard  material 
and  are  highly  reflective  are  suitable;  surfaces  consisting  of 
earth  which  has been  tamped  down must  not  be used.  The  test 
site must  be  in the  form of  a rectangle whose  sides  are at 
least  3 m  from  the outer  edge of  the moped  (handlebars 
excluded).  There must  be no significant  obstacles, e.g.  no 
persons other  than  the  rider  and  the observer  may  stand  within 
this  rectangle.  The moped must  be positioned  within  the said 
rectangle  so  that  the microphone  used  for measurement  is at 
least  1 m  from  any  kerb. 

2.2.3.3. 

Mi see 11aneous 

Readings of  the measuring  instrument  caused  by  ambient  noise 
and wind  effects must  be at  least  10 dB(A)  lower  than  the 
sound  levels  to be measured.  A suitable windshield  may  be 
fitted  to the microphone  provided  that  account  is taken of  its 
effect  on  the sensitivity of  the microphone. 

-  390 -

2.2.4. 

Method  of  measurement 

2.2.4.1. 

Nature  and  number  of  measurements 

The maximum  sound  level  expressed  in A-weighted  decibels 
(dB(A)) must  be measured  during  the period  of operation  laid 
down  in 2.2.4.3. 

At  least  three measurements must  be  taken at each  measuring 
point. 

2.2.4.2. 

Positioning of  the microphone  (Figure  2) 

The microphone must  be positioned  level  with  the exhaust 
outlet  or  0.2 m above  the surface of  the  track, whichever  is 
the  highest.  The microphone  diaphragm  must  face  towards  the 
exhaust  outlet  at a distance of  0.5 m  from  it.  The axis of 
maximum  sensitivity of  the microphone must  be parallel  to the 
surface of  the  track  at  an angle of  45 ±  10*  to  the  vertical 
plane of  the direction of  the exhaust  emissions. 

In relation  to this vertical  plane, the microphone must  be 
located on  the side which  gives  the maximum  possible  distance 
between  the microphone and  the outline of  the moped 
(handlebars  excluded). 

If the exhaust  system  has more  than one outlet  at  centres  less 
than  0.3 m apart, the microphone must  be  faced  towards  the 
outlet  which  is nearest  the moped  (handlebars excluded) or 
towards  the outlet  which  is highest  above  the surface of  the 
track.  If the centres of  the outlets are more  than 0.3 m 
apart, separate measurements must  be  taken  for  each of  them, 
the highest  figure  recorded  being  taken  as  the  test  value. 

2.2.4.3. 

Operating  conditions 

The engine  speed must  be held  steady  at one of  the  following 
values: 

-  1/2  S  if S  is more  than 5 000 rev/min, 

-  3/4  S  if S  is not more  than 5 000  rev/min, 

where  S  is the speed  referred  to  in 3.2.1.7 of  Appendix  1A. 

When  a constant  engine speed  is reached,  the  throttle must  be 
returned  swiftly  to the  idle position.  The sound  level  must 
be measured  during an operating  cycle consisting of  a brief 
period of  constant  engine  speed  and  throughout  the 
deceleration period, the maximum  sound-1 eve I meter  reading 
being  taken  as the test  value. 

2.2.5. 

Results  (test  report) 

2.2.5.1. 

The  test  report  drawn up  for  the purpose of  issuing  the 
document  referred  to  in Appendix  1B must  indicate  all  relevant 
data  and  particularly  those used  in measuring  the noise of  the 
stat ionary  moped. 

- 391 -

2.2.5.2. 

Values, rounded off to the nearest decibel, must be read off 
the measuring instrument. 

Only those measurements which vary by no more than 2 dB(A) in 
three consecutive tests will be used. 

2.2.5.3. 

The average of the three measurements will constitute the test 
result. 

2.3. 

2.3.1 

2.3.1.1. 

2.3.2. 

2.3.3. 

2.3.3.1. 

2.3.3.2. 

ORIGINAL EXHAUST SYSTEM (SILENCER) 

Requirements for silencers containing absorbent fibrous 
materials 

Absorbent fibrous material must be asbestos-free and may be 
used  in the construction of silencers only  if it is securely 
held  in place throughout the service  life of the silencer and 
it meets the requirements of any one of sections 2.3.2, 2.3.3 
or 2.3.4. 

After removal of the fibrous material, the sound  level must 
comply with the requirements of 2.1.1. 

The absorbent fibrous material may not be placed  in those 
parts of the silencer through which the exhaust gases pass and 
must comply with the following requirements. 

The material must be heated at a temperature of 650 ± 5 *C for 
four hours  in a furnace without reduction  in average length, 
diameter or bulk density of the fibre. 

After heating at 650 ± 5 *C for one hour  in a furnace, at 
least 98% of the material must be retained  in a sieve of 
nominal mesh size 250 /urn complying with  ISO standard 3310/1 
when tested  in accordance with  ISO standard 2599. 

2.3.3.3. 

The  loss in weight of the material must not exceed 10.5% after 
soaking for 24 hours at 90 ± 5 *C in a synthetic condensate of 
the following composition: 

1 N hydrobromic acid  (HBr): 10 ml; 
1 N sulphuric acid  (H2S04): 10 ml; 
Distilled water to make up to 1 000 ml. 

Note:  The material must be washed  in distilled water and 

dried for one hour at 105 "C before weighing. 

2.3.4. 

Before the system  is tested  in accordance with section 2.1 of 
this Annex, it must be put  into normal working order by one of 
the following methods: 

2.3.4.1 

Conditioning by continuous road operation 

2.3.4.1.1. 

The minimum distance to be travelled during conditioning must 
be 2 000 km. 

-  392 -

2.3.4.1.2. 

50% ±  10% of  this conditioning cycle must  consist  of  town 
driving  and  the  remainder  of  long-distance  runs;  the 
continuous  road  cycle may  be  replaced  by  a corresponding 
test-track  programme. 

2.3.4.1.3. 

The  two speed  regimes must  be alternated  at  least  six  times. 

2.3.4.1.4. 

The  complete  test  programme must  include at  least  10 breaks 
lasting at  least  three hours  in order  to reproduce  the effects 
of  cooling  and  condensation. 

2.3.4.2. 

Conditioning  by pulsation 

2.3.4.2.1. 

The exhaust  system or  components  thereof must  be  fitted  to the 
moped or  to the engine. 

In the  former  case, the moped must  be mounted  on  a roller 
dynamometer.  In the second  case, the engine must  be mounted 
on  a  test  bench. 

The  test  apparatus, as shown  in detail  in Figure  3,  is fitted 
at  the outlet  of  the exhaust  system.  Any other  apparatus 
giving  equivalent  results  is acceptable. 

2.3.4.2.2. 

The  test  equipment  must  be adjusted  so  that  the  flow of 
exhaust  gases  is alternately  interrupted  and  restored  2 500 
times by a rapid-action valve. 

2.3.4.2.3. 

The  valve must  open when  the exhaust  gas back-pressure, 
measured  at  least  100 mm  downstream of  the  intake  flange, 
reaches a value of between 0.35  and 0.40  bar.  Should  such a 
figure be unattainable  because of  the engine  characteristics, 
the valve must  open when  the gas back-pressure  reaches a  level 
equivalent  to 90% of  the maximum  that  can  be measured  before 
the engine  stops.  It must  close when  this pressure  differs by 
no more  than  10% from  its stabilized  value with  the  valve 
open. 

2.3.4.2.4. 

The  time-1 apse  relay must  be set  for  the duration of  the 
exhaust  gases calculated  on  the basis of  the  requirements of 
2.3.4.2.3. 

2.3.4.2.5. 

Engine speed must  be 75% of  the speed  (S) at which  the engine 
develops maximum  power. 

2.3.4.2.6. 

The power  indicated  by  the dynamometer  must  be 50% of  the 
full-throttle power measured  at 75% of  engine  speed (S). 

2.3.4.2.7. 

Any  drainage  holes must  be closed off  during  the  test. 

2.3.4.2.8. 

The entire  test must  be completed  within  48 hours.  If 
necessary,  a cooling  period must  be allowed  after  each  hour. 

- 393 -

2.3.4.3. 

Conditioning on a test bench 

2.3.4.3.1. 

The exhaust system must be fitted to an engine representative 
of the type fitted to the moped for which the system is 
designed, and mounted on a test bench. 

2.3.4.3.2. 

Conditioning consists of three test bench cycles. 

2.3.4.3.3. 

Each test-bench cycle must be followed by a break of at least 
6 hours  in order to reproduce the effects of cooling and 
condensation. 

2.3.4.3.4. 

Each test-bench cycle consists of six phases.  The engine 
conditions and duration are as follows for each phase: 

Phase 

Conditions 

Duration of phase 
(minutes) 

1 
2 
3 
4 
5 
6 

Idling 
25% load at  75% S 
50% load at  75% S 
100% load at  75% S 
50% load at 100% S 
25% load at 100% S 

6 
40 
40 
30 
12 
22 

Total time: 

2 hrs 30 m ins 

2.3.4.3.5. 

During this conditioning procedure, at the request of the 
manufacturer, the engine and the silencer may be cooled in 
order that the temperature recorded at a point not more than 
100 mm from the exhaust gas outlet does not exceed that 
measured when the moped  is running at 75% S in top gear.  The 
engine and/or moped speeds must be determined with an accuracy 
of ± 3 %. 

-  394 -

Figure 3 

Test  apparatus  for conditioning  by  pulsation 

1.  Inlet  flange or  sleeve  for  connection  to the rear of  the  test  exhaust 

system. 

2.  Hand-operated  regulating  valve. 

3.  Compensating  reservoir  with  a maximum  capacity  of  40  I and  a  filling 

time of  not  less than  1 second. 

4.  Pressure  switch with  an operating  range of 0.05  to 2.5 bar. 

5.  Time delay  switch. 

6.  Pulse  counter. 

7.  Quick-acting  valve, such  as exhaust  brake  valve 60 mm  in diameter, 

operated  by a pneumatic  cylinder with  an output  of  120 N at  4 bar.  The 
response  time,  for opening  and closing, must  not  exceed  0.5  seconds. 

8.  Exhaust  gas  evaluation. 

9.  Flexible hose. 

10. Pressure gauge. 

-  395 -

2.3.5 

Diagram  and  markings 

2.3.5.1 

2.3.5.2 

2.3.5.3 

A diagram  of  the exhaust  system must  be annexed  to the 
document  referred  to  in Appendix  1A. 

All  original  silencers must  be  legibly  and  indelibly  marked 
with  the make and  type references  . 

Any  packing of original  replacement  silencer  systems must  be 
marked  legibly with  the words  "original  part" and  the make and 
type  references. 

2.3.6 

Intake  silencer 

If the engine  intake has  to be fitted with  an air  filter 
and/or  intake silencer  in order  to comply  with  the  permissible 
sound  level, the  filter  and/or  silencer  must  be  regarded  as 
part  of  the silencer  and  the requirements of  section  2.3 will 
also apply  to  them. 

3. 

COMPONENT TYPE-APPROVAL  OF A NON-OR IGINAL EXHAUST  SYSTEM OR 
COMPONENTS THEREOF, AS A TECHNICAL  UNIT, FOR  TWO-WHEELED 
MOPEDS 

3.0. 

SCOPE 

This point  applies to the component  type-approval, as 
technical  units, of exhaust  systems or  components  thereof 
intended  to be  fitted  to one or more particular  types of moped 
as non-original  replacement  parts. 

3.1. 

DEFINITION 

3.1.1. 

"Non-original  replacement  exhaust  system  or  components 
thereof" means any exhaust  system  component  as defined  in 
section  1.2 of  this Annex  intended  to be  fitted  to a moped  to 
replace  that of  the type  fitted  to the moped when  the document 
provided  for  in Appendix  1B was  issued. 

3.2. 

APPLICATION FOR COMPONENT  TYPE-APPROVAL 

3.2.1. 

3.2.2. 

Applications  for  component  type-approval  for  replacement 
exhaust  systems or  components  thereof  as technical  units must 
be submitted  by  the manufacturer  of  the system  or  by  his 
authorized  representative. 

For  each  type of  replacement  exhaust  system or  components 
thereof  for which  approval  is requested,  the application  for 
component  type-approval  must  be accompanied  by  the  following 
documents  in triplicate, and by  the following particulars: 

3.2.2.1. 

-  description,  in respect  of  the characteristics referred  to 
in section  1.1  of  this Annex, of  the  type(s) of moped  for 
which  the system(s) or  component(s)  is/are  intended; 

the numbers  and/or  symbols  specific  to the  type of  engine and 
moped  must  be given. 

-  396  -

3.2.2.2. 

-  description  of  the  replacement  exhaust  system  stating  the 

relative  position of  each  of  its components,  together  with 
the  fitting  instructions; 

3.2.2.3. 

-  drawings of  each  component  to facilitate  location  and 

identification, and  statement  of materials  used.  These 
drawings must  also  indicate  the  intended  location of  the 
mandatory  component  type-approval  number. 

3.2.3. 

The  applicant  must  submit,  at  the  request  of  the  technical 
authority: 

3.2.3.1. 

-  two  samples of  the system  for  which  component  type-approval 

is  requested, 

3.2.3.2. 

-  an exhaust  system  conforming  to  that  originally  fitted  to 

the moped  when  the document  provided  for  in Appendix  1B was 
issued, 

3.2.3.3. 

-  a moped  representative of  the  type  to which  the  replacement 

exhaust  system  is to be  fitted,  supplied  in such  a 
condition  that, when  fitted  with  a silencer  of  the  same 
type  as was originally  fitted,  it meets  the  requirements of 
either  of  the  following  two sections: 

3.2.3.3.1. 

if the moped  referred  to  in 3.2.3.3.  is of  a  type which  has 
been  granted  type-approval  pursuant  to  the provisions of  this 
chapter : 

-  during  the  test  in motion,  it does  not  exceed  by more  than 
1 dB(A)  the  limit  value  laid down  in section  2.1.1. of  this 
Annex, 

-  during  the stationary  test,  it does  not  exceed  by more  than 
3  dB(A)  the value  indicated  on  the manufacturer's  rating 
plate-, 

3.2.3.3.2. 

if the moped  referred  to  in 3.2.3.3.  is not  of  a  type  which 
has been granted  type-approval  in accordance  with  the 
requirements of  this chapter,  it does not  exceed  by more  than 
1 dB(A)  the  limit  value  applicable  to  that  type of  moped  when 
it was  first  put  into service; 

3.2.3.4. 

-  a separate  engine  identical  to  that  fitted  to  the moped 
referred  to above, where  the competent  authorities  deem 
necessary. 

3.3. 

3.3.1. 

3.4. 

3.4.1. 

MARKINGS  AND  INSCRIPTIONS 

Non-original  exhaust  systems or  components  thereof  must  be 
marked  in accordance with  the  requirements  of  Annex  VI. 

COMPONENT  TYPE-APPROVAL 

Upon  completion  of  the  tests  laid  down  in this  chapter,  the 
competent  authority  will  issue  a certificate  based  on  the 
model  set  out  in Appendix  2B.  The  component  type-approval 

-  397 -

number  must  be  preceded  by  a rectangle  surrounding  the  letter 
"e"  followed  by  the distinguishing  number  or  letters of  the 
Member  State  which  issued  or  refused  the  component  type-
approval . 

3.5. 

SPECIFICATIONS 

3.5.1. 

General  specifications 

The  design,  construction  and  mounting  of  the  silencer  must  be 
such  that: 

3.5.1.1. 

-  the moped  complies with  the  requirements  of  the  chapter 

under  normal  conditions of  use, and  in particular 
regardless  of  any  vibrations  to which  it may  be  subjected; 

3.5.1.2. 

-  it displays  reasonable  resistance  to  the  corrosion 

phenomena  to which  it  is exposed,  with  due  regard  to  the 
normal  conditions of  use of  the  moped, 

3.5.1.3. 

-  the  ground  clearance  available under  the  silencer 

originally  fitted,  and  the angle  at  which  the moped  can 
lean over,  are  not  reduced, 

3.5.1.4. 

-  the  surface  does  not  reach  unduly  high  temperatures, 

3.5.1.5. 

-  its outline  has no projections  or  sharp  edges, 

3.5.1.6. 

-  springs  have  adequate  clearance, 

3.5.1.7. 

-  adequate  safety  clearance  is provided  for  pipes, 

3.5.1.8. 

-  it  is  impact-resistant  in a way  that  is compatible  with 

clearly-defined  maintenance  and  installation  requirements. 

3.5.2. 

Specifications  for  sound  levels 

3.5.2.1. 

The  acoustic efficiency  of  the  replacement  exhaust  systems or 
components  thereof  must  be  tested  using  the methods  described 
in sections  2.1.2, 2.1.3,  2.1.4  and  2.1.5  of  this  Annex. 

With  a  replacement  exhaust  system  or  component  thereof  fitted 
to  the moped  referred  to  in section  3.2.3.3 of  this Annex,  the 
sound-level  values obtained  must  meet  the  following 
condit ions: 

3.5.2.1.1. 

they  must  not  exceed  the values measured,  in accordance  with 
the  provisions  of  3.2.3.3,  using  the  same moped  fitted  with 
the original  equipment  silencer  both  during  the  test  in motion 
and  during  the stationary  test. 

3.5.3. 

Testing  of  moped  performance 

3.5.3.1. 

The  replacement  silencer  must  be  such  as  to ensure  that  the 
moped's  performance  is comparably  to  that  achieved  with  the 
original  silencer  or  component  thereof. 

-  398  -

3.5.3.2. 

3.5.3.3. 

The  replacement  silencer  must  be  compared  with  an 
originally-fitted  silencer,  also  in new  condition,  fitted  in 
turn  to  the moped  referred  to  in 3.2.3.3. 

This  test  is carried out  by measuring  the engine  power  curve. 
The  net  maximum  power  and  the  top  speed  measured  with  the 
replacement  silencer  must  not  exceed  the net  maximum  power  and 
top  speed  measured  under  the same  conditions with  the original 
equipment  exhaust  system  by more  than  5%. 

3.5.4. 

Additional  provisions  relating  to silencers  as  separate 
technical  units  containing  fibrous material 

Fibrous material  may  not  be used  in the construction  of  such 
silencers unless  the  requirements  set  out  in section  2.3.1  of 
this Annex  are  met. 

- 399 -

APPENDIX 1A 

INFORMATION SHEET 

REGARDING THE PERMISSIBLE SOUND LEVEL AND ORIGINAL EXHAUST SYSTEM 
OF A TYPE OF TWO-WHEELED MOPED 

(to be attached to the application for component type-approval where this is 
submitted separately from the application for vehicle type-approval) 

(mode I) 

Order No (allocated by applicant) 

The application for component  type-approval regarding the permissible sound 
level and original exhaust system of a type of two-wheeled moped must  include 
the details listed  in Annex  II to Council Directive 92/61/EEC of 30 June 
1992, section A, points: 

0.1 
0.2 
0.5 
0.6 
2.1 
3 
3.0 
3.1 
3.1.1 
3.2.1.7 
3.2.8.3.3 
3.2.8.3.3.1 
3.2.8.3.3.2 
3.2.9 
3.2.9.1 
4 
4.1 
4.2 
4.3 
4.4 
4.4.1 
4.4.2 
4.5 
4.6 
5.2 

- 400 -

APPENDIX IB 

Name of  administration 

CERTIFICATE OF COMPONENT TYPE-APPROVAL 

REGARDING THE PERMISSIBLE  SOUND LEVEL AND ORIGINAL  EXHAUST  SYSTEM(S) 
OF A TYPE OF TWO-WHEELED MOPED 

MODEL 

Report  No 

of  the technical  authority 

date: 

1. 

Trade name or  trademark of vehicle: 

2. 

3. 

4. 

5. 

6. 

7. 

8. 

9. 

Type of  vehicle: 

Variant(s) (if any): 

Version(s) (if any): 

Name and  address of manufacturer: 

Name and  address of  the manufacturer's authorized  representative (if 
any): 

Original  exhaust  system  type(s): 

Intake system  type(s) (where essential  to observe sound  level  limit) 

Noise  level  of  the vehicle when stationary: 

dB(A) at: 

rpm. 

10. 

Vehicle submitted  for  testing on: 

11. 

Component  type-approval  granted/refused1 

12. 

Place: 

13. 

Date: 

14. 

Signature: 

1 

Delete where not  applicable. 

(25 

- 401 -

APPENDIX 2A 

INFORMATION DOCUMENT 

FOR A NON-ORIGINAL EXHAUST SYSTEM OR COMPONENT(S) THEREOF, 
AS TECHNICAL UNIT(S), FOR TWO-WHEELED MOPEDS 

MODEL 

Order No (allocated by applicant) 

The application for component type-approval  for a non-original exhaust system 
for two-wheeled mopeds must  include the following details: 

1. 

Make: 

2. 

Type : 

3. 

Name and address of manufacturer: 

4. 

Name and address of the manufacturer's authorized representative (if 
any): 

5. 

Component  list of the technical unit (attach drawings): 

6. 

Make(s) and type(s) of moped for which the silencer  is designed:1) 

7. 

Any restrictions on use and fitting instructions: 

In addition, the application must  include the details listed  in Annex  II to 
Council Directive No 92/61/EEC of 30 June 1992, section A, points: 

0.1 
0.2 
0.5 
0.6 
2.1 
3 
3.0 
3.1 
3.1.1 
3.2.1.7 
4 
4.1 
4.2 
4.3 
4.4 
4.4.1 
4.4.2 
4.5 
4.6 
5.2 

1)  Delete where not applicable. 

- 402 -

APPENDIX 2B 

Name of administration 

CERTIFICATE OF COMPONENT TYPE-APPROVAL 

FOR A NON-ORIGINAL EXHAUST SYSTEM FOR TWO-WHEELED MOPEDS 

MODEL 

Report No 

of the technical authority 

date: 

1. 

Make of exhaust: 

2. 

Type of exhaust: 

3. 

Name and address of manufacturer: 

4. 

5. 

Name and address of the manufacturer's authorized representative (if 
any): 

Make(s) and type(s) and any variant(s) or version(s) of the vehicie(s) 
for which the exhaust system  is designed: 

6. 

System submitted for testing on: 

7. 

Component type-approval granted/refused1 

8. 

Place: 

9. 

Date: 

10. 

Signature: 

1  Delete where not applicable. 

- 403 -

ANNEX III 

REQUIREMENTS FOR MOTORCYCLES 

1. 

DEFINITIONS 

For the purposes of this chapter: 

1.1. 

1.1.1. 

"type of motorcycle as regards its sound  level and exhaust 
system" means motorcycles which do not differ as regards the 
following essential characteristics: 

type of engine (two- or four-stroke, reciprocating piston 
engine or rotary-piston engine, number and capacity of 
cylinders, number and type of carburettors or injection 
systems, arrangement of valves, maximum power and 
corresponding speed); 

the cubic capacity of rotary-piston engines should be 
considered as double the volume of the chamber; 

1.1.2. 

transmission system, in particular  the number and ratios of 
the gears; 

1.1.3. 

number, type and arrangement of exhaust systems. 

1.2. 

1.2.1. 

1.2.2 

1.3. 

1.3.1 

1.3.2 

"exhaust system" or "silencer" means a complete set of 
components necessary to limit the noise caused by a motorcycle 
engine and  its exhaust. 

"original exhaust system or silencer" means a system of the 
type fitted to the vehicle at the time of type-approval or 
extension of type-approval.  It may be the one first fitted or 
a replacement. 

"non-original exhaust system or silencer" means a system of a 
type other than that fitted to the vehicle at the time of 
type-approval or extension of type-approval,  it may be used 
only as a replacement exhaust system or silencer. 

"exhaust systems of differing types" means systems which are 
fundamentally different  in one of the following ways: 

systems comprising components bearing different factory or 
trade marks; 

systems comprising any component made of materials of 
different characteristics or comprising components which are 
of a different shape or size; 

1.3.3. 

systems  in which the operating principles of at  least one 
component are different; 

1.3.4. 

systems comprising components  in different combinations. 

404 -

1.4. 

2. 

2.1. 

"component of an exhaust system" means one of the individual 
components which together form the exhaust system (such as 
exhaust pipework, the silencer proper) and the intake system 
(air fiIter) if any. 

If the engine has to be equipped with an  intake system (air 
filter and/or  intake noise absorber) in order to comply with 
the maximum permissible sound  levels, the filter and/or the 
absorber must be treated as components having the same 
importance as the exhaust system. 

COMPONENT TYPE-APPROVAL REGARDING THE SOUND LEVEL AND ORIGINAL 
EXHAUST SYSTEM, AS A TECHNICAL UNIT, OF A TYPE OF MOTORCYCLE 

NOISE OF THE MOTORCYCLE  IN MOTION (measuring conditions and 
method for testing of the vehicle during component 
type-approval) 

2.1.1. 

Limits:  cf. Annex I. 

2.1.2. 

Measuring  instruments 

2.1.2.1. 

Acoustic measurements 

The apparatus used for measuring the sound  level must be a 
precision sound-level meter of the type described in 
International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) publication 
179 'Precision sound-1 eve I meters', second edition. 
Measurements must be carried out using the 'fast' response and 
the 'A' weighting also described  in that publication. 

At the beginning and end of each series of measurements the 
sound-level meter must be calibrated  in accordance with the 
manufacturer's  instructions, using an appropriate sound source 
(e.g. pistonphone). 

2.1.2.2. 

Speed measurements 

Engine speed and motorcycle speed on the test track must be 
determined to within ± 3%. 

2.1.3. 

Conditions of measurement 

, 

2.1.3.1. 

Condition of the motorcycle 

During the measurements the motorcycle must be  in running 
order  (including coolant, oils, fuel, tools, spare wheel and 
rider). 

Before the measurements are made the motorcycle must be 
brought to the normal operating temperature.  If the 
motorcycle  is fitted with fans with an automatic actuating 
mechanism, this system must not be  interfered with during the 
sound measurements.  For motorcycles having more than one 
driven wheel, only the drive provided for normal road 
operation may be used.  Where a motorcycle  is fitted with a 
sidecar, this must be removed for the purposes of the test. 

2.1.3.2. 

Test  site 

-  405  -

The  test  site must  consist  of  a central  acceleration  section 
surrounded  by  a substantially  flat  test  area.  The 
acceleration  section must  be  flat;  its surface must  be dry and 
such  that  surface  noise  remains  low. 

On  the  test  site  the variations  in the  free sound  field 
between  the sound  source  at  the centre of  the acceleration 
section  and  the microphone must  not  exceed i  1 dB.  This 
condition will  be deemed  to be met  If there are no  large 
objects which  reflect  sound,  such  as  fences, rocks, bridges or 
buildings, within  50 m of  the centre of  the  acceleration 
section.  The  surface of  the site must  be made of  hard 
material  such  as concrete, asphalt  or  any other  acoustically 
equivalent  material  within  a minimum  radius of  10 m around  the 
centre of  the acceleration  section and  be  free of  powdery 
snow,  long grass,  loose soi I or  cinders. 

The microphone must  not  be obstructed  in any way  which  could 
affect  the sound  field, and  no person may  stand  between  the 
microphone  and  the sound  source.  The observer  carrying out 
the measurements must  so position  himself  as not  to affect  the 
readings of  the measuring  instrument. 

2.1.3.3. 

Miscellaneous 

Measurements may  not  be  taken  in unfavourable  weather 
conditions and  in particular  in gusting winds. 

The wind  speed  must  be  <. 3 m/s.  The measurements will  be 
acceptable  if there are gusts of  <. 5 m/s. 

For  measurements, the A-weighted  sound  level  of  sound  sources 
other  than  those of  the motorcycle  to be  tested  or  of wind 
effects must  be at  least  10 dB(A) below  the sound  level 
produced  by  the motorcycle. 

If the difference  between  the ambient  noise and  the measured 
noise  is between  10 and  16 dB(A),  in order  to calculate  the 
test  results  the appropriate  correction must  be  subtracted 
from  the  readings on  the sound-1 eve I meter, as  in the 
fol lowing  graph: 

-  406 

dBU) 

û,«. 

0,5 

0,* 

OJ 

d3(Aj 

Difference  between  ambient  noise  and  noise  to be measured 

A suitable windshield  may  be  fitted  to  the microphone  provided 
that  account  is taken of  its effect  on  the sensitivity and 
directional  characteristics of  the microphone. 

2.1.4. 

Method of  measurement 

2.1.4.1 

Nature and number  of  measurements 

The maximum  sound  level  expressed  in A-weighted  decibels 
(dB(A)) must  be measured  as the motorcycle  travels  between 
lines AA' and BB'  (figure  1 ).  The measurement  will  be  invalid 
if an abnormal  discrepancy  between  the peak  value and  the 
general  sound  level  is recorded. 

At  least  two measurements must  be  taken on each  side of  the 
motorcycle. 

2.1.4.2 

Positioning of  the microphone 

The microphone must  be  located  7.5 m  from  the reference  line 
CC  (figure  1) of  the track  and  1.2 m  above ground  level. 

2.1.4.3 

Conditions of operation 

The motorcycle must  approach  line AA'  at  an  initial  steady 
speed  as specified  in 2.1.4.3.1  and  2.1.4.3.2.  When  the front 
of  the motorcycle  reaches  line AA'  the  throttle must  be fully 

-  407  -

opened  as quickly  as practically  possible  and  kept  in that 
position  until  the  rear  of  the motorcycle  reaches  line BB'; 
the  throttle must  then  be  returned  as quickly  as possible  to 
the  idle position. 

For  all  measurements  the motorcycle  must  be  ridden  in a 
straight  line over  the acceleration  section  keeping  the 
longitudinal  median  plane of  the motorcycle  as close  as 
possible  to  Iine  C C. 

2.1.4.3.1. 

Motorcycles  with  non-automatic  gearboxes 

2.1.4.3.1.1. 

Approach  speed 

The motorcycle must  approach  line AA'  at  a steady  speed 
-  of  50 km/h, or 

-  corresponding  to an engine  speed  equal  to 75% of  the  speed 

referred  to  in 3.2.1.7  of  Appendix  1A. 

The  lower  of  these  speeds must  be  selected. 

2.1.4.3.1.2. 

Selection  of  gear  ratio 

2.1.4.3.1.2.1. Motorcycles  fitted with  a gearbox  having  at  least  four  ratios, 

whatever  the cylinder  capacity  of  their  engines, must  be 
tested  only  in second  gear. 

2.1.4.3.1.2.2. Motorcycles  fitted  with  engines  having  a cylinder  capacity  not 

exceeding  175 cm3  and  a gearbox  with  five  ratios or  more 
must  be  tested  only  in third  gear. 

2.1.4.3.1.2.3. Motorcycles  fitted  with  engines  having  a cylinder  capacity  of 

more  than  175 cm3  and  a gearbox  with  five  ratios or  more 
must  be  tested once  in second  gear  and once  in third  gear. 
The  result  used  must  be  the average  of  the  two  tests. 

2.1.4.3.1.2.4.  If, during  the  test  carried  out  in second  gear  (see 

2.1.4.3.1.2.1,  2.1.4.3.1.2.2  and  2.1.4.3.1.2.3),  the  engine 
speed  on  the approach  to the  line marking  the end  of  the  test 
track  exceeds  100% of  the speed  referred  to  in 3.2.1.7  of 
Appendix  1A,  the  test  must  be carried  out  in third  gear  and 
the sound  level  measured  must  be  the only  one  recorded  as  the 
test  result. 

2.1.4.3.2. 

Motorcycles with  automatic  gearboxes 

2.1.4.3.2.1. 

Motorcycles without  a manual  selector 

2.1.4.3.2.1.1. Approach  speed 

The motorcycle  must  approach  line AA'  at  steady  speeds of 30, 
40 and  50 km/h or  75% of  the maximum  road  speed  if that  value 
is  lower.  The condition giving  the highest  sound  level  is 
chosen. 

2.1.4.3.2.1.2. Motorcycles  equipped  with  a manual  selector  with  X  forward 

dr ive posit ions 

-  408 -

2.1.4.3.2.1.3. Approach  speed 

The motorcycle must  approach  line AA'  at  a steady  speed of:* 

less than 50 km/h,  the engine  rotation speed  being  equal  to 
75% of  the speed  referred  to  in 3.2.1.7 of Appendix  1A, 

or 

-  50 km/h,  the engine  rotation speed  being  less  than 75% of 

the speed  referred  to  in 3.2.1.7 of Appendix  1A. 

If,  in the  test  at  a steady  speed of  50 km/h,  the gears 
change  down  to first, the approach  speed  of  the motorcycle 
may  be  increased  to a maximum  of 60 km/h  to avoid  the 
changedown. 

2.1.4.3.2.1.4. Position of  the manual  selector 

If the motorcycle  is equipped  with  a manual  selector  with X 
forward  drive positions, the  test must  be carried  out  with  the 
selector  in the highest  position;  the voluntary  device  for 
changing  down  (e.g. kickdown) must  not  be used.  If an 
automatic  changedown  takes place  after  line AA',  the  test  must 
be begun  again using  the second-highest  position or  the 
third-highest  position  if necessary,  in order  to  find  the 
highest  position of  the selector  at which  the  test  can  be 
performed  without  an automatic  changedown  (without  using  the 
kickdown). 

2.1.5. 

Results  (test  report) 

2.1.5.1. 

The  test  report  drawn up  for  the purpose of  issuing  the 
document  referred  to  in Appendix  1B must  indicate any 
circumstances  and  influences  affecting  the  results of  the 
measurements. 

2.1.5.2. 

Readings  taken  from  the sound-1 eve I meter  must  be corrected  in 
accordance with  2.1.3.3.  The corrected  values must  be  rounded 
off  to the nearest  decibel. 

2.1.5.3. 

2.1.5.4. 

Only  those measurements  whose  variation  in two  consecutive 
tests on  the same  side of  the motorcycle  is  less  than or  equal 
to 2 dB(A) may  be used  for  the purpose of  issuing  the  document 
referred  to  in Appendix  1B. 

To  take account  of  inaccuracies  in the measurements,  the 
result  of each measurement  must  be arrived  at  by deducting 
1 dB(A) from  the value obtained  in accordance  with  2.1.5.2. 

If the average of  the  four  results of  the measurements  does 
not  exceed  the maximum  permissible  level  for  the category  to 
which  the vehicle  being  tested  belongs,  the  limit  laid down  in 
2.1.1. will  be deemed  as being  complied  with.  This  average 
value will  constitute  the  result  of  the  test. 

-  409  -

If  the  four  results of  the measurements  do  not  exceed  the 
maximum  permissible  level  for  the  category  to which  the 
motorcycle  being  tested  belongs,  the  limit  laid  down  in  2.1.1 
will  be deemed  as being  complied  with. 

If one of  the  four  results exceeds  the maximum  permissible 
level  by  not  more  than  1 dB(A),  a second  series of  four 
measurements  will  be  taken.  In this  case  the  limit  laid  down 
in 2.1.1  will  only  be  deemed  as being  complied  with  if  the 
four  new  results  are  less  than or  equal  to  the  maximum 
permissible  level. 

2.2. 

2.2.1. 

In all  other  cases, the  limit  laid  down  in 2.1.1  will  be 
deemed  as not  being  complied  with. 

NOISE  FROM  STATIONARY  MOTORCYCLE  (measuring  conditions  and 
method  for  testing of  the  vehicle  in use) 

Sound-pressure  level  in the  immediate  vicinity  of  the 
motorcycle 

In order  to  facilitate  subsequent  noise  tests on  motorcycles 
in use,  the  sound-pressure  level  must  also be measured  in the 
immediate  vicinity  of  the exhaust-system  outlet  in  accordance 
with  the  following  requirements,  the  result  of  the  measurement 
being  entered  in the  test  report  drawn  up  for  the purpose  of 
issuing  the  document  referred  to  in Appendix  1B. 

2.2.2. 

Measuring  instruments 

A precision  sound-1 eve I meter  as defined  in 2.1.2.1  must  be 
used. 

2.2.3. 

Conditions of  measurement 

2.2.3.1. 

Condition of  the  motorcycle 

Before  the measurements  are made  the motorcycle  engine  must  be 
brought  to  the normal  operating  temperature.  If  the 
motorcycle  is fitted  with  fans with  an  automatic  actuating 
mechanism,  this system  must  not  be  interfered  with  during  the 
sound  measurements. 

During  the measurements  the gearbox  must  be  in neutral  gear. 
If  it  is  impossible  to disconnect  the  transmission,  the 
driving  wheel  of  the motorcycle  must  be  allowed  to  rotate 
freely,  for  example  by  placing  the  vehicle  on  its  centre 
stand. 

2.2.3.2. 

Test  site  (Figure  2) 

Any  area  in which  there  are  no significant  acoustic 
disturbances  may  be used  as a  test  site.  Flat  surfaces  which 
are  covered  with  concrete,  asphalt  or  some  other  hard  material 
and  are  highly  reflective  are  suitable;  surfaces  consisting  of 
earth  which  has been  tamped  down must  not  be used.  The  test 
site must  be  in the  form  of  a rectangle  whose  sides  are at 

-  410 -

least  3 m  from  the outer  edge of  the motorcycle  (handlebars 
excluded).  There must  be no significant  obstacles, e.g. no 
persons other  than  the  rider  and  the observer  may  stand within 
this  rectangle.  The motorcycle must  be positioned within  the 
said  rectangle  so that  the microphone  used  for  measurement  is 
at  least  1 m  from  any  kerb. 

2.2.3.3. 

Mi see 11aneous 

Readings of  the measuring  instrument  caused  by  ambient  noise 
and wind  effects must  be at  least  10 dB(A)  lower  than  the 
sound  levels  to be measured.  A suitable windshield may  be 
fitted  to the microphone  provided  that  account  is taken of  its 
effect  on  the sensitivity of  the microphone. 

2.2.4. 

Method  of  measurement 

2.2.4.1. 

Nature  and  number  of  measurements 

The maximum  sound  level  expressed  in A-weighted  decibels 
(dB(A)) must  be measured  during  the period of operation  laid 
down  in 2.2.4.3. 

At  least  three measurements must  be  taken  at  each  measuring 
point. 

2.2.4.2. 

Positioning  of  the microphone  (Figure  2) 

The microphone  must  be positioned  level  with  the  exhaust 
outlet  or  0.2 m above  the surface of  the  track, whichever  is 
the highest.  The microphone  diaphragm  must  face  towards  the 
exhaust  outlet  at a distance of 0.5 m  from  it.  The  axis of 
maximum  sensitivity  of  the microphone must  be parallel  to the 
surface of  the  track  at  an angle of  45 ±  10*  to  the  vertical 
plane of  the direction of  the exhaust  emissions. 

In relation  to this vertical  plane, the microphone  must  be 
located on  the side which  gives  the maximum  possible  distance 
between  the microphone  and  the outline of  the  motorcycle 
(handlebars  excluded). 

If the exhaust  system  has more  than one outlet  at  centres  less 
than 0.3 m  apart,  the microphone must  be  faced  towards  the 
outlet  which  is nearest  the motorcycle  (handlebars  excluded) 
or  towards  the outlet  which  is highest  above  the surface of 
the  track.  If the centres of  the outlets are more  than 0.3 m 
apart, separate measurements must  be  taken  for  each of  them, 
the  highest  figure recorded  being  taken  as  the  test  value. 

2.2.4.3. 

Operating  conditions 

The  engine  speed must  be held  steady  at one of  the  following 
values: 

-  1/2  S  if S  is more  than  5 000  rev/min, 

-  3/4  S  if S  is not more  than 5 000  rev/min, 
where  S  is the speed  referred  to  in 3.2.1.7 of  Appendix  1A. 

411  -

When  a constant  engine  speed  is reached,  the  throttle must  be 
returned  swiftly  to the  idle position.  The  sound  level  must 
be measured  during  an operating  cycle  consisting  of  a brief 
period  of  constant  engine  speed  and  throughout  the 
deceleration  period,  the maximum  sound-level  meter  reading 
being  taken  as  the  test  value. 

2.2.5. 

Results  (test  report) 

2.2.5.1. 

The  test  report  drawn  up  for  the purpose of  issuing  the 
document  referred  to  in Appendix  1B must  indicate  all  relevant 
data  and  particularly  those used  in measuring  the  noise of  the 
stationary  motorcycle. 

2.2.5.2. 

Values, rounded  off  to the nearest  decibel, must  be  read off 
the measuring  instrument. 

Only  those measurements which  vary  by  no more  than  2 dB(A)  in 
three  consecutive  tests will  be  used. 

2.2.5.3. 

The  average of  the  three measurements will  constitute  the  test 
result. 

-  412 -

Figure 1 
TEST  FOR MOTORCYCLE  IN MOTION 

Figure 2 
TEST  FOR  STATIONARY  VEHICLE 

Height  of centre of  exhaust  outlet 

CM 
o 
C 

2.3. 

2.3.1. 

2.3.1.1 

2.3.2. 

2.3.3. 

2.3.3.1 

2.3.3.2 

2.3.3.3 

-  413 -

ORIGINAL  EXHAUST SYSTEM  (SILENCER) 

Requirements  for  silencers  containing  absorbent  fibrous 
mater ials 

Absorbent  fibrous material  must  be asbestos-free  and may be 
used  in the construction  of  silencers only  if  it  is securely 
held  in place  throughout  the service  life of  the silencer  and 
it meets  the requirements of  any one of  sections  2.3.2,  2.3.3 
or  2.3.4. 

After  removal  of  the fibrous material,  the sound  level  must 
comply  with  the requirements of  2.1.1. 

The absorbent  fibrous material  may  not  be placed  in those 
parts of  the silencer  through which  the exhaust  gases pass and 
must  comply  with  the following  requirements. 

The material  must  be heated  at  a temperature  of  650 ± 5  *C for 
four  hours  in a furnace without  reduction  in average  length, 
diameter  or  bulk  density  of  the  fibre. 

After  heating  at 650 ± 5  *C for one  hour  in a  furnace, at 
least 98 % of  the material  must  be retained  in a sieve of 
nominal  mesh  size 250 /urn complying with  ISO standard  3310/1 
when  tested  in accordance with  ISO standard  2599. 

The  loss  in weight  of  the material  must  not  exceed  10.5% after 
soaking  for  24 hours at 90 ± 5  *C  in a synthetic condensate of 
the  following  composition: 

1 N hydrobromic acid  (HBr):  10 ml; 
1 N sulphuric acid  (H2S04):  10 ml; 
Distilled water  to make up  to  1 000 ml. 

Note: The material  must  be washed  in distilled water  and dried 

for one  hour  at  105  *C before  weighing. 

2.3.4. 

Before  the system  is tested  in accordance with  section  2.1 of 
this Annex,  it must  be put  into normal  working order  by one of 
the  following methods: 

2.3.4.1 

Conditioning  by continuous  road operation 

2.3.4.1.1 

The  table shows  the minimum  distance  to be  travelled  for each 
category of motorcycle  during  conditioning. 

Category of motorcycle by 
cylinder capacity  (cm3) 

Distance  (km) 

1.  <  80 
2.  >  80  <  175 
3.  > 175 

4 000 
6  000 
8  000 

-  414 -

2.3.4.1.2. 

50% ±  10% of  this conditioning  cycle must  consist  of  town 
driving  and  the  remainder  of  long-distance  runs  at  high  speed; 
the  continuous  road  cycle may  be  replaced  by  a corresponding 
test-track  programme. 

2.3.4.1.3. 

The  two speed  regimes must  be alternated  at  least  six  times. 

2.3.4.1.4. 

The  complete  test  programme  must  include  at  least  10 breaks 
lasting  at  least  three  hours  in order  to  reproduce  the  effects 
of  cooling  and  condensation. 

2.3.4.2. 

Conditioning  by pulsation 

2.3.4.2.1. 

The  exhaust  system or  components  thereof  must  be  fitted  to the 
motorcycle  or  to the engine. 

2.3.4.2.2. 

2.3.4.2.3. 

In the  former  case, the motorcycle  must  be mounted  on  a  roller 
dynamometer.  In the second  case, the engine must  be  mounted 
on  a  test  bench. 

The  test  apparatus, as shown  in detail  in Figure  3,  is fitted 
at  the outlet  of  the exhaust  system.  Any  other  apparatus 
giving  equivalent  results  is acceptable. 

The  test  equipment  must  be  adjusted  so  that  the  flow of 
exhaust  gases  is alternately  interrupted  and  restored  2 500 
times by  a rapid-action  valve. 

The  valve must  open when  the exhaust  gas  back-pressure, 
measured  at  least  100 mm  downstream  of  the  intake  flange, 
reaches  a value of  between 0.35  and 0.40  bar.  Should  such a 
figure  be unattainable  because of  the engine  characteristics, 
the  valve must  open when  the gas back-pressure  reaches  a  level 
equivalent  to 90% of  the maximum  that  can  be measured  before 
the engine  stops.  It must  close when  this pressure  differs by 
no more  than  10% from  its stabilized  value with  the  valve 
open. 

2.3.4.2.4. 

The  time-lapse  relay must  be  set  for  the duration  of  exhaust 
gases  calculated  on  the basis of  the  requirements  of 
2.3.4.2.3. 

2.3.4.2.5. 

Engine  speed  must  be 75% of  the speed  (S) at  which  the  engine 
develops maximum  power. 

2.3.4.2.6. 

The  power  indicated  by  the dynamometer  must  be  50% of  the 
full-throttle power  measured  at  75% of  engine  speed (S). 

2.3.4.2.7. 

Any  drainage  holes must  be closed  off  during  the  test. 

2.3.4.2.8. 

The  entire  test  must  be completed  within  48 hours.  If 
necessary,  a cooling  period  must  be  allowed  after  each  hour. 

2.3.4.3. 

Conditioning  on  a test  bench 

2.3.4.3.1. 

The  exhaust  system must  be  fitted  to an engine  representative 
of  the  type  fitted  to the motorcycle  for  which  the  system  is 
designed,  and mounted  on  a  test  bench. 

- 415 -

2.3.4.3.2. 

Conditioning consists of the specified number of test bench 
cycles for the category of motorcycle for which the exhaust 
system was designed.  The table shows the number of cycles for 
each category of motorcycle. 

Category of motorcycle by 
cylinder capacity (cm3) 

Number of 

cycles 

1.  <  80 
2.  >  80  <  175 
3.  > 175 

6 
9 
12 

2.3.4.3.3. 

Each test-bench cycle must be followed by a break of at least 
6 hours in order to reproduce the effects of cooling and 
condensation. 

2.3.4.3.4. 

Each test-bench cycle consists of six phases.  The engine 
conditions and duration are as follows for each phase: 

Phase 

Cond i t i ons 

Durât ion of  phase 

Engines of 
less  than 

175 c m3 

(minutes) 

Engines of 
175  c m3 
or  more 
(minutes) 

1 
2 
3 
4 
5 
6 

Idling 

25%  load  at  7 5% S 
5 0%  load  at  7 5% S 
100%  load  at  7 5% S 
5 0%  load  at  100% S 
25%  load  at  100% S 

6 
40 
40 
30 
12 
22 

6 
50 
50 
10 
12 
22 

Total  time: 

2 hours  30 

2 hours  30 

2.3.4.3.5. 

During this conditioning procedure, at the request of the 
manufacturer, the engine and the silencer may be cooled in 
order that the temperature recorded at a point not more than 
100 mm from the exhaust gas outlet does not exceed that 
measured when the motorcycle  is running at 110 km/h or 75% S 
in top gear.  The engine and/or motorcycle speeds must be 
determined with an accuracy of ± 3%. 

-  416  -

Figure  3 

Test  apparatus  for  conditioning  by  pulsation 

©^ 

1.  Inlet  flange or  sleeve  for  connection  to the  rear  of  the  test  exhaust 

system. 

2.  Hand-operated  regulating  valve. 

3.  Compensating  reservoir  with  a maximum  capacity  of  40  I and  a  filling 

time of  not  less  than  1 second. 

4.  Pressure  switch  with  an operating  range of  0.05  to 2.5  bar. 

5.  Time  delay  switch. 

6.  Pulse  counter. 

7.  Quick-acting  valve,  such  as exhaust  brake  valve  60 mm  in diameter, 

operated  by  a pneumatic  cylinder  with  an output  of  120 N at  4 bar.  The 
response  time,  for opening  and  closing, must  not  exceed  0.5  seconds. 

8.  Exhaust  gas  evaluation. 

9.  Flexible  hose. 

10  Pressure  gauge. 

(2e 

- 417 -

2.3.5 

Diagram and markings 

2.3.5.1 

2.3.5.2 

2.3.5.3 

A diagram of the exhaust system must be annexed to the 
document referred to in Appendix 1A. 

All original silencers must be  legibly and  indelibly marked 
with the make and type references. 

Any packing of original replacement silencer systems must be 
marked  legibly with the words "original part" and the make and 
type references. 

2.3.6 

Intake silencer 

If the engine  intake has to be fitted with an air filter 
and/or  intake silencer  in order to comply with the permissible 
sound  level, the filter and/or silencer must be regarded as 
part of the silencer and the requirements of section 2.3 are 
also apply to them. 

3. 

COMPONENT TYPE-APPROVAL OF A NON-ORIGINAL EXHAUST SYSTEM OR 
COMPONENTS THEREOF, AS TECHNICAL UNITS, FOR MOTORCYCLES 

3.0. 

SCOPE 

This point applies to the component type-approval, as 
technical units within the meaning of Article 2 of the 
directive referred to in Article 1, of exhaust systems or 
components thereof  intended to be fitted to one or more 
particular types of motorcycle as non-original  replacement 
parts. 

3.1. 

DEFINITION 

3.1.1. 

"Non-original replacement exhaust system or components 
thereof" means any exhaust system component as defined in 
section 1.2 of this Annex  intended to be fitted to a 
motorcycle to replace that of the type fitted to the 
motorcycle when the document provided for  in Appendix 1B was 
issued. 

3.2. 

APPLICATION FOR COMPONENT TYPE-APPROVAL 

3.2.1. 

3.2.2. 

Applications for component type-approval  for replacement 
exhaust systems or components thereof as technical units must 
be submitted by the manufacturer of the system or by his 
authorized representative. 

For each type of replacement exhaust system or components 
thereof for which approval  is requested, the application for 
component type-approval must be accompanied by the following 
documents  in triplicate, and by the following particulars: 

3.2.2.1. 

-  description, in respect of the characteristics referred to 
in section 1.1 of this Annex, of the type(s) of motorcycle 
for which the system(s) or component(s) is/are intended; 

the numbers and/or symbols specific to the type of engine and 
motorcycle must be given; 

-  418 -

3.2.2.2. 

-  description of  the replacement  exhaust  system  stating  the 

relative position of each of  its components, together with 
the fitting  instructions; 

3.2.2.3. 

-  drawings of each component  to facilitate  location and 

identification, and statement of materials used.  These 
drawings must also  indicate  the  intended  location of  the 
mandatory  component  type-approval  number. 

3.2.3. 

The applicant must submit, at  the request of  the  technical 
authority: 

3.2.3.1. 

-  two samples of  the system  for which component  type-approval 

is requested; 

3.2.3.2. 

-  an exhaust  system conforming  to that originally  fitted  to 

the motorcycle when  the document  provided  for  in 
Appendix  1B was  issued; 

3.2.3.3. 

-  a motorcycle  representative of  the type to which  the 

replacement  exhaust  system  is to be fitted, supplied  in 
such a condition  that, when fitted with  a silencer of  the 
same  type as was originally  fitted,  it meets  the 
requirements of either of  the following  two sections*. 

3.2.3.3.1. 

if the motorcycle  referred  to  in 3.2.3.3.  is of a type which 
has been granted  type-approval  pursuant  to the provisions of 
this chapter: 

-  during  the test  in motion,  it does not exceed  by more than 

1 dB(A) the  limit value  laid down  in section  2.1.1. of  this 
Annex, 

-  during  the stationary  test,  it does not exceed  by more than 
3 dB(A) the value  indicated on  the manufacturer's  rating 
plate; 

3.2.3.3.2. 

if the motorcycle  referred  to  in 3.2.3.3.  is not of  a type 
which  has been granted  type-approval  pursuant  to the 
provisions of  this Regulation  it does not exceed  by more than 
1 dB(A) the  limit value applicable to that  type of motorcycle 
when  it was first put  into service; 

3.2.3.4. 

-  a separate engine  identical  to that  fitted  to the 
motorcycle  referred  to above, where  the competent 
authorities deem necessary. 

3.3. 

MARKINGS AND  INSCRIPTIONS 

3.3.1. 

Non-original  exhaust  systems or  components thereof must  be 
marked  in accordance with  the requirements of Annex VI. 

-  419 

-

3.4. 

COMPONENT  TYPE-APPROVAL 

3.4.1. 

Upon  completion  of  the  tests  laid  down  in this chapter,  the 
competent  authority  will  issue  a certificate  corresponding  to 
the model  shown  in Appendix  2B.  The  component  type-approval 
number  must  be preceded  by  a rectangle  surrounding  the  letter 
"e"  followed  by  the distinguishing  number  or  letters of  the 
Member  State which  issued or  refused  the component  type-
approval . 

3.5. 

SPECIFICATIONS 

3.5.1. 

General  specifications 

The  design,  construction  and mounting  of  the  silencer  must  be 
such  that: 

3.5.1.1. 

-  the motorcycle  complies with  the  requirements  of  the 

chapter  under  normal  conditions of  use, and  in particular 
regardless of  any  vibrations  to which  it may  be  subjected; 

3.5.1.2. 

-  it displays  reasonable  resistance  to  the  corrosion 

phenomena  to which  it  is exposed, with  due  regard  to  the 
normal  conditions of  use of  the motorcycle, 

3.5.1.3. 

-  the ground  clearance  available under  the silencer 

originally  fitted,  and  the  angle  at  which  the  motorcycle 
can  lean over, are  not  reduced, 

3.5.1.4. 

-  the surface  does not  reach  unduly  high  temperatures, 

3.5.1.5. 

-  its outline  has no projections  or  sharp  edges, 

3.5.1.6. 

-  springs  have  adequate  clearance, 

3.5.1.7. 

-  adequate  safety  clearance  is provided  for  pipes, 

3.5.1.8. 

-  it  is  impact-resistant  in a way  that  is compatible  with 

clearly-defined maintenance  and  installation  requirements. 

3.5.2. 

Specifications  for  sound  levels 

3.5.2.1. 

The  acoustic  efficiency  of  the  replacement  exhaust  systems or 
components  thereof  must  be  tested  using  the methods  described 
in sections  2.1.2, 2.1.3, 2.1.4  and  2.1.5  of  this  Annex. 

With  a  replacement  exhaust  system  or  component  thereof  fitted 
to  the motorcycle  referred  to  in section  3.2.3.3 of  this 
Annex,  the sound-level  values obtained  must  meet  the  following 
condit ions: 

3.5.2.1.1. 

they must  not  exceed  the values measured,  in accordance  with 
the  provisions  of  3.2.3.3, using  the same motorcycle  fitted 
with  the original  equipment  silencer  both  during  the  test  in 
motion  and  during  the  stationary  test. 

-  420 -

3.5.3. 

Testing  of motorcycle  performance 

3.5.3.1. 

3.5.3.2. 

3.5.3.3. 

The  replacement  silencer must  be such  as  to ensure  that  the 
motorcycle's  performance  is comparable  to that  achieved  with 
the original  silencer or  component  thereof. 

The  replacement  silencer must  be compared  with  an originally-
fitted  silencer, also  in new condition,  fitted  in turn  to the 
motorcycle  referred  to  in 3.2.3.3. 

This  test  is carried out  by measuring  the engine power  curve. 
The net  maximum  power  and  the top speed measured  with  the 
replacement  silencer must  not  exceed  the net  maximum  power  and 
top speed measured under  the same conditions with  the original 
equipment  exhaust  system by more  than  5%. 

3.5.4. 

Additional  provisions  relating  to silencers  as  technical  units 
containing  fibrous material 

Fibrous material  may not  be used  in the construction of  such 
silencers unless  the requirements  set  out  in section  2.3.1  of 
this Annex  are met. 

- 421 -

APPENDIX 1A 

INFORMATION  SHEET 

REGARDING  THE PERMISSIBLE SOUND LEVEL AND ORIGINAL  EXHAUST  SYSTEM 
OF A TYPE OF MOTORCYCLE 

(to be attached  to the application  for component  type-approval  where  this  is 
submitted  separately  from  the application for vehicle  type-approval) 

Order  No  (allocated  by applicant) 

(model) 

The application  for  component  type-approval  regarding  the permissible  sound 
level  and original  exhaust  system of a type of motorcycle must  include the 
details  listed  in Annex  II to Council  Directive 92/61/EEC of  30 June 1992, 
Section A, points: 

0.1 
0.2 
0.5 
0.6 
2.1 
3 
3.0 
3.1 
3.1.1 
3.2.1.7 
3.2.8.3.3 
3.2.8.3.3.1 
3.2.8.3.3.2 
3.2.9 
3.2.9.1 
4 
4.1 
4.2 
4.3 
4.4 
4.4.1 
4.4.2 
4.5 
4.6 
5.2 

- 422 -

APPENDIX 1B 

Name of administration 

CERTIFICATE OF COMPONENT TYPE-APPROVAL 

REGARDING THE PERMISSIBLE SOUND LEVEL AND ORIGINAL EXHAUST SYSTEM(S) 
OF A TYPE OF MOTORCYCLE 

Model 

Report No 

of the technical authority 

date: 

1. 

Trade name or trade mark of vehicle: 

2. 

Type of vehicle: 

3. 

Variant(s) (if any): 

4. 

Version(s) (if any): 

5. 

Name and address of manufacturer: 

6. 

Name and address of the manufacturer's authorized representative 
(if any): 

7. 

Original exhaust system type(s): 

8. 

9. 

Intake system type(s) (where essential  to observe sound  level  limit) 

Noise  level of the vehicle when stationary: 

dB(A) at: 

rpm. 

10. 

Vehicle submitted for testing on: 

11. 

Component type-approval granted/refused1 

12. 

Place: 

13. 

Date: 

14. 

Signature: 

1  Delete where not applicable. 

-  423 -

APPENDIX  2A 

INFORMATION  SHEET 

FOR A NON-ORIGINAL  EXHAUST  SYSTEM 
OR  COMPONENT(S) THEREOF, AS TECHNICAL  UNIT(S),  FOR  MOTORCYCLES 

(mode I) 

Order  No  (allocated  by applicant) 

The application  for  component  type-approval  for  a non-original  exhaust  system 
for motorcycles must  include  the following  details: 

1. 

Make: 

2. 

Type: 

3. 

Name and  address of  manufacturer: 

4. 

Name and address of  the manufacturer's  authorized  representative 
(if any): 

5. 

Component  list of  the technical  unit  (attach  drawings): 

6. 

7. 

Make(s) and  type(s) of motorcycles  for which  the silencer  is 
designed:1) 
Any  restrictions on use and  fitting  instructions: 

In addition,  the application must  include  the details  listed  in Annex  II to 
Council  Directive 92/61/EEC of  30 June  1992, Section A, points: 

0.1 
0.2 
0.5 
0.6 
2.1 
3 
3.0 
3.1 
3.1.1 
3.2.1.7 
4 
4.1 
4.2 
4.3 
4.4 
4.4.1 
4.4.2 
4.5 
4.6 
5.2 

1)  Delete where  not  applicable. 

- 424 -

APPENDIX 2B 

Name of administration 

CERTIFICATE OF COMPONENT TYPE-APPROVAL 

FOR A NON-ORIGINAL EXHAUST SYSTEM FOR MOTORCYCLES 

Model 

Report No 

of the technical authority 

date: 

1. 

Make of exhaust : 

2. 

Type of exhaust: 

3. 

Name and address of manufacturer: 

4. 

5. 

Name and address of the manufacturer's authorized representative 
(if any): 

Make(s) and type(s) and any variant(s) or version(s) of the vehlcle(s) 
for which the exhaust system  is designed: 

6. 

System submitted for testing on: 

7. 

Component type-approval granted/refused1 

8. 

Place: 

9. 

Date: 

10. 

Signature: 

1  Delete where not applicable. 

- 425 -

ANNEX IV 

REQUIREMENTS FOR THREE-WHEELED MOPEDS AND TRICYCLES 

1. 

DEFINITIONS 

For the purposes of this chapter: 

1.1. 

"type of three-wheeled moped or tricycle as regards  its sound 
level and exhaust system" means three-wheeled mopeds and 
tricycles which do not differ as regards the following 
essential characteristics: 

1.1.1. 

bodywork shape or materials (in particular the engine 
compartment and  its soundproofing); 

1.1.2. 

vehicle  length and width; 

1.1.3. 

type of engine (petrol or diesel, two- or four-stroke, number 
and capacity of cylinders, number and type of carburettors or 
injection systems, arrangement of valves, maximum power and 
cor respond Ing speed); 

the cubic capacity of rotary-piston engines should be 
considered as double the volume of the chamber; 

1.1.4. 

transmission system, in particular the number and ratios of 
the gears-, 

1.1.5. 

number, type and arrangement of exhaust systems. 

1.2. 

1.2.1. 

1.2.2. 

1.3. 

1.3.1. 

1.3.2. 

"exhaust system" or "silencer" means a complete set of 
components necessary to limit the noise caused by the engine 
and exhaust of a three-wheeled moped or tricycle. 

"original exhaust system or silencer" means a system of the 
type fitted to the vehicle at the time of type-approval or 
extension of type-approval.  It may be the one first fitted or 
a replacement. 

"non-original exhaust system or silencer" means a system of a 
type other than that fitted to the vehicle at the time of 
type-approval or extension of type-approval.  It may be used 
only as a replacement exhaust system or silencer. 

"exhaust systems of differing types" means systems which are 
fundamentally different  in one of the following ways: 

systems comprising components bearing different factory or 
trade marks; 

systems comprising any component made of materials of 
different characteristics or comprising components which are 
of a different shape or size-, 

- 426 -

1.3.3. 

systems  in which the operating principles of at  least one 
component are different; 

1.3.4. 

systems comprising components in different combinations. 

1.4. 

2. 

2.1. 

"component of an exhaust system" means one of the individual 
components which together form the exhaust system (such as 
exhaust pipework, the silencer proper) and the  intake system 
(air filter) if any. 

If the engine has to be equipped with an intake system (air 
filter and/or  intake noise absorber) in order to comply with 
maximum permissible sound  levels, the filter and/or the 
absorber must be treated as a component having the same 
importance as the exhaust system. 

COMPONENT TYPE-APPROVAL REGARDING THE SOUND LEVEL AND ORIGINAL 
EXHAUST SYSTEM, AS A TECHNICAL UNIT, OF A TYPE OF THREE-
WHEELED MOPED OR TRICYCLE 

NOISE OF THE THREE-WHEELED MOPED OR TRICYCLE (measuring 
conditions and method for testing of the vehicle during 
component type-approval) 

2.1.1. 

* 

The vehicle, its engine and  its.exhaust system must be 
designed, constructed and assembled so that the vehicle 
complies with the requirements of this chapter under normal 
conditions of use, regardless of any vibrations to which they 
may be subjected. 

2.1.2. 

The exhaust system must be designed, constructed and mounted 
to resist the corrosion phenomena to which  it is exposed. 

2.2. 

SPECIFICATIONS FOR SOUND LEVELS 

2.2.1. 

Limits:  cf. Annex I. 

2.2.2. 

Measuring  Instruments 

2.2.2.1. 

The apparatus used for measuring the sound  level must be a 
precision sound-1 eve! meter of the type described in 
International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) publication No 
179 "Precision sound-level meters", second edition. 
Measurements must be carried out using the 'fast' response of 
the sound-1 eve I meter and the 'A' weighting also described in 
that publicat ion. 

At the beginning and end of each series of measurements the 
sound-level meter must be calibrated  in accordance with the 
manufacturer's  instructions, using an appropriate sound source 
(e.g. a pistonphone). 

2.2.2.2. 

Speed measurements 

Engine speed and vehicle speed on the test track must be 
determined to within ± 3% 

-  427  -

2.2.3. 

Conditions of  measurement 

2.2.3.1. 

Condition of  the  vehicle 

During  the measurements,  the  vehicle  must  be  in the  running 
order  (including  coolant, oils,  fuel,  tools, spare  wheel  and 
rider). Before  the measurements  are made  the  vehicle must  be 
brought  to  the  normal  operating  temperature. 

2.2.3.1.1. 

The measurements  must  be made with  the  vehicles  unladen  and, 
except  in the  case of  vehicles  that  cannot  be  separated, 
without  trailer  or  semitrailer, on  an unobstructed  and 
sufficiently  quiet  site. 

2.2.3.2. 

Test  site 

The  test  site must  consist  of  a central  acceleration  section 
surrounded  by  a substantially  flat  test  area.  The 
acceleration  section  must  be  flat;  its surface  must  be dry  and 
such  that  surface  noise  remains  low. 

On  the  test  site  the  variations  in the  free  sound  field 
between  the  sound  source  at  the centre  of  the  acceleration 
section  and  the microphone  must  not  exceed  i  1 dB.  This 
condition  will  be deemed  to be met  if there  are  no  large 
objects  which  reflect  sound,  such  as  fences,  rocks, bridges or 
buildings, within  50 m of  the centre  of  the  acceleration 
section.  The  surface  of  the site must  be made  of  hard 
material  such  as concrete,  asphalt  or  any other  acoustically 
equivalent  material  within  a minimum  radius of  10 m  around  the 
centre  of  the acceleration  section  and  be  free of  powdery 
snow,  long  grass,  loose  soil  or  cinders. 

The microphone  must  not  be obstructed  in any  way  which  could 
affect  the  sound  field,  and  no person  may  stand  between  the 
microphone  and  the  sound  source.  The observer  carrying  out 
the measurements  must  so position  himself  as not  to affect  the 
readings  of  the measuring  instrument. 

2.2.3.3. 

Mi see I Ianeous 

Measurements  may  not  be  taken  in unfavourable  weather 
conditions  and  in particular  in gusting  winds. 

The wind  speed  must  be  <. 3 m/s.  The measurements  will  be 
acceptable  if there  are gusts of  <. 5 m/s. 

For  measurements,  the A-weighted  sound  level  of  sound  sources 
other  than  those of  the vehicle  to be  tested  or  of  wind 
effects must  be  at  least  10 dB(A) below  the  sound  level 
produced  by  the  vehicle. 

If  the difference  between  the  ambient  noise  and  the  measured 
noise  is between  10 and  16  dB(A),  in order  to calculate  the 
test  results  the appropriate  correction  must  be  subtracted 
from  the  readings  on  the  sound-levé I meter,  as  in the 
fol lowing  graph: 

-  428 -

Cfl(A) 

OA 

0,3 

0,2 

0,1 

10 

11 

1? 

13 

H 

16 

cB(A) 

Difference between  ambient  noise  and noise  to be measured 

A suitable windshield  may  be  fitted  to the microphone  provided 
that  account  is taken of  its effect  on  the sensitivity  and 
directional  characteristics of  the microphone. 

2.2.4. 

Method  of measurement 

2.2.4.1 

Nature and number  of  measurements 

The maximum  sound  level  expressed  in A-weighted  decibels 
(dB(A)) must  be measured  as the vehicle  travels between  lines 
AA'  and BB'  (figure  1 ).  The measurement  will  be  invalid  if an 
abnormal  discrepancy  between  the peak  value and  the general 
sound  level  is recorded. 

At  least  two measurements must  be taken on each  side of  the 
vehicle. 

2.2.4.2 

Positioning of  the microphone 

The microphone must  be  located  7.5 m  from  the  reference  line 
CC  (figure  1) of  the track  and  1.2 m above ground  level. 

-  429 -

2.2.4.3. 

Conditions of  operation 

The  vehicle must  approach  line AA' at an  initial  steady  speed 
as specified  in 2.2.4.4.  When  the front of  the  vehicle 
reaches  line AA'  the throttle must  be  fully opened  as quickly 
as practically  possible and kept  in that  position until  the 
rear of  the vehicle  reaches  line BB'; the  throttle must  then 
be returned  as quickly  as possible  to the  idle position. 

For  all measurements  the vehicle must  be  ridden  in a straight 
line over  the acceleration  section keeping  the  longitudinal 
median  plane of  the vehicle as close as possible  to  line  C C. 

2.2.4.3.1. 

In the case of  articulated  vehicles consisting of  two 
inseparable  components and  regarded  as constituting one  single 
vehicle, the semitrailer  must  not  be  taken  into account  with 
regard  to crossing  line BB'. 

2.2.4.4. 

Determining  the steady  speed  to be adopted 

2.2.4.4.1. 

Vehicle without  gearbox 

The  vehicle must  approach  line AA' at a steady  speed 
corresponding  either  to a speed of  rotation of  the engine 
equal  to three-quarters of  that at which  the engine  develops 
its maximum  power or  to three-quarters of  the maximum  speed of 
rotation of  the engine permitted  by  the governor, or of 
50 km/h, whichever  is the slowest. 

2.2.4.4.2. 

Vehicle with manual  gearbox 

If the vehicle  is fitted with  a gearbox  with  two, three or 
four  ratios, second  gear must  be used.  If the gearbox  has 
more  than  four  ratios, third gear must  be used.  If the engine 
then reaches a speed of  rotation beyond  its maximum  power 
rating,  instead of  second or  third gear  the next  higher  gear 
to allow  line BB' on  the test  track  to be  reached  without 
exceeding  this rating must  be engaged.  Overdrive must  not be 
selected.  If the vehicle has a dual-ratio  final  drive, the 
ratio selected must  be that  corresponding  to the highist  speed 
of  the vehicle.  The vehicle must  approach  line AA' at a 
steady  speed  corresponding  either  to three-quarters of  the 
engine  rotation speed at which  the engine develops  its maximum 
power or  to three-quarters of  the maximum engine  rotation 
speed  permitted  by  the governor, or  at 50 km/h, whichever  is 
the slowest. 

2.2.4.4.3. 

Vehicle with  automatic gearbox 

The vehicle must  approach  line AA' at a steady  speed of 
50 km/h or  three-quarters of  its maximum speed, whichever  is 
the slowest.  Where several  forward  drive positions  are 
available, that  producing  the highest  average  acceleration of 
the vehicle between  lines AA' and BB' must  be selected.  The 
selector  position  that  is used only  for  braking, manoeuvring 
or  similar  slow movements must  not be used. 

-  430  -

2.2.5. 

Results  (test  report) 

2.2.5.1. 

The  test  report  drawn  up  for  the  purpose  of  issuing  the 
document  referred  to  in Appendix  1B must  indicate  any 
circumstances  and  influences  affecting  the  results of  the 
measurements. 

2.2.5.2. 

Readings  taken  from  the sound-level  meter  must  be  corrected  in 
accordance  with  2.2.3.3.  The  corrected  values must  be  rounded 
off  to  the nearest  decibel. 

2.2.5.3. 

2.2.5.4. 

Only  those measurements  whose  variation  in two  consecutive 
tests on  the same  side of  the  vehicle  is  less than or  equal  to 
2 dB(A) may  be used  for  the purpose  of  issuing  the  document 
referred  to  in Appendix  1B. 

To  take  account  of  inaccuracies  in the measurements,  the 
result -of each  measurement  must  be arrived  at  by  deducting 
1  dB(A)  from  the  value obtained  in accordance  with  2.1.5.2. 

If the average of  the  four  results of  the measurements  does 
not  exceed  the maximum  permissible  level  for  the  category  to 
which  the  vehicle  being  tested  belongs,  the  limit  laid  down  in 
2.2.1. will  be deemed  as being  complied  with.  This  average 
value  will  constitute  the  result  of  the  test. 

If the  four  results of  the measurements  do not  exceed  the 
maximum  permissible  level  for  the  category  to which  the 
motorcycle  being  tested  belongs,  the  limit  laid  down  in  2.2.1 
will  be  deemed  as being  complied  with. 

If one of  the  four  results  exceeds  the maximum  permissible 
level  by  not  more  than  1 dB(A),  a second  series of  four 
measurements  will  be  taken.  In this  case  the  limit  laid  down 
in 2.2.1  will  only  be  deemed  as  being  complied  with  if  the 
four  new  results  are  less  than or  equal  to  the maximum 
permissible  level. 

In all  other  cases,  the  limit  laid  down  in 2.2.1  will  be 
deemed  as not  being  complied  with. 

2.3. 

Measurement  of  the noise  of  the  stationary  vehicle  (for 
testing  the  vehicle  in use) 

2.3.1. 

Sound-pressure  level  in the  immediate  vicinity  of  the  vehicle 

In order  to  facilitate subsequent  noise  tests on  vehicles  in 
use,  the sound-pressure  level  must  also be measured  in the 
immediate  vicinity  of  the exhaust-system  outlet  (silencer) in 
accordance  with  the  following  requirements,  the  result  of  the 
measurement  being  entered  in the  test  report  drawn  up  for  the 
purpose  of  issuing  the document  referred  to  in Appendix  1B. 

2.3.2. 

Measuring  instruments 

A precision  sound-level  meter  conforming  in accuracy  to  the 
provisions of  item  2.2.2.1. must  be  used. 

-  431  -

2.3.3. 

Conditions of  measurement 

2.3.3.1. 

Condition of  the  vehicle 

Before  the measurements  are made  the  vehicle  engine  must  be 
brought  to  the normal  operating  temperature.  If  the  vehicle  is 
fitted  with  fans with  an  automatic  actuating mechanism,  this 
system  must  not  be  interfered  with  during  the  sound 
measurements. 

The  vehicle must  be placed  at  the centre  of  the  test  area  with 
the gears  in neutral  and  the clutch  engaged.  If the design  of 
the  vehicle  does not  allow  this, the  vehicle  must  be  tested  in 
accordance  with  the manufacturer's  instructions  for  testing 
the engine  when  stationary. 

2.3.3.2. 

Test  site  (see  Figure  2) 

Any  area  in which  there  are no significant  acoustic 
disturbances  may  be used  as a  test  site.  Flat  surfaces  which 
are  covered  with  concrete,  asphalt  or  some other  hard  material 
and  are  highly  reflective  are  suitable;  surfaces  consisting  of 
earth  which  has been  tamped  down must  not  be used.  The  test 
site must  be  in the  form of  a  rectangle  whose  sides  are at 
least  3 m  from  the outer  edge of  the  vehicle  (handlebars 
excluded).  There must  be no  significant  obstacles, e.g.  no 
persons other  than  the  rider  and  the observer  may  stand  within 
this  rectangle.  The  vehicle  must  be  positioned  within  the 
said  rectangle  so  that  the microphone  used  for  measurement  is 
at  least  1 m  from  any  kerb. 

2.3.3.3. 

Mi see 11aneous 

Readings  of  the measuring  instrument  caused  by  ambient  noise 
and  wind  effects must  be  at  least  10 dB(A)  lower  than  the 
sound  levels  to be measured.  A  suitable windshield  may  be 
fitted  to  the microphone  provided  that  account  is taken of  its 
effect  on  the sensitivity  of  the  microphone. 

2.3.4. 

Method  of  measurement 

2.3.4.1. 

Number  of  measurements 

At  least  three measurements  must  be  taken  at  each  measurement 
point.  The measurements  will  be  regarded  as valid only  if  the 
difference  between  the  results of  three measurements  carried 
out  in  immediate  succession  is no greater  than  2 dB(A).  The 
highest  value  from  the  three measurements  will  be  taken. 

2.3.4.2. 

Positioning  of  the microphone  (Figure  2) 

The microphone  must  be positioned  level  with  the  exhaust 
outlet  or  0.2  m above  the  surface  of  the  track, whichever  is 
the  highest.  The microphone  diaphragm  must  face  towards  the 
exhaust  outlet  at  a distance  of  0.5  m  from  it.  The  axis of 
maximum  sensitivity  of  the microphone  must  be  parallel  to  the 
surface  of  the  track  at  an  angle  of  45 ±  10*  to  the  vertical 
plane  of  the  direction  of  the exhaust  emissions. 

- 432 -

In relation to this vertical plane, the microphone must be 
located on the side which gives the maximum possible distance 
between the microphone and the outline of the vehicle 
(handlebars excluded). 

If the exhaust system has more than one outlet at centres less 
than 0.3 m apart, the microphone must be faced towards the 
outlet which  is nearest the vehicle (handlebars excluded) or 
towards the outlet which  is highest above the surface of the 
track,  if the centres of the outlets are more than 0.3 m 
apart, separate measurements must be taken for each of them, 
the highest figure recorded being taken as the test value. 

2.3.4.3. 

Operating conditions 

The engine speed must be held steady at one of the following 
values: 

-  1/2 S if S is more than 5 000 rev/min, 

-  3/4 S  if S is not more than 5 000 rev/min, 

where S is the speed referred to in 3.2.1.7 of Appendix 1A. 

When a constant engine speed  is reached, the throttle must be 
returned swiftly to the idle position.  The sound  level must 
be measured during an operating cycle consisting of a brief 
period of constant engine speed and throughout the 
deceleration period, the maximum sound-level meter reading 
being taken as the test value. 

2.4. 

RESULTS (TEST REPORT) 

2.4.1. 

The test report drawn up for the purpose of  issuing the 
document referred to in Appendix 1B must  indicate all relevant 
data and particularly those used  in measuring the noise of the 
stationary vehicle. 

2.4.2. 

Values, rounded off to the nearest decibel, must be read off 
the measuring  instrument. 

Only those measurements which vary by no more than 2 dB(A) in 
three consecutive tests will be used. 

2.4.3. 

The average of the three measurements will constitute the test 
result. 

(27 

-  433  -

Figure 1 
Positions  for  testing  the vehicle  in motion 

2.5. 

2.5.1. 

2.5.1.1 

2.5.2. 

2.5.3. 

2.5.3.1 

2.5.3.2 

2.5.3.3 

434 -

ORIGINAL EXHAUST SYSTEM (SILENCER) 

Requirements for silencers containing absorbent fibrous 
mater i a Is 

Absorbent fibrous material must be asbestos-free and may be 
used  in the construction of silencers only  if it is securely 
held  in place throughout the service  life of the silencer and 
it meets the requirements of any one of sections 2.3.2, 2.3.3 
or 2.3.4 of Annex  I I. 

After removal of the fibrous material, the sound  level must 
comply with the requirements of 2.2.1. 

The absorbent fibrous material may not be placed  in those 
parts of the silencer through which the exhaust gases pass and 
must comply with the following requirements. 

The material must be heated at a temperature of 650 ± 5 *C for 
four hours in a furnace without reduction  in average length, 
diameter or bulk density of the fibre. 

After heating at 650 ± 5 *C for one hour  in a furnace, at 
least 98% of the material must be retained  in a sieve of 
nominal mesh size 250 /urn complying with  ISO standard 3310/1 
when tested  In accordance with  ISO standard 2599. 

The  loss in weight of the material must not exceed 10.5% after 
soaking for 24 hours at 90 ± 5 "C in a synthetic condensate of 
the following composition: 

1 N hydrobromic acid  (HBr): 10 ml; 
1 N sulphuric acid (H2S04): 10 ml; 
Dist iI led water to make up to 1 000 ml. 

Note: The material must be washed  in distilled water and dried 

for one hour at 105 'C before weighing. 

2.5.4. 

Before the system  is tested  in accordance with section 2, it 
must be put  into normal working order by one of the following 
methods: 

2.5.4.1 

Conditioning by continuous road operation 

2.5.4.1.1 

The table shows the minimum distance to be travelled for each 
category of vehicle during conditioning. 

Category of vehicle by 
cylinder capacity  (cm3) 

Distance (km) 

1.  < 250 
2.  > 250  <  500 
3.  > 500 

4 000 
6 000 
8 000 

-  435 -

2.5.4.1.2. 

50% ±  10% of  this conditioning  cycle must  consist  of  town 
driving  and  the remainder  of  long-distance  runs  at  high  speed; 
the continuous  road cycle may  be  replaced  by a  corresponding 
test-track  programme. 

2.5.4.1.3. 

The  two speed  regimes must  be alternated  at  least  six  times. 

2.5.4.1.4. 

The complete  test  programme  must  include at  least  10 breaks 
lasting  at  least  three hours  in order  to reproduce  the effects 
of  cooling  and  condensation. 

2.5.4.2. 

Conditioning  by  pulsation 

2.5.4.2.1. 

The exhaust  system or  components  thereof  must  be  fitted  to the 
vehicle or  to the engine. 

2.5.4.2.2. 

2.5.4.2.3. 

In the  former  case, the vehicle must  be mounted  on  a roller 
dynamometer.  In the second  case, the engine must  be mounted 
on  a  test  bench. 

The  test  apparatus, as shown  in detail  in Figure  3,  is fitted 
at  the outlet  of  the exhaust  system.  Any other  apparatus 
giving  equivalent  results  is acceptable. 

The  test  equipment  must  be adjusted  so  that  the  flow of 
exhaust  gases  is alternately  interrupted  and  restored  2 500 
times by a rapid-action  valve. 

The  valve must  open when  the exhaust  gas  back-pressure, 
measured  at  least  100 mm  downstream  of  the  intake  flange, 
reaches a value of  between 0.35  and 0.40  bar.  Should  such a 
figure  be unattainable  because of  the engine  characteristics, 
the valve must  open when  the gas back-pressure  reaches a  level 
equivalent  to 90% of  the maximum  that  can be measured  before 
the engine  stops.  It must  close when  this pressure  differs by 
no more  than  10% from  its stabilized  value with  the  valve 
open. 

2.5.4.2.4. 

The  time-lapse  relay must  be set  for  the duration of  exhaust 
gases  calculated  on  the basis of  the  requirements of 
2.5.4.2.3. 

2.5.4.2.5. 

Engine speed must  be 75% of  the speed  (S) at which  the engine 
develops maximum  power. 

2.5.4.2.6. 

The power  indicated  by  the dynamometer  must  be  50% of  the 
full-throttle power measured  at  75% of  engine  speed (S). 

2.5.4.2.7. 

Any  drainage  holes must  be closed  off  during  the  test. 

2.5.4.2.8. 

The entire  test must  be completed  within  48 hours.  If 
necessary, a cooling  period  must  be allowed  after  each  hour. 

- 436 -

2.5.4.3. 

Conditioning on a test bench 

2.5.4.3.1. 

The exhaust system must be fitted to an engine representative 
of the type fitted to the vehicle for which the system is 
designed, and mounted on a test bench. 

2.5.4.3.2. 

Conditioning consists of the specified number of test bench 
cycles for the category of vehicle for which the exhaust 
system was designed.  The table shows the number of cycles for 
each category of vehicle. 

Category of vehicle by 
cylinder capacity (cm3) 

Number of 
cycles 

1.  < 250 
2.  > 250  <  500 
3.  > 500 

6 
9 
12 

2.5.4.3.3. 

Each test-bench cycle must be followed by a break of at least 
6 hours  in order to reproduce the effects of cooling and 
condensât ion. 

2.5.4.3.4. 

Each test-bench cycle consists of six phases.  The engine 
conditions and duration are as follows for each phase: 

Phase 

Conditions 

Duration of phase 

Engines of 
less than 
250 cm3 
(minutes) 

Engines of 
250 cm3 
or more 
(minutes) 

1 
2 
3 
4 
5 
6 

Idling 
25% load at  75% S 
50% load at  75% S 
100% load at  75% S 
50% load at 100% S 
25% load at 100% S 

6 
40 
40 
30 
12 
22 

6 
50 
50 
10 
12 
22 

Total  time: 

2 hours 30 

2 hours 30 

2.5.4.3.5. 

During this conditioning procedure, at the request of the 
manufacturer, the engine and the silencer may be cooled in 
order  that the temperature recorded at a point not more than 
100 mm from the exhaust gas outlet does not exceed that 
measured when the vehicle  is running at 110 km/h or 75% S in 
top gear.  The engine and/or vehicle speeds must be 
determined with an accuracy of ± 3%. 

-  437  -

Figure  3 

Test  apparatus  for  conditioning  by  pulsation 

1.  Inlet  flange or  sleeve  for  connection  to  the  rear  of  the  test  exhaust 

system. 

2.  Hand-operated  regulating  valve. 

3.  Compensating  reservoir  with  a maximum  capacity  of  40  I and  a  filling 

time of  not  less  than  1  second. 

4.  Pressure  switch  with  an operating  range  of  0.05  to  2.5  bar. 

5.  Time  delay  switch. 

6.  Pulse  counter. 

7.  Quick-acting  valve,  such  as exhaust  brake  valve  60 mm  in  diameter, 

operated  by  a pneumatic  cylinder  with  an output  of  120 N at  4 bar.  The 
response  time,  for  opening  and  closing,  must  not  exceed  0.5  second. 

8.  Exhaust  gas  évaluât ion. 

9.  Flexible  hose. 

10  Pressure  gauge. 

-  438 -

2.5.5. 

Diagram  and  markings 

2.5.5.1. 

2.5.5.2. 

2.5.5.3. 

A  diagram  of  the exhaust  system  must  be annexed  to  the 
document  referred  to  in Appendix  1A. 

All  original  silencers must  be  legibly  and  indelibly  marked 
with  the make  and  type  reference  . 

Any  packing  of original  replacement  silencer  systems must  be 
marked  legibly  with  the words  "original  part" and  the make  and 
type  references. 

2.5.6. 

Intake  silencer 

If the engine  intake has  to be  fitted  with  an air  filter 
and/or  intake  silencer  in order  to comply  with  the  permissible 
sound  level, the  filter  and/or  silencer  must  be  regarded  as 
part  of  the silencer  and  the  requirements of  section  2.3 will 
also  apply  to  them. 

3. 

COMPONENT TYPE-APPROVAL  OF A NON-ORIGINAL  EXHAUST SYSTEM OR 
COMPONENTS THEREOF, AS TECHNICAL UNITS, FOR  THREE-WHEELED 
MOPEDS AND  TRICYCLES 

3.0. 

SCOPE 

This  point  applies  to the component  type-approval,  as 
technical  units, of  exhaust  systems or  components  thereof 
intended  to be  fitted  to one or  more  particular  types of 
three-wheeled mopeds and  tricycles as non-original  replacement 
parts. 

DEFINITION 

"Non-original  replacement  exhaust  system  or  components 
thereof" means  any exhaust  system  component  as defined  in 
section  1.2 of  this Annex  intended  to be  fitted  to a 
three-wheeled  moped or  tricycle  to  replace  that  of  the  type 
fitted  to  the  three-wheeled moped  or  tricycle when  the 
document  provided  for  in Appendix  1B was  issued. 

APPLICATION  FOR COMPONENT  TYPE-APPROVAL 

Applications  for  component  type-approval  for  replacement 
exhaust  systems or  components  thereof  as  technical  units must 
be  submitted  by  the manufacturer  of  the system or  by  his 
authorized  representative. 

For  each  type of  replacement  exhaust  system or  components 
thereof  for which  approval  is requested,  the application  for 
component  type-approval  must  be accompanied  by  the  following 
documents  in triplicate, and  by  the  following  particulars: 

3.1. 

3.1.1. 

3.2. 

3.2.1. 

3.2.2. 

3.2.2.1. 

-  description,  in respect  of  the characteristics  referred  to 
in section  1.1  of  this Annex, of  the  type(s) of  vehicle  for 
which  the system(s) or  component(s)  is/are  intended; 

-  the numbers  and/or  symbols  specific  to the  type of  engine 

and  vehicle must  be given; 

-  439  -

3.2.2.2. 

-  description  of  the  replacement  exhaust  system  stating  the 

relative  positions of  each  of  its components,  together  with 
the  fitting  instructions; 

3.2.2.3. 

-  drawings  of  each  component  to  facilitate  location  and 

identification, and  statement  of materials  used.  These 
drawings  must  also  indicate  the  intended  location of  the 
mandatory  component  type-approval  number. 

3.2.3. 

The  applicant  must  submit,  at  the  request  of  the  technical 
author ity: 

3.2.3.1. 

-  two samples  of  the  system  for which  component  type-approval 

is  requested, 

3.2.3.2. 

-  an exhaust  system  conforming  to  that  originally  fitted  to 
the  vehicle  when  the document  provided  for  in Appendix  1B 
was  issued, 

3.2.3.3. 

-  a vehicle  representative of  the  type  to which  the 

replacement  exhaust  system  is to be  fitted,  supplied  in 
such  a condition  that, when  fitted  with  a silencer  of  the 
same  type  as was originally  fitted,  it meets  the 
requirements  of  either  of  the  following  two  sections: 

3.2.3.3.1. 

if  the  vehicle  referred  to  in 3.2.3.3.  is of  a  type which  has 
been  granted  type-approval  pursuant  to  the provisions of  this 
chapter: 

-  during  the  test  in motion,  it does  not  exceed  by more  than 
1  dB(A)  the  limit  value  laid  down  in section  2.2.1.3  of 
this  Annex, 

-  during  the  stationary  test,  it does  not  exceed  by more  than 
3  dB(A)  the  value  indicated  on  the manufacturer's  rating 
plate; 

3.2.3.3.2. 

if  the  vehicle  referred  to  in 3.2.3.3.  is not  of  a  type  which 
has been  granted  type-approval  pursuant  to  the  provisions  of 
this  chapter  it does not  exceed  by more  than  1 dB(A)  the  limit 
value  applicable  to that  type of  vehicle  when  it was  first  put 
into  service; 

3.2.3.4. 

-  a separate  engine  identical  to  that  fitted  to  the  vehicle 

referred  to above, where  the competent  authorities deem  it 
necessary. 

3.3. 

3.3.1. 

MARKINGS  AND  INSCRIPTIONS 

Non-original  exhaust  systems or  components  thereof  must  be 
marked  in accordance  with  the  requirements  of  Annex  VI. 

-  440  -

3.4. 

COMPONENT TYPE-APPROVAL 

3.4.1. 

Upon completion of the tests laid down  in this chapter, the 
competent authority will  issue a certificate corresponding to 
the model shown  in Appendix 2B.  The component type-approval 
number must be preceded by a rectangle surrounding the letter 
"e" followed by the distinguishing number or  letters of the 
Member State which  issued or refused the component type-
approval . 

3.5. 

SPECIFICATIONS 

3.5.1. 

General specifications 

The design, construction and mounting of the silencer must be 
such that: 

3.5.1.1. 

-  the vehicle complies with the requirements of the chapter 

under normal conditions of use, and  in particular 
regardless of any vibrations to which  it may be subjected; 

3.5.1.2. 

-  it displays reasonable resistance to the corrosion 

phenomena to which it is exposed, with due regard to the 
normal conditions of use of the vehicle, 

3.5.1.3. 

-  the ground clearance available under the silencer 

originally fitted, and the angle at which the vehicle can 
lean over, are not reduced, 

3.5.1.4. 

-  the surface does not reach unduly high temperatures, 

3.5.1.5. 

-  its outline has no projections or sharp edges, 

3.5.1.6. 

-  springs have adequate clearance, 

3.5.1.7. 

-  adequate safety clearance  is provided for pipes, 

3.5.1.8. 

-  it is impact-resistant  in a way that  is compatible with 

clearly-defined maintenance and  installation requirements. 

3.5.2. 

Specifications for sound levels 

3.5.2.1. 

The acoustic efficiency of the replacement exhaust systems or 
components thereof must be tested using the methods described 
in sections 2.3, 2.4, 2.5 and 2.6 of this Annex. 

With a replacement exhaust system or component thereof fitted 
to the vehicle referred to in section 3.2.3.3 of this Annex, 
the sound-level values obtained must meet the following 
conditions: 

3.5.2.1.1. 

they must not exceed the sound-1 eve I values measured, in 
accordance with the provisions of 3.2.3.3, using the same 
vehicle fitted with the original equipment silencer both 
during the test  in motion and during the stationary test. 

-  441  -

3.5.3. 

Testing  of  vehicle  performance 

3.5.3.1. 

3.5.3.2. 

3.5.3.3. 

The  replacement  silencer  must  be such  as  to ensure  that  the 
vehicle's  performance  is comparable  to  that  achieved  with  the 
original  silencer  or  component  thereof. 

The  replacement  silencer  must  be  compared  with  an originally-
fitted  silencer,  also  in new  condition,  fitted  in turn  to  the 
vehicle  referred  to  in  3.2.3.3. 

This  test  is carried out  by measuring  the engine  power  curve. 
The  net  maximum  power  and  the  top speed  measured  with  the 
replacement  silencer  must  not  exceed  the net  maximum  power  and 
top  speed  measured  under  the same  conditions  with  the  original 
equipment  exhaust  system  by more  than  5%. 

3.5.4. 

Additional  provisions  relating  to silencers  as  technical  units 
containing  fibrous material 

Fibrous material  may  not  be used  in the  construction of  such 
silencers  unless  the  requirements  set  out  in section  2.7.1  of 
this Annex  are  met. 

-  442 -

APPENDIX 1A 

INFORMATION  SHEET 

REGARDING  THE PERMISSIBLE  SOUND LEVEL AND ORIGINAL  EXHAUST  SYSTEM 
OF A TYPE OF THREE-WHEELED MOPED OR TRICYCLE 

(to be attached  to the application  for component  type-approval  where  this  is 
submitted  separately  from  the application  for  vehicle  type-approval) 

(mode I) 

Order  No  (allocated by  applicant) 

The application  for  component  type-approval  regarding  the permissible  sound 
level  and original  exhaust  system of  a type of  three-wheeled moped or 
tricycle must  include  the details  listed  in Annex  IJ  to Council  Directive 
92/61/EEC of  30 June  1992, Section A, points: 

0.1 
0.2 
0.5 
0.6 
2.1 
3 
3.0 
3.1 
3.1.1 
3.2.1.7 
3.2.8.3.3 
3.2.8.3.3.1 
3.2.8.3.3.2 
3.2.9 
3.2.9.1 
4 
4.1 
4.2 
4.3 
4.4 
4.4.1 
4.4.2 
4.5 
4.6 
5.2 

- 443 -

APPENDIX 1B 

Name of administration 

CERTIFICATE OF COMPONENT TYPE-APPROVAL 

REGARDING THE PERMISSIBLE SOUND LEVEL AND ORIGINAL EXHAUST SYSTEM(S) 
OF A TYPE OF THREE-WHEELED MOPED OR TRICYCLE 

Model 

Report No 

of the technical authority 

date: 

1. 

Trade name or trade mark of vehicle: 

2. 

Type of vehicle: 

3. 

Variant(s) (if any): 

4. 

Version(s) (if any): 

5. 

Name and address of manufacturer: 

6. 

Name and address of manufacturer's authorized representative (if any) 

7. 

Original exhaust system type(s): 

8. 

9. 

Intake system type(s) (where essential  to observe sound  level  limit): 

Noise  level of the vehicle when stationary: 

dB(A) at: 

rpm. 

10. 

Vehicle submitted for testing on: 

11. 

Component type-approval granted/refused1 

12. 

Place: 

13. 

Date: 

14. 

Signature: 

1  Delete where not applicable. 

-  444 -

APPENDIX 2A 

INFORMATION  SHEET 

FOR A NON-ORiGINAL  EXHAUST  SYSTEM OR  COMPONENT(S) THEREOF, 
AS TECHNICAL  UNIT(S),  FOR  THREE-WHEELED  MOPEDS OR  TRICYCLES 

(model) 

Order  No  (allocated  by  applicant) 

The application  for  component  type-approval  for  a non-original  exhaust  system 
for  three-wheeled mopeds or  tricycles must  include the  following  details: 

1. 

Make: 

2. 

Type: 

3. 

Name and  address of  manufacturer: 

4. 

5. 

6. 

Name and  address of  the manufacturer's authorized  representative  (if 
any): 
Component  list of  the  technical  unit  (attach  drawings): 

Make(s) and  type(s) of  vehicle(s) for which  the silencer  is 
designed:1^ 

7. 

Any  restrictions on use and  fitting  instructions: 

In addition,  the application must  include  the details  listed  in Annex  II to 
Council  Directive  92/61/EEC of  30 June  1992, Section A, points: 

0.1 
0.2 
0.5 
0.6 
2.1 
3 
3.0 
3.1 
3.1.1 
3.2.1.7 
4 
4.1 
4.2 
4.3 
4.4 
4.4.1 
4.4.2 
4.5 
4.6 
5.2 

1)  Delete where  not  applicable. 

- 445 -

APPENDIX 2B 

Name of administration 

CERTIFICATE OF COMPONENT TYPE-APPROVAL 

FOR A NON-ORIGINAL EXHAUST SYSTEM FOR 
THREE-WHEELED MOPEDS OR TRICYCLES 

Model 

Report No 

of the technical authority 

date: 

1. 

Make of exhaust: 

2. 

Type of exhaust: 

3. 

Name and address of manufacturer: 

4. 

5. 

Name and address of the manufacturer's authorized representative 
(if any): 

Make(s) and type(s) and any variant(s) or version(s) of the vehicle(s) 
for which the exhaust system  is designed: 

6. 

System submitted for testing on: 

7. 

Component type-approval granted/refused1 

8. 

Place: 

9. 

Date: 

10. 

Signature: 

1  Delete where not applicable. 

-  446 -

ANNEX V 

PRODUCTION CONFORMITY  REQUIREMENTS 

1.  VEHICLE  CONFORMITY 

Any vehicle manufactured  must  conform  to a type of vehicle  approved 
pursuant  to this chapter, be equipped with  the silencer with which  it was 
type-approved  and satisfy the requirements of section 2 of  the Annex 
relating to the type of  vehicle concerned. 

In order  to test conformity as required above, a sample vehicle will  be 
taken from  the production  line of  the type approved  pursuant  to this 
chapter.  Production will  be regarded  as conforming  to the provisions of 
this chapter  if the sound  level measured  using  the method  described  in 
section 2.1  of each Annex  does not exceed  by more  than 3 dB(A) the value 
measured  at  the time of  type-approval, nor by more  than  1 dB(A) the 
limits  laid down  in this chapter. 

2.  CONFORMITY OF A NON-ORIGINAL REPLACEMENT EXHAUST SYSTEM 

Any exhaust  system manufactured must  conform  to a type approved  pursuant 
to this chapter  and satisfy  the requirements of section  3 of  the Annex 
relating  to the type of vehicle  for which  it  is  intended. 

In order  to test  conformity  as required  above, a sample exhaust  will  be 
taken  from  the production  line of  the type approved  pursuant  to this 
chapter. 

Production will  be regarded  as conforming  to the provisions of  this 
chapter  if the requirements of sections 3.5.2  and 3.5.3  of each Annex  are 
satisfied and  if the sound  level measured using  the method  described  in 
section 2.1  of each Annex  does not exceed  by more  than 3 dB(A) the value 
measured  at  the time of  type-approval, nor  by more  than  1 dB(A) the 
limits  laid down  in this chapter. 

- 447 -

ANNEX VI 

MARKING REQUIREMENTS 

1. 

Non-original exhaust system or components thereof, but not the 
mounting parts and pipes, must bear: 

1.1.  the trade name or mark of the manufacturer of the exhaust system and 

its components, 

1.2.  the brand name given by the manufacturer. 

1.3.  the component  type-approval mark composed and affixed  in accordance 

with the requirements of Annex V to the EEC Directive on the type-
approval of two- or three-wheeled motor vehicles. 

2. 

3. 

4. 

The marks referred to in 1.1 and 1.3 and the name referred to in 1.2 
must be  indelible and clearly  legible even when the exhaust system is 
fitted to the vehicle. 

A component may bear several  type-approval numbers  if it has been 
type-approved as a component of several replacement exhaust systems. 

The replacement exhaust system must be supplied with packaging or 
labelling bearing the following: 

4.1 

the trade name or mark of the manufacturer of the replacement silencer 
and  its components; 

4.2.  the address of the manufacturer or of the manufacturer's authorized 

representative; 

4.3.  a list of the motorcycle models to which the replacement silencer is 

intended to be fitted. 

5. 

The manufacturer must supply the following; 

5.1. 

instructions describing  in detail the correct methods of fitting to 
the motorcycle; 

5.2.  instructions on how the silencer should be maintained; 

5.3.  a list of component parts with the corresponding part numbers, 

excluding mounting parts. 

- 448 -

CHAPTER 10 

TRAILER COUPLING DEVICES FOR 

TWO OR THREE-WHEEL MOTOR VEHICLES 

AND MOTORCYCLE SIDECAR ATTACHMENTS 

(26 

ANNEX 

COUPLING  DEVICES  FOR  TRAILERS  TOWED  BY TWO OR 

THREE-WHEEL  MOTOR  VEHICLES 

1. 

Coupling  devices  shall  be  so designed  and  manufactured  that  they 

meet  the mobility  conditions  defined  in point  2 and  the  strength 

conditions  defined  in point  3. 

2. 

Mobility  conditions 

Coupling  devices  for  trailers  towed  by  two or  three-wheel  motor 

vehicles  shall  be  capable  of  angular  displacement  of  90*  in a 

horizontal  plane  either  side of  the median  longitudinal  plane  of  the 

towing  vehicle  and  15'  in a vertical  plane  above  and  below  a 

horizontal  plane. 

Moreover,  the  device  must  permit  lateral  inclination of  the  towing 

vehicle,  to  left  or  right, of  at  least  40*  in relation  to  the 

vertical  in the  case  of  a  two-wheel  vehicle  and  at  least  15*  in 

relation  to  the  vertical  in the  case of  a  three-wheel  vehicle. 

However,  this  latter  requirement  does  not  apply  if  the  device  is 

intended  for  a single-wheel  trailer. 

3. 

Strength  conditions 

3.1. 

Longitudinal  strength 

The  coupling  device  must  be  capable  of  withstanding,  without 

breakage  or  permanent  deformation  of  the  coupling  or  its mounting,  a 

horizontal  force  FL  applied  at  the  centre  of  articulation  and 

directed  towards  the  front  and  then  towards  the  rear. 

FL,  expressed  in Newtons,  is given  by  the  following  formula  : 

-0£>-

FL -  1.5  Me 

where 

M - 

total  mass  in kg of  the  trailer  when carrying  the maximum  load 

provided  for  by  its manufacturer; 

c  - 

average maximum  deceleration  in m/s, of which  the  towing 

vehicle  is capable  in the type 0 braking  test  as defined  in 

Appendix  1 to the Annex  to Directive 93/..../EEC on  the 

braking of  two or  three-wheel  motor  vehicles. 

3.2. 

Vertical  strength 

The coupling device must  be capable of withstanding,  without 

breakage or  permanent  deformation of  the coupling  or  its mounting, a 

vertical  force  Fv of  0.1  FL applied  at  the centre of  articulation 

and  directed  upwards  and  then downwards. 

3.3 

Transverse  strength 

The coupling  device must  be capable of withstanding, without 

breakage  or  permanent  deformation of  the coupling  or  its mounting, a 

transverse  force  Ft of  0.1  FL perpendicular  to the median 

longitudinal  plane of  the towing  vehicle, applied  at  the centre of 

articulation  and  directed  to the  left and  then  to the right. 

APPENDIX 1 

INFORMATION  DOCUMENT 

IN RESPECT OF COUPLING DEVICES FOR TRAILERS TOWED BY 

A TYPE OF TWO OR THREE-WHEEL MOTOR  VEHICLE 

(To be attached  to the application  for component  type-approval  where  this  is 

submitted  separately  from  the application for vehicle  type-approval) 

Serial  No  (assigned  by  the applicant) : 

The application  for  component  type-approval  in respect of coupling devices for 

trailers  towed  by a  type of  two or  three-wheel  motor  vehicle shall  contain  the 

information  set out  in Annex  II to Directive 92/61/EEC of  30 June  1992  in 

Sect ion A, points: 

0.1 

0.2 

0.4  to  0.6 

9.1  to 9.1.2 

APPENDIX 2 

Name of administration 

CERTIFICATE OF COMPONENT TYPE-APPROVAL 

IN RESPECT OF SIDECAR ATTACHMENTS FOR A 

TYPE OF MOTORCYCLE 

MODEL 

Report No 

by testing body 

Date 

Component type approvaI No 

Extens ion No 

1. 

Make or trade name of vehicle : 

2. 

3. 

Type of vehicle  : 

Manufacturer's name and address 

4. 

Name and address of manufacturer's representative (if any) 

5. 

6. 

7. 

8. 

9. 

Vehicle submitted for test on : 

Component type-approval granted/refused^*^ 

Place : 

Date 

Signature : 

(*) 

Delete as appropriate 

ANNEX il 

ATTACHMENTS FOR MOTORCYCLE  SIDECARS 

1. 

If a motorcycle  is fitted with sidecar  attachments these must meet 

the strength  conditions described  in points 3.1  to 3.3. 

2. 

Test  device 

The motorcycle shall  rest on a horizontal  plane,  Its median 

longitudinal  plane being vertical. 

It shall  be  immobilized by means of multiple supports acting 

preferably on  the tyres, saddle,  luggage carrier, wheel  spindles, 

handlebar  and steering column. 

As many  supports as are necessary  shall  be used  to ensure  that  the 

vehicle  is adequately  immobilized. 

A  test  frame, as depicted by way of example  in Appendix  1, shall be 

fitted  to the motorcycle by means of  the attachments to be  tested. 

The  frame shall  have a point  0 situated  1.25 m  from  the median 

longitudinal  plane of  the motorcycle and 0.3 m above  the  horizontal 

plane of support of  the motorcycle. 

Point 0 shall, moreover, be  located  in a transverse plane  lying 

between  the spindles of  the front and  rear wheels of  the motorcycle 

such  that  the distance between  that plane and  the rear wheel  spindle 

Is one  third of  the distance between that plane and  the front wheel 

spindle. 

3. 

Strength  conditions 

3.1. 

Vertical  stressing : 

The attachments must  be capable of withstanding, without  breakage or 

permanent  deformation of  themselves or  the motorcycle  frame, a 

vertical  force  Fv directed  upwards and  then downwards  and  applied at 

point  0 on  the  test  device  described  in point  2. 

Fv, expressed  in Newtons,  is given  by  the  following  formula  : 

Fv -  10  (M + C) 

where 

M - 

the mass  in kg of  the sidecar  as stated  by  the manufacturer; 

C - 

the maximum  load  in kg which  the sidecar  may  carry, as 

provided  for  by  the manufacturer, each  passenger  being  taken 

to weigh  75 kg. 

3.2. 

Transverse  stressing  : 

The attachments must  be be capable of withstanding, without  breakage 

or  permanent  deformation of  themselves or  the motorcycle  frame, a 

horizontal,  transverse  force  Ft of  0.3  Fv directed  towards  the 

motorcycle  and  then away  from  the motorcycle, applied  at  point  0 of 

the  test  device  described  in point  2. 

3.3. 

Longitudinal  stressing  : 

The attachments must  be capable of withstanding, without  breakage or 

permanent  deformation of  themselves or  the motorcycle  frame, a 

longitudinal  force FL directed  towards  the  front  and  then  towards 

the  rear, applied  at  point  0. 

-w-

FL, expressed  in Newtons,  is given  by  the  following  formula  : 

FL -  1.5  (M + C)c 

where 

c  -  average  maximum  deceleration  in m/s, of which  the  towing 

vehicle  is capable  in the  type  0 braking  test  as defined  in 

Appendix  1 to  the Annex  to Directive 93/ 

/EEC on  the 

braking  of  two or  three-wheel  motor  vehicles. 

APPENDIX 1 

Testing device 

1.25m 

-w7-
APPENDIX  2 

INFORMATION  DOCUMENT 

IN RESPECT OF  SIDECAR  ATTACHMENTS 

FOR A TYPE OF  MOTORCYCLE 

(To be attached  to  the application  for  component  type-approval  where  this  is 

submitted  separately  from  the application  for  vehicle  type  approval) 

Serial  No  (assigned  by  the applicant) : 

The  application  for  component  type-approval  in respect  of  sidecar  attachments 

for  a  type of motorcycle  shall  contain  the  information  set  out  in Annex  II to 

Directive  92/61/EEC of  30 June  1992  in Section A, points  : 

0.1 

0.2 

0.4  to  0.6 

and  in Section B, points  1.3  and  1.3.1 

APPENDIX 3 

Name of administration 

CERTIFICATE OF COMPONENT TYPE-APPROVAL 

IN RESPECT OF SIDECAR ATTACHMENTS FOR A 

TYPE OF MOTORCYCLE 

MODEL 

Report No 

by testing body 

Date 

Component type approvaI No 

Extension No 

1. 

Make or trade name of vehicle 

2. 

3. 

Type of vehicle : 

Manufacturer's name and address 

4. 

Name and address of manufacturer's representative (if any) 

5. 

6. 

7. 

Vehicle submitted for test on : 

Component  type approval granted/refused*** 

-Place 

Date 

9. 

Signature : 

(•) 

Delete as appropriate. 

CHAPTER 11 

SAFETY-BELT ANCHORAGES AND SAFETY-BELTS 
FOR BODIED THREE-WHEEL MOPEDS, 
TRICYCLES AND QUADRICYCLES 

-w-

ANNEX 1 

1. 

DEFINITIONS 

Within  the meaning of this chapter: 

1.1 

1.2 

1.3 

"type of vehicle  in respect of  its safety  belts" means motor 
vehicles which do not differ  essentially  among  themselves, in 
particular  as regards the following: 
dimensions, shapes and materials of the structural  components of 
the vehicle or seat  to which  the anchors are attached; 

"seat  anchorages" means the parts of the structures of the vehicle 
or  seat or all other  parts of the vehicle  to which  the belts must 
be  fastened; 

"effective  anchorage" means the point  used  to determine,  in a 
conventional  manner  in accordance with  item 4, the angle of each 
part of  the safety  belt  in relation  to its wearer  i.e. the point 
where  a strap should be attached  in order  to adopt  a position 
identical  to an  intended  position of the belt  when  this  is used 
and which may correspond or not to the true anchorage  according to 
the configuration of the accessories for the attachment  of the 
belt  at the point where  this  is attached  to the anchorage; 

1.3.1 

- for example 

1.3.1.1 

1.3.1.2 

1.3.1.3 

1.4 

1.5 

where a safety  belt  includes a rigid part  that  is attached  to a 
lower  anchorage whether  this  is static or  free  to pivot, the 
effective  anchorage  for all of the seat  adjustment  positions shall 
be the point  where  the strap  is attached  to that  rigid part, 

where  there  is a reverser  attached  to the structure of the vehicle 
or  seat  the median point of the reverser  at the point  where the 
strap emerges  from  this on the wearer  side of the belt  shall be 
considered  to be the effective anchorage, 

where  the belt  directly  links  its wearer  with an  inertia  reel 
attached  to the structure of the vehicle or seat  without  an 
intermediate  direction  reverser  the effective  anchorage  shall be 
taken  to be the point of  intersection of the axis of the belt 
inertia  reel  with  the plane passing  through  the median  axis of the 
strap on the reel ; 

"floor" means the  lower part of the bodywork of the vehicle 
linking  the side walls of that  vehicle.  Taken within  this meaning 
the  "floor"  includes the ribs, raised  pressings and any other 
stiffeners even where  these are beneath  the floor, such  as spars 
and struts; 

"seat" means a structure  forming, or otherwise, an  integral  part 
of  the vehicle structure  including  its interior  fittings which 
offer  a seated  position  for an adult, the term designating  both an 
individual  seat  and part of a bench  corresponding  to a seating 
pos i t i on ; 

1.6 

1.7 

1.8 

1.9 

1.9.1 

1.9.2 

1.9.3 

1.10 

1.11 

-4(-

"group of seats" means either  a bench-type  seat or separate  seats 
mounted  side by side  (i.e. in such a way  that  the front  anchorages 
of  a seat  are  in line with or ahead of  the rear  anchorages of 
another  seat  and  in line with or behind  the front  anchorages of 
that  same other  seat  (which  provide one or several  seating 
positions for adults; 

"bench" means a complete  structure  together  with  its cover  which 
provides at  lest  two seating  positions  for adult occupants; 

"tip-up seat" means an auxiliary  seat  intended  for occasional use 
that  is normally  folded  away; 

"type of seat" means a category of seats which do not differ 
essentially  among  themselves  in such  respects as: 

the shape and dimensions of the seat  structure  and materials of 
which  it  is made, 

type and dimensions of adjustment  systems and all of  the  locking 
systems, 

type and dimensions of belt  anchorages on the seat, of the seat 
anchorage  and of the relevant  parts of the vehicle  structure, 

"seat  anchorage" means the system of attaching  the seat  in its 
entirety  to the vehicle structure,  including  the relevant  parts of 
the vehicle structure; 

"adjustment  system" means  the device enabling  the parts of the 
seat  to be adjusted  in order  to achieve an occupant  seating 
position  that  is adapted  to his or her morphology.  That  setting 
device may  in particular  permit: 

1.11.1 

longitudinal  adjustment, 

1.11.2 

vertical  adjustment, 

1.11.3 

an angular  adjustment, 

1.12 

"protected  space" means a space within which  the screening  areas 
within  the protective  space have a cumulative  area of at  least 
800 cm2; 

1.13 

"protection  space" means the space  in front of a seat  and  lying: 

-  between  two horizontal  planes, one of which  passes  through the 

H point  and the other  is 400 mm above  that  point, 

-  between  longitudinal  vertical  planes  that are symmetrical  in 

relation  to the H point  and  lie 400 mm apart, 

-  behind  a vertical  transverse plane  that  is 1.30 m  from the 

H  point. 

-46cr 

In any  given  transverse  vertical  plane  a continuous  surface such 
that,  if a  165 mm-diameter  sphere  is projected  in a horizontal 
longitudinal  direction  passing  through  any given  point  within the 
zone and  through  the centre of  the sphere  there  is within  the 
protection  space no aperture  through which  the sphere can be 
passed,  this shall  be called a screening area-, 

"movement  system" means a device enabling  a seat or one of  its 
parts  to move  to rotate without  any  fixed  intermediate  position  in 
order  to ease  access  to the space behind  the seat  concerned; 

"locking  system" means a device  holding  the seat  and  its parts  in 
any position of  use and comprising mechanisms  for  locking  the seat 
backrest  in relation  to the seat  and  the seat  in relation  to the 
vehicle; 

"H point" means a reference  point  as defined  in  Item  1.1  in 
Annex  III determined  in accordance with  the procedure  described  in 
sa id annex ; 

"H' point", means  the reference  point  corresponding  to the H point 
defined  in  Item  1.16  and determined  for  all  normal  positions of 
use of  the seat ; 

"R point" means  the reference  point  of  a seat  as defined  in 
i tern 1.2  in Annex  I I I ; 

"reference  line" means  the straight  line defined  in  Item 3.4 of 
Annex  I I I ; 

"L«| and L2 points" means  the  lower effective anchorages; 

"C point" means  the point  located  450 mm  vertically  above  the R 
point.  However,  if distance  S defined  in  Item  1.23  is not  less 
than 280 mm  and  if the other  conceivable  formula, BR - 260 mm + 
0.8  S specified  in paragraph  4.3.3  is retained  by  the manufacturer 
the vertical  distance between C and R shall  be 500 mm; 

"alpha  1 and  aloha  2" angles mean  respectively  the angles  formed 
by  a horizontal  plane and  the planes perpendicular  to the 
longitudinal  median plane of  the vehicle and  passing  through  point 
H-j and points L-j and  L2; 

"S" means  the distance,  in millimetres, between  the effective 
upper  anchorage  and a reference  plane P that  is parallel  to the 
median  longitudinal  plane of  the vehicle, defined  as  follows: 

1.14 

1.15 

1.16 

1.17 

1.18 

1.19 

1.20 

1.21 

1.22 

1.23 

1.23.1 

if the seating  position  is well  defined  by  the shape of  the seat 
plane P  is the median plane of  that seat, 

1.23.2 

if the seating position  is not well  defined: 

1.23.2.1 

plane P relative  to the driver  is that which  is parallel  to the 
median  longitudinal  plane of  the vehicle when  it passes  vertically 
through  the centre of  the steering wheel  in  its mid  position  if it 
is adjustable  and  taken as being within  the plane of  the steering 
wheel  rim, 

-tes-

1.23.2.2 

plane P for  the passenger  sitting  at  the side on  the  front  is 
symmetrical  to driver  plane  P, 

1.23.2.3 

plane P for  the side  rear  seating  position  is that  stated  by  its 
manufacturer  provided  that  the  following  distance  limits A between 
the median  longitudinal  plane of  the vehicle  and  plan P are 
adhered  to: 

2. 

2.1 

2.1.1 

2.1.2 

2.1.3 

2.1.4 

2.1.5 

2.2 

3. 

3.1 

A  is not  less than 200 mm  if the bench  is designed  solely  for  two 
passengers, 

A  is not  less than 300 mm  if the bench  is designed  for more  than 
two passengers. 

GENERAL  REQUIREMENTS 

The safety  belt  anchorages shall  be designed, manufactured  and 
installed  in such  a way 

so as  to permit  the  fitting of  an appropriate  safety  belt.  The 
anchorages  for  the  front  side seats shall  permit  the use of  belts 
incorporating an  inertia  reel  and  reverser  returning  to the upper 
anchorage, having  regard  in particular  to the strength 
characteristics of  the anchorages, unless  the manufacturer 
supplies  the vehicle  fitted with other  types of  belt  incorporating 
inertia  reels.  If the anchorages are only  suitable  for  certain 
types of  belt  those  types must  be mentioned  in the document  set 
out  in Annex  V, Appendix  1. 

as to reduce  to a minimum  the risk of  belt  slippage when  it is 
worn correct I y, 

as to reduce  to a minimum  the risk of  deterioration of  the strap 
as a result  of  contact  with  the rigid  sharp  parts of  the  structure 
of  the vehicle or seat, 

so that, under  normal  conditions of use, the vehicle may  fulfil 
the requirements of  this chapter, 

where  anchorages  adopt  different  positions  in order  to enable 
persons  to enter  the vehicle and  in order  to retain  the occupants 
the specifications of  this regulation  shall  apply  to anchorages  in 
their  effective  retention position. 

Safety-belt  anchorages are not  required  for bodied  three-wheel 
mopeds having  an unladen mass of not more  than 250 kg. 

MINIMUM  NUMBER  OF BELT ANCHORAGES 

Two  lower  and one upper  anchorage  shall  be provided  for  the front 
seats.  However, two  lower  anchorages  are considered  sufficient 
for  the  front  centre seats where  there are other  front  seats.  The 
windscreen  is considered  as forming  part of  the reference  zone for 
the anchorages where  this may enter  into static  contact  with  the 
device  for  testing  in accordance with  the method  described  in 
Annex  II to Directive  74/60/EEC on  the  interior  fittings of motor 
vehicles-,1 

1 

0J  No L 38, 11.2.1974. 

3.2 

3.3 

4. 

for  the other  side  seats  two  lower  and one upper  anchorage  must  be 
provided; 

with  the exception  of  the  tip-up  seat  for  which  anchorages  are not 
required  at  least  two  lower  anchorages must  be provided  for  all 
other  seats. 

POSITIONING OF  SEAT  BELTS 
(see Annex  11, Figure  1) 

4.1 

General 

4.1.1 

4.1.2 

4.2 

4.2.1 

4.2.2 

4.2.3 

4.3 

4.3.1 

The  anchorages  for one and  the same belt  may  all  be  attached  to 
the structure  of  the vehicle, or of  the seat  or  to any other  part 
of  the  vehicle, or  be divided  among  those  various  positions. 

One and  the same anchorage may  receive  the ends of  two  adjacent 
belts provided  that  the test  requirements  are met. 

Position  of  lower  effective  anchorages 

Angles  alpha  1 and alpha  2 must  lie between  30 and  80'  in all of 
the normal  positions of use of  the seat. 

Where  rear  seat  benches and adjustable  seats are provided  with  the 
adjustment  system  defined  in  Item  1.11  and  their  back  rest  angle 
is  less than  20' (see Annex  II, Figure  1) angles  alpha  1 and 
alpha  2 may  be  less than the minimum  values  specified  in 
Item 4.2.1  provided  that  they  are not  less than  20*  in any of  the 
normal  positions of use of  the seat. 

The  distance  between  the  two vertical  planes parallel  to  the 
median  longitudinal  plane of  the vehicle  and  passing  through  each 
of  the  two  lower  effective  anchorages  (L1  and  L2) of  one  and  the 
same  belt  shall  not  be  less than  350 mm.  The median  longitudinal 
plane of  the seat  shall  pass points  L1  and  L2 at  at  least  230 mm 
from  those points. 

Position of  the upper  effective  anchorages 
(see Annex  II, Figure  2) 

If a strap guide or  similar  device affecting  the position of  the 
effective  upper  anchorages  is used  this will  be determined  in a 
conventional  manner  by considering  the position of  the  anchorage 
when  the central  longitudinal  line of  the strap  passes  through  J1 
defined  successively  from  the R point  via  the  following  three 
segments: 

RZ:  segment  of  reference  Iine measured  from  the R point  upwards 
along  the  length of  530 mm; 

ZX: segment  perpendicular  to the median  longitudinal  plane of  the 
vehicle  measured  from  the Z point  in the direction  of  the 
anchorage  and  having  a  length of  120 mm-, 

XJ1:  segment  perpendicular  to the plane  defined  by  segments RZ and 
ZX measured  from point  X forwards over  a  length of  60 mm. 

-4£-

Point  J2  is determined  by  symmetry  with  point  J1  about  the 
longitudinal  plane  vertically  crossing  the  reference  line  defined 
in  I tern 5.1.2  of  the  dummy  placed  in  the  relevant  seat. 

The  upper  effective  anchorage  shall  lie  below  plane  Fn  that  is 
perpendicular  to  the  median  longitudinal  plane  of  the  seat  and 
forms  an  angle  of  65' with  the  reference  line.  For  the  rear  seats 
this  angle  may  be  reduced  to  60*.  Planes  FN  shall  be  located  in 
such  a way  as  to  intersect  the  reference  line  at  a  point  D  such 
that  DR  -  315 mm  ±  1.8  S. 
However  if S  does  not  exceed  200 mm  OR  becomes  -  675  mm. 

The  upper  effective  anchorage  of  the  belt  shall  lie  behind  plane 
FK  that  is perpendicular  to  the  median  longitudinal  plane  of  the 
seat  and  intersects  the  reference  line  at  an  angle  of  120'  at  a 
point  Br  -  260 mm  +  S.  If S  is not  less  than  280 mm  the 
manufacturer  may  use,  at  his  discretion,  BR  -  260  mm  +  0.8  S. 

4.3.2 

4.3.3 

4.3.4 

The  S  value  shall  not  be  less  than  140  mm. 

4.3.5 

4.3.6 

4.3.7 

The  upper  effective  anchorage  shaI I be  located  behind  a  vertical 
plane  that  is perpendicular  to  the  median  longitudinal  plane  of 
the  vehicle  and  passes  through  the  R  point  as  shown  in  the  diagram 
in Annex  I I. 

The  upper  effective  anchorage  of  the  belt  shall  be  located  above 
the  horizontal  plane  passing  through  the  C  point  defined  in 
Item  1.21. 

In addition  to  the  upper  anchorage  referred  to  in  Item  4.3.1  other 
upper  effective  anchorages  may  be  fitted  if one  of  the  following 
condi t ions  is met : 

4.3.7.1 

the  additional  anchorages  meet  the  requirements  of  Items  4.3.1  to 
4.3.6 

4.3.7.2 

4.3.7.3 

the  upper  anchorages  may  be  used  without  the  aid  of  tools,  meet 
the  requirements  of  Items  4.3.5  and  4.3.6  and  lie  within  one  of 
the  specified  areas  by  moving  the  area  bounded  in  Figure  1  in 
Annex  II  by  80  mm  upwards  or  downwards  in  a  vertical  direction. 

the  anchorage(s)  is  (are)  intended  for  a  harness-type  belt  and 
meet(s)  the  requirements  set  out  in  Item  4.3.6  if  they  lie  behind 
the  transverse  plane  passing  through  the  reference  I ine  and  is 
(are)  located: 

4.3.7.3.1 

where  there  is a  single  anchorage,  within  the  area  common  to  two 
dihedrals  bounded  by  vertical  lines  passing  through  the  points  J1 
and  J2  defined  in  Item  4.3.1,  the  horizontal  sections  of  which  are 
defined  by  Figure  2  in Annex  II, 

4.3.7.3.2 

if  there  are  two  anchorages,  within  that  of  the  above  dihedrals 
which  is suitable,  provided  that  no  anchorage  is more  than  50  mm 
from  the  symmetrical  seat  located  opposite  the  other  anchorage, 
about  plane  P  defined  in  item  1.23  of  the  seat  under 
considérât ion. 

-Wfe -

STRENGTH OF  ANCHORAGES 

Each  anchorage  shall  be able to withstand  the tests provided for 
in  Items 6.3 and 6.4.  Permanent  deformation may be acceptable, 
including  breakage of an anchorage or  the surrounding  area, 
provided  that  the specified  force has been maintained  throughout 
the  intended  period.  During  the test  the minimum  distances for 
the  lower  effective anchorages  required  by  item 4.2.3 and the 
requirements  set out  in items 4.3.6 and 4.3.7 for upper  effective 
anchorages  shall  be maintained. 

In the vehicles  in which  these devices are used  the movement and 
locking  systems enabling  the occupants of all of  the seats  to exit 
from  the vehicle  shall  still  be able  to be activated  manually 
after  the tractive  force has ceased  to be applied; 

Dimensions of  threaded  holes  for anchorages 
The  threaded  holes  for the anchorages  shall  be of the 
7/16 - 20 UNF 2B type  in accordance  with  ISO standard  TR1417. 

If the manufacturer  has fitted  the vehicle with  safety  belts that 
have  been  attached  at all of the anchorages  required  for the seat 
at  issue  it  is not necessary  that  those  anchorages meet  the 
requirements of  item 5.3 provided  that  they meet  the other 
requirements of  this Chapter.  Moreover,  the requirement  set out 
in  item 5.3 shall  not apply  to additional  anchorages meeting the 
requirement  set out  in item  4.3.7.3. 

It must  be possible  to remove  the safety-belt  from  the anchorage 
without  damage  to the  latter. 

TESTS 

General 

5. 

5.1 

5.2 

5.3 

5.4 

5.5 

6. 

6.1 

6.1.1 

Subject  to the  implementation of the provisions  set out  in  item 2 
and  in  line with  the manufacturer's  request, 

6.1.1.1 

the tests may concern either  a vehicle  structure or a fully 
finished  vehicle 

6.1.1.2 

the windows and doors may be  installed or not and closed  or not 

6.1.1.3 

any normally  intended  component  whïch  is likely  to contribute to 
structural  rigidity may be  installed. 

6.1.2 

The seats must  be  installed  and adjusted  to their  driving  position 
or  position of use selected  by the testing  body  réponsible  for the 
component  type approval  tests as being  the  least  favourable  from a 
system-strength  point of view. 

The  position of the seats must  be stated  in the report.  If its 
angle  is adjustable  the backrest  shall  be  locked  in position in 
accordance  with  the manufacturer's  instructions or,  in their 
absence,  in a position  corresponding  to an effective  seat  angle as 
close  as possible  to 15*. 

6.2 

Vehicle  restraint 

6.2.1 

6.2.2 

The method  used  to restrain  the vehicle  during  the  test  shall  not 
cause  the anchorages or  anchorage  areas  to be  reinforced  or  reduce 
the normal  deformation of  the structure. 

A  restraint  device shall  be considered  satisfactory  if  it has no 
effect  on  an area extending  throughout  the width  of  the  structure 
and  if the vehicle or  structure  is  locked or  attached  at  the  front 
at  a distance of  at  least  500 mm  from  the anchorage  to be  tested 
and  held or  attached  at  the rear  at  least  300 mm  from  said 
anchorage. 

6.2.3 

It  is recommended  that  the structure  be made  to rest  on  supports 
directly  below  the wheel  axes or  if that  is not  possible  directly 
below  the suspension points. 

6.2.4 

If a test  method  other  than  that  required  by  items 6.3.1  to  6.3.8 
is used  it's equivalence  shall  be  demonstrated. 

6.3 

General  test  requirements 

6.3.1 

6.3.2 

6.3.3 

6.3.4 

6.3.5 

All  of  the anchorages within one  and  the same group of  seats shall 
be  tested  simultaneously. 

The  tractive  force shall  be applied  forwards  at  an angle of  10*± 
5*  above  the horizontal  in a plane  parallel  to the median 
longitudinal  plane of  the vehicle. 

The  loading  shall  begin  as quickly  as possible.  The  anchorages 
shall  withstand  the specified  load  for  at  least  0.2  s. 

The  tract ion devices  to be used  for  the  tests described  in 
item 6.4  below  are  represented  in Annex  IV. 

The  anchorages  for  seats  fitted  with upper  anchorages  shall  be 
tested  under  the following  conditions: 

6.3.5.1 

side  front  seats: 

the anchorages  shall  be subjected  to the  test  required  by 
item 6.4.1  in which  the forces are applied  to them  by means of a 
device  reproducing  the geometry  of  a three-point  belt 
incorporating  an  inertia  reel  and  a reverser  back  up  to the upper 
anchorage. 
Moreover, when  there are more  anchorages  than  the number  required 
by  item  3 those anchorages  shall  be subjected  to the  test  required 
in  item 6.4.5  during which  the  forces shall  be applied  to them by 
means of  a device  reproducing  the geometry  of  the  type of 
safety-belt  intended  to be attached  to those  anchorages. 

6.3.5.1.1 

When  the  inertia  reel  is not  attached  to the  lower  side  anchorage 
which must  be provided  for, or where  the  inertia  reel  is attached 
to the upper  anchorage  the  lower  anchorages must  also  be  subjected 
to the  test  required  by  item  6.4.3. 

6.3.5.1.2 

In the above  instance  the  tests  required  by  items 6.1.4  and  6.1.3 
may  be carried  out  on  two different  structures  at  the  request  of 
the manufacturer. 

6.3.5.2 

Rear  side  seats and/or  central  seats: 
The  anchorages  shall  be submitted  to the  test  required  by 
item 6.4.2  in which  the forces are  transferred  to  them  by means of 
a device  reproducing  the geometry  of  a three-point  non-intertia 
reel  belt, and  the test  required  by  item 6.4.3  in which  the  forces 
are  transferred  to the two  lower  anchorages  by means of  a device 
representing  a  lap belt.  The  two tests may  be carried  out  on  two 
different  structures  at  the request  of  the manufacturer. 

6.3.5.3 

By way of  a departure  from  the  requirements of  item 6.3.5.1  and 
6.3.5.2, where  a manufacturer  delivers  his vehicle  fitted  with 
belts  including  inertia  reels  the corresponding  anchorages shall 
be submitted  to the test  in which  the  forces are  transferred  to 
them  by means of  a device  reproducing  the geometry  of  the  belt(s) 
for  which  the anchorages  are  to be component  type  approved. 

6.3.6 

6.3.7 

6.3.8 

6.4 

6.4.1 

6.4.1.1 

6.4.1.2 

Where  there  are no upper  anchorages  for  the  rear  side  seats and 
central  seats  the  lower  anchorages  shall  be submitted  to  the test 
required  by  item 6.4.3  in which  the  forces  are  transferred  to them 
by means of  a device  reproducing  the geometry  of  a  lap belt. 

If the vehicle  is designed  to receive other  devices which  do not 
enable  the straps  to be attached  directly  to the  anchorages 
without  the use of  intermediate  rollers, etc. or  which  require 
anchorages  additional  to those  referred  to  in  item  3,  the belt or 
assembly  of  cables, rollers, etc.  representing  the belt  equipment 
shall  be attached  by means of  such  a device  to the anchorages on 
the  vehicle  and  those anchorages  shall  be submitted  to the test 
required  in  item 6.4  as appropriate. 

A  test  method  other  than  those  required  in  item 6.3  may  be used 
but  its equivalence  will  have  to be  demonstrated. 

Specific  requirements  for  the  tests  to be carried  out  on  vehicles 
having  an unladen mass of not  more  than  400 kg* 

Test  in three-point  belt  configuration  incorporating  an  inertia 
reel  with  reverser  attached  to the upper  anchorage. 

A special  reverser  for  the cable or'strap  having  the 
characteristics needed  in order  to transfer  the  forces  from  the 
traction  device, or  the reverser  supplied  by  the manufacturer, 
shall  be attached  to the upper  anchorages. 

A  test  loading of 675 daN ± 20 daN shall  be applied  to a  traction 
device  (see Annex  IV, Figure  2) attached  to the belt  anchorages by 
means of  a device  reproducing  the geometry  of  the upper  diagonal 
strap of  that  belt. 

6.4.1.3 

At  the same  time a tractive  force of  675 daN ± 20 daN  shall  be 
applied  to a traction  device  (see Annex  IV, Figure  4) attached  to 
the  two  lower  anchorages. 

The mass of  the  traction  batteries  for  electric  vehicles  is not  included 
in the unladen mass. 

6.4.2 

Test  in three-belt  configuration without  inertia  reel  or  with 
inertia  reel  on  the upper  anchorage. 

6.4.2.1 

A  test  loading of 675 daN ± 20 daN shall  be applied  to a traction 
device  (see Annex  IV, Figure  2) attached  to the upper  anchorage 
and  the opposite  lower anchorage  for  the same  belt, by using a 
retractor  attached  to the upper  anchorage  if such  a device  is 
supplied  by  the manufacturer. 

6.4.2.2 

At  the same  time a traction  force of 675 daN ±  20 daN  shall  be 
applied  to a  traction device  (see Annex  IV, Figure  1) attached  to 
the  lower anchorages. 

6.4.3 

Test  in  lap-belt  configuration 

6.4.3.1 

A  test  loading of  1110 daN ± 20 daN shall  be applied  to a  traction 
device  (see Annex  IV, Figure  1) attached  to the  two  lower 
anchorages. 

6.4.4 

Anchorage  test, either with all  attached  to the seat  structure or 
distributed  among  the vehicle  structure  and  the seat  structure. 

6.4.4.1 

6.4.4.2 

Depending on  the case the tests specified  in  Items 6.4.1,  6.4.2 
and 6.4.3 above will  be carried out  by adding, for  each  seat  and 
each group of  seats, the additional  force stated  below. 

In addition  to the force referred  to  in  Item 6.4.1, 6.4.2  and 
6.4.3  a  longitudinal  and  horizontal  force equal  to ten  times the 
weight  of  the complete seat  shall  be applied  to the centre of 
gravi ty of  the seat. 

6.4.5 

Test  in special  type belt  configuration. 

6.4.5.1 

A test  loading of 675 daN ± 20 daN shall  be applied  to one 
traction device  (see Annex  IV, Figure  2) attached  to the 
anchorages  for  a safety  belt of  this type by means of  a device 
reproducing  the geometry of  the upper  diagonal  strap or  straps. 

6.4.5.2 

At  the same  time a tractive  force of 675 daN ±  20 daN  is applied 
to the  traction  device  (see Annex  IV, Figure  3) attached  to the 
two  lower  anchorages. 

6.5 

Specific  requirements  for  the tests  to be carried  out  on  vehicles 
having  an unladen mass of more  than 400 kg  (or  550 kg  if the 
vehicles are assigned  to the transport  of  goods) 

The  requirements  set out  in Annex  I concerning  the specific  test 
methods  required  by Directive 76/115/EEC on safety-belt  anchorages 
for motor  vehicles1  shall  apply. 

7. 

CHECKING AFTER  THE TESTS 

Any  deterioration  in the anchorages  and  load supporting  structures 
during  the  tests shall  be recorded  after  the tests. 

1 

0J  L 24, 30.01.1976, p. 6. 

ANNEX  I I 

Figure 1: EFFECTIVE ANCHORAGE ATTACHMENT AREAS 

DR - 315 + 1.8 S 
BR - 260 + S 
unless otherwise 
specified in 
Items 4.3.2, 4.3.3 
and 4.3.6 in 
Annex 1 

Authorized area for 
additional anchorages 
in accordance with 
Item 4.3.7.2 in 
Annex 1 

Reference 
accordance 
Item 1.19 
Annex 1 

Dis 
I tern 

tance stated  in 
m 1.2-f  in Annex 1 

i  j  *^f  ~T~  7\>  &  T 
*f  J 
j 

'ôo/  f  J\f* 

A n g le  stated  in 
Item 6.1.2  in Annex  1 

Reference  line in accordance 

Median  longitudinal 

with  Item 1.19  in Annex 1 

plane of the seat 

For outer seats 

on  left hand side 

All the dimensions are 

in millimetres 

Upper 

effective 

anchorage 

-Mi-

Figure  2:  EFFECTIVE  UPPER  ANCHORAGES  IN ACCORDANCE  WITH 
ITEM 4.3.7.3  IN ANNEX  12 

ANNEX  I I I 

PROCEDURE TO BE FOLLOWED  IN ORDER  TO DETERMINE THE POSITION 
OF THE H POINT AND THE TRUE BACKREST  RAKE ANGLE 
AND TO CHECK THEIR RELATIONSHIP WITH THE POSITION 
OF THE R POINT AND THE  INTENDED BACKREST  RAKE ANGLE 

1. 

1.1 

1.2 

1.2.1 

1.2.2 

1.3 

1.4 

1.5 

1.5.1 

DEFINITIONS 

The  "H" point  which  characterizes the position within  the 
passenger  compartment  of a seated occupant  is the trace,  in a 
vertical  longitudinal  plane, of  the  theoretical  axis of  rotation 
between  the  legs and  trunk of a human body, as represented  by  the 
dummy described  in  Item 3 below. 

The  "R" point or  the  "seated  position  reference point"  is the 
reference  point  stated  by  the manufacturer  which 

has coordinates determined  in relation  to the structure  of  the 
vehicle 

corresponds  to the theoretical  position of  the  trunk/leg  rotation 
point  ("H"  point) for  the driving position or  lowest, rearmost 
position of normal  use assigned  to each of  the seats provided by 
the manufacturer  of  the vehicle. 

"Backrest  rake angle"  is the  inclination of  the seat  back  in 
relation  to the vertical. 

The  "true backrest  rake angle"  is the angle  formed  by  the  vertical 
line passing  through  the H point  and  the reference  line for  the 
trunk of  the human body  represented  by  the dummy  described  in 
Item 3 below. 

The  "intended  backrest  rake angle"  is the angle specified  by  the 
manufacturer, who 

shall  determine  the backrest  rake angle  for  the  lowest  rearmost 
driving or  normal  use condition assigned  to each of  the seats by 
the manufacturer  of  the vehicle, 

1.5.2 

it  is formed  at  the R point  by  the vertical  line and  the  trunk 
reference  Iine, 

1.5.3 

and corresponds  theoretically  to the  true rake  angle 

2. 

2.1 

DETERMINATION  OF THE H POINTS AND TRUE BACKREST  RAKE  ANGLES 

An  "H" point  and a  "true backrest  rake angle" shall  be  determined 
for each  seating  position provided  by  the manufacturer.  Where the 
seats  in a given  row may  be considered  to be similar  (bench, 
identical  seats, etc.),  a single "H" 

3. 

3.1 

DUMMY  CHARACTERISTICS 

Ml-

A  three  dimensional  dummy  shall  be  used  the mass  and  contour  of 
which  are  those  of  an  average-size  adult.  This  dummy  is 
represented  in Figure  1 and  2  in  the  appendix  to  this  annex. 

3.2 

This  dummy  incorporates: 

3.2.1 

3.2.2 

3.2.3 

3.2.4 

3.3 

3.4 

4. 

4.1. 

4.2. 

4.3. 

two  parts, one  simulating  the  back  and  the other  the  pelvis  of  the 
body,  jointed  along  an  axis  representing  the  axis  of  rotation 
between  the  thorax  and  thighs.  The  trace  of  that  axis  on  the 
flank  of  the  dummy  is the  H  point  of  that  dummy; 

two  components  simulating  the  legs  and  jointed  in  relation  to  the 
part  simulating  the  pelvis; 

two  components  simulating  the  feet,  linked  to  the  legs  by  joints 
simulating  the  ankles; 

moreover,  the  component  simulating  the  pelvis  is equipped  with  a 
level  gauge  enabling  its  transverse  lean  to be  checked. 

Ballast  representing  the  weight  of  each  body  component  is  located 
at  the  appropriate  points  constituting  the  corresponding  centres 
of  gravity  in order  to obtain  a  total  dummy  mass  of  roughly 
75.6  kg.  The  details  of  the  different  ballast  weights  were  given 
in Figure  2  in  the  Appendix. 

The  reference  line  for  the  trunk  of  the  dummy  is taken  into 
account  via  a  straight  line  passing  through  the  joint  between  the 
leg  and  the  pelvis  and  the  theoretical  joint  between  the  neck  and 
thorax  (see  Figure  1  in  the  Appendix). 

PLACING  IN POSITION  OF  DUMMY 
The  tridimensional  dummy  shall  be  placed  in position  as  follows: 

The  vehicle  shall  be  placed  on  a  horizontal  plane  and  the  seats 
shall  be  adjusted  as  described  in  item  2.2.  above; 

the  seat  to be  tested  shall  be  covered  with  a  piece  of  cloth 
intended  to ease  the  correct  placing  in position  of  the  dummy; 

the  dummy  shall  be  sat  in  the  position  under  examination,  its 
swivel  axis  being  at  right  angles  to  the median  longitudinal  plane 
of  symmetry  of  the  vehicle; 

4.4. 

the  feet  of  the  dummy  shall  be  located  as  follows: 

4.4.1. 

4.4.2. 

when  it  is placed  on  the  front  seats  it  shall  be  such  that  the 
level  gauge  enabling  the  transverse  lean of  the  seat  to be  checked 
is brought  into  the  horizontal, 

when  it  is placed  on  the  rear  seats  its  feet  are  arranged  in such 
a  way  that,  as  far  as  possible,  they  are  in contact  with  the  front 
seats.  If  the  feet  then  rest  upon  parts  of  the  floor  that  are  at 

-in 

different  levels  the  foot  that  is the  first  to  come  into  contact 
with  the  front  seat  shall  serve  as  a  reference  and  the  other  foot 
shall  be  arranged  in such  a way  that  the  level  gauge  enabling  the 
transverse  lean  of  the  seat  to be  checked  is brought  into  the 
hor izontal, 

if  the  "H" point  is detemined  at  a central  seat  the  feet  shall  be 
placed  either  side  of  the  tunnel; 

the  ballast  masses  shall  be  placed  on  the  thighs,  the  level  gauge 
for  the  transvers  lean of  the  seat  shall  be  brought  into  the 
horizontal  and  the  ballast  masses  shall  be  placed  on  the  component 
representing  the  seat  of  the  dummy; 

the  dummy  is to  be moved  away  from  the  seat  backrest  using  the 
knee  pivot  rod  and  its back  is to be moved  forwards.  Replace  the 
dummy  in position  on  the  seat  by  sliding  its seating  support 
backwards  until  resistance  is met  again  swinging  its  back 
rearwards  until  it  is supported  by  the  seat  backrest; 

a  horizontal  force  of  roughly  10 +. 1 daN  shall  then  be  applied 
twice  to  the  dummy.  The  direction  and  point  of  application  of  the 
force  shall  be  represented  by  a black  arrow  in Figure  2 of  the 
appendix ; 

the  ballast  masses  shall  then  be  placed  on  the  right  and  left 
flanks,  followed  by  the  bust  masses.  The  transverse  level  of  the 
dummy  shall  be  kept  horizontal; 

while  maintaining  the  transverse  level  gauge  of  the  dummy 
horizontal  bring  the  back  forwards  until  the  bust  masses  are  above 
the  H  point  in such  a way  as  to cancel  out  any  rubbing  against  the 
seat  backrest; 

delicately  move  the  back  rearwards  in such  a way  as  to  complete 
the  placing  in position.  The  transverse  level  gauge  for  the  dummy 
shall  be  horizontal  and  where  this  is not  the  case  proceed  once 
more  as  described  above. 

RESULTS 

Once  the  dummy  has  been  placed  in position  in accordance  with  item 
4  above  the  H  point  and  the  backrest  rake  angle  under 
consideration  consist  of  the  H  point  and  the  inclination  angle  of 
the  reference  line  for  the  trunk  of  the  dummy. 

The  coordinates  of  the  H point  in relation  to  three  planes  that 
are  at  right  angles  respectively  to  the  true  backrest  rake  angle 
shall  be  measured  in order  to be  compared  with  the  data  provided 
by  the manufacturer  of  the  vehicle. 

4.4.3. 

4.5 

4.6. 

4.7. 

4.8. 

4.9. 

4.10. 

5. 

5.1. 

5.2. 

-w-

6. 

6.1. 

6.2. 

CHECKING OF THE  POSITION RELATIVE TO THE  "R" AND  "H" POINTS AND OF 
THE RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN  THE  INTENDED ANGLE  AND THE TRUE  BACKREST 
RAKE  ANGLE 

The  results of  the measurements  carried  out  in  item  5.2. in 
respect  of  the  "H" point  and  the  true backrest  rake  angle shall  be 
compared  with  the coordinates  for  the  "R" point  and  with  the 
intended  backrest  rake angle stated  by  the manufacturer  of  the 
vehicle. 

Checking  of  the  relative position of  the  "R" and  "H" points and of 
the  relationship  between  the  intended  angle  and  the  true  backrest 
rake angle  shall  be considered  satisfactory  for  the  seating 
position under  consideration  if the  "H" point  as defined  by  its 
coordinates  is  located within  a 50 mm  square  having  a centre  "R" 
and  if the  true backrest  rake angle does not  diverge  by more  than 
5*  from  the  intended  rake angle. 

6.2.1. 

If these  conditions  are met  the  "R" point  and  the  intended  rake 
angle  shall  be used  for  the test  and,  if necessary,  the dummy  is 
adjusted  in order  that  the  "H" point  coincides with  the  "R" point 
and  that  the  true backrest  rake angle  coincides with  the  intended 
angle. 

6.3. 

6.4. 

6.5. 

If the  "H" point  or  the  true  rake  angle  do not  meet  the 
requirements  set out  in  item 6.2.  above  the  "H" point  or  the  true 
rake angle will  be determined  twice more  (three  times  altogether). 
If the  results obtained  during  two of  these  three operations meet 
the  requirements  the  results of  the  test  shall  be  considered 
satisfactory. 

If the  results of  at  least  two of  the  three operations  do not «eet 
the  requirements  set out  in  item 6.2.  the  result  of  the  test  shall 
be considered  unsatisfactory. 

If the situation  described  in  item 6.4. above  arises or  if the 
check  cannot  be carried  out  because  the manufacturer  has not 
provided  information on  the position  of  the  "R" point  or  the 
intended  backrest  rake angle  the average of  the  results of  the 
three determinations may  be used  and  be considered  as applying  in 
all  cases where  the  "H" point  or  intended  backrest  rake angle  is 
referred  to  in this Chapter. 

ANNEX  I I I - Append i x 

COMPONENTS OF THE THREE-DIMENSIONAL  DUMMY 

trunk  reference  line 

/ 

dorsal  bal last 
mass support 

support  for 
thigh  masses 

knee  joint 

swivel  axis 

transverse  level  gauge 

Figure 1 

DIMENS IONS AND MASS OF  DUMMY 

Mass of  dummy 

Components  simulating  the back 
and  seating  support  for  the body 
Dorsal  masses 
Seating-support  masses 
Thigh masses 
Leg masses 

Total 

16.6 
31.2 
7.8 
6.8 
13.2 

75.6 

Direction  and point of 
applicat ion of  load 

varlab le between 
10.8 cm and  42.4 

41,7 cm 

Figure 2 

ANNEX  IV 

TRACTION  DEVICE 

Figure 1 

RbO 

Cloth-covered  foam, thickness 25 

-4  — 

228 

RSO 

F i g u re  2 

Cloth-covered  foam, thickness 25 

p 
• 

100-

(dimensions  in mm) 

Figure  3 

Cloth-covered  foam 

thickness 25 

RSO 

All  dimensions  are  in mm 

ANNEX  V - Appendix 1 

INFORMATION  DOCUMENT 
IN RESPECT OF SEAT-BELT ANCHORAGES  INTENDED FOR 
A TYPE OF BODIED THREE-WHEEL  MOPED, 
TRICYCLE OR QUADRI CYCLE 

(to be attached  to the application for component  type approval  if this  is 
submitted  separately  from  the application  for  vehicle  type  approval) 

Order  No  (assigned  by  the  applicant) 

The application  for  the component  type approval  of  seat-belt  anchorages  for a 
type of bodied  three-wheel  moped,  tricycle or  quadricycle shall  contain  the 
information  set  out  in Annex  II to Directive  92/61/EEC of  30.6.1992. 

under  A,  item Nos 

0.1 

0.2 

0.4  to  0.6 

and under  C,  item Nos 

2.7  to  2.7.5.2 

2.10  to  2.10.5 

(30 

ANNEX  V - Appendix  2 

CERTIFICATE OF COMPONENT  TYPE  APPROVAL 
IN RESPECT OF SAFETY-BELT  ANCHORAGES 
FOR A TYPE OF BODIED  THREE-WHEEL 
MOPED, TRICYCLE OR QUADRICYCLE 

MODEL 

Name of 
administrât ion 

Report  No 

by  testing  body 

date 

Component  type approval  No 

Extension  No 

1.  Make of  three-wheel  moped/tricycle/quadricycle:* 

2.  Type of  three-wheel  moped/tricycle/quadricycle : 

3.  Manufacturer's name  and  address: 

4.  Name  and  address of manufacturer's  representative  (if  any) 

5.  Three-wheel  moped/tricycle/quadricycle* submitted  for  testing on 

6.  Component  type approval  granted/refused* 

7.  Place:  .. 

8.  Date:  ... 

9.  Signature 

* 

Delete  as appropriate. 

ANNEX VI 

REQUIREMENTS  PLACED ON SAFETY  BELTS 

1. 

2. 

2.1. 

2.2. 

The  requirements  set  out  in the annexes  to Directive  77/541/EEC1^ 
shalI  apply. 

However, as a departure  from  the fitting  requirements  set  out  in 
item 3 of  Annex  I to said  Directive, vehicles  having  an unladen 
mass not  exceeding  400 kg  (or 550 kg  if the  vehicles  are  assigned 
to the  transport  of goods) may  be fitted  with  belts or  restraint 
systems  incorporating belts that  have  the  following 
configurations: 

for  the side  seats,  lap- and diagonal- belts either  equipped or 
not  with  inertia  reels; 

for  the central  seats,  lap belts or  lap-and-diagonaI  belts either 
fitted  or  not  with  inertia  reels. 

1)  OJ  No L 220, 29.8.1977, p. 95 

ANNEX  VI - Appendix 1 

INFORMATION  DOCUMENT 
IN RESPECT OF A TYPE OF  SAFETY-BELT 
INTENDED FOR BODIED THREE-WHEEL MOPEDS, 
TRICYCLES OR QUADRICYCLES 

(to be attached  to the application  for  component  type approval  if this  is 
submitted  separately  from  the application  for  vehicle  type  approval) 

Order  No  (assigned  by  the  applicant) 

The application  for  the component  type approval  of  a type of  safety-belt 
intended  for  bodied  three-wheel  mopeds,  tricycles or  quadricycles shall 
contain  the  information  set out  in Annex  II to Council  Directive  92/61/EEC of 
30.6.1992. 

under  A,  item Nos 

0.1 

0.2 

0.4  to  0.6 

and under  C,  item No 

2.9.1 

-Vèfr-

ANNEX  VI - Appendix  2 

CERTIFICATE OF COMPONENT TYPE  APPROVAL 
IN RESPECT OF A TYPE OF  SAFETY-BELT 
INTENDED FOR BODIED  THREE-WHEEL 
MOPEDS, TRICYCLES OR QUADRI CYCLES 

MODEL 

Name of 
administrât ion 

Report  No 

by  testing  body 

date 

Component  type approval  No 

Extension  No 

1.  Make of  safety-belt : 

2.  Type of  safety-belt : 

3.  Manufacturer's  name and  address: 

4.  Name  and  address of manufacturer's  representative  (if  any) 

5.  Safety-belt  submitted  for  testing  on: . 

6.  Component  type approval  granted/refused' 

7.  Place: 

8.  Date: 

9.  Signature: 

* 

Delete  as  appropriate 

ANNEX  VI - Appendix  3 

INFORMATION  DOCUMENT 
IN RESPECT OF THE FITTING OF 
SAFETY-BELTS TO A TYPE OF BODIED 
THREE-WHEEL MOPED, TRICYCLE OR QUADRI CYCLE 

(to be attached  to the application for component  type approval  if this  is 
submitted  separately  from  the application for  vehicle  type  approval) 

Order  No  (assigned  by  the  applicant) 

The application  for  the component  type approval  of  a the  fitting of 
safety-belts  to a type of  bodied  three-wheel  moped, tricycle or  quadricycle 
shall  contain  the  information set out  in Annex  II to Council 
Directive 92/61/EEC of 30.6.1992. 

under  A,  item Nos 

0.1 

0.2 

0.4  to  0.6 

and under  C,  item No 

2.9.1 

2.10  to  2.10.5 

ANNEX  VI - Appendix  4 

CERTIFICATE OF COMPONENT TYPE  APPROVAL 
IN RESPECT OF THE FITTING OF  SAFETY-BELTS 
TO A TYPE OF BODIED  THREE-WHEEL 
MOPED, TRICYCLE OR QUADRI CYCLE 

MODEL 

Name of 
administrât ion 

Report  No 

by  testing body 

date 

Component  type approval  No 

Extension  No 

1.  Make of  three-wheel  moped/tricyle/quadricycle*: 

2.  Type of  three-wheel  moped/tricyle/quadricycle*: 

3.  Manufacturer's name and  address : 

4.  Name and  address of manufacturer's  representative  (if  any) 

5. 

Three-wheel  moped/tricyle/quadricycle  submitted  for  testing on 

6. 

Component  type approval  granted/refused* 

7. 

Place 

8. 

Date:  .... 

9. 

Signature: 

* 

Delete  as appropriate 

-m -

CHAPTER 12 

GLAZING» WINDSCREEN WIPERS, WASHERS, 

DE-ICERS AND DEMISTERS FOR 

BODIED THREE-WHEEL MOPEDS, TRICYCLES AND QUADRICYCLES 

1. 

1.1. 

1.2 

ANNEX 1 

GLAZING 

Design  reouirements 

The  vehicles  covered  by  this  Chapter  and  having  a maximum  design 
speed  of  more  than  80 km/h  are  subject  to  the  design  and 
installation  requirements  set  out  in Directive  92/22/EEC1  on 
safety  glazing  and  glazing  materials  on  motor  vehicles  and  their 
trailers. 

the  vehicles  covered  by  this Chapter  and  having  a maximum  design 
speed  of  not  more  than  80 km/h  are  subject  to  the  requirements 
set  out  in Annex  III, concerning  windscreens  and  other  glazing, 
to Directive  89/173/EEC2  relating  to certain  components  and 
characteristics of  wheeled  agricultural  or  forestry  tractors. 
However, 

1.2.1 

The  wording  of  item  19  in Annex  I I I-A to said  directive  shall  be 
replaced  by  the  following:  "Two  inspections per  year  are 
author ized". 

1.2.2. 

Annexes  11l-B  and  11 l-P to  said  directive  shall  be  replaced  by 
appendices  1  to  4  respectively. 

2- 

2.1. 

2.1.1. 

2.1.2. 

Requirements  concerning  the  fitting  of  windscreens  and  other 
glazing  to  the  vehicles  referred  to  in 1.2 

At  the  discretion  of  the manufacturer  bodied  vehicles  may  be 
fitted  with: 

"windscreens"  and  "glazing  other  than  windscreens" meeting  the 
requirements  of  Annex  I I 1-1  to Directive  89/173/EEC; 

or  windscreens  meeting  the  requirements  applying  to  "glazing 
other  than  windscreens"  set  out  in Annex  I Il-A  to  Directive 
89/173/EEC  but  excluding  those  covered  by  item 9.1.4.2  in Annex 
lll-C  to  the  same  directive  (glazing  the  regular  light-
transmission  coefficient  of  which  may  be  less  than  70  % ). 

1  OJ  No  L 67,  10.3.1989,  p.  1. 

2  OJ  No  L 67,  10.3.1989,  p.  1. 

ANNEX 1 

APPENDIX 1 

INFORMATION  DOCUMENT  IN RESPECT OF  A TYPE OF  GLAZING 
INTENDED  FOR  BODIED THREE-WHEEL  MOPEDS, 
TRICYCLES OR  QUADRICYCLES 

(to be  attached  to  the  application  for component  type  approval  where  this  is 
submitted  separately  from  the application  for  vehicle  type  approval) 

Order  No  (assigned  by  the applicant) 

The  application  for  component  type  approval  in respect  of  a  type  of  glazing 
intended  for  bodied  three-wheel  mopeds,  tricycles or  quadricycles  shall 
contain  the  following  information: 

1. 

2. 

3. 

Make  or  trade  name : 

Manufacturer's  name  and  address: 

Name  and  address of  manufacturer's  representative  (if  any): .. 

It must  also contain  the  information  set  out  in Annex  II  to Council  Directive 
No 92/61/EEC of  30  June  1992 under  letter  C,  in  Items: 

2.2  to 2.2.2.1 

APPENDIX 2 

Name of administration 

CERTIFICATE OF COMPONENT TYPE APPROVAL  IN RESPECT OF 
A TYPE OF GLAZING INTENDED FOR BODIED THREE-WHEEL MOPEDS, 
TRICYCLES OR QUADRICYCLES 

MODEL 

Report No 

by testing body 

Date 

Component type approval No 

Extension No 

1. 

2. 

3. 

4. 

5. 

6. 

7. 

8. 

9. 

Make or trade name of glazing: 

Type of glazing: 

Manufacturer's name and address: 

Name and address of manufacturer's representative (if any) 

Glazing submitted for testing on: 

Component type approval granted/refused' 

Place: 

Date: 

Signature: 

*  Delete as approrpiate 

-Mi -

APPENDIX  3 

INFORMATION  DOCUMENT  IN RESPECT OF THE FITTING OF GLAZING 
TO A TYPE OF BODIED THREE-WHEEL  MOPED, 
TRICYCLE OR QUADRICYCLE 

(to be attached  to  the application  for  component  type approval  where  this  is 
submitted  separately  from  the application  for  vehicle  type  approval) 

Order  No  (assigned  by  the  applicant) 

The application  for  component  type approval  in respect  of  the  installation of 
glazing  on a type of  bodied  three-wheel  moped,  tricycle or  quadricycle shall 
contain  the  information  set out  in Annex  II to Council  Directive 92/61/EEC of 
30 June  1992, under  A,  in  Items: 

0.1 
0.2 
0.4  to  0.6 
1.1 
4.6 
and under  C  in  Items 
2.2  to  2.2.2.1 

Mi-

APPENDIX  4 

Name of  administration 

CERTIFICATE OF COMPONENT TYPE APPROVAL  IN RESPECT OF 
THE FITTING OF GLAZING TO A TYPE OF BODIED THREE-WHEEL MOPED, 
TRICYCLE OR QUADRICYCLE 

Report  No 

by  testing body 

Date 

Component  type approval  No 

Extension No 

1. 

2. 

3. 

4. 

5. 

6. 

7. 

8. 

9. 

Make or  trade name of  three-wheel  moped/tricycle/quadricycle" 

Type of  three-wheel  moped/tricycle/quadricycle* 

Manufacturer's  name and  address: 

Name  and  address of manufacturer's  representative  (if any): . 

Vehicle  submitted  for  test  on: 

Component  type approval  granted/refused" 

Place: 

Date: 

Signature: 

*  Delete  as appropriate 

*  Delete as  approrpiate 

-C03-

ANNEX  I I 

WINDSCREEN  WIPERS, WASHERS  AND  DE-ICERS  AND  DE-MISTERS 
FOR  BODIED  THREE-WHEEL  MOPEDS, 
TRICYCLES OR  QUADRI CYCLES 

1. 

DEFINITIONS 

For  the  purposes  of  this  Directive: 

1.1 

"Type of  vehicle  in respect  of  windscreen  wipers, washers, 
de-icers  and  de-misters" means: 

1.1.1 

1.1.2 

1.1.3 

vehicles which  do  not  differ  among  themselves  as  regards  the 
following  essential  aspects: 

The  outer  and  inner  shapes  and  fittings  which,  within  the  area 
defined  in Appendix  1,  Item  1, may  affect  visibility; 

The  shape,  dimensions  and  characteristics  of  the  windscreen  and 
its  attachment; 

The  characteristics of  the  windscreen  wipers, washers  and  the 
cab  heat ing  system. 

1.2 

"V  points" 

means  the  points  the  position  of  which  within  the  cab  is 
determined  by  vertical  longitudinal  planes  passing  though  the 
centres  of  the outermost  seating  positions  provided  on  the  front 
seat  and  which  in relation  to  the  R  point  and  the  intended  rake 
of  the  backrest  are  used  to check  compliance  with  the 
requirements  concerning  field  of  vision  (see  Appendix  1 ). 

1.3 

R  points  or  seating-position  reference  point  and  H  point: 
the  definitions  set  out  in Chapter  XI  relating  to  seat  belt 
anchorages  and  safety  belts  shall  apply. 

1.4 

Windscreen  reference  points 

means  the  points  on  the  intersection  with  windscreens  of  lines 
radiating  forward  from  the  V  points  up  to  the  outer  surface  of 
the  windscreen. 

1.5 

Transparent  area  of  a  windscreen 

means  the  part  of  the  surface  the  light  transmission  factor  of 
which, measured  at  right  angles  to  the  surface,  is at  least  70%. 

1.6 

Windscreen  wiper 

means  the assembly  consisting of  a device which  wipes  the outer 
surface of  the windscreen  and  the accessories  and  controls 
needed  to start  and stop said  device. 

1.7 

Windscreen  wiper  field 

means  the area on  the outer  surface of a wet  windscreen  that  is 
swept  by  the windscreen wiper. 

1.8 

Windscreen  washer 

means a device  for  storing  and  applying  a  liquid  to the outer 
surface of  a windscreen,  together  with  the necessary  controls 
for  starting  and  stopping  the device. 

1.9 

Windscreen  washer  control 

means  a unit  or  accessory  for  starting  and  stopping  the 
windscreen  washer  device. Starting  and stopping may  be 
coordinated  with  the operation  of  the windscreen  wiper  or  be 
totally  independent  of  this. 

1.10 

Windscreen  washer  pump 

means a device  intended  to convey  the windscreen  washer  liquid 
from  its bottle  to the surface of  the windscreen. 

1.11 

Jet 

means  a device which can be directionaIly  adjusted  and which 
directs  the screen washer  liquid onto  the windscreen. 

1.12 

Operation  of  the windscreen  washer 

means  the ability  of a windscreen  washer  device  to direct  the 
liquid onto  the target  area of  the windscreen  without  producing 
a  leak or  the detachment  of  a windscreen washer  tube when  the 
device  is used  normally. 

1.13 

De-icing device 

means a device  intended  to melt  frost  or  ice from  the surfaces 
of  the windscreen  and  thus  to restore  vision. 

1.14 

De-icing 

-MS-

means  the removal  of  the coating  of  frost  or  ice covering  the 
glazed  surfaces using  the de-icing  and windscreen  wiping 
devices. 

1.15 

De-iced  area 

means  the area on  the glazed  surfaces  the surface of which  is 
dry or  covered  with melted  or  partly melted  (damp)  frost  which 
can be  removed  from  the outside  by  the windscreen  wiper, but 
excluding  the area of  the windscreen  that  is covered  with dry 
frost. 

1.16 

De-misting device 

means  a device  intended  to remove  the coating of mist  from  the 
inner  surface of  the windscreen  and  thus  to restore  vision. 

1.17 

Mist 

means  a coating  of  condensate on  the  inner  face of  the glazed 
surfaces. 

1.18 

De-misting 

means  removal  of  the mist  covering  the glazed  surfaces using  the 
de-mist ing device. 

2. 

2.1 

2.1.1 

-(AI,-

REQUIREMENTS 

Windscreen  wiper 

All  vehicles  shall  be equipped  with  at  least  one  automatic 
windscreen  wiper  i.e. which  is able  to operate  when  the  engine 
of  the  vehicle  is running  without  any  intervention  by  the  driver 
other  than  what  is necessary  in order  to start  and  stop  the 
windscreen  washer. 

2.1.1.1 

It must  also  cover  at  least  90% of  vision  area  A  defined  in 
item  2.2  in Appendix  1. 

2.1.2 

2.1.3 

2.1.4 

2.1.5 

2.2. 

2.2.1 

2.2.2 

2.2.3 

2.2.4 

2.3 

2.3.1 

The  windscreen  wiper  shall  have  a sweep  frequency  of  at  least  40 
cycles  per  minute. 

The  frequency  (frequencies)  referred  to  in  item  2.1.2  shall  be 
obtained  as stated  in  items  3.1.1  to 3.1.6,  3.1.7  and  3.1.8. 

The  wiper  arm  shall  be  fitted  in such  a way  as  to be  able  to be 
folded  back  from  the windscreen  in order  to enable  this  to be 
cleaned  manually. 

The  windscreen  wiper  shall  be  able  to operate  for  two minutes  on 
a  dry  windscreen  as  required  by  item  3.1.9. 

Windscreen  washer 

All  vehicles  shall  be  fitted  with  a windscreen  washer  that  is 
able  to withstand  the  loadings  resulting  from  blocked  Jets,  and 
the  system  shall  be  activated  via  the  procedure  described  in 
item  3.2.1. 

Operation  of  the  screen  washers  and  wipers  shall  not  be  impaired 
by  exposure  to  the  temperature  cycles  required  in  items  3.2.2 
and  3.2.3. 

The  windscreen  washer  shall  be  able  to supply  enough  liquid  to 
clear  60% of  the  area  defined  in  item  2.2.  in Appendix  1 under 
the  conditions described  in 3.2.4. 

The  capacity  of  the  liquid  bottle  shall  be  at  least  one  litre. 

De-icer  and  de-mister 

All  vehicles  shall  be equipped  with  a windscreen  de-icer  and 
de-mister  enabling  any  ice or  frost  covering  the windscreen  and 
any  mist  covering  the  inner  surface  of  the windscreen  to be 
removed. 
However,  this  device  is not  required  for  bodied  three-wheel 
mopeds  having  an engine  developing  not  more  than  3 k W. 

2.3.2 

-m-

The  conditions  set  out  in  item  2.3.1  shall  be considered  to have 
been met  if the vehicle  is fitted  with  a suitable 
passenger-compartment  heating  system  which  must  meet  the 
conditions  imposed  by Directive  78/548/EEC1  relating  to heating 
systems  for  the passenger  compartment  of motor  vehicles, with 
the  following  addendum  to  items 2.4.1.1  and  2.4.1.2  in Annex I 
to  the abovementioned  Directive:  "alternatively  it must  be 
clearly  demonstrated  that  no  leaks may  reach  the  passenger 
compartment". 

2.3.3 

By way  of  a departure  from  item 2.3.2  above  the  requirements of 
Directive  78/317/EEC2  relating  to the defrosting  and  demisting 
systems of glazed  surfaces of motor  vehicles  shall  apply  to 
vehicles  having  a power  of more  than  15 kW. 

1  OJ  No L 168, 26 June  1978, p. 40. 

2  OJ  No L 81,  28.3.1978, p. 27. 

3. 

3.1 

3.1.1 

3.1.2 

3.1.3 

3.1.4 

-m -

TEST  PROCEDURE 

Windscreen  wiper 

Unless otherwise  specified  the  tests described  below  shall  be 
carried  out  under  the  following  conditions: 

The ambient  temperature  shall  not  be  less than  10*C nor  more 
than  40*C; 

The windscreeen  shall  be kept  constantly  wet; 

If the windscreen  wiper  is electrically  operated  the  following 
additional  conditions must  be met: 

3.1.4.1 

The battery  must  be fully  charged; 

3.1.4.2 

The engine  shall  turn at  a speed  corresponding  to 30% +10% of 
its peak-power  speed; 

3.1.4.3 

The dipped-beam  headlamps must  be  lit; 

3.1.4.4 

Where  the heating  and/or  ventilation devices,  if any, are 
electric  they  shall  operate under  maximum  power  consumption 
condi t ions: 

3.1.4.5 

Where  the de-icing  and de-misting  devices,  if any, are  electric 
they  shall  operate under  maximum  power  consumption  conditions. 

3.1.5 

3.1.6 

3.1.7 

3.1.8 

3.1.9 

Compressed  air or  vacuum windscreen wipers  shall  be able to 
operate  continuously  at  the  required  frequencies  whatever  the 
engine speed  and  loading. 

The  sweep  frequencies of  the windscreen  wiper  shall  meet  the 
conditions  set out  in  item  2.1.3  following  a preliminary 
operating  period  of  20 minutes on a wet  surface. 

The outer  surface of  the windscreen  shall  be  thoroughly 
degreased  with methylated  spirits or  an equivalent  degreasing 
agent. 

After  drying  an at  least  3% and  at  the most  10% ammonia  solution 
shall  be applied  and  allowed  to dry  and  the surface of  the 
windscreen  then wiped with  a dry  cotton  rag. 

A uniform  coating of  test mixture  shall  then be applied  to the 
outer  surface of  the windscreen(see  Appendix  2) and  then allowed 
to dry. 

The  requirements  set out  in  item 2.1.5  are met  if the  conditions 
set  out  in  item 3.1.4  are  fulfilled. 

3.2 

Windscreen  washer 

Test  conditions 

3.2.1 

Test  No 1 

-W\-

3.2.1.1 

The windscreen  washer  shall  be  filled with  water  and  fully 
primed,  then exposed  to an ambient  temperature  of  20 +5*C  for a 
minimum  of  4 hours. All  of  the  jets shall  be blocked  and  the 
control  actuated  six  times within one minute, each  operating 
period  being  at  least  3 seconds.  If the device  is activated by 
the muscular  energy  of  the driver  the  required  force shall  be 
stated  in the  following  table: 

Type of pump 

Force  required 

manually operated  11 to 13.5 daN 
40 to 44.5 daN 

foot operated 

3.2.1.2 

The  test' voltage  for electric  pumps  shall  be not  less than  the 
nominal  voltage without,  however, exceeding  this by more  than 2 
volts. 

3.2.1.3 

Once  the  test  has been carried  out  the windscreen  washer  shall 
operate  as  required  by  item  1.12. 

3.2.2 

Test  No 2  (test  involving  exposure  to  low  temperatures) 

3.2.2.1 

The windscreen  washer  shall  be  filled with water,  fully  primed 
and  then exposed  to an ambient  temperature  of  -18 +3"C  for at 
least  4 hours, ensuring  the all  of  the water  contained  in the 
device  is frozen. The device  is then exposed  to an  ambient 
temperature  of  20 +2'C until  the  ice has completely  melted. The 
operation  of  the device  is then checked,  its activation  then 
being  as  required  by  item  3.2.1. 

3.2.3 

Test  No 3 (exposure  to high  temperatures) 

3.2.3.1 

3.2.4 

3.2.4.1 

The windscreen  washer  shall  be  filled  with  water  at a 
temperature  of 60 + 3*C. The operation  of  the device will  then 
be checked  by being  actuated  as required  by  item  3.2.1. 

Test  No 4  (windscreen washer  efficiency  test  provided  for  in 
item  2.2.3) 

The windscreen  washer  shall  be  filled  with water  and  fully 
primed. With  the vehicle  at  a standstill  and  not  exposed  to any 
significant  windforce  the windscreen  washer  jet or  jets shall  be 
adjusted  to point  towards  the  target  area on  the outer  surface 
of  the windscreen.  If the device  is activated  by  the muscular 
energy  of  the driver  the  force  to be used  in order  to do so 
shall  not  exceed  that  provided  for  in  item  3.2.1.1.  If the 
device  is activated  by an electric  pump,  the  requirements of 
item 3.1.4  shalI  apply. 

~<06 -

3.2.4.2 

3.2.4.3 

The outer  surface of  the windscreen  shall  be subjected  to the 
treatment  described  in  items 3.1.7  and  3.1.8. 

The windscreen  washer  shall  then be activated  as described  by 
its manufacturer  for  ten automatic operating  cycles of  the 
windscreen  wiper  at  its highest  frequency  and  the proportion of 
the  field of  view  found  in  item 2.2  in Appendix  I thus  cleaned 
shall  be  determined. 

3.3 

All  of  the  tests on  the windscreen washer  described  in  items 
3.2.2  and  3.2.3  shall  be carried out on one and  the  same  device 

-•toi-

APPENDIX 1 

PROCEDURE  TO BE FOLLOWED  IN ORDER  TO DETERMINE THE AREAS OF 
VISION ON THE WINDSCREENS OF BODIED THREE-WHEEL  MOPEDS, 
TRICYCLES AND QUADRICYCLES  IN RELATION TO THE V POINTS 

1. 

1.1 

1.2 

POSITIONS OF THE V POINTS 

Tables  I and  II give  the position of  the V points  in relation 
to the R point  as emerging  from  their  x, y and  z coordinates 
within  the  tridimensional  reference  system. 

Table  I indicates the base coordinates  for  a given  seatback 
rake of  25*. The positive direction of  the  coordinates 
in Annex  III, Figure 1. 

s  shown 

TABLE 1 

Point V 

X 

Y 

Z 

Vi 
v2 

68 mm 
68 mm 

-  5 mm 
-  5 mm 

665 mm 
589 mm 

1.3 

1.3.1 

Correction  to be made  to the  intended  seatback  rake  angles 
other  than  25". 

Table  II gives  the additional  corrections  to be made  to 
coordinates  A  X for each V point  when  the  intended  seatback 
rake angle  differs  from  25*. The positive  direction of  the 
coordinates  is given  in Figure  1. 

- A S 

TABLE  I I 

Back  rest  rake 
angle  (degrees) 

Hor izontal 
coordinates 

Back  rest  rake 
angle  (degrees) 

Hor izontal 
coordinates 

5 
6 
7 
8 
9 
10 
11 
12 
13 
14 
15 
16 
17 
18 
19 
20 
21 
22 

â  x 

186 mm 
177 mm 
167 mm 
157 mm 
147 mm 
137 mm 
128 mm 
118 mm 
109 mm 
99 mm 
90 mm 
81 mm 
72 mm 
62 mm 
53 mm 
44 mm 
35 mm 
26 mm 

23 
24 
25 
26 
27 
28 
29 
30 
31 
32 
33 
34 
35 
36 
37 
38 
39 
40 

A x 

-18 mm 
-  9 mm 
0 mm 
9  mm 
17 mm 
26 mm 
34 mm 
43 mm 
51 mm 
59 mm 
67 mm 
76 mm 
84 mm 
92 mm 
100 mm 
108 mm 
115 mm 
123 mm 

2. 

2.1 

2.2 

AREAS OF  VISION 

Two areas of  vision are determined  from  the V points. 

Area of  vision A  is the area on  the outer  protruding  surface of 
the windscreen  which  is bounded  by  the  four  following  planes 
emanating  forwards  from  the V points  (see  Figure 1 ): 

a vertical  plane passing  through  V-j and V2  and  forming 
an angle of  13"  to the  left with  the  x axis; 

a plane parallel  to the y axis passing  through  V-j and 
forming  an angle of  1' upwards with  the  x axis; 

a plane parallel  to the y axis passing  through  V2  and 
forming  an angle of  1' downwards with  the  x axis; 

a vertical  plane passing  through V-| and V2  and  forming 
an angle of  20* to the right  with  the  x axis. 

APPENDIX  1 

Figure  1 

Area  of Vi s ion  A 

i 

-Y 

(1) 

Trace  of  the  longitudinal  plane  of  symmetry  of  the  vehicle 

(2) 

Trace  of  the  vertical  plane  passing  through  R 

(3) 

Trade  of  the  vertical  plane  passing  through  Vj  and  V2 

APPENDIX 2 

MIXTURE FOR TESTING WINDSCREEN WIPERS AND WASHERS 

The test mixture referred to in Items 3.1.8 and 3.2.3.2 comprises, by volume, 
92.5% of water  (having a hardness of  less than 205 g/1000 kg following 
evaporation), 5% of saturated aqueous salt (sodium chloride) and 2.5% by 
weight of dust the composition of which  is shown  in Tables  I and II. 

TABLE I 

Analysis of the test dust 

Element 

Percentage by mass 

Si02 
Fe2Û3 
Al203 
CaO 
MgO 
Alkalis 
Ignit ion 
losses 

67 to 69 
3 to 5 
15 to 17 
2 to 4 
0.5 to 1.5 
3 to 5 

2 to 3 

TABLE 11 

Distribution of the coarse dust  in accordance with the dimension 
of the particles 

Particle 
dimension 
( in //xm) 

0 to 5 
5 to 10 
10 to 20 
20 to 40 
40 to 80 
80 to 200 

Distribution according 

to dimension 

12 ± 2 
12 ± 3 
14 ± 3 
23 ± 3 
30 ± 3 
9 ± 3 

- « • 5 6 5-

APPENDIX  3 

INFORMATION  DOCUMENT  IN RESPECT OF  THE WINDSCREEN  WIPER  FOR 
A TYPE OF  BODIED THREE-WHEEL  MOPED, TRICYCLE OR QUADRI CYCLE 

(to be  attached  to  the application  for  component  type  approval  where  this  is 
submitted  separately  from  the application  for  vehicle  type  approval) 

Order  No  (assigned  by  the  applicant) 

The application  for  component  type  approval  in respect  of  the windscreen  wiper 
for  a  type of  bodied  three-wheel  moped,  tricycle  or  quadricycle  shall  contain 
the  following  information: 

1. 

2. 

3. 

Make  or  trade  name: 

Manufacturer's  name  and  address: 

Name  and  address of manufacturer's  representative  (if  any): .. 

It must  also  contain  the  information  set  out  in Annex  II  to  Council 
Directive 92/61/EEC  of  30 June  1992 under  C,  Items 2.3  and  2.3.1 

- 6U -

APPENDIX 4 

Name of administration 

CERTIFICATE OF COMPONENT TYPE APPROVAL  IN RESPECT OF 
THE WINDSCREEN WIPER FOR A TYPE OF BODIED THREE-WHEEL MOPED, 
TRICYCLE OR QUADRICYCLE 

MODEL 

Report No ....by testing body 

Date 

Component type approval No 

Extension No  .. 

1. 

2. 

3. 

4. 

5. 

6. 

7. 

8. 

9. 

Make or trade name of windscreen wiper: 

Type of windscreen wiper: 

Manufacturer's name and address: 

Name and address of manufacturer's representative (if any) 

Windscreen wiper submitted for testing on: 

Component type approval granted/refused' 

i* 

Place: 

Date: 

Signature: 

*  Delete as appropriate 

APPENDIX 5 

INFORMATION  DOCUMENT  IN RESPECT OF THE WINDSCREEN  WASHER  FOR A 
TYPE OF BODIED  THREE-WHEEL  MOPED, TRICYCLE OR QUADRI CYCLE 

(to be attached  to the application  for  component  type approval  where  this  is 
submitted  separately  from  the application  for  vehicle  type  approval) 

Order  No  (assigned  by  the applicant) 

The application  for  component  type approval  in respect  of  the  windscreen 
washer  for a type of  bodied  three-wheel  moped,  tricycle or  quadricycle shall 
contain  the following  information: 

1. 

2. 

3. 

Make or  trade  name : 

Manufacturer's  name and  address:  .... 

Name and  address of manufacturer's  representative  (if  any): .. 

It shall  also  contain  the  information set  out  in Annex  II to Council 
Directive 92/61/EEC of  30 June  1992 under  C,  Items 2.4 and  2.4.1 

APPENDIX  6 

Name of  administration 

CERTIFICATE OF COMPONENT TYPE APPROVAL  IN RESPECT OF 
THE SCREEN WASHER  FOR A TYPE OF BODIED THREE-WHEEL  MOPED, 
TRICYCLE OR QUADRICYCLE 

MODEL 

Report  No  ....by  testing  body 

Date 

Component  type approval  No 

Extension  No 

1. 

2. 

3. 

4. 

5. 

6. 

7. 

8. 

9. 

Make or  trade name of screen washer: 

Type of  screen washer : 

Manufacturer's  name and address: 

Name and address of manufacturer's  representative  (if  any) 

Screen washer  submitted  for  test  on: 

Component  type approval  granted/refused* 

Place: 

Date: 

Signature: 

Delete  as  approrpiate 

APPENDIX  7 

INFORMATION  DOCUMENT  IN RESPECT OF THE DE-ICING AND DE-MISTING  DEVICE 
FOR A TYPE OF BODIED THREE-WHEEL  MOPED, TRICYCLE OR QUADRI CYCLE 

(to be attached  to the application  for component  type approval  where  this  is 
submitted  separately  from  the application  for  vehicle  type  approval) 

Order  No  (assigned  by  the applicant) 

The application  for  component  type approval  in respect of  the de-icing  and de 
misting  device  for  a type of  bodied  three-wheel  moped, tricycle or  quadricycle 
shall  contain  the  following  information: 

1. 

2. 

3. 

Make or  trade name : 

Manufacturer's  name and address: 

Name  and  address of manufacturer's  representative  (if  any):... 

It shall  also contain  the  information set out  in Annex  II to Council 
Directive 92/61/EEC of  30 June  1992 under  letter  C,  in  items 2.5  and  2.5.1 
0.1 

0.2 

0.4  to  0.6 

1.1 

and under  C,  Items 2.1.1  to 2.1.4  and  2.3  to  2.5 

APPENDIX 8 

Name of administration 

CERTIFICATE OF COMPONENT TYPE APPROVAL  IN RESPECT OF 
THE DE-ICING AND DE-MISTING DEVICE FOR A TYPE OF BODIED THREE-WHEEL 
MOPED, TRICYCLE, OR QUADRI CYCLE 

MODEL 

Report No 

by testing body 

Date 

Component type approval No 

Extension No 

1. 

2. 

3. 

4. 

5. 

6. 

7. 

8. 

9. 

Make or trade name of de-icing and de-misting device: .... 

Type of de-icing and de-misting device: 

Manufacturer's name and address: 

Name and address of manufacturer's representative (if any) 

De-icing and de-misting device submitted for test on 

Component  type approval granted/refused* 

Place: 

Date: 

Signature: 

*  Delete as approrpiate. 

ISSN 0254-1475 

COM(93) 449 final 

DOCUMENTS 

EN 

06 05 

Catalogue number : CB-CO-93-496-EN-C 

ISBN 92-77-59508-6 

Office for Official Publications of the European Communities 

L-2985 Luxembourg